Home

SUSE LINUX

1. 25 19 mtools 25 1 10 Cleaning Up 25 2 Users and Access Permissions 25 2 1 File System Permissions 25 22 Modifying File Permissions 2523 Thesetuid Bitl 25 2 4 The setgid Bit aeree Eee de 25 2 5 The Sticky Bit s s as tta su ERA E IU 25 2 6 Access Control Lists 25 3 Important Linux Commands ooo ooo o 25 3 1 File CommandS 25 3 2 System Commands ooo ooo 25 4 The vi Editor 26 Ergonomics in the Workplace 26 1 The Working Environment o ooo ooo 2611 The Right Desk o o ooo oo 26 12 Sitting Correctly on the Right Working Chair 26 1 3 Good Lighting for Productive Work 26 1 4 Optimum Climate o o ooo o 26 1 5 Noise Levels SUSE LINUX User Guide 375 377 378 378 379 381 382 383 384 384 385 386 386 387 387 389 390 391 391 392 393 393 398 401 403 404 404 405 406 407 408 xvii xviii 262 Office Equipment 6 eee 26 2 1 Buying aScreen swau 00 eee eee 26 2 2 Screen Location 0 00000084 26 2 3 The Keyboard and the Wrists 26 2 4 TheMousel RR 263 Links and Literature A Help and Documentation B_ SUSE LINUX FAQ Contents 415 419 425
2. 277 TTC MICE 278 17 4 5 Polders ia SS RR ERE RES 278 1746 Filters llle 279 Xi _______ Contents 17 47 Virtual Folders o 280 17 5 Calendar is ba eee eo buy Rom do R0 Ee nad 281 A seat aa E A e d 281 17 5 2 Scheduling a Meeting less 281 Mod OR em e SN A RS LOS RR 282 17 6 Contacts gt c se oso mod Roo Remo Rs ee we ns 282 tw ae ts he ech tea ea 282 17 6 2 MakingaList oo ooo 282 a AN Ake a a 283 TT 283 A Oe eee eh eee eee 284 285 ao a AR A Se a a 286 DL PC Gee Bites ee E 287 289 Ane A A Ram MUS e oe 292 DTP 292 E Xo aw 293 T 295 297 299 E a a da 300 19 2 MIXeFS ae a apah oi ie e ad a 300 di dd ey ORES den 301 peda T 301 Le he A a da a Gude tee 4 302 19 24 The GNOME Mixer Applet 302 19 2 5 alsam xer 4 45 4 25 bee RR A ER a 302 19 2 6 Mixer Parameters of Soundblaster Live and Audigy 303 SUSE LINUX User Guide xiii Xiv 19 2 7 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 CP ae OM eal ee E ew PU ba 4 4 oe eR a A 19 3 4 GNOME CD Player Applet Tv 19 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit 19 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity TIME a teni Som ipa A SE he 19 6 3 Saving and Exporting lees ues 19 8 Compressing Audio Data o ooo ooo ooo 199 ALSA d MIDI 0 0 00 ee eee eee 19 9
3. ssuuuues graphics cards group administration hard disk controller hardware esses hardware information hostname 006 installation mode installation scope installation source changing installation suggestion installing with Internet configuration SISDN 4 A joysticks oooooooocoooorocom skeyboard recette 1129 keyboard layout language 2 eee language selection PTY Miami riada manual installation memory test oooooccccccccccoo modems sorei kipin a monitor settings MOUSE E MCUESES EEE paraa network card 00005 96 network configuration 35 940109 INES client siis cence e 107 NFS server 00 ce see ee 107 ANIS client uta NTP ls rote pustente ds online update package dependencies package manager partitioning printing 6 cece eee profile manager software radio cards ieeee erre software updates x rc config pm sound cards sess repairing systems starting oooooocccoccccccoo rescue system ssseeee support request sssss root password buon uU DIESE sysconfig editor QUO ir
4. Hi how are you today Bye Tux Column 4 Line 6 Figure 16 2 Composing a Message 262 16 6 Creating a New Message To compose a message fill in the respective fields in the New Message window To send messages from different e mail accounts select one of the identities configured as described in Section 16 4 1 on pageD59 The but tons next to To and CC and possibly blind copy Bcc open the ad dress book allowing you to select an address After entering the first few characters of an address press T to see a list of possible comple tions When the message is completed click Send Under View gt Head ers select various header types with more or fewer entries To attach files to your message click the paper clip icon and select the file to attach Alternatively drag a file from the desktop or another folder to the New Message window or select one of the options in the Attach menu Normally the MIME type encoding of a file is recognized correctly If this is not the case select the type from a list Enter a short description in the Description field Then select an encoding from the list of encoding op tions the default values usually work When a file is attached to your message it appears in the list of attachments in the lower part of the win dow Attachments can be saved removed or opened by selecting the name of the attachment and sub
5. Select Categories Public 5 w ok Jj Apply X Cancel Figure 11 2 Recording New Contact Information Miscellaneous allows adding a picture or logo to the selected contact Other features like the entering the longitude and latitude of a location are possible 11 2 Creating Address Lists To generate lists from your address data open the editor for distribution lists with Settings gt Toolbars gt Distribution Lists Use New List to create one or several new lists under different names The new entries ap pear in the drop down menu at the top left corner of the editor Select the desired list then drag and drop all desired contacts from the overview in the left part of the window to the list overview Renaming and deleting lists is also possible here See Figure 11 3 on the following page 11 3 Searching Address Data Basically KAddressBook offers three options for searching address data SUSE LINUX User Guide oogsseJpp vy ull JueuJe8DUD A sseJppv 227 228 File Edit View Tools Settings Help 14 ao o fq 4 0 x Search l Fieids J Eiter None 3 D Tux Pinguin Home Given Name Family Name Email Address Freunde xj New List _Bename Lists Remove tist j Email Homepage hil Name Email Use Preferred Home Postfach 99999 Tux Pinguin tux example com Yes Aufdorschalle 12345 Gr nland Add
6. 43 2 YaST Online Updatel ooo oo 433 Patch CD Updatel ooo oo oo coo 43 4 Installing and Removing Software 4 3 5 System Update o o ooo ooo mo 44 Hardwate y ies ass a we OE we od Contents 45 46 47 48 49 51 441 CD ROM Drives nnm 442 Printer eos We 5be x RB RE REEERIS 44 3 Hard DiskControllr len 4 4 4 Graphics Card and Monitor SaX2 ee ee ea a ead ae oe 446 _ IDE DMA Model lere E47 oysStck m Eu ee he ERR Rte bow og Re Sb one doo de doe Se DE c is 449 SCANNER aoe ech a ae Ede UU Pek eR be Ep 4410 Sound 0 02002 eee eee 4 4 11 TV and Radio Cards 4 5 Network Devices o 45 1 Information about the Internet Dia Up 4 5 2 NetworkCard o II E AA ans E RES ERE HS a 4 5 5 ISDN ea Sk xd3 Rn E SERE EN Nux S 46 Network Services llle 4 6 1 HostNameand DNS 4 6 2 NES Client and NFS Server 4 6 3 Configuration of a Samba Server 4 6 4 Configuration of Samba Clients 465 NTP Cheni oaea Rory a Rede ed 46 0 Kou ikke RR PUE E m Se lad ew ae 46 7 Mail Transfer Agent ooo 4 6 8 Network Services inetd Pun ARR iMm E io ok ee SEN per bleed d qure ear ee e a RS oo whee RA AA Oe n 474 Firewall
7. image galleries AV iii JaVASCT PE cese nemen k ywords i em eene saving web pages web browser LA cece cece cece eens character recognition configuring 000 gallery sonic asias dss preview A A x ep Weise aie scanning esses KOrganizer ssesssse address book attendees nn unninn calendar sssueues CAOS iiu eie eaa bee ga configuring 00 VS oorr epe na een Rd dij M printing A erre starting ooooooccocccorncconco o 2102008 ita re a KPilot ion parias Jdev pilot 2r KDE Addressbook Conduit 1213 KOrganizer ooooocococccccooo 213 working with ssus 215 A neret ER ER ee 307 KSnapshot oocococccccoocccccccccncnos gt 1 KWrite iia 203 L language sister 126 VOSS LEE 384 1397 Linux removing cerina eri noes 420 locate i ect pe nep Een dies 396 log files sbootmsg i m perte 127 POG side ste e edle eren 113 messages 1 eee eee eee eee 128 logging login attempts 113 SUSE LINUX User Guide 441 442 A is E E TE ST 378 393 M MAN pages csaseeses c ker ehe es 393 DAULTODS tr Y ERE 4420 Dit tii ais 381 394 modems A A A O 99 monitor settings oooocooccoommoo MONI OTS PR 409 i iia TE 384 MOV parai EAE RIEUSE EAEN NR ER 3321334 PAUCIO tiara Tee eris
8. Note The public key is intended for the public and is distributed to all of your communication partners However only you should have access to the secret key Do not grant other users access to this data Note Start KGpg from the main menu or with the command kgpg from the com mand line A padlock icon for KGpg appears in your panel Click the icon to open the function menu Select Open key manager Refer to Figure 15 1 Under Key access all options related to the generation or management of keys To generate a new key pair for yourself click Generate Key Pair TD 0 File Edit View Keys Groups Settings Help KEW Za Name v Email Trust Expiration Size EIGamal subkey E Unlimited 1024 i S a Tux Pinguin tux example com Unlimited gt Tux Pinguin tux example com gt Unlimited H Figure 15 1 The Key Manager 250 __ 15 1 Key Management In the following dialog shown in Figure 15 2 enter your user name your e mail address and an optional comment The default setting for Expira tion Never key pair is valid for an indefinite period can be accepted unless you want your keys to expire after a certain time The default set tings for Key size and Algorithm can be accepted as they are Now start the key generation with OK After this process is completed the newly generated key appears in the overview window of the key manager r Generate Key Pair
9. Device Configuration English US Mouse IntelliMouse Explorer Partitioning Format Partition dev sdb8 3 8 GB for with reiser Format Partition dev sdb6 258 8 MB for swap Format Partition dev sdb5 23 5 MB for boot with ext2 Software t Change w y bs 3 Abort T Accept Figure 1 1 Suggestion Screen First set a password for the system administrator user roof This special user is always configured by YaST and is needed for system maintenance tasks Caution Remember the root password because you can only modify the system or install programs using the root identity Caution If a network card or other communication hardware such as a modem or ISDN card is found during the installation these can now be configured and a connection can be established with the Internet or a local network LAN This enables use of various services during the remaining part of the procedure For example if you configure an Internet connection can perform an on line update immediately In this way include the latest updates for your system If you establish a connection with a local network you can configure a 1 4 Configuration name service such as NIS YaST assumes that you will not manage any lo cal users on your system This is usually the case with commercial workstations whose users are ad ministered centrally e g on a department server If you do not configur
10. CJ No time associated Duration 2 hours A Cj Beminder l LJ Dy Show time as Busy Select Categories Access Public 3 Load Template Save as Template v o UO apply J 3X Cancel Figure 10 3 Scheduling with KOrganizer also be used to sort the list of attendees later With Status assign a status to an attendee such as needs action accepted or completed Change the status of an attendee at any time by selecting the attendee in the list then choosing another status from the drop down list If you check Request re sponse the attendees receive an e mail with the relevant schedule item 10 3 3 To Do ltems Create a new to do item by selecting Actions gt New To Do In the di alog that opens specify the exact start and due date and time for the new task its progress in percent and its priority If other people are involved specify their details under Attendees The created to do item is then auto matically included in the left list under To do items The Summary col umn in this list shows the description Priority shows the value selected 10 3 4 Categories To manage your schedule group events and to dos according to certain categories Assign the scheduling items to one or several categories for in stance if one of your items is related to job training you could assign it to both Business and Education Categories can be assigned
11. KDE Development 3ddiag A Tool to Verify the 3D Configuration GNOME Development Tcl Tk Development System With 3Ddiag you can verify the 3D configuration M Fxnerienced User Name DiskUsage Used Free Total I MI 1 56 GB 155 7 MB 1 72 GB PUPA C 1 613 Check Dependencies Autocheck Accept Figure 2 11 Installing and Removing Software with the YaST Package Manager Changing the Installation Scope If you install the default system there is usually no need to add or remove individual packages This basic system consists of a software selection that meets most requirements without any changes If you have specific needs modify this selection with the package manager It offers various filter criteria for determining a selection from the numerous packages in SUSE LINUX 2 5 Installation Suggestion The filter selection box is located at the top left under the menu bar At start up the Selections filter is active This filter groups the program pack ages by their application purpose such as multimedia or office applica tions The various groups of the Selections filter are listed under the filter selection box The packages included in the selected system type are prese lected Click the respective check boxes to select or deselect entire selections for installation The right part of the window displays a table listing the individual pack ages included in the current
12. The first three lines of the output do not hold any information not available with 1s 1 These lines only state file name owner and owning group Lines 4 to 9 hold the ACL entries Conventional access permissions repre sent a subset of those possible when using ACLs Our example ACL grants read and write access to the owner of the file as well as to a user jane lines 4 and 5 The conventional concept has been expanded allowing ac cess to an extra user The same applies to the handling of group access The owning group holds read permissions line 6 and the group d jungle holds read and write permissions The mask entry in line 8 reduces the ef fective permissions for the user jane and the group d jungle to read ac cess Other users and groups do not get any kind of access to the file line 9 Only very basic information has been provided here Find further back ground information about ACLs in the Administration Guide 25 2 Users and Access Permissions 25 3 Important Linux Commands This section gives insight into the most important commands of your SUSE LINUX system Along with the individual commands parameters are listed and where appropriate a typical sample application is introduced To learn more about the various commands use the manual pages ac cessed with man followed by the name of the command for example man ls In the man pages move up and down with and PgDn Move be tween the beginning and the end o
13. User Guide UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND 37 Local User Administration Using this method users are managed locally on the installed machine This is the typical solution for stand alone workstations User Administration with NIS or LDAP This method is mostly used in organizations to manage workstations on a department wide basis The user administration for the entire department is carried out on a central host or name server making the creation of local accounts unnecessary In fact the method could be chosen because local accounts are undesirable If all requirements are met YaST opens a dialog in which to select the user administration method It is shown in Figure If you do not have the necessary network connection create local user accounts VaS Winseatior Base Installation w Language w Installation Settings w Perform Installation Configuration Root Password Network Online Update Users Clean Up Release Notes eec e v amp X amp Device Configuration 4 e suse 8 User Authentication Method Stand Alone Machine Network Client Network Authentication Method Abort Back Figure 2 16 User Authentication 2 6 6 Configuring the Host as a NIS Client If you have decided to manage user accounts through NIS configure the host as a NIS client A NIS enabled network requires some expert knowl 38 26 Finishing the Installation edge The details of NIS are exp
14. doptsed 3INON9 SUL 6 3 3 Configuring Nautilus Nautilus retrieves its default font and other preferences from the desktop configuration To set Nautilus specific preferences select Edit gt Prefer ences in any Nautilus window The configuration dialog offers four tabs Views Behavior Icon Captions and Preview The Views dialog allows switching the Default View between Icon View and List View A sorting order can be set for any of these options The Behavior dialog allows choosing between single click and double click response and also sets the handling of executable files These can ei ther be started on activation or the content displayed The operating mode of the trash is also set here Activate a confimation dialog before deletion if desired Include a Delete command that bypasses trash can also be set The files are immediately deleted if this option is activated The Icon Captions dialog features three options for determining what in formation should be displayed for icons and how it should be displayed In the Preview dialog select whether to activate preview thumbnails for certain file types 6 4 Important Utilities GNOME features a wealth of applets and applications This section pro vides an introduction to some of the most useful and interesting all of which are compatible with the GNOME configuration scheme SUSE LINUX User Guide __
15. 19 9 ALSA and MIDI File View Reverb Chorus Channel lt je gt Contro ModWheel c mmf O Bank all Preset c all A 000 000 Piano 1 5 000 000 001 Piano 2 il O 001 000 002 Piano 3 002 000 003 Honky Tonk 003 000 004 E Piano 1 2 004 000 005 E Piano 2 005 000 006 Harpsichord e 006 000 007 Clavinet 2 007 000 008 Celesta Cc 008 000 009 Glockenspiel X Key ey Velocity ee Pitch Gear Ha Milli Figure 19 13 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard 19 9 2 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard If you do not have an external MIDI keyboard connected to your sound card use the virtual keyboard vkeybd For this purpose the internal port numbers listed with pmidi 1 as described above are important To start the program from the command line enter vkeybd addr 73 0 amp The port address must be adapted to your system Specify the first WaveTable port from the list If an external sound generator is connected alternatively specify the port number of the external MIDI port vkeybd supports a number of additional options For example enter vkeybd addr 73 0 octave 5 amp toincrease the number of dis played octaves to five An overview of the command line options can be accessed with vkeybd help orin The instrument designation in the preset list can be configured by specify ing a preset file with the preset option Extract the instrument names of a sound font file with the command s tovkb Chan
16. Name Email Comment optional Expiration Never Key size 1024 Algorithm DSA amp ElGamal w x ji Expert Mode J ux Cancel J Figure 15 2 Generating Keys 15 1 2 Exporting the Public Key After generating your key pair make the public key available to other users This enables them to use it to encrypt or sign the messages or files they send you To make the public key available for others select Keys gt Export Public Key The dialog that opens offers three options Export Public Key To Email Your public key is sent to a recipient of your choice by e mail If you activate this option and confirm with OK the dialog for creating a new e mail message with KMail appears En ter the recipient and click Send The recipient will receive your key and can then send you encrypted contents SUSE LINUX User Guide 6d2 um uodo 251 Export Public Key To Clipboard You can place your public key here be fore you continue to process it Export Public Key To File If you prefer to distribute your key as a file on a data medium instead of sending it by e mail click this option confirm or change the file path and name and click OK To make your public key available to a wide audience export it to one of the key servers on the Internet For more information refer to Sec tion on the facing page 15 1 3 Importing Keys If you receive a key
17. determine whether the DSL connection should be established automatically when the system is booted or established manually Subsequently select your coun try and provider The contents of the following dialogs depend on the pre viously selected settings If you are not sure about some options read the detailed help texts in the dialogs To use Dial on demand see Section 4 5 1 on page 96 for a stand alone system configure a DNS server Today most providers support dynamic DNS assignment so a valid IP address of the name server is provided each time a connection is established Nevertheless a suitable dummy DNS must be entered in this dialog such as 192 168 22 99 If you are not dynamically assigned a name server specify the IP addresses of your provider s name server here Idle time out seconds allows you to set an idle time after which the con nection is terminated automatically A value between 60 and 300 seconds is recommended SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 101 102 VES Vinstatier Se Here set the most important t H settings for DSL connection E DSL configuration First choose your PPP mode This is either PPP over Ethemet DSL Connection Settings PPPoE or PPP over ATM PPPoATM Use PPP over Ethemet if your DSL modem is PPP mode PPP over Ethernet connected via ethernet to your Einem hd computer If you are not sure which mode to use ask your PPP Mode Depe
18. in your company do not hesitate to make use of this possibility Note Some specific information about your network is required for configur ing LDAP access Obtain this information from the responsible system administrator Note o To configure access to an LDAP server from your workstation select Tools gt Settings gt Directory Servers All previously configured LDAP ac cesses are listed in the overview Click Add to add a new LDAP access A configuration assistant starts helping configure the LDAP access in a few steps Exit the welcome screen of the assistant with Next and specify the following settings in the dialogs Server Information Enter the server name and the login method for the LDAP server The default method is anonymous access Connecting to the Server Enter the port number and the security proto cols SSL or TLS to use Searching the Directory Enter the search base the search range the search duration and possibly a limitation of the displayed hits Display Name In this last step enter the name under which the selected server should appear in the list Close the assistant with Next and Finish SUSE LINUX User Guide WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD PUD ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 283 284 Upon completion of the configuration the new LDAP server appears in your contact list under Other Contacts and can be browsed for any en tries 17 8 For More Informatio
19. it examines the system and displays installed packages If you select addi tional packages for installation the package manager automatically checks SUSE LINUX User Guide uoioun8yuo2 SDA 59 the dependencies and selects any other needed packages resolution of de pendencies If you unknowingly select conflicting packages the package manager indicates this and submits suggestions for solving the problem resolution of conflicts If a package needed by other installed packages is accidentally marked for deletion the package manager issues an alert with detailed information and alternative solutions Apart from these purely technical aspects the package manager provides a well structured overview of the range of packages in SUSE LINUX The packages are arranged by subjects and the display of these groups is re stricted by means of suitable filters Thus the package manager facilitates the management of software packages and is a valuable tool for maintain ing your system The Package Manager To change the software selection on your system with the package man ager select Install or Remove Software in the YaST Control Center The dialog window of the package manager is shown in Figure 4 4 File Package Extras Help Filter Selections aj Package Summary A To
20. searching for addresses local clipboard ssssuue scommands sorires ria piri teni configuring 008 accessibility background olor iussisti ee nets OM cisci gua 3 osse opens keyboard 24 keyboard shortcuts 48 locales 147 mouse ssssssssseeeeh iiri Vicar rriias Screensaver 1 eee eee A seh ier window decorations desktop 00 088 desktop sharing xD P e mail applications WEES siian enel windows 6 cece eee eee keyboard DUI raza Fals configuring 08 applet 2 sen scis tesceor epe eie clipboard encryption drag and drop OO depositas exporting public keys generating a key pair importing keys keyservers sorset surni tinina exporting keys importing a key signing keys oooooocooomoo O e NOR UU killall cec rentre meret ek erit Kinternet oooocoocccoccccccoccooo KMail soto etes enne estis address book attachments configuring decoding messages encrypting messages signing messages ASPAM sessione rta writing messages MIX c M Konqueror bookmarks sssse digital cameras file manager
21. to limit the search to files or directories or search for the content of the document If you enter a keyword of the docu ment to find in Containing text all texts containing this word are displayed Click the desired file to load it directly With Save as save the file under a new name in a different directory The original file is retained Search criteria can be specified in the Properties dia log You can limit your search to files that were modified or created recently or to files that belong to a specific user or group 5 1 Desktop Components 5 1 7 The Windows The windows of all KDE applications have the same structure The title bar features four buttons in the right corner The question mark provides access to context help If you click the question mark then an icon of the application a short help text is displayed The button with the black dash minimizes the window A minimized window is placed in the panel but not terminated Display it and continue to use it by clicking the icon in the taskbar The button with the square maximizes the window over the entire screen area Another click on this symbol restores the window to its former size The X closes the window and terminates the application Windows can be moved enlarged or downsized Click the title bar and keep the left mouse button pressed to move the window on your screen If you right click the top bar a configuration menu is displayed To change
22. 0 0 ee presentations selecting text spreadsheet roads A O gt Writer 0 cece eee ee eee A ties iene endee P partos A sachet sie anaana 423 creating oooococccoccoo 23 fstab RAID PA WA on neta testen s passwords changing sssssssss 400 paths censes oua ye een ROCA ETESTA E 352 absolute sirupi ier nieka 382 relative consiente 382 working with 382 A ue ede etie Prae 1104 permissions access control lists 392 changing oocccoooccccccccconoo description directories MOS intacta in Pad da printing 6 cece eee eee eee applications from command line configurations configuring with YaST troubleshooting connection 6 6 cece eee eee eee scheduling see KOrganizer S CUPS casan SEM ts taa 125 GDI printers opisir oaia screenshots see KSnapshot Ghostscript driver SDB esis 420 AAA ier nin oideis security AAA configuring 1101115 eIpdfilter A oec ete firewalls oooooococccoooo 114 LPROS cirio cra Shells ui arc LPRng and Ipdfilter Bash APOT L2 entes as commands printer driver paths printer languages pipes printing system ooooocooom oo wild cards sptobl
23. 24 5 Editing Images Basics After using the paint tools to adjust the selection as desired convert from the quick mask view back to the normal selection view by clicking the icon in the lower left corner of the image window currently displaying a red box The selection is again displayed with the marching ants 24 5 3 Applying and Removing Color Most image editing involves applying or removing color By selecting a part of the image limit where color can be applied or removed When you select a tool and move the cursor onto an image the cursor s appearance changes to reflect the chosen tool With many tools an icon of the current tool is shown along with the arrow For paint tools an outline of the cur rent brush is shown allowing you to see exactly where you will be painting in the image and how large an area will be painted Selecting Colors By default paint tools use the foreground color However this can be changed in the tool options of fill tools To select the color first click the display box of the foreground or background color as desired A dialog with four tabs opens These tabs provide different color selection methods Only the first tab shown in Figure 24 2 on the next page is de scribed here The new color is shown in Current The previous color is shown in Old The easiest way to select a color is using the colored areas in the boxes to the left In the narrow vertical bar click a color simi
24. 5 1 6 The Main Menu Access the main menu by means of the icon to the far left of the panel By default this menu contains entries for logging out from the system lock ing the screen executing commands and starting the quick browser and the bookmark manager Use the file manager to display your home di rectory search for files or start the Control Center for the purpose of cus tomizing the desktop The other menu entries allow you to start a variety of programs sorted by subjects The following section provides information about selected functions that you can start by means of the main menu De tailed information about the Control Center is available in Section 5 2 on pagea Logout User You can log out from the system by means of this menu item However first you will be asked what should happen after the SUSE LINUX User Guide 139 140 logout If you select the Login as different user the login screen is displayed allowing you or another user to log in to the system You can also turn off or restart the computer Confirm your selection with OK or remain logged in by clicking Cancel Lock Screen If you leave your workstation you can blacken your screen or start a screensaver To restore the session view enter your normal login password In this way make sure no one reads or manipulates your documents or e mail messages Start New Session To start a second session with a graphical user inter fa
25. After making your selection click Next to return to Setup SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 93 94 4 4 11 TV and Radio Cards After starting and initializing this YaST module the TV and Radio Cards dialog appears If your card was automatically detected it is displayed at the top of the list In this case highlight the line with the mouse and select Configure If your card was not detected select Other not recognized Press Configure to proceed with the manual selection in which to select your card from the list of vendors and models If you have already configured TV or radio cards modify existing configu rations with Change In this case a dialog presents a list of all configured cards Select a card and start the manual configuration with Edit During the automatic hardware detection YaST attempts to assign the cor rect tuner to your card If you are not sure simply keep the setting De fault recognized and check whether it works If you are not able to set all channels this might be due to a failure of the automatic detection of the tuner type In this case click Select Tuner and highlight the correct tuner type in the list If you are familiar with the technical details you can use the expert dialog to specify settings for a TV or radio card Select a kernel module and its parameters in this dialog Also check all parameters of your TV card dr
26. By means of a check box determine whether existing connections should be terminated prior to the next charge increment ChargeHUP However this does not yet work with all providers For Channel bundling multi link PPP activate the respective check box To start SUSEfirewall2 mark Activate firewall Details opens a dialog that enables the implementation of more complex connection scenarios Normal home users do not need this dialog Exit the SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 105 106 dialog with Next In the following dialog specify the settings for the assignment of the IP address If your provider has not assigned a static IP address select Dy namic IP address If you have a static IP address enter the local IP address of your host and the remote IP address as specified by the provider in the respective fields If the interface should be used as standard route to the In ternet activate Default Route Only one interface per system can be used as the default route Exit the dialog with Next Specify your country and your provider in the following dialog The listed providers are call by call providers To use a provider that is not listed here click New The dialog ISP parameters opens allowing entry of all settings for the desired provider The default setting for ISDN type is ISDN SyncPPP The phone number may not contain any separators such as comm
27. For example save the message as a draft or send it later SUSE LINUX User Guide uJDJ80Jg Jopue o2 PUD ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 277 278 17 4 4 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures Evolution supports e mail encryption with PGP It can sign e mail and check signed e mail messages To use these features generate and manage keys with an external application such as gpg or KGpg To sign an e mail message before sending it select Security gt PGP sign When you click Send a dialog prompts for the password of your secret key Enter the password and exit the dialog with OK to send the signed e mail To sign other e mail messages in the course of this session with out needing to unlock the secret key repeatedly activate Remember this password for the remainder of this session When you receive signed e mail from other users a small padlock icon ap pears at the end of the message If you click this symbol Evolution starts an external program gpg to check the signature If the signature is valid a green check mark appears next to the padlock symbol If the signature is invalid a broken padlock appears The encryption and decryption of e mail is just as easy After composing the e mail message go to Security gt PGP encrypt and send the e mail message When you receive encrypted messages a dialog opens to ask for the password of your secret key Enter the passphrase to decrypt the e
28. Monitor Mixer sliders for digital mixing The respective levels are displayed in the Digital Mixer For each output channel the Patchbay 304 19 2 Mixers contains a row of radio buttons for selecting the desired channel source Analog Inputs and Outputs Adjust the amplification for the analog to digital and digital to analog con verters under Analog Volume The DAC sliders are used for the output channels and the ADC sliders are used for the input channels Use the ra dio buttons to switch the levels between 4 dBu and 10 dBV The first set ting is intended for audio professionals The latter is for private purposes xnu ui PUNOS Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About TDAC U DAC 1 DAC 2 DAC 3 DAC 4 DAC 5 DAC 8 DAC 7 p DC 0 rADC 1 077 078 065 071 073 082 078 073 007 007 4dBu A 4dBu 4dBu v 100BY w 10dBY 10dBV Figure 19 5 Mixer for Analog Inputs and Outputs Configuration of the S PDIF Channels The S PDIF channel settings are made under Hardware Settings The Envy24 chip reacts to volume changes with a delay that can be configured with Volume Change 19 3 Players Linux offers a variety of programs for playing audio CDs and various mu sic formats such as MP3 OGG and WAV files Where possible the sup ported formats of the players are listed
29. SUSE LINUX USER GUIDE 9 Edition 2004 Copyright O This publication is intellectual property of SUSE LINUX AG Its contents can be du plicated either in part or in whole provided that a copyright label is visibly located on each copy All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to de tail However this does not guarantee complete accuracy Neither SuSE Linux AG the authors nor the translators shall be held liable for possible errors or the conse quences thereof Many of the software and hardware descriptions cited in this book are registered trademarks All trade names are subject to copyright restrictions and may be reg istered trade marks SUSE LINUX AG essentially adheres to the manufacturer s spelling Names of products and trademarks appearing in this book with or with out specific notation are likewise subject to trademark and trade protection laws and may thus fall under copyright restrictions Please direct suggestions and comments to document ation suse de Authors J rg Bartsch Gernot Hillier Marcel Hilzinger Johannes Meixner Matthias Nagorny Siegfried Olschner Marcus Sch fer Jens Daniel Schmidt Arvin Schnell Christian Schuszter Adrian Schr ter Re becca Walter Translators Daniel Pisano Tino Tanner Editors J rg Arndt Antje Faber Karl Eichwalder Berthold Gunreben Roland Haidl Jana Jaeger Edith Parzefall In s Pozo Thomas R lz Thomas Schraitle Layout Ma
30. and the Track at once mode bear greater importance The Track at once mode inserts an intermission of two seconds after each track 21 4 Copying a CD Select Copy CD from the toolbar In the following dialog make the set tings for the reading and writing device as shown in FigureD1 3 on the facing page The options introduced above are also available here An ad ditional function enables the creation of several copies of the CD 21 4 Copying a CD CD Copy and cb cloning x CD Reader Device TOSHIBA DVD ROM SD M1612 ill q r Burning Device Speed Auto 3 Options Advanced r Writing Mode r Copy Mode Auto E 2 Normal Copy C Clone Copy r Options 4 Temp Directory IL Simulate Write image file to X Burnfree Amp kde tux la EJ On the fly Free space in temporary directory 28 5 GB EJ Only create image R Remove image r Copies K3b Defaults User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 21 3 Copying a CD 21 5 Writing ISO Images If you already have an ISO image go to Tools gt Write ISO Image A win dow opens in which to enter the location of the Image to Write K3b calcu lates a check sum and displays it in MD5 Sum If the ISO file was down loaded from the Internet this sum shows if the download was successful Use the Options and Advanced tabs to set your preferences To
31. cause of their vast number Whenever an error is encountered the procedure is stopped and a dialog opens offering details and possible solutions It is not possible to describe all these cases Read the notifications on the screen carefully and choose the desired action from the list options It is also possible to decline the offered repair action in cases of doubt The system remains unaltered in this aspect and no repair is ever performed automatically and without prompting the user SUSE LINUX User Guide Joda LUSISAS ISOA 47 48 YaS Winscanor te YaST System Repair is now checking your Linux system Depending on the CPU and the amount of memory this can take some time Above all the file system checks with fsck are very time consuming If the scan sequence finds an error YaST suggests one or more repair proposals Then select one proposal or cancel the repair Pause Pause or continue analyzing the system Show All Details Activate or disable reporting YaST System Check Init Repair System Probing floppy Floppy device found on dev fdO Initialize Target System Target system initialized Check Partition Tables Searching for hard disks Several hard disks detected dev sda dev sdb Checking partition tables Partition tables found for the disks dev sda dev sdb Checking partition tables Ok Ok Ok Ok details System Check um
32. for the representation of negative numbers Money Configure all currency related settings that should differ from the default settings for the selected system language in this dialog For example on a US system the currency symbol is the decimal symbol is thousands are separated with a and the number of fraction digits is 2 The position of the currency symbol and the prefix for positive and negative amounts is arranged in such a way that the currency symbol precedes the prefix and the amount SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq 3d eut 147 148 Time amp Date Here enter the time format the date format the short date format and the first day of the week A detailed explanation is dis played if you click the symbol in the title bar then the respective menu item Other This tab features the setting for the default paper format and mea surements On a US system the default paper format is US Letter and the imperial system is used for measurements Keyboard Shortcuts This module comprises two tabs Use the Shortcut Schemes tab to select an existing layout or create new keyboard layout schemes The Modifier Keys tab provides an overview of the special keys available on your key board Your system offers a number of predefined shortcuts for specific tasks ar ranged in schemes Use the Shortcut Schemes tab to manage all shortcuts on your system By default the following schemes are available
33. sets the master volume PCM and CD control the respective weighting of the PCM and audio CD channels 19 2 Mixers Determine the recording source by pressing Space The capture con troller regulates the input amplifier Whether the Line controller or the MIC controller is used depends on the recording source For more information enter man alsamixer alsamixergui is a mouse operated variant of alsamixer with a graphical interface E Note The look and feel of alsamixer depends on the type of sound card used The description referred to the AC97 standard for mixer functionality If your sound card does not comply with this standard some features may not be supported The mixer Envy24 should be used for sound cards equipped with the Envy24 ice1712 chip see Section 19 2 7 Note xnur ui PUNOS 19 2 6 Mixer Parameters of Soundblaster Live and Audigy Apart from the parameters of the AC97 standard there are many ad ditional options for Soundblaster Live and Audigy cards The controls AC97 Wave and Music are used for playback AC97 can be used to adjust the level of the AC97 mix This mix also receives input from the line mic and CD signals Wave adjusts the level of the PCM channels Music controls the volume of the internal wavetable synthesis of MIDI data Apart from the Capture parameter for recordings the AC97 Capture contro
34. 25 26 27 Is my hardware supported It is best to refer to the component database at harduaredb suse delor is usr share doc howto en Hardware HOWTO gz can also pro vide some information How can I defragment my hard disk Linux has an intelligent file system This file system makes defrag mentation superfluous because it prevents fragments from occurring Your partitions should not be more than ninety percent used Use d h to view information about used and available hard disk space What is meant by partitioning Partitioning is dividing the hard disk into smaller sections For the default configuration SUSE LINUX requires at least two partitions one for Linux itself and one swap partition for the virtual main memory How much space do I need for Linux This depends on how many and which packages you want to install A standard installation with office applications requires about 1 GB 2 GB is recommended if you want space for your own data as well To install just about everything you need 3 6 GB depending on the version I need more space for Linux How can I add another hard disk To make more space available integrate a new hard disk or parts of it partitions into your Linux system at any time For example if it turns out that you need more space in opt mount an additional hard disk partition to this directory To do so follow this procedure a Install your hard disk following the instruct
35. 533 The Location Bat o 152 ERRADA AA die ua 153 ees 2 a E RR FUE 153 T 154 5 4 1 KInternet Connecting to the Internet 154 5 4 2 The Download Manager KGet 155 5 43 SuSEWatcher llle 156 D 156 TIPP 158 5 4 6 Formatting Floppy Disks with KFloppy 159 ERRADA KORR ER ERD A a 5 4 8 Desktop Sharing lt lt oo o 161 de aa da 163 DATO Kontact s cem da de Ra ee 164 pp 164 5 4 12 Font Administration with KFontinst 167 6 The GNOME Desktop 169 6 1 Ihe Desktop oes mene e ER UR ee a 170 611 Thelcons llle 170 aeos tta uvas meii ce 170 6 13 The Panel omo a aed ROS 171 SUSE LINUX User Guide vii viii 6 1 4 The Main Menul 171 Paid 171 A E Hee de 172 6 21 Keyboardl e RR ce a 172 iue a NI Gedo Oe LE ia 173 62 3 Menus and Toolbars 173 6 24 Screensaver sp aor o oo 173 625 Windowsi sa gt reagos eaa k eaaa a De a EA 174 6 2 6 Background ooa ooo o 174 627 Foni 244 2244 o m m ki EH ES 175 PIT ek 175 6 29 Accessibility eee 175 Tr PTT 176 6 2 11 Sound system alerts 177 Ae Gaon docu Geechee da Hie di ua 177 6 3 1 Navigating in Nautilus llle 177 63 2 File Management llle 179 TT 179 obi gd Bie ee 6 EER a eee oe E 179 6 4 1 Dictionary 9 s o eee
36. 6 eee eee eee eee ee 394 deleting renceresen inek ai 394 formats Girar SPAT iras A terea XCF eran entes tas O cese REA EIE Pas latas searching contents searching for A O Shell avance enis uncompressing ss viewing gorgot iem piua kiii A keen nEn ethers firewalls eese net mn fonts installing ooooooooccoooo 167 formatting tum 192 c 192 uu roo 398 G Gale ind 23711239 configuring cerre iodin kees siss 239 AMX A nba wagers GIMP usaran d tese pos COONS netas configuring creating images CHOPPING aitor mii editing images Moi TER openingimages printing opara 0 cece eee eee retouching images saving images scaling images siSelecting ventosas starting 0 60 cece eee ee templates 0 08 SUSE LINUX User Guide 439 440 accessibility 175 background 1174 OMS isa 1175 keyboard oocoococcccccccccos 172 keyboard shortcuts 176 menus 0 c cece eee 1173 MOUSE tia 173 Screensaver 1 eee eee eee ee 173 system alerts 177 MEMES scien dreary aise auton 175 s toolbars ences 173 lt WINdOWS ociereerere eek 174 desktop menu 170 dictionary 005 180 SCISKS ice tiii YT DVDS ermitas ceras
37. Figure 4 26 SUSE Firewall Selecting the Interfaces to Protect but only saves information about changed packages and copies of critical storage areas and configuration files Define the kind of data to save in the backup By default the backup in cludes information about any packages changed since the last installation In addition it may include data that does not belong to packages them selves such as many of the configuration files in etc or the directories under home Apart from that the backup can include important storage areas on your hard disk that may be crucial when trying to restore a sys tem such as the partition table or the master boot record MBR 4 8 2 Restoring the System The restore module shown in Figure 4 28 on page 118 enables restoration of your system from a backup archive Follow the instructions in YaST Press Next to proceed to the individual dialogs First specify where the archives are located removable media local hard disks or network file systems As you continue a description and the contents of the individ ual archives are displayed enabling you to decide what to restore from the archives 4 8 System MIL ffe Choose the services that t lt should be available from the Firewall Configuration Step 2 of 4 Services Internet Q If you are not running a ARCAUTE e coche ftne cU cem gn server of some kind you WR SE should not need any of the uE EJ HTTP with SSL http
38. IONA 258 16 1 KMail and Kontact KMail can be displayed along with other applications in one window This is done with the Kontact utility Refer to 5 4 10 on page 164 for more de tails about this 16 2 Mail Formats KMail can save messages in the following formats mbox This traditional UNIX format the oldest saves all messages in a single file Directories are also simulated by means of individual files The individual mails can only be distinguished by the From line MailDir In contrast to the mbox format the MailDir format has a unique file name for every message The messages are stored in the respec tive directories and can easily be identified and further processed KMail uses the MailDir format as the more convenient alternative by default but MailDir is not supported by many other e mail pro grams This can be a disadvantage if you want to switch to a different e mail program later and still access your old e mails Processing old mails in mbox format is no problem however if you select MailDir Just copy or move the files to the MailDir folder 16 3 Access Types KMail allows you to access your electronic mail in various ways The access type largely depends on your Internet Service Provider ISP or mail server The main access types are POP3 and IMAP POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3 POP3 is a standardized procedure for receiving e mail A POP3 server stores the messages until the user retrieves them wi
39. In the lower part of the dialog under Quick Controls globally activate or deactivate the actions for all programs 5 2 Settings 5 2 4 Appearance amp Themes This item features all fine tuning options for the appearance of your desk top Screen saver The module for selecting and configuring the screensaver consists of three parts Select a suitable screensaver from the list to the left The preview to the right shows how the selected program looks Use Setup and Test to test the screensaver in the running system and configure it doptseq 3d eut Start screen saver automatically For the screensaver to be activated auto matically select this check box and specify the time in minutes after which the screensaver should be activated Require password to stop screen saver The screensaver can block your workstation and require a password for the release Priority Use the slider to set the priority of the screensaver in relation to other processes If you use a graphically complicated screensaver that generates a high processor load set the priority higher to achieve a smooth display quality In this case the priority of other processes is reduced accordingly However if you frequently let your machine work while you do other things you should refrain from running a complex screensaver with a high priority Colors Use this module to manage and edit color schemes for your desktop Select one of the many ex
40. Internet communication protocol finding increased use in local net works known as intranets telnet Telnet is the sajprotocolland command for communicating with other hosts Normally the user only sees telnet as a means for logging into a remote system terminal Formerly the designation of a keyboard and monitor combination connected to a central computer On workstations this term is also used for programs that emulate a real terminal Tux Name of the Linux penguin see http www sjbaker org cux Glossary UNIX UNIX is an operating system that is widely distributed above all on workstations in networks Since the beginning of the 1990s there has been a freely available version for PCs Linux URL Uniform Resource Locator Unique Internet address that contains the type e g http and the name of the host e g www suse de user account See rajaccess permissions user directory See home directory VESA Video Electronics Standard Association Industrial consortium that defines among other things important video standards wild card A wild card stands for one symbol or more arbitrary characters symbol wild cards Placeholder for one symbol or more symbol unknown charac ters most often used in commands especially search commands window manager A window manager is the layer that interacts between the and the user It is responsible among other things for you
41. O 420 4 Where can I get special tips or help In Konqueror enter the path usr share doc sdb en html index html to view our Support Database which contains useful information If this path does not exist install the packages sdb and Sdb en On the Internet find the most recent version athttp sdb suse de en sdb html 5 How can I enter commands in KDE Click the screen with shell icon in the panel to start the Bash shell Select alternative terminals from the main menu To run a single com mand press Alt F2 then enter the command 6 I cannot find many programs in KDE You can start all programs from a terminal window by entering the program name and pressing Enter 7 What is a mirror Why should I not get these things from ftp As there are many users who need to retrieve things from the server at the same time its capacity limit would be reached very quickly For this reason there are a number of other FTP servers that contain a duplicate of the SUSE server These servers are referred to as mir rors Select a mirror in your vicinity same country to speed up the download A list of mirror is available ati http www suse de 8 I cannot find any exe files Where are all the applications In Linux executable files normally do not have file extensions Most programs are located in usr bin and usr X11R6 bin 9 How can I recognize executable files The command 1s 1 returns all executable f
42. OJackConnect a Patchbay for Jack To use JACK first start the engine with jackd d alsa d hw 0 JACK was designed to achieve a low latency Therefore the engine should run with real time priority For more information read the file usr share doc packages jack RE ADME SuSE The patchbay QJackConnect assists in tracking the JACK clients running in your system Following the program launch with qjackconnect the clients with readable ports are listed on the left side and the clients with writable ports are listed on the right side If no JACK clients were started the lists initially only display the inputs and outputs of the sound card The lists are updated automatically as the port configuration changes The ports are displayed in a tree view under the client Connect individual ports by selecting them from the lists and clicking Connect Connect multiple ports simultaneously by selecting clients 19 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit 19 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity With audacity package audacit y record and edit audio files This is called hard disk recording When you start the program for the first time select a language At other times change the language setting under File gt Preferences gt Interface The language change is then effective the next time you start the program xnu ui PUNOS File Edit View Project Generate Effect Analyze Help 7K Right 44
43. SUSE LINUX User Guide JOPI 4X91 eiuM eui 205 206 Cut This cuts the currently selected text region The corresponding key board shortcut is 0 Copy This copies the selected text region to the clipboard The same can be achieved with the shortcut Ctrl C Paste Use this to insert text from the clipboard The shortcut for this function is V You can also paste text by middle clicking Select All This selects all the text in a document The shortcut for this function is A Deselect This menu option deselects a previously selected text area The shortcut for this function is A You can do the same by clicking in the document window Toggle Block Selection KWrite not only supports marking and remov ing horizontal selections lines or paragraphs it also supports verti cal selections any desired text block This toggles the block selection mode which can also be done with the shortcut B Toggle Insert This changes the program s input mode By default KWrite inserts new text at the current cursor position Selecting this menu item switches the editing mode so any existing text is overwrit ten Alternatively switch between editing modes by pressing Ins Find and Replace Selecting Find or pressing dis plays a dialog in which to enter a search string or a regular expres sion Also define the search direction the starting po
44. See Sec tion4 9 on page 373 for ideas of where to find more information about the program 24 1 Graphics Formats There are two main formats for graphics pixel and vector The GIMP works only with pixel graphics which is the normal format for pho tographs and scanned images Pixel graphics consist of small blocks of color that together create the entire image The files can easily become quite large because of this It is also not possible to increase the size of a pixel im age without losing quality Unlike pixel graphics vector graphics do not store information for all in dividual pixels Instead they store information about how image points lines or areas are grouped together Vector images can also be scaled very easily The drawing application of OpenOffice org for example uses this format 24 2 Starting The GIMP Start GIMP from the main menu Alternatively enter gimp amp in a com mand line 24 2 1 Initial Configuration When starting GIMP for the first time or the 2 0 version for the first time a configuration wizard opens for preparatory configuration The default 24 1 Graphics Formats settings are acceptable for most purposes Press Continue in each dialog unless you are familiar with the settings and prefer another setup 24 2 2 The Default Windows Three windows appear by default They can be arranged on the screen and except the toolbox closed if no longer needed Closing the toolbox closes
45. Step size Change Position Change Size wn Io lt m Cancel Figure 4 14 Adjusting the Image Geometry multihead dialog Three modes are offered Traditional default One screen Xinerama and Clone mode Traditional multihead Each monitor represents an individual unit The mouse pointer can switch between the screens Cloned multihead In this mode all monitors display the same contents The mouse is only visible on the main screen Xinerama multihead All screens combine to form a single large screen Program windows can be positioned freely on all screens or scaled to a size that fills more than one monitor The layout of a multihead environment describes the arrangement of and the relationship between the individual screens By default SaX2 config ures a standard layout that follows the sequence of the detected graphics cards arranging all screens in a row from left to right In the Layout dia log of the multihead tool determine the way the monitors are arranged by using the mouse to move the screen symbols in the grid After you have completing the layout dialog verify the new configuration by clicking Test Linux currently does not offer 3D support for Xinerama multihead environ ments In this case SaX2 deactivates the 3D support 4 4 Hardware Input Devices Mouse If the mouse already works you do not need to do anything However
46. Template to select a template on which to base the new image The GIMP includes a number of templates ranging from an A4 sheet of paper to a CD cover from which to choose To create a custom template select File gt Dialogs gt Templates and use the controls offered by the window that opens In the Image Size section set the size of the image to create in pixels or another unit GIMP defaults use inches as the other unit Click the unit to select another unit from the list of available units Changing the pixel size modifies the other unit size and vice versa The ratio between pixels and a unit is set in Resolution A resolution of 72 pixels per inch corresponds to screen display It is sufficient for web page graphics A higher resolution should be used for images to print For most printers a resolution of 300 pixels per inch results in an acceptable quality In Image Type select whether the image should be in color RGB or grayscale For detailed information about image types see Sec tion on page 371 Select the Fill Type for the new image Fore ground and Background use the colors selected in the toolbox White uses a white background in the image Transparent creates a clear image Transparency is represented by a gray checkerboard pattern Enter a com ment for the new image in Image Comment When the settings meet your needs press OK
47. Then create multiple logical partitions within the extended partition The maximum number of logical partitions is fifteen on SCSI disks and 63 on BJIDE disks It does not matter which type of partitions are used for Linux Primary and logical partitions both work fine Required Disk Space The amount of hard disk space needed depends on the intended use of the system Available space limits what applications can be installed The fol lowing hints give some guidelines for space requirements Minimal system 180 MB No graphical interface X Window System is installed which means only console applications can be used Also only a very basic selec tion of software is installed Minimal system with graphical interface 500 MB This includes X and some applications Graphical system with modern applications between 1 GB and 2 GB This includes recent versions of graphical desktops namely KDE and GNOME and bigger application packages such as OpenOffice org and Netscape or Mozilla For downloading movies and music with Linux 2 GB SUSE LINUX User Guide UOID OJSU LUOJSND 20 Both items 3 GB Burning CDs and the items listed above 4 GB These guidelines can help develop a partitioning scheme for your system Under 500 MB A swap partition and a root partition Between 500 MB and 4 GB A small boot partition located within the first cylinders of the hard disk boot at least 8 MB or 1
48. Use Search for Files to find files With Run Program enter and run a command for example for start ing a program instead of navigating through the various program menus From the main menu you can also start the GNOME Control Center for configuring the desktop or YaST for installing additional software 6 1 5 Handling Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs To access floppy disks CDs or DVDs insert the medium in the appro priate drive Right click an empty spot of the desktop and select the de sired medium from the Drives list A floppy disk or CD icon appears Double clicking the icon launches Nautilus which displays the contents of the medium Copy files to your personal home directory by dragging and dropping Copy files to a floppy disk in the same way SUSE LINUX User Guide doptsed 3INON9 SUL 171 172 M Caution Do not simply remove floppy disks from the drive after using them Floppy disks CDs and DVDs must always be unmounted from the system first Close all Nautilus sessions still accessing the medium then right click the icon for the medium and select eject from the menu Then safely remove the floppy disk or CD the tray opens automati cally The icon disappears from the desktop Caution Floppy disks can also be formatted from the floppy disk menu In the dia log choose the format and density of the floppy disk In file system type choose between Linux native ext2
49. Willy Wilber a Homepage http Home Postfach 99999 Aut der Scholle 12345 Gr nland Antarktis Figure 11 1 KAddressBook Main Window 11 1 Creating a New Contact Open the contact editor with File gt New Contact the respective icon or the entry in the toolbar A dialog opens with two tabs in which to make your entries Refer to Figure 11 2 on the next page Enter all important information including name title private and business addresses all phone numbers e mail addresses and URLs under the Gen eral tab If desired assign the contact to a category that can later be used for filtering the address view Select a standard category Family Friend Business Customer or School or create a new category The Details tab contains some useful additional information such as birthdays and anniversaries and offers the possibility to add comments for this contact As soon as all required fields under these tabs are completed save the data with OK The new contact then appears in a list of current contacts in the left part of the window 11 1 Creating a New Contact f General Details Misc Home Edit Name Tux Penguine 8 I Work Bole Mobile Edit Phone Numbers Organization Formatted name Tux Penguine L L Home J LU e Edit Email Addresses Email tux amp example com URL l Edit Addresses J e IM address
50. YES The second filter relies on this 2 Add a second filter to the list and name it SPAMFilter This filter moves the messages marked by SpamAssassin to the spam folder Select lt header field gt as the property and contains as the qualifier Enter X Spam Status YES in the corresponding text entry field Set filtering action to file in folder and select spam Confirm with Ap ply SUSE LINUX User Guide UOHOOIAAY oN Id SUL IONX 267 268 These two filters should be placed in the described order at the top of the list Any other filters can be placed below them Distinguishing Wanted and Unwanted Messages SpamAssassin ships with predefined rules that control the recognition of spam messages It is possible for the tool to miss a message occasionally This is where the rate of false negatives can be lowered by training Spa mAssassin The utility sa learn is included for this purpose If your messages are stored in the MailDir format refer to Section on page 258 run the fol lowing command sa learn spam dir Mail spam cur If your messages are stored in the mbox format run the following com mand sa learn mbox spam Mail spam directory SpamAssassin returns the following message upon a successful spam recognition event Learned from 15 message s Visit the site http www spamassassin org Qr read the correspond ing man page to discover more about this t
51. YaST suggests a mount point for each partition created Details of the parameters are provided in the next section 3 Select OK to apply your changes SUSE LINUX User Guide 23 24 The new partition is then listed in the partition table If you click Next the current values are adopted and you are returned to the suggestion screen Partitioning Parameters If you create a new partition or modify an existing partition various pa rameters can be set in the partitioning tool For new partitions suitable pa rameters are set by YaST and usually do not require any modification To perform manual settings proceed as follows 1 Select the partition 2 Edit the partition and set the parameters 2 5 File System ID Even if you do not want to format the partition at this stage as sign it a file system ID to ensure that the partition is registered correctly Possible values include Linux Linux swap Linux LVM or Linux RAID Refer to the Administration Guide for details on LVM and RAID File System To format the partition immediately within the scope of the in stallation specify one of the following file systems for the parti tion Swap Ext2 Ext3 ReiserFS or JFS Swap is a special format that makes the partition usable as vir tual memory Every system should have at least one swap parti tion of at least 128 MB see notel 2 5 5 on the next page Reis
52. a The scanner is not supported Check http sdb suse de en for a list of Linux compatible devices a Your SCSI controller was not installed correctly a There are termination problems with your SCSI port Your SCSI cable is too long SUSE LINUX User Guide 91 92 Your scanner has a SCSI Light Controller that is not supported by Linux Your scanner is defective Caution SCSI scanners should not be connected or disconnected when the the system is running Shut the system down first Caution For more information about scanning refer to Chapter 23Jon page 4 4 10 Sound When the sound configuration tool is started YaST tries to detect your sound card automatically Configure one or multiple sound cards To use multiple sound cards start by selecting one of the cards to configure Press Configure to enter the Setup dialog Edit opens a dialog in which to edit previously configured sound cards Finish saves the current settings and completes the sound configuration If YaST is unable to detect your sound card automatically press Add Sound Card in Sound Configuration to open a dialog in which to select a sound card and module Setup With Quick Automatic Setup you are not required to go through any of the further configuration steps and no sound test is performed The sound card is configured automatically With Normal Setup you have the pos sibility to a
53. addr 128 0 To terminate timidity enter killall timidity to kill all timidity processes xnur ui PUNOS 19 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor AlsaModularsynth from the package a1samodular is a digital replica of an analog modular synthesizer The program has a JACK interface and can load all kinds of LADSPA effect plug ins Thus it can also be used as a versatile effect processor Enter ams to start AlsaModularSynth from the command line The param eter j activates the JACK mode provided the JACK engine jackd is run ning see Section on page 310 The required port connections can be established with QJackConnect Individual ports are generated for each PCM module in the JACK mode AlsaModularSynth only appears in the list of QJackConnect if at least one PCM module exists The directory usr share doc packages alsamodular contains nu merous example patches that demonstrate the various possibilities De tailed documentation is available in the subdirectory html 19 11 1 Synthesizer Patch Examples The application package for AlsaModularSynth provides a selection of patch examples to allow the user to start working with the application right away The folder demos is located in the directory usr share doc packages alsamodular A few autonomous patches are con tained there that generate interesting random sound loops The files con cerned begin with example ams demo Patches containing scope and
54. as unre solved dependencies from other packages exist or could arise Third party packages packages without SUSE signature are automatically assigned this status to prevent them from being overwritten by later versions existing on the installation media This may cause package conflicts that must be resolved manually for experts Automatic Installation This package has been automatically selected for installation as it is required by another package resolution of pack age dependencies Note To deselect such a package you may need to use the status Taboo Note 2 Automatic Update This package is already installed However as another package requires a newer version of this package the installed ver sion will automatically be updated Delete Automatically This package is already installed but existing package conflicts require this package be deleted For example this may be the case if the current package has been replaced by a differ ent package However this does not happen very often SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBYUOD SDA 63 64 Automatic Installation after selection This packages has been automatically selected for installation be cause it is part of a predefined selection such as Multimedia or Development Automatic Update after selection This package is already installed but a newer version exists on the installation media This package is part of a predefined
55. b Output in bytes k Output in kilobytes m Output in megabytes 25 3 Important Linux Commands date option s This simple program displays the current system time If run as root it can also be used to change the system time Details about the program are available in Processes top options s top provides a quick overview of the currently run ning slprocesses Press H to access a page that briefly explains the main options to customize the program ps option s process ID If run without any options this command displays a table of all your own programs or processes those you started The options for this command are not preceded by hyphen aux Displays a detailed list of all processes independent of the owner kill option s process ID Unfortunately sometimes a program cannot be terminated in the normal way In most cases you should still be able to stop such a runaway program by executing the ki11 command specifying the respective process ID see top and ps ki11 sends a TERM signal that instructs the program to shut itself down If this does not help the following parameter can be used 9 Sends a KILL signal instead of a TERM signal This brings the specified process to an end in almost all cases killall option s processname This command is similar to ki11 but uses the process name instead of the process ID as an argument killing all processes with that name Network ping option s
56. check Enable automatic saving of calendar This also saves all changes 10 1 Starting KOrganizer automatically at a user definable interval To be prompted before any items are deleted enable Confirm deletes Under Time amp Date customize the defaults for working hours and ap pointments define the default alarm time and set your time zone KOrga nizer switches between winter and daylight savings time automatically Under Fonts set your preferred font type and size for the different text fields of the program Fonts can be selected for the time bar the month view and under Agenda view for the day view week view and work week view Under Colors set the colors that should be used to highlight events to do items and other elements For instance define that to do items due on the current day should be dark red and that overdue to do items should be light red The other items of the preferences dialog allow customization of the vari ous views and the program s group features Under Group Scheduling provide additional e mail addresses which is useful if you are registered for a certain event under a different address E KOrganizer Main Configuration C A Pede O Use email settings from Control Center Full name Anonym IA Email address niemand nirgendwo IC Send copy to owner when mailing events a j Auto Save veus R Enable automatic saving of calendar K Save
57. connecting EPI E deste vele duri ue te Konqueror directories changing 6 6 scenes sereatiig oi deleting 5 asiceske eee een navigating PAS puntera dns StrUCtUTe iiem disks SbOOt ioci eion tire hein qe 117 formatting 008 159 module e secedere i117 TOSCO io esprit ds 117 DNS configuring 00e 107 download manager 155 drives 2smou nting siii rt re 397 e mail configuring 08 109 e mail applications Evolution Mal rales editors encryption ciuin tort eee eee eee ergonomics 6 cece eee eee eee error messages bad interpreter permission denied Evolution corria address books attachments calendar configuring contacts 0 eee creating messages encryption cece ee eee S filter8 acceeen te ets folders ien arras importing mail SSIPMING rra tana starting 0 cece eee ee eee virtual folders F FAO cus eesssiotteprnorsaec tanen est 419 FAT filesystem sessssssse file managers Konqueror 1501153 file systems SEX aia files o ERE 220 archiving 38511396 comparing 6 eee eee eee 9 compressing 585 595 converting from Microsoft formats 188 copying
58. duit of KPilot set some configuration options before using them KOrganizer stores its files in the directory kde share apps korganizer However given that the directory kde begins with a dot it may not be shown by the file selection dialog In this case enter the complete path manually or explicitly toggle the display of hidden files dot files in the file selection dialog The default shortcut for this is F8 SUSE LINUX User Guide 1OlldM ULM Je1nduuo2 pjeupunoH o BurziuoJu2Ag 213 ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only O Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only R Sync archived entries to the PC 3X Cancel Figure 9 3 KPilot Configuration Having opened the directory kde share apps korganizer select a file that can be used as a calendar file by KOrganizer In our example this is the file palm ics In the case of a user called tux the complete path and file name would be home tux kde share apps korganizer palm ics as shown in Figure D 4 ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file home tux kde share apps korganiz er palm ics Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only S
59. gezahn A Figure 19 16 Main Window and Channel View of kmid kar format in the directory opt kde3 share apps kmid These files also contain the lyrics which are scrolled and highlighted in sync with the playback Access the detailed online help of kmid with FT The MIDI ports must be set correctly under Settings gt MIDI Settings The channel view presented when you click the keyboard button in the tool bar is especially noteworthy Enlarge the window accordingly to see each channel represented as a piano keyboard For each channel select the pre ferred instrument 19 9 ALSA and MIDI x Note If kmid is started by clicking a MIDI file in the KDE file manager Kon queror the MIDI settings specified in the KDE Control Center are applied If the program is started separately the settings specified in the program itself are applied Note E Xnur ui PUNOS 19 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card Some sound cards do not have a WaveTable synthesizer for playing MIDI files with the loaded sound font or instrument patch In this case use a software WaveTable synthesizer like fluidsynth or timidity 19 10 1 The Sound Font Synthesizer fluidsynth After the program is started with a command like fluidsynth a alsa m alsa seq gm s 2 fluidsynth appears in the list of writable MIDI ports and can be used as sound source In this example gm s 2 is a file i
60. groupname file s Transfers the group ownership of a given ile to the group with the specified group name The file owner can only change group ownership if a member of both the current and the new group l chmod options mode file s 5 Changes the access permissions The mode parameter has three parts e group access and access type group accepts the following characters 5 u user 5 g group ud o others zx 2 For access grant access with and deny it with The access type is controlled by the following options r read w write x eXecute executing files or changing to the directory un Set uid bit the application or program is started as if it were started by the owner of the file As an alternative a numeric code can be used The four digits of this code are composed of the sum of the values 4 2 and 1 the decimal result of a binary mask The first digit sets the set user ID SUID 4 the set group ID 2 and the sticky 1 flags The second digit defines the permissions of the owner of the file The third digit defines the permissions of the group members and the last digit sets the permis sions for all other users The read permission is set with 4 the write permission with 2 and the permission for executing a file is set with 1 The owner of a file would usually receive a 7 the sum of all per missions gzip parameters file s This program compresses the contents of files using c
61. it is a question of the correct adjustment The height of your working chair is best when your forearms lying on the table are at right angles to your upper arms You should be able to place your feet completely on the floor and your thighs and lower legs should also be at right angles Gymnastic balls and balancing chairs offer an alternative to conventional seating arrangements Unfortunately a good chair constructed according to ergonomic criteria is relatively expensive but the investment in your health is worth it Impor tant features of a good chair include a backrest reaching to the shoulder blades and with an adjustable ki netic resistance support for the lumbar spinal column a seat that is also adjustable and can be tilted forwards or backwards automatic regulation of backrest and seat to retain an ideal angle springs that softly cushion the weight when sitting down stability and rollers that are restrained when you stand adjustable height of the seat according to standards 42 to 53 cm and backrest SUSE LINUX User Guide 92DJ O 0MA SUI ui so luouo813 405 406 individual adjustment of arm rests if there are any luxury a footrest if your feet do not reach the floor 26 1 3 Good Lighting for Productive Work Generally speaking workplace lighting does not come close to the intensity of light outdoors This difference is unnoticed because the human faculty of perception is very flexible
62. ko Ll Support Question Describe your problem briefly but as thoroughly as possible Exact error messages and previous Support Key 12345678912345 actions taken are especially important TuX SUSE Change Do notinclude morethan one question in a mail Separate Choose a category multiple requests into different Unspecified subject blocks and write a Booting CD R DSL specific request for each topic gt Hardware Installation ISDN This makes them easierto E x Notebook Mail Modem process accelerating responses i Network Printer Sound The hardware and software gt use gt kpepai information serves to determine the basic system information and configuration on your computer Your question for SUSE support If you need further support for individual problems consider using the SUSE Professional Services Find more information aboutthis at http www suse de en support Figure 4 31 Submitting a Support Request view the log for example to check if all services and functions were started as expected 4 9 3 System Log The system log logs the operations of your computer to var log messsages Kernel messages are recorded here sorted according to date and time 4 9 4 Loading a Vendor s Driver CD With this module automatically install device drivers from a Linux driver CD that contains drivers for SUSE LINUX When installing SUSE LINUX from scratch use this YaST mo
63. local time or UTC canada lain Most PCs that also have other Central and South America Central operating systems installed Asia Eastern such as Microsoft Windows Australia East Indiana use local time Africa Hawaii Machines that have only Linux pecits dana Sane installed should be set to Global Michigan Universal Time Coordinated Etc Mountain UTC Samoa If you are unsure use the default values already selected Hardware clock setto Change Time or Date local time 16 23 49 11 03 2004 Cancel Accept Figure 2 12 Selecting the Time Zone 2 5 9 Language The language was already selected at the beginning of the installation see Section 2 3Jon page 15 If you want to change this setting you can do this here Furthermore advanced users can use the Details button to set the language for the user root The drop down menu offers three options ctype The value of the variable LC CTYPE in the file etc sysconfig language is adopted for the user root This sets the localization for language specific function calls yes The user root has the same language settings as the local user SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND 33 34 no The language settings for the user root are not affected by the lan guage selection Click OK to complete the configuration or Discard to undo your changes 2 5 10 Launching the Installation When satisfied with the installation setting
64. received for this user If you enter the user gets any A gbon Back Figure 18 1 YaST Module for the Configuration of the Fax Function User Here select the user for whom to activate the fax functionality In coming fax messages and status reports will be sent to this user ac count Fax Numbers Phone numbers assigned to the user for incoming fax messages are entered in this field Separate multiple phone numbers with commas All faxes sent to these numbers will be forwarded to the user by e mail Leave this field empty if you only want the user to be able to send fax messages StationID For identification purposes the fax protocol uses a special ID that should normally contain the external phone number of the fax device in international notation An example for a valid station ID is 49 89 123456 for the fax number 123456 in Munich Germany The maximum length of this entry is twenty digits Valid characters are numbers spaces and the symbol as prefix to the international country code Header This field can contain an arbitrary text to use as a header for sent 288 18 1 Configuration User tux 5 Phone Numbers Delay Duration Action MailAndSave 5 Pin OK Cancel Figure 18 2 Fax Functionality User Preferences faxes Whether and how this text is featured on the sent document depends on the ISDN driver used Action The default setting Mai 1AndSav
65. select one or several files keep Ctrl pressed to select multiple files or directories If necessary determine the following advanced options for the archive Add only if newer If the archive already contains a file with the same name the file is only added if it is newer than the one existing in the archive Include subfolders To compress an entire directory activate this option to include all subdirectories Exclude backup files Avoid unnecessary data trash by disabling the inclusion of backup copies when creating an archive Exclude hidden files Usually hidden files do not contain any data that are relevant for the user By default they are not included in the archive to reduce the amount of data Exclude files This explicitly excludes certain files from the archive This option is useful if you want to compress entire directories but exclude certain files from the archive Instead of file names you can also spec ify search patterns Ignorecase File Roller ignores different spellings of file names and exten sions like JPEG or jpeg After completing the selection and configuration exit the dialog The archive created is available for further processing at the desired location To decompress an archive load it to File Roller click Edit gt Extract to and specify the target directory SUSE LINUX User Guide doptsed 3INON9 SUL 181 Part Ill Office Applications The OpenOffice
66. tab are Button Mapping Here specify right handed or left handed use of your mouse Icons Determine how the system should react to clicks and double clicks The default setting for the KDE desktop is a single click for opening files or folders and a mouse pointer that changes its appearance when it is moved over icons If you want icons to be selected automatically in addition to the single click activate the respective option and set the delay for this selection To use double click for opening files and folders select Double click to open files and folders select icons on first click Finally set the size and color of the pointer and the visual feedback on activation Configuration options of the Advanced tab Pointer Acceleration and Pointer Threshold The pointer acceleration defines the relation between the movement speed of the input device mouse and the speed of the pointer on the screen The higher the selected factor is the more difficult it is to con trol the screen pointer The threshold in pixels specifies the distance the pointer must cover before the indicated pointer acceleration is activated In this way control the mouse pointer easily when covering small distances and cover large distances on the screen with small movements Double Click Interval Here set the maximum interval between two mouse clicks that should still be interpreted as a double click Drag Start Time and Drag Start Distance The object
67. the application In the default configuration The GIMP saves your window layout when you exit Dialogs left open reappear when you next start the program GIMP Tip of the Day This small window opens with useful tips and tricks each time the program starts Reading the tips is recommended for new users Uncheck Show tip next time GIMP starts to disable it This setting can also be changed in the preferences Press Close to close the window The Toolbox The main window of The GIMP shown in FigureD4 1 on the next page contains the main controls of the application Closing it exits the appli cation At the very top the menu bar offers access to file functions ex tensions and help Below that find icons for the various tools Hover the mouse over an icon to display information about it The current foreground and background color are shown in two overlap ping boxes The default colors are black for the foreground and white for the background Click the box to open a color selection dialog Swap the foreground and background color with the bent arrow symbol to the upper right of the boxes Use the black and white symbol to the lower left to reset the colors to the default To the right the current brush pattern and gradient are shown Click the displayed one to access the selection dialog The lower portion of the win dow contains the Tool Options dialog It allows configuration of various options for the current tool
68. the file system for Linux and DOS FAT because Windows cannot access Linux file systems Help provides some instructions for the tool 6 2 Settings The GNOME desktop can be customized according to your preferences and needs Click the Start Here icon on the desktop If this icon is not visible start Nautilus by right clicking the desktop then selecting New Window Under Location enter preferences Open the various configura tion dialogs by double clicking the respective icons Note In the individual modules access specific help for the options with Help The system immediately adopts every change made in a config uration module Note 6 2 1 Keyboard In the Keyboard module determine settings such as the repeat rate and sound events associated with your keyboard The module consists of the Keyboard and Audio tabs Use the Audio tab to configure of an au dio signal for your keyboard For audible notification when a wrong key is pressed activate the corresponding radio button Exit the Keyboard module with Close or go the accessibility module with Accessibility The functionality of this module is described in Section 6 2 9 on page 175 6 2 Settings 6 2 2 Mouse Configuration The mouse configuration consists of three tabs Buttons Cursor and Motion The configuration options of the Buttons tab refer to the Mouse Orientation Lef
69. the modules may not be loaded automatically In this case continue automatically to a dia log in which to load the USB module manually Refer to the YaST help text for more information SCSI scanner Specify the device such as dev sg0 SCSI scanners should not be connected or disconnected when the the system is run ning Shut the system down first Network scanner Enter the IP address or the host name You can use a scanner that is connected to a host in your network and con figured as a network scanner To configure a network scanner refer to the Support Database article Scanning in Linux keyword scanner When selecting a network scanner enter the host name or the IP address of the host to which the scanner is connected uouounByuo2 ISOA If your scanner was not detected the device probably is not supported However sometimes even supported scanners are not detected If that is the case proceed with the manual scanner selection If you can iden tify your scanner in the list of vendors and models select it If not select Cancel Information about scanners that work with Linux is provided at http cdb suse de index php LANG en http sdb suse http www mostang com sane Caution Only assign the scanner manually if you are absolutely sure Incorrect selection could damage your hardware Caution zl Troubleshooting Your scanner may not have been detected for one of the following reasons
70. the size of the window move the mouse pointer along one of the four edges of the window until the mouse pointer symbol changes to a double arrow Then keep the left mouse button pressed while moving this edge Another possibility is to move the mouse pointer to one of the four corners and resize two edges of the window at the same time 5 2 Settings The KDE desktop can be customized according to your preferences and needs Control Center in the main menu opens the configuration dialog for your KDE desktop The following section introduces a number of mod ules 5 2 Peripherals This opens the configuration dialogs for the mouse keyboard and printer administration Keyboard Keyboard repeat Keeping a key pressed causes the associated character to be printed repeatedly as long as the key is pressed The option is activated by default Key click volume 1f you want to hear a sound when a key is clicked acti vate this option and adjust the volume with the slider SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq 3d eut 141 Use sticky keys slow keys or bounce keys These options are the same as those listed in Section on page where they are described in detail NumLock on KDE startup Here determine whether the number pad of your keyboard should be active when KDE is started Mouse The mouse configuration comprises three tabs General Advanced and Mouse Navigation The configuration options of the General
71. 1 Loading Sound Fonts SB Live and AWE 199 2 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard 19 9 3 Establishing Connections between MIDI Ports 19 9 4 kmid The KDE MIDIPlayer 19 10MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card 19 10 1 The Sound Font Synthesizer fluidsynth puss Mie bs a eee ne UTEM net eines p HM 19 115 The MIDI Out Modulel Torreeres tee Toes Contents 312 312 313 314 315 316 20 TV Video Radio and Webcam 20 1 Watching TV withmotv o o o o oo ooo o 20 1 1 Video Source and Network Searchl 20 1 2 From Silent Film to Sound Film 20 1 3 Screen Proportions and Full Screen Mode 2014 The Launcher Menul o ooo 20 2 Video Text with alevt 20 3 Webcams and motv es Uc Vere EC A 20 5 1 Operation 20 5 2 Snapshots 20 5 5 CommandLline 0 21 K3b The KDE Burning Application 21 1 Creating a Data CD 212 Burning CDs 213 Creating an Audio CD llle 214 CopyingaCD 21 5 Writing ISO Images 21 6 For More Information 22 Digital Cameras and Linux 22 1 ConnectingtotheCamera llle 222 Installating thePrograms oo ooo 22 3 Using Konqueror 224 Using gtKam 225 Using Digikam 22 6 For More Information SUSE LINUX User Guide 331 332 332 333 3
72. 270 16 12 For More Information unnamed Belongs to Top Level i Folder Icons C Use custom icons Folder Type Mailbox format maildir i Associated Mailing List C Folder holds a mailing list Old Message Expiry C Expire old messages in this folder ha 7 z Identity Sender Standard Default li Show Sender Receiver Show Default ij w Ok 3 Cancel j Figure 16 3 Creating New Folders SUSE LINUX User Guide Uonpooigday PIN IA SUL IONA 271 Evolution An E Mail and Calendar Program Evolution is a groupware suite created by Ximian It offers regular e mail features along with extended features like task lists and a calendar The application also provides a complete address book including the ability to send contact information to others in vCard format cup tat debes Gok xou ee des 274 bie ad s ua dida net eir 275 7 4 EMail ci a da a eke Bae Oe eo 277 17 5 Calendar llle 281 17 6 Contact ee ee G 282 E 283 17 8 For More Information 284 WUDIBOld Jopue o2 PUD JIOJA 3 UY uounjo 3 274 17 1 Starting Evolution Start Evolution from the main menu or with evolution When started for the first time Evolution offers a configuration assistant If it is not opened automatically select Tools gt Settings gt Mail Accounts and
73. 443 444 test page nuria rin tai 176 text editors time zones Operna ed dme A ES ER TV A OE T 334 card configuration OO 335 Eu ZR tomar EE 33211334 ENXIVEPE caco cis 335 teletext 20 0 0 ccc cece eee eee 1334 U A eile ed hemp 398 updatedb sssssssssssssss 396 updating Online ninn re dacs con c path CDr racista USB digital cameras 346 users administering with YaST 111 V Vi re 401 virtual consoles navigating switching virtual memory 0 66 cece eee W web browsers Gale n 2 coe dts 2371239 Konqueror 23411236 Mozilla oo oooccooccooo m 241 web pages archiving oooooccccoocccccooo 234 webcams A sre the meer 336 SMO isses the S ER Eo ga 334 wild cards sse 396 X X O asasina baila wane Ea configuring 606e mu ltihe d cello t 85 XMMS act aio is dea 306 Y YaST Index backups 0oooccocorccccooooo o 115 boot configuration 120 boot mode eee eee 32 CD ROM 0 cece eee eee eee configuring 65 128 Control Center usuuu 54 disk creation oo oococccococ 117 disk space o n DMA urgere rene ns 189 A O 107 driver CDs ssss 128 DSL 2 eer re EepberkenEe e mail irewall J 2 2 trente tti graphical user interface graphics card
74. By drawing parts of your image on separate layers change move or delete those parts without dam aging the rest of the image To understand how layers work imagine an image created from a stack of transparent sheets Different parts of the im age are drawn on different sheets The stack can be rearranged changing which parts are on top Individual layers or groups of layers can shift po sition moving sections of the image to other locations New sheets can be added and others set aside Use the Layers dialog to view the available layers of an image The text tool automatically creates special text layers when used The active layer is highlighted The buttons at the bottom of the dialog offer a number of functions More are available in the menu opened when a layer is right clicked in the dialog The two icon spaces before the image name are used for toggling image visibility eye icon when visible and for linking layers Linked layers are marked with the chain icon and moved as a group Only layers with transparency an alpha channel can be placed above other layers in a stack To add this to a layer right click and select it from the menu 24 6 Editing Images Advanced Features 24 6 2 Image Modes GIMP has three image modes RGB Grayscale and Indexed RGB is a normal color mode and is the best mode for editing most images Grayscale is used for black and white images Indexed limits the colors in the image to a set nu
75. E Areacode Dialprefix This is only used on a internal SO ee bus and most common one is 0 NIL X Start ISDN Log If you do not want to log all your ISDN traffic uncheck Start ISDN Log Start Mode OnBoot x Abort Back ok Figure 4 20 ISDN Configuration In the following dialog define the interface for your ISDN card or add further providers to existing interfaces Set up the interfaces with the SyncPPP or RawIP modes Most Internet providers use SyncPPP which is described below Depending on the connection scenario specify one of the following for Your Phone Number 1 The ISDN card is connected directly to the socket By default ISDN offers three numbers MSN multiple subscriber number On request up to ten numbers can be made available for your line Assign one of the MSN numbers to your ISDN card Enter the number without the prefix If you enter an incorrect number your telecom provider will automatically use the first MSN assigned to your ISDN line 2 The ISDN card is connected to a PBX Various specifications are required depending on the constellation a For private use Usually the Euro ISDN or EDSS1 protocol is used for the internal ports of small phone systems These phone 4 5 Network Devices Ya S YVinscalor ts My phonenumber Asyour t own telephone number MSN put in your telephone number without area code if your ISDN card is connected directly to the phon
76. ESSID network ID NWID en cryption key and nickname Press OK to complete the configuration of your card Kernel Module and Selection of the Network Card If your network card is a PCMCIA or USB device activate the re spective check boxes and exit the dialog with Next If not select the network card model with Select from list YaST automatically selects a suitable kernel module Exit this dialog with Next Here set up your networking m 5 device The values will be written Manual network card configuration into etz modprobe conf Options for the module should be written in the format Sieworkinteface option value Each entry should be space separated for example ASE ESE io 0x300 irg 5 Note If two Ethernet 5 0 29 l cards are configured with the same module name options will r Kemel Module be merged while saving Get a list of available network Se cards by pressing Select from List Options If you have a PCMCIA network card click on the PCMCIA check box if you have an USB network card click on the check box USB Pcmcia Cj USB iL l J Selectfrom List Abort Back Next Figure 4 16 Configuration of the Network Card SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 97 98 Configuration of the Network Address Specify the address assignment method for your network card Automatic Address Setu
77. GPL profits from this project especially from the tools but should not be seen as the same thing GPL GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE See home directory A private directory in the Linux system that belongs to a specific user usually in home username Except the superuser only the user has full access rights in his home directory host name Name of a machine in Linux usually the name by which it can be reached on the network HTML Hypertext Markup Language The most important language used in the vsWorld Wide Web for de signing the contents The layout commands made available by HTML define how a document looks and how it is displayed in a HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol A protocol used between the jbrowsers and Internet servers to trans mit rs HT ML pages over the ra World Wide Web SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 429 430 IDE Integrated Drive Electronics A widely used hard disk standard in low grade and middle grade PCs Internet World wide computer network based on TCP IP which is used by a very large population IP address A numerical 32 bit Internet address appearing in four decimal series separated by periods for example 192 168 10 1 which is uniquely assigned to a machine connected to TCP IP networks IRQ Interrupt Request A request to the sjoperating system carried out by a hardware compo nent or a program to assign it processor capacity ISDN Integrated Services Digital Ne
78. General r Model Vendor and Name selection Unclassified Uniwill Computer Corp RIVA TNT2 Model 64 VESA RIVA TNT2 Ultra VIA Technologies Inc Unknown TNT2 VMWare Inc lt Intergraphics it Quadro4 700XGL DH e Q Matrox Quadro4 750XGL O Micro Star Intemational Co Ltd Quadro4 750XGL DH NeoMagic Quadro4 900XGL NSC Quadro4 900XGL DH Number 9 Quadro4 980 XGL Quadro4 980XGL DH Nvidia SGS Thomson Joint Venture Quadro DCC O Rendition Quadro FX 1000 O s3 Quadro FX1000 DH SGS Thomson Quadro FX 1100 J Silicon Motion Quadro FX 2000 h sis Quadro FX2000 DH O Texas Instruments Quadro FX 3000 C Trident Quadro FX 3000 DH Tseng RIVA TNT O zt O J ai Vanta e Ok Cancel Figure 4 11 Selecting the Graphics Card Colors and Resolutions Here three tabs Colors Resolution and Expert are available Colors Depending on the hardware used select a color depth of 16 256 32768 65536 or 16 7 million colors 4 8 15 16 or 24 bit For a reasonable display quality set at least 256 colors 1 Resolution When the hardware is detected the resolution is queried Therefore the module usually only offers resolution and color depth combinations that your hardware can display correctly This keeps the danger of damaging your hardware with incorrect set tings very low in SUSE LINUX If you change the resolution manu ally consult the document
79. Gl Method and Max results 5 Scope selection Default Scope Administration ardware i D cups inux Documentation O Browse info page j iO Manpages Development i E Bash Reference Ie e Create Search Index Figure A 2 Configuring the Search Function If no search index was generated previously the system automatically prompts you to do so when you click the Search tab or enter a search string and click Search In the dialog window for generating the search index Figure A 3 on the next page use the check boxes to determine the information sources to index The index is generated when you exit the dia log with OK To limit the search base and the hit list as precisely as possible use the three drop down menus to determine the number of displayed hits and the selection area of sources to search The following options are available for determining the selection area SUSE LINUX User Guide UO LOLUSLUNDOG pub d eH 417 418 Index HTML Search Search Scope Status El Bash Reference Missing O Documentation for Linux PAM Missing O cups Missing Index Directory var cache susehelp Apply X Cancel Figure A 3 Generating a Search Index Default A predefined selection of sources is searched All All sources are searched None No sources selected for the search Custom Determine the sources to search by activating the respective check
80. Layers Channels Paths Undo In the first section use the drop down box to select the image to which the tabs refer By clicking Auto control whether the active image is chosen automatically By default Auto is enabled SUSE LINUX User Guide dINIS eui ui soyda Buyoindiuny 359 360 Rect Select Options 59 Mode iE amp IX Antialiasing Feather Edges Radius LJ 10 0 Auto Shrink Selection Sample Merged Free Select gt Width Height 1 S ce Figure 24 1 The Main Window Layers shows the different layers in the current images and can be used to manipulate the layers Information is available in Sectionp4 6 1 on page 370 Channels shows and can manipulate the color channels of the image Paths are an advanced method of selecting parts of an image They can also be used for drawing Paths shows the paths available for an image and provides access to path functions Undo shows a limited history of modi fications made to the current image Its use is described in Section 24 5 5 on pageB70 The bottom portion of the window contains three tabs With them select the current brush gradient and pattern 24 2 Starting The GIMP 24 3 Getting Started in GIMP 24 3 1 Creating a New Image To create a new image select File gt New or press This opens a dialog in which to make settings for the new image If desired use From
81. Linux Linux Linux Service Linux Consulting Linux Software Distributor Linux Distributor gt 13 ta a 14 tyle 15 lt link rel stylesheet href styles home css type text css title SuSE Homepage Styles gt 16 tyle 17 a t 18 lt script language JavaScript type text javascript src jscript change_img js gt lt script gt lt script language JavaScript Line 10 Col O INS NORM em Figure 8 1 The KWrite Text Editor 8 1 The File Menu New Ctm N This creates a new file and at the same time opens a new KWrite window in which to start typing your text 8 1 The File Menu Open Ctrl O Use this to open an existing file It opens a file selec tion dialog that resembles a file manager The left hand area provides a number of quick navigation buttons to use to list the files in your home directory or on the floppy with just one click Alternatively use the entry field in the toolbar at the top or browse directories with the arrow buttons As soon as a directory is selected the files and subdi rectories in it are listed in the right hand part of the dialog To speed things up narrow down the list according to the file type by specify ing the file extension e g txt under Filter To mark the current directory for quick return later click the star button in the toolbar and create a bookmark for it Any directory bookmarked in this way can subsequently be r
82. Online Update The YaST Online Update YOU enables the installation of important up dates and improvements The respective patches are available for down load on the SUSE FIP server and various mirror servers Under Installa tion Source select one of the various servers When you select a server the respective URL is copied to the input field below where it can be edited You can also specify local URLs in the form file my path or simply my path Expand the existing list with additional servers using New 4 3 Software Server Click Edit Server to modify the settings of the currently selected server When the module starts Manual Selection of Patches is active enabling determination of whether individual patches should be fetched To apply all available update packages deactivate this option However depending on the bandwidth of the connection and the amount of data to transmit this can result in long download times If you activate Download All Patches Again all available patches instal lable packages and descriptions are downloaded from the server If this box is not activated default only retrieve patches not yet installed on your system Additionally there is a possibility to update your system automatically Click Configure Fully Automatic Update to configure a process that au tomatically looks for updates and applies them on a daily basis This pro cedure is fully aut
83. SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 305 Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings analog Volume About Master Clock S PDIF Output Settings Internal Xtal y Professional Consumer S PDIF In d Professional Consumer Copyright Emphasis Category v Copyrighted y No emphasis y DAT Volume Change 4 Copy permitted 50 15us y PCM encoder CD ICE 908 Copy y General Rate 48 3 A 1 st generation wy Original Figure 19 6 Configuring the S PDIF Parameters with envy24control 19 3 1 XMMS An MP3 WAV OGG and Stream Player XMMS is a full blown audio player with robust jitter resistance The appli cation is easy to use The button for displaying the menu is located in the upper left corner of the program window Select the output plug in module with Options gt Preferences gt Audio I O Plugins If the xmms kde package is installed the aRts sound server can be configured here Note XMMS automatically redirects its output to the Disk Writer Plugin if it is not able to find a configured sound card In this case the played files are written to the hard disk as WAV files The time display then runs faster than when playing the output through a sound card Note Various visualization plug ins can be started through Options gt Prefer ences gt Visualization Plugins If you have a graphics card with 3D accel eration select an application such as the OpenGL spectru
84. The Key Server Dialog ooo eee 253 253 254 15 3 The Applet 2s cr t ue oho e UR EP n 255 15 3 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard 255 256 PSU IV RIETI d WR 256 Dy Stan amp a Se a eee 256 257 161 KMail and Kontact eee 258 16 2 Mail Formats cis om RR RR I ws 258 Ye Re 258 164 Configuring KMail 2 20 0 0 a 259 16 4 1 Defining Your User Identity 259 tik Ae Stee oe SE 259 16 4 83 Configuring the Appearance of KMail 260 16 5 Using KMail umso by e A EO Pe e 261 SUSE LINUX User Guide 16 6 Creating a New Message lees 262 Wa a ae Ae e dede dee ee dd 263 168 Importing Mail o o ooo coco oo 264 16 9 The Address BOOK o 264 16 10Filters s ou a a a e aoe REGINE E 265 16 10 1 Filter Rule llle 265 Er 265 CNET 266 SWR ERR a 268 Di ob ENERO hd eee oR ed 269 T 269 ITI P 269 T 270 m 270 dard oe qe roii Bock Bice euni audi nd 270 273 bh ety toh a deh es ah aa a E a 274 loe sboabas 274 DAA as Se 275 17 3 1 Summary oc RI RR A 275 Lr 276 17 9 8 Calendar GER RIS RES 276 17 9 4 Tasks 4 obo EKER Re Y ms 276 7 9 5 Contacts s wo uox erg Rx Re AA RUE Es 276 17 4 E Mail Red Wa edo e tet qe IRR ach RD oor 277 iv du S Ree ORES SES 277 1742 Mail Preferences len 277 T C
85. This tab corresponds to KJobViewer described in Section 5 4 5 on page I58 Properties All settings related to the printer are available here general information drivers interfaces separator pages quotas and user accesses Instances Depending on the document type you may have diverse re quirements for the printouts page format duplex printing orienta tion print quality and banners Combine the characteristic settings for each type in instances To create a new profile select New and en ter a name for the profile Click Settings to open a configuration dialog in which to specify these settings To save the settings and exit SUSE LINUX User Guide 143 144 the dialog click OK To define one of your custom profiles as the de fault for this printer click Set as Default Your default profile is used when printing from applications You can only switch between the individual profiles in the printer administration module 5 2 2 Desktop Under Appearance set the standard font font size background colors and underlining on the desktop Under Window Behavior configure the behavior of the windows and their activation For example set the focus to follow the mouse In this case you do not need to click a window to acti vate it The taskbar in the panel displays the applications currently started on your system In this module determine to what extent started programs and vir
86. To or Cc fields and originating from Fred define a second filter under Fil ter Criteria using the second row of drop down menus Select From in the first menu and contains in the second Then enter the e mail address to filter Activate Applies to all 3 Select the action to execute move delete etc You have now created a filter that transfers all mails from Fred Johnson on the KDE user list as specified 16 10 3 Spam Filters While electronic mail has many advantages it has a significant disadvan tage spam Unsolicited mass mailings also known as spam sent by the advertisement industry clog your electronic inbox and cause long trans fer times Filtering tools can separate the annoying ballast from important messages SpamAssassin is such a tool that can be embedded into KMail It relies on various built in rules and has the ability to learn from its expe rience with spam The configuration of this useful application for KMail is described here 16 10 Filters Preparations The actual software needs to be present before spam messages can be fil tered Run YaST as user root and install the package spamassassin with the package manager Software Software Then configure the system to activate the SpamAssassin service on sys tem start up by opening the RunLevel editor in YaST located under Sys tem Search the list of services for spamd and select activate Confirm t
87. To make an account the default account for sending e mail select the de sired account then press Default To disable fetching e mail from an ac count select the account then click Disable A disabled account can still be used as the address for sending but that account is not checked for incom ing e mail If necessary reactivate the account with Enable 17 4 2 Mail Preferences Use Mail Preferences to select or disable the quote highlight color or how long after opening a message is marked as read Also make settings regard ing how images in HTML mail messages are handled 17 4 3 Creating Messages To compose a new message click New gt Mail Message Replying to or forwarding a message opens the same message editor Next to From se lect from which account to send the message In the recipient fields enter an e mail address or part of a name or address in your address book If Evolution can match what you enter to something in the address book a selection list is displayed Click the desired contact or complete your input if none match To select directly from the address book click To or CC Evolution can send e mail as plain text or HTML To format HTML mail select Format in the toolbar To send attachments select Attach or Insert gt Attachment To send your message click Send If not ready to send it immediately make another selection under File
88. To restore the default set tings press Reset Pressing Cancel aborts creation of a new image 24 3 2 Opening an Existing Image To open an existing image select File gt Open or press Ctrl O In the dialog that opens the current directory is listed above the center column Available directories are listed in the left column Double click the directory to make it the current one moves up a level in the hierarchy The center column shows the files available in the current directory Click a file name to select it If available a preview of the selected file is shown in the right column Alternatively enter a file name in the field towards the bottom Pressing Tab while entering a name in the field attempts to SUSE LINUX User Guide dINIS OUL ui soyda Buyoindiuny 361 362 complete the name Available completions are then listed in the Folders and Files columns Select one or enter enough of the name to identify the file uniquely then press Tab again Click OK to open the selected image Press Cancel to skip opening an image 24 3 3 The Image Window The new or opened image appears in its own window The menu bar in the top of the window provides access to all image functions Alternatively access the menu by right clicking the image or clicking the small arrow but ton in the left corner of the rulers File offers the standard file options such as S
89. a connection has already been configured with YaST use View Log to identify the reason for the error The menu can be accessed by right clicking the KInternet icon S The connection is not yet active but will be established as soon as a request is made Right click KInternet to access a menu for configuring Klnternet To con figure your access select Settings gt Configure with YaST After en tering the root password YaST is started Depending on the access type 5 4 Important Utilities start the modem ISDN network or DSL configuration of YaST to select a provider from a list KInternet can do even more if the option Channel Bundling is activated in YaST a second ISDN channel can be added to an existing connection with Add link This doubles the transfer rate although at a higher price Activate channel bundling if you need to download large files The acti vated channel bundling is evident from the red plus symbol at the top left corner of the KInternet icon Users who want to establish Internet connections automatically can use dial on demand DoD If this mode is selected KInternet automatically connects to your Internet service provider ISP as soon as a request is submitted After a certain time out the connection is terminated A DoD connection is evident from the blue D at the bottom right corner of the KInternet icon DoD only makes sense if you have a flat rate Internet account
90. and other commercial programs Use it to resize and retouch photographs design graphics for web pages make cov ers for your custom CDs or almost any other graphics project It meets the needs of both amateurs and professionals 24 Graphics Formats oo 358 242 Starting The GIMP 358 243 Getting Started in GIMP 361 24 4 Saving Images oo o 362 24 5 Editing Images Basics 364 24 6 Editing Images Advanced Features 370 24 7 Printinglmages o o 371 248 Configuring GIMP o 371 249 For More Information 373 dNIS SUL ULM sojydog BupondyuoN 358 Like many other Linux programs Ihe GIMP is developed as a coopera tive effort of developers worldwide who volunteer their time and code to the project The program is under constant development so the version in cluded in your SUSE LINUX may vary slightly from the version discussed here The layout of the individual windows and window sections is espe cially likely to vary The new 2 0 version offers many new features and an updated user inter face As many of these features and aspects of the user interface are men tioned here both new and experienced GIMP users can benefit from this chapter The GIMP is an extremely complex program Only a small range of features tools and menu items are discussed in this chapter
91. and select fonts and numbering methods 7 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer Paragraph Styles Text body indent automatic Figure 7 5 The Stylist for Writer To assign a style to a paragraph select the style to use and click the paint bucket icon in the Stylist Click the paragraphs to which to assign the style Pressing or clicking the paintbucket icon again turns off the function Easily create your own styles by formatting a paragraph or a character as desired Use the Character and Paragraph items in the Format menu to achieve the desired results In the Stylist click New Style from Selection to the right of the bucket symbol Enter a name for your style and click OK Now you can use the newly created style on other parts of the document Change details of the style easily by selecting it in the list right clicking and selecting Modify from the menu This opens a dialog in which all the possible formatting properties are available for modification SUSE LINUX User Guide eyngs eoyo 610 eoyjouedo aul 193 7 65 Inserting a Table Create a table by clicking the Insert icon in the main toolbar and keeping it pressed for a few seconds This opens another toolbar in which to specify the object to insert If you now move the mouse cursor to the third icon see a grid open as shown in Figure 7 6 jVetault E A horndale g Figure 7 6 I
92. are not allowed Other special characters 7 bit ASCII and the digits 0 to 9 are allowed Two options are available for local users UOID OJSU LUOJSND Receive system messages via e mail Checking this box sends the user messages created by the system ser vices These are usually only sent to root the system administrator This option is useful for the prominently used user account because it is highly recommended to log in as root only in special cases Automatic login This option is only available if KDE is used as the de fault desktop It automatically logs the current user into the system when it starts This is mainly useful if the computer is operated by only one user Note No authentication is performed during system start up with au tomatic login Do not check this option for systems containing sensitive data or to which other people have access Note 2 6 8 Reading the Release Notes After completing the user authentication setup YaST displays the release notes They contain important up to date information not available when the manuals were printed If you have installed update packages the most recent version of the release notes is available SUSE LINUX User Guide 4 42 2 7 Hardware Configuration Configure the graphics card and if desired other hardware devices such as the printer and the sound card Just click a component to start its con figuration For the most part Y
93. as well as their connec tion status with aconnect iloraconnect ol Terminate connections established with aconnect with the option d for example aconnect d 128 0 129 0 To terminate all connections enter aconnect x Get information about other options with man aconnect xnur ui punog ES Note aseqnet can be used to establish MIDI connections over a network Note File About Sort by Note MIDI Channel Transpose Split Point 0 36 C ame e MIDI Channel Transpose Split Point 1 48 Uca eee Figure 19 15 Configuring Split Zones with QMidiRoute The program QMidiRoute enables flexible MIDI routing It sorts the MIDI events received on the writable port according to pitch velocity or channel and immediately forwards them to the readable ports Using the parame ters Channel and Transpose change the channel and pitch of the lower split zone 19 9 4 kmid The KDE MIDI Player If the kdemult imedia is installed find Midi Karaoke Player in the KDE start menu under Multimedia Some demo files for kmid are available in SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 319 320 x KMid bachdemo mid KMid o Datei St ck Sammlung Einstellungen Hilfe 0 00 0 15 Geschwindigkeit M BEE Kanalansicht KMid iC O rr fay diit HT 2 o Elektrischer Bass Plektron w Bass Elektrischer Bass Plektron v TEE EE a E A SAI IAE 3 O Vorspiel 2 S
94. autodetection a If YaST is able to detect the printer model automatically it can be assumed that the printer connection works on the hardware level and no settings need to be changed in this respect If YaST is unable to autodetect the printer model there may be some problem on the hardware level and some manual interven tion is required to configure the connection To learn about the steps involved in this refer to the Administration Guide Name of the Queue The queue name is used when issuing print com mands The name should be relatively short and consist of lowercase letters and numbers only Ghostscript Driver or Printer Language Printer Model The Ghostscript driver and the printer language depend on your printer model YaST lets you select a predefined configuration suit able for the model Selecting a manufacturer and a model basically means selecting a printer language and a Ghostscript driver suitable for this language with some default settings for the driver These settings may then be changed in an additional dialog as needed SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBYUOD ISOA 75 76 For non PostScript models all printer specific data is produced by the Ghostscript driver The driver configuration both choosing the right driver and the correct options for it is the single most impor tant factor determining the output quality The settings made at this point affect the printout on a queue by queue ba
95. back to your home directory at any point by entering only cd 9 To make a copy of a file use cp For instance enter cp Testfile Testbackup to copy Testfile to Testbackup Once again the command 1s can be used to see whether both files are in the direc tory 25 1 4 Specifying Paths When working with files or directories it is important specify the correct path However you do not need to enter the entire absolute path from the root directory to the respective file Rather you can start from the current directory Address your home directory directly with Accordingly there are two ways to list the file Test file in the directory test by entering the relative path with 1s test or by specifying the absolute path with Is ytest To list the contents of home directories of other users enter 1s username In the above mentioned directory tree one of the sample users is tux In this case 1s tux would list the contents of the home directory of tux Refer to the current directory with a dot The next higher level in the tree is represented by two dots By entering 1s see the contents of the par ent directory of the current directory The command 1s shows the contents of the directory two levels higher in the hierarchy Second Example Working with Paths Here is another example to illustrate how to move around in the directories of your SUSE LINUX system 25 1 Introduction to Bash Change into your home dir
96. block access for others Java and JavaScript are often disabled for security reasons Unfortunately some web pages require JavaScript for correct display 12 5 Java and Javascript The Web Browser Galeon Recently the widely used web browser has been transformed into a real jack of all trades The fact that today s Internet applications feature such depth in integration and are heavily integrated into their correspond ing desktop environments is almost taken for granted Users of outdated machines soon feel the effects of this development All around browsers are often memory eaters sluggish in their operation and occupy thirty megabytes on the hard disk That is why the idea behind Galeon is to devote itself just to one assign ment the web and only the web Galeon implements the speedy Gecko engine of the Mozilla browser and integrates this into a functional user interface The application loads quickly and is one of the fastest browsers available 13 1 Optimized for the Web 238 13 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs 239 13 3 Smart Bookmarks 239 13 4 Settings and Controls 239 13 5 For More Information 239 UO9S D2 JOSMOIG JSM SUL 238 File Edit View Tab Settings Bookmarks Go Tools Help lt Back gt d d Home stophoo suse com index ushtml a THE LINUX EXPERTS Site Map Links Shop Search E SuSE Linux Ope
97. burn the CD click Write SUSE LINUX User Guide uoupolddy Buluing 30 SUL ae 343 21 6 For More Information Apart from the two main functions described above K3b offers other functions such as the creation of DVD copies reading audio data in WAV format rewriting CDs or the integrated audio player A detailed de scription of all available program features is available athttp k3b 344 21 6 For More Information Digital Cameras and Linux gPhoto 2 0 is a command line program for communicating between the computer and a digital camera It is compatible with several graphical in terfaces front ends including gtKam Konqueror Kamera and Gno Cam This chapter covers the use of giKam Konqueror and Digikam aa poa 346 Du 346 ox PP 346 uote 347 Ep ee 348 22 6 For More Information 349 xnur pub spJeuJp2 Jop A comprehensive list of supported cameras is available at http www gphoto org cameras html If gphoto2 is installed retrieve the list with the command gphoto2 list cameras gphoto2 help pro vides information about the available commands in the command line in terface 22 Connecting to the Camera The fastest and most convenient way to connect digital cameras to the com puter is USB provided the kernel the camera and the computer support USB The standard SUSE kernel provides this support A suitable cable is also required Note Using
98. calendar applications of the handheld The desktop equivalent for these applications is KOrganizer For more information refer to Section 10 on page 217 Time Synchronization Conduit Enabling this conduit adjusts the hand held s clock to that of the desktop computerduring each sync oper ation This is only a good idea if the clock of the desktop computer itself is corrected by a time server at fairly frequent intervals Available Conduits Available conduits are On Active Conduits KDE Addressbook Conduit Ue DIGI IT GRE DE ko Calendar Conduit are on the right Only ganzer ES near Sonal active conduits can be KOrganizer Todo Conduit configured KPilot Expenses Conduit KPilot KNotes Conduit Time Synchronization Conduit Figure 9 1 Configuration Dialog with the Available Conduits 9 1 1 Configuring the Handheld Connection Apart from setting up the physical link there is also some manual config uration necessary on the software side The configuration depends on the type of cradle docking unit used with the handheld There are basically two types of these USB cradles and serial cradles The connection can be SUSE LINUX User Guide JOlldM ULM Je1nduuo2 pjeupunoH o BurziuoJu2Ag 211 212 configured either on a system wide basis by the administrator the root user or by a regular user for his personal environment Configuring the Connection from within KPilot To set up the connection with the hand
99. case all changes are applied and the program is terminated Package The items in the Package menu always refer to the package cur rently displayed in the individual package window Although all sta tus flags are displayed you can only select those possible for the cur rent package Use the check boxes to determine whether to install the sources of the package All in This List opens a submenu listing all package status flags However these do not merely affect the current package but all packages in this list Extras The Extras menu offers options for handling package dependen cies and conflicts If you have already manually selected packages for installation click Show Automatic Package Changes to view the list of packages that the package manager automatically selected to re solve dependencies If there are still unresolved package conflicts an alert is displayed and solutions suggested If you set package conflicts to Ignore this information will be saved permanently in the system Otherwise you would have to set the same packages to Ignore each time you start the package manager To unignore dependencies click Reset Ignored Dependency Conflicts SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBYUOD SDA 65 66 Help Help gt Overview provides a brief explanation of the package manager functionality A detailed description of the various package flags is available under Symbols If you
100. chosen under TV card input Note Select from the EPG providers found in Configure gt Select Provider Configure gt Merge Providers even creates flexible associations between the various provider databases 20 4 2 Sorting the Programs nxtvepg provides a convenient filter function for managing even the most extensive program offerings Activate a network selection list with Config ure gt Show networks The Filter menu offers plenty of filter functions Right click the program list to open a special filter menu in which to acti vate contextual filter functions Of particular interest is the Navigate menu This is built directly from the EPG data It will appear in the language provided by the network 20 5 Webcam Operation with gqcam gqcam is a webcam application that assists in taking snapshots or auto matic picture series with webcams To use gqcam your webcam must be supported by Video4Linux Many USB webcams like the Logitech Quick cam Express are automatically recognized Grayscale and color cameras can be used TV cards wthat support Video4Linux can also be used as an image source An overview of the supported USB devices is maintained at http www linux usb org A graphical user interface is not compul sory because gqcam can also run from the command line 20 5 1 Operation Connect your camera to the USB port of your computer before starting gq cam
101. consider another step With these Windows settings the resizing might have the effect that the swap file is split into many small parts scattered all over the FAT partition Also the entire swap file would need to be moved during the resizing which makes the process rather slow It is therefore useful to unset these Windows optimizations for the time being and reenable them after the resizing has been completed UOID OJSU LUOJSND Note zl NTFS file system In Windows run scandisk and defrag to move the files to the beginning of the hard disk In contrast to the FAT file sys tem this must be done in NTFS to enable resizing E Note If you operate your system with a permanent swap file on an NTFS file system this file may be located at the end of the hard disk and remain there despite defrag Therefore it may be impos sible to shrink the partition sufficiently In this case temporarily deactivate the swap file the virtual memory in Windows After the partition has been resized reconfigure the virtual memory Note After these preparations return to the Linux partitioning setup and se lect Shrink Windows Partition After a quick check of the partition YaST opens a dialog with a suggestion for resizing the Windows partition The first bar graph shows how much disk space is currently occupied by Windows and how much space is still available The second bar graph shows how the space would be distributed after th
102. dialog with all the configuration op tions available for KWrite This includes the color scheme and the fonts used settings for indentation text selection and word wrap shortcuts and highlighting options and some others The dialog also allows you to define a default view profile and to integrate an exter nal spell check module Configure Shortcuts This opens a dialog in which to change the exist ing keyboard shortcuts or define custom shortcuts Configure Toolbars toolbar buttons This opens a dialog in which to add and remove 8 7 The Help Menu This menu gives access to the KWrite handbook Click What s This or use the shortcut Shift ED to invoke all available context sensitive tooltips 8 8 Kate The editor Kate provides further possibilities It is based on the same edi tor component as KWrite but supports concurrent editing of multiple files A useful feature is syntax highlighting Both KWrite and Kateoffer this fea ture It formats program code to make it more readable This can be acti vated in Extras gt syntax highlighting 8 7 The Help Menu Sychronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot Handheld computers are in widespread use nowadays among users who need to have their schedules to do lists and notes with them everywhere they go Often users want the same data to be available both on the desktop and on the portable device This is where KPilot comes in
103. disk controllers and enables the assignment of the suitable kernel module with specific parameters Use Test Loading of Module to check if the current settings work before they are saved permanently in the system Caution This is an expert tool Do not modify the settings unless you know what you are doing Your system may no longer boot if you make incorrect settings In any case you should make use of the test option Caution El 4 4 4 Graphics Card and Monitor SaX2 The graphical user interface or X server handles the communication be tween hardware and software Desktops like KDE and GNOME and the SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 79 80 wide variety of window managers use the X server for interaction with the user The graphical user interface is initially configured during installation To change the settings afterwards run this YaST module In the configuration dialog choose between Text Mode Only and the graphical user interface The current settings are saved and you can reset to them at any time The current values are displayed and offered for modification the screen res olution the color depth the refresh rate and the vendor and type of your monitor if it was autodetected If you have just installed a new graphics card a small dialog appears asking whether to activate 3D acceleration for your graphics card Click Edit SaX2 the configuration tool for the input a
104. domain to recipient recipient s domain E mail not only lets you send text but also sound files or pictures It has many advantages it is inexpensive and mail usually reaches its destination within minutes EIDE Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics Improved DE standard that allows hard disks with a size over 512 MB SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 427 428 environment A uajshelllusually provides an environment in which the user can per form temporary settings These settings include path specifications for programs the user name the current path and the appearance of prompts The data is saved in an sjenvironment variable The assignment of the environment variables is possible for example by means of the configuration files of the shell environment variable A position in the esfenvironment of the shell Every environment vari able has a name that is usually capitalized The variables are assigned values such as path names ethernet Popular standard for less expansive computer networks EXT2 Second Extended File System EXT2 is the default file system used by Linux FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Widely used acronym for documents providing answers to frequently asked questions file system A file system is a system for structuring files There are many file systems available which differ sometimes quite extremely in performance and power firewall Protects a local network or host from unaut
105. dow When several application windows populate the desktop the active one by default is the one last clicked Change this behavior by activating Select windows when the mouse moves over them If desired activate Raise se lected window after an interval and adjust the latency time with the slider This activates a window only when the cursor was placed within the win dow for a time exceeding the set latency Application windows can be shaded by double clicking the title bar leav ing only the title bar visible This saves space on the desktop and is the de fault behavior It is alternatively possible to set windows to maximize when the title bar is double clicked With the radio buttons select the modifier key to press for moving a win dow The possible choices are Ctr AID and the key 6 2 6 Background Determine a background for your desktop By default the changes made here are applied to all virtual desktop If you do not want any background picture click No Picture and define a background style The drop down menu offers a horizontal gradient a vertical gradient or no gradient at all Use Color to define the desired colors in the color editor To use an image file as a background picture drag it from the file manager and drop it in Select picture Alternatively click Select picture to open a dialog in which to select the desired image 6 2 Settings Picture Options determines
106. e Base Installation 2 Test Internet Connection v Language w Installation Settings w Perform Installation To validate your Internet access Configuration activate the test procedure Y Root Password gt Network e Online Update e Users The following steps will be performed e Clean Up Connect to the Internet e Release Notes Download latest release notes Device Configuration Check for latest updates Close connection Select Yes Test Connection to the Internet N lo Skip This Test 3 J 2 5 a lo gt iz A 43 BO a f Figure 2 15 Testing the Internet Connection Note The download of updates might take quite some time depending on the bandwidth of the Internet connection and on the size of the update files Note l To perform a software update immediately select Perform Update Now and click OK This opens YaST s online update dialog with a list of the available patches if any which can be selected and loaded To learn about the process read Section 4 3 2 on page 56 This kind of update can be per formed at any time after the installation If you prefer not to update now select Skip Update then click OK 2 6 5 User Authentication If the network access been configured successfully during the previous steps of the installation you now have two different possibilities for man aging user accounts on your system SUSE LINUX
107. e s 180 espais 180 183 185 pte away o s Sade RUNE x AME Bee AA 186 Gave EU E we ea 187 73 Getting Help s s mx onem koh a 187 rre opel 188 Li ei Sd 188 e 190 7 6 1 Creating Texts with the AutoPilot 190 Contents 8 9 7 6 2 Creating Texts without the AutoPilot 763 Selecting lext o ooo oo 7 64 Working with theStylist 765 Inserting a Table o 7 6 6 Inserting Graphics o oo ie A c ERRE ARANA ae 7 74 Importing Spreadsheet Tables TO PETE 2M 7 9 1 Creating Presentations with the AutoPilot 79 2 AddingaSlide The KWrite Text Editor D DIE eer ese aay Y E C UTE AE Sam edu ide sie VOR ec und a ar e Weg Ae EE 86 TheSetinggMenu lle 87 The Help MenU le Sychronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot 9 1 1 Configuring the Handheld Connection 9 1 2 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit 9 1 3 Managing To Do Items and Events 9 2 Working with KPilot o o ooo ee ee 9 2 1 Backing up Data from the Handheld 9 2 2 Installing Programs on the Handheld SUSE LINUX User Guide 10 Scheduling with KOrganizer 10 1 Starting KOrganizer 10 2 Configuring KOrganizer llle 10 3 Using the Calendar 10 3 1 Eve
108. edit the command line add options or correct typing errors One of the most frequently used com mands is 1s which can be used with or without arguments Entering the plain 1s command in the console shows the contents of the current direc tory Options are prefixed with a hyphen The command 1s 1 for instance shows the contents of the same directory in full detail Next to each file name see the date when the file was created the file size in bytes and fur ther details which are covered later One very important option that exists for many commands is the help option By entering 1s help dis play all the options for the 1s command Also use the 1s command to view the contents of other directories To do so the directory must be specified as a parameter For example to see the contents of Desktop enter 1s 1 Desktop 25 1 Introduction to Bash 25 1 2 Files and Directories To use the shell efficiently it is really useful to have some knowledge about the file and directory structures of a Linux system You can think of direc tories as electronic folders in which files programs and subdirectories are stored The top level directory in the hierarchy is the root directory referred to as This is the place from which all other directories can be accessed The home directory contains the directories in which the individual users can store their personal files Figure 25 1 shows the standard directory tree in Linux with
109. guarantee that the recipient of a signed message receives the correct key It is possible for the mail to be intercepted on the way to the recipient and signed with another key Therefore the recipient should check the at tached key by comparing the finger print with a previously received value Further information about this can be found in the PGP and GnuPG docu mentation 16 11 4 Decoding Encrypted Messages In KMail select the message to decrypt Enter your password when prompted KMail attempts to decrypt the message If it was encrypted with your public key KMail displays it in clear text If not you cannot read the e mail message KMail saves these e mail messages encrypted to prevent anyone from reading them without your password 16 11 5 Encrypting Messages To send an encrypted message to a recipient for whom you have the pub lic key simply write the message in the Create Message window Before sending the message click the red key icon in the window s toolbar Now the message can be sent If KMail cannot find a key for the recipient a list with all available keys is shown Select the appropriate one from the list or abort the process KMail also informs you if errors occur during the en cryption process You cannot read encrypted messages if you did not click Always encrypt to self in the Security tab 16 12 For More Information More information is available on the KMail home page atihttp kmail
110. has remained unchanged on your hard disk To unpack the archive enter tar xvf testarchive tar but do not try this yet For file compression the obvious choice on Linux is the popular gzip pro gram Just enter gzip testarchive tar With 1s now see that the file testarchive tar is no longer there and that the file testarchive tar gz has been created instead This file is much smaller and therefore much better suited for transfer via e mail or storage on a floppy SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 385 386 Now unpack this file in the test 2 directory created earlier To do so enter cp testarchive tar gz test2 to copy the file to that direc tory Change to the directory with cd test2 A compressed archive with the tar gz extension can be unzipped with the gunzip com mand Enter gunzip testarchive tar gz which results in the file testarchive tar which then needs to be extracted or untarred with tar xvf testarchive tar You can also unzip and extract a com pressed archive in one step by adding the z option The complete com mand would be tar xzvf testarchive tar gz With 1s you can see that a new test directory has been created with the same contents as your test directory in your home directory 25 1 9 mtools mtools are a set of commands for working with MS DOS file systems The commands included in mt 001s allow you to address the first floppy drive as a just like under MS DOS and the commands are like MS DOS com mand
111. host name IP address The ping command is the standard tool for testing the basic func tionality of TCP IP networks It sends a small data packet to the destination host requesting an immediate reply If this works ping displays a message to that effect which indicates that the network link is basically functioning SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ut BUOM 399 400 c number Determines the total number of packages to send and ends after they have been dispatched By default there is no lim itation set f flood ping sends as many data packages as possible A popular means reserved for root to test networks i value Specifies the interval between two data packages in sec onds Default one second nslookup The domain name system resolves domain names to IP ad dresses With this tool send queries to information servers DNS servers telnet option s host name or IP address Telnet is actually an Internet protocol that enables you to work on remote hosts across a network telnet is also the name of a Linux program that uses this protocol to enable operations on remote computers Caution Do not use telnet over a network on which third parties can eaves drop Particularly on the Internet use encrypted transfer methods such as ssh to avoid the risk of malicious misuse of a password see the man page for ssh Caution zi Miscellaneous passwd option s username Users may change their o
112. if the mouse does not work control it with the number pad of the keyboard as described in Section 4 4 4 on the following page If the automatic detection fails use this dialog to configure your mouse manually Refer to the documentation of your mouse for a descrip tion of the model Select your model from the list of supported mouse types and confirm by pressing on the number pad Keyboard Use the selection field at the top of this dialog to specify the kind of keyboard to use Then select the language for the keyboard layout the country specific position of the keys Use the test field to check if special characters are displayed correctly The status of the check box used for activating and deactivating the entry of accented letters depends on the respective language and does not need to be changed Click Finish to apply the new settings to your system Touchscreen Currently XFree86 only supports Microtouch and Elo TouchSystems touchscreens SaX2 can only autodetect the monitor not the toucher The toucher is treated as an input device To con figure the toucher start SaX2 and select Input devices gt Touch screens Click Add and add a touchscreen Save the configuration by clicking Finish You do not need to test the configuration Touch screens feature a variety of options and usually must be calibrated first Unfortunately there is no general tool for this purpose in Linux The standard configuration
113. in different file formats Bitmap TrueType etc These are commonly known as System Fonts Users can additionally install their own fonts from various collections on CD ROM Such user installed fonts are however only visible and available to the corresponding user The KDE control center provides a comfortable tool for administering sys tem and user fonts It is shown in Figure 5 13 ff Font Installer sonnel x Location fonts Personal Name v Font Novell Sans Bold TF NOVEL_EB ttt W Novell Sans ExtraBold IFNOVELSBO W Novell Sans BoldOSF The quick brown fox jump T NOVELSBS ttt W Novell Sans BoldSC s over the lazy dog TT NOVELS_B t W Novel v NOVELSB_ttf Novel TT NOVELSDO tf W Novell Sans DemiOSF pu th a isum TF NOVELSDS tt W Novell Sans DemiSC x 8 o 01 23456789 lt gt T NOVELSD_ttt W Novell Sans Demi ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU T NOVELSEB t W Novell Sans ExtraBoldSC VWXYZIN abcdefghijkImnopq ENNOVELSIOttf W Novell Sans ItalicOSF RAC E ALIS55333 Tr NOVELSIS tt W Novell Sans ItalicSC rstuvwxyz l AACENOUaaaa c PENOVeLSL Af v eiae eeaiiiin oo o t c 5 q8 6 I NOVELSMO t W Novell Sans MediumOS ES Tr NOVELSMS tt W Novell Sans MediumSC _ bi EOcots2Yp0ZTIn fr mov TI NOVELSM M Novell Sans Medium R Foam AAO Eo 7 oyY ofifi 36 Items 36 Fonts 1 4 MB Total 0 Folders Administrator Mode Figure 5 13 Font Administration from th
114. in Linux Linux offers a wide range of sound applications in various stages of devel opment This chapter provides an overview of a wide range of applications for various multimedia tasks together with some technical background in formation Applications that are not part of the standard installation can be installed with YaST i Ep Ns ddp ra dd 300 19 2 Mixers imos x xU Rex a ROO ROT RUE Rs 300 sa PR DL X RR CAPES eu ER EE d 305 igo pes Podok ge bu E 308 19 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit 310 19 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity 311 Cirsa ap dex EES 314 19 9 ALSA and MIDI xnur ui PUNOS 19 1 The ALSA PCM Types As of version 0 9 of the Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA the concept for PCM devices was fundamentally modified and expanded PCM is an acronym for Pulse Code Modulation and designates the digital out put interfaces when relating to sound cards The user can influence the way ALSA addresses the sound card by selecting a specific PCM type The main PCM types are hw and plughw To understand the difference between the two types consider how a PCM device is opened It must be opened with specific settings for at least the following parameters sample format sample frequency number of chan nels number of periods previously referred to as fragments and size of a period For example an application may attempt to play a WAV file with a sample frequency of 44 1 kHz alth
115. in the dialogs for the creation of new events and to dos after selecting Categories Create additional categories with Edit Categories SUSE LINUX User Guide Jeziuo81Oy ui Guinpeuos 221 222 General Attendees Recurrence Attachments Select Addressee Status Needs Action zj C Request response L Load Template Save as Template j v ok gt Apply X Cancel Figure 10 4 Entering Attendee Details 10 4 Printing Selecting File gt Print opens a dialog in which to define the calendar period to print and the type of view to use To specify the period enter the dates by hand or use the calendar available from the drop downs To use the print preview function you must have KGhostView installed Alterna tively specify a different PostScript viewer such as QV after selecting File gt Print gt Print gt System Options then going to the Preview item in the dialog 10 5 Address Book To store important contacts or to search for a contact open the address book by selecting File gt Addressbook In the address book window make a new entry by selecting File gt New Contact The KDE address book application although linked with KOrganizer is an independent pro gram Learn more about it in Chapter TIJon page 225 10 4 Printing 10 6 Help For any problems or
116. information O about existing Groups To shift to the user dialog J select Users Q To create a new group push C the button Add To edit or delete an existing Q group select one group from the list and push the button Edit or Delete O Add Edit Delete Users and groups are arranged LEA E SS in various sets Change the set setriter Expert Options v currently shown in the table with Set Filter Customize 2 t Abort Back Einish your view filter with H Figure 4 24 Group Administration server is publicly accessible and you are afraid someone could carry out this action without authorization If you select Stop this key combination causes the system to shut down With Ignore this key combination is ignored Specify the Shutdown Behavior of KDM by granting permission to shut down the system from the KDE Display Manager the graphical login of KDE Only root the system administrator All users No body or Local users If Nobody is selected the system can only be shut down via the text console Login Settings Typically following a failed login attempt there is a waiting period lasting a few seconds before another login is possible The purpose of this is to make it more difficult for password sniffers to log in In addition you have the option of activating Record failed login attempts and Record successful login attempts If you
117. is available in the online help described in Section 7 3 7 3 Getting Help Get help for OpenOffice org at any time from the Help menu Depend ing on your selection the depth and type of help provided varies To get thoroughly acquainted with a topic select Help gt Contents The help system provides information about each of the modules of OpenOf fice org Writer Calc Impress etc If you find this information too broad or overwhelming try the Help Agent instead which offers help and tips as you perform different ac tions with OpenOffice org Select Help gt Help Agent to enable this If less information should be sufficient try Tips and Extended Tips They enable the program s tooltips short information about the element to which the mouse is pointing These items can easily be disabled later when you are more familiar with the program SUSE LINUX User Guide eyngs eoyo 610 eoyjouedo aul 187 188 Note If you are not sure whether the features are active open the Help menu A checked menu item indicates that the corresponding help function is currently active Note 7 4 Converting Microsoft Office Documents OpenOffice org is able to work with Microsoft Office documents To convert such documents select File gt AutoPilot gt Document Con verter Choose the file format from which to convert There are sev eral StarOffi
118. is printed it is sent to a printer queue for temporary storage From there 4 4 Hardware it is retrieved by a print spooler which sends it to the printer device in the required order However for the most part this data is not available in a form that can be processed by the printer A graphical image for instance first needs to be converted into a format the printer can understand This conversion into a printer language is achieved with a printer filter a program called by the print spooler to translate data as needed so the printer can handle it Some Standard Printer Languages ASCII text Every normal printer should at least be able to print ASCII text di rectly However there are devices that cannot print ASCII text di rectly but are able to handle one of the other standard printer lan guages mentioned below UOILOINBYUOD SDA PostScript PostScript is the established printer language on Unix and Linux sys tems Many programs produce PostScript output that can then be di rectly printed by a PostScript printer PCL3 PCL4 PCL5e PCL6 ESC P ESC P2 and ESC P raster If a PostScript printer is not available the print filter can use the pro gram Ghostscript to convert PostScript data into one of these other standard printer languages Ghostscript uses different drivers for dif ferent printers to make use of specific features such as color settings offered by the various models as much as possible Pro
119. machine does not require any additional description All incoming messages can be received and opened in the e mail client For backup purposes the incoming mes sages are also stored in var spool capisuite users lt username gt received SUSE LINUX User Guide uoiooiunuJulooeje NASI 295 296 The recording of the personal welcome message is performed directly over the remote access feature of the answering machine To access your answer ing machine remotely call your associated number from any telephone Enter the previously defined PIN during the welcome message playback Wait a few seconds if you mistype your PIN then try again after the beep Shortly after having correctly entered the PIN the answering machine gives the number of stored messages You then have the choice of record ing a new welcome message or listening to your stored messages Follow the instructions given The following table provides a brief overview of the menu items for re motely accessing messages It is recommended to carry a copy of it if you use the remote access frequently The commands can be entered at any time during the playback of the messages This means that an excessively long voice message can be skipped easily Table 18 1 Commands for Message Playback Key Function 1 delete current message 4 skip to the next message 5 skip to the previous message 6 replay current message 18 2 Usage Part V Multimedia Sound
120. made available to recipients of a signed message so they can verify its authenticity It also needs to be accessible to enable others to send encrypted messages to the owner of the key Public keys can be stored on a public PGP key server such as http www pgp net 16 11 1 Signing Messages Create your messages as usual Before sending the message click the cor responding icon second to last in the toolbar of the window or choose Options gt sign message The message can then be sent To sign it KMail must know your PGP password However if you have already provided the password KMail signs the message without requesting any further in formation The results of the PGP signing process can be reviewed in the SentMessages folder or in the outbox if you did not use Send now There your e mail should be marked with the notice that it was signed by you 16 11 2 Checking the Signature of a Received Message If KMail is able to verify the signature of an e mail a green frame with the key ID is displayed If the signature cannot be verified a yellow frame with an alert is displayed This means that you do not have a suitable public key for the signature 16 11 3 Sending Public Keys Create a message for the person who should receive your public key Choose Attach gt Attach Public Key The mail can then be sent There SUSE LINUX User Guide UOHOSIAdy PIN 305 SUL IIDIADI 269 is no
121. mail message 17 4 5 Folders It is often convenient to sort e mail messages into a variety of folders To view your folder tree select View gt Folder Bar If accessing mail over IMAP the IMAP folders are also shown in this folder bar For POP and most other formats your folders are stored locally sorted under Local Folders Your Contacts Calendar and Tasks are also treated as fold ers in this view but should not be used for storing e mail Several folders are included by default Inbox is where new messages fetched from a server are initially placed Sent is used for saving copies of sent e mail messages Outbox is temporary storage for e mail that has not yet been sent It is useful if working offline or if the outgoing mail server is temporarily unreachable Drafts is used for saving unfinished e mail mes sages The Trash folder is intended for temporary storage of deleted items The folder can be emptied automatically by activating the respective option under Tools gt Settings gt Mail Preferences New folders can be created under Local Folders or as subfolders of ex isting folders Create as complex a folder hierarchy as desired To create 17 4 E Mail a new folder while in the Inbox view select File gt Folder gt New Folder In the following dialog enter a name for the new folder Leave the Folder Typ
122. may cause some web pages not to function in the intended way With Manage Stored Cookies inspect the properties of any cookies that have been accepted Use the Images dialog to define similar settings for the handling of graphics This is especially useful if you do not want to clog an already slow connection modems with the download of large images The dialog also allows you to suppress the animation of any images To achieve this just select Never under the Animated images should loop header In the Passwords dialog decide whether Mozilla should store any passwords entered Consider both convenience and secu rity However if you use the browser for online banking you should definitely not have the corresponding password stored by Mozilla JOSMOIG GSM OIIZO JA SUL Advanced Often web pages are not only written in plain HTML Many sites also use JavaScript or Java to produce some special effects As a general rule it is recommended to turn off Java Under Scripts amp Plu gins you should also turn off JavaScript at least for Mail amp News groups Other dialogs available under this entry are related to the browser s Cache and to the Proxies used by it The settings in the Cache dialog depend on the specific circumstances with which the browser needs to cope but the default 4096 kB size of the Memory Cache is often too small A cache is a temporary storage area used for
123. motv Find a summary of the supported USB devices athttp www linux usb If you have already used motv to access the TV card prior to access ing the webcam the bttv driver is loaded The webcam driver is loaded automatically when your webcam is connected to the USB Start motv at the command line with the parameter c dev videol to access the we bcam Access the TV card with motv c dev videoO When connecting the webcam to the USB before the bttv driver has been automatically loaded for example by starting a TV application dev videoO is reserved for the webcam In this case if you start motv with the c dev videol parameter to access the TV card you might get an error message because the bttv driver was not automatically loaded Solve this problem by loading the driver separately with modprobe bttv as the user root Access an overview of the configurable video devices on your system with motv hwscan 20 2 Video Text with alevt 20 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC From some broadcasters an EPG signal Electronic Program Guide is transmitted along with the video text signal Easily view this electronic guide using the program nxtvepg To do this however you must have a TV card supported by the bttv driver and be able to receive one of the channels broadcast with an EPG With nxtvepg the broadcasts are sorted according to channel and topic such as movie and sport and filtered according to cri
124. neral 171 file manager 179 File Roller FIGONS rua aset eke ee aid edad main menu 6 6 eee eee ee Nautilus ooo oommmmm panels 0 08 utilities oooo omm oo GNU sua Bphot 2 ie eere enean installing 22 ere eren graphical user interface graphics SOHNE mier file formats 0000 362 pliss TESIS ina 365 VECIOR iran 119911358 graphicss Konqueror 0 0 00 eee 153 EN groups administering BEKATIL tna camera selection installing ns2oreaneeiy ras QUIZO uus rinda BZip sse rra Rte iss H alba 400 hard disks SAGGING aie isses keen temere 423 defragmenting 423 A ers hnt en het e 89 hardware CD ROM reciia iis peser yeah hard disk controller Index information sssssssss SUP POLK ermita MAN Pages cee orris itas OpenOffice org SUSE Help Center host names esses l etd derriers era arias 110 installing csi eee menie SYAST series nox estere enna 143 Internet configuring connections T DSL IP addresses J Java uoti ET 236 JaVaSctipt iii 236 joysticks configuring oooooccccooocncoo gt audio CDs ooooccccoccccccoocooo configuring 008 copying CDs data CDS caian wanes KAddressBook 06 005 creating address lists
125. not cause any serious damage if they are not activated by root The only virus scanners available in Linux search e mails for Windows viruses if Linux is used as a router or server Nevertheless you should back up important data and configurations Do I need to compile a kernel myself No this is usually unnecessary The kernel has become so large that there are about eight hundred options to consider during the config uration Because it is almost impossible to master all possible config urations and their effects it is strongly discouraged for inexperienced users to recompile the kernel Do so only at your own risk In cases of custom compiled kernels SUSE cannot provide any installation sup port Where can I see the system messages In a terminal window enter tail f var log messages as root Additional interesting programs relating to this one are top procinfo and xosview Use the command 1ess var log boot msg to view the boot messages SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 421 422 18 19 20 21 22 I cannot log in to my computer with telnet I always get the an swer Login incorrect You are probably trying to log in as root For security reasons this is not possible via telnet by default With YaST set up a normal user account Log in with this user name Then change to the user root with su It is much better and safer however to use the program ssh instead of telnet The ssh program uses encr
126. of the ISDN adapter is returned the driver is installed correctly and CapiSuite can be installed and used 18 1 Configuration The CapiSuite package must be installed with YaST to be able to configure Capisuite More information about installing software is provided in the relevant section of the YaST chapter Caution CAPlSuite might not be included in the Personal Edition This package is in any case available for download on the SUSE Internet servers If needed installation instructions are published on the web site of the CAPlSuite project at http www capisuite de Caution Following the installation YaST contains two modules for configuring the fax and answering machine functionality These modules are described be low 18 1 1 Configuring Fax Services The YaST module Fax from the Network Devices group contains a form with a user list and buttons for the processing of list entries The list con tains all the users already configured for the fax system The Capisuite scripts used here are multiuser and allow each user to send and receive faxes individually The target number of an incoming call determines which user receives the fax The list of this module is empty when it is started for the first time If various users want to receive faxes with CapiSuite it must be ensured that the associated phone numbers are all different and that all these num bers are also associated with the line to which the ISDN a
127. often be quite small if only a few colors are used PNG With its support for transparency lossless compression free avail ability and increasing browser support PNG is replacing GIF as the preferred format for web graphics with transparency An added ad vantage is that PNG offers partial transparency which is not offered by GIF This enables smoother transitions from colored areas to trans parent areas antialiasing To save the image in the chosen format press OK To abort press Cancel If the image has features that cannot be saved in the chosen format a dia log appears with choices for resolving the situation Choosing Export if offered normally gives the desired results A window then opens with the options of the format Reasonable default values are provided SUSE LINUX User Guide dINIS eui ui soyda Buyoindiuny 363 364 24 5 Editing Images Basics 24 5 Changing the Image Size Once an image is scanned or a digital photograph is loaded from the cam era it is often necessary to modify the size for display on a web page or for printing Images can easily be made smaller either by scaling them down or by cutting off parts of them Making an image larger is much more prob lematic Because of the nature of pixel graphics quality is lost when an image is made larger It is recommended to keep a copy of your original image before scaling or cropping Cropping an Image Cropping an ima
128. on your system Windows Scheme With Win Key Mac Scheme KDE Default for 3 Modifier Keys KDE Default for 4 Modifier Keys Windows Scheme Without Win Key a Unix Scheme To change the scheme used on your system select one of the listed schemes and adopt it globally Global Shortcuts Shortcut Sequences and Appli cation Shortcuts or assign shortcuts to individual actions and save them as a custom scheme To create a new shortcut for an action or modify an existing shortcut select the tab for the respective area e g Global Shortcuts and click the action to assign e g Show Taskmanager The section Shortcut for Selected Ac tion is then activated in the lower part of the dialog Three radio buttons offer the basic configuration options none default and custom Existing schemes are write protected allowing restoration of the default values at any time Save your own modifications by clicking Save at the top right and entering a name for your custom scheme The new scheme is then listed in the selection menu 5 2 Settings Note Under Application Shortcuts you can only configure standard ac tions available in all applications Program specific shortcuts must be configured in the program itself via Settings gt Configure Shortcuts Note E Accessibility The settings in this module facilitate the access to the system for users with hearing problems or motor
129. preview in the lower part of the window Use Effects to configure various GUI effects and transparency types if supported by the respective style 5 2 5 Regional amp Accessibility Country Region Language The settings in this module only apply to KDE applications Other applica tions such as OpenOffice org may need to be configured separately All regional system settings can be configured under five tabs Locale Use the drop down menu to select the desired country from the list Settings such as the language numbers currency time and date are automatically set to suitable values A preview of all current re gional settings is displayed in the lower part of the dialog For exam ple to use the regional settings for the US but use Spanish as the sys tem language click Add Language to select this language and add it to the list of available system languages To remove a language mark it in the list and click Remove Language Numbers To use different number settings than the default settings asso ciated with the country selected under Locale configure the decimal symbol thousands separator positive sign and negative sign in this dialog The decimal symbol and the thousands separator for curren cies are configured separately under the Money tab The default set ting on a US system is for the decimal symbol an optional for the thousands separator no entry for the positive sign and
130. program is very speedy as it uses a database specifically created for the purpose rather than searching through the entire file system This very fact however also results in a major drawback locate is unable to find any files created after the latest update of its database The database can be generated by root with updatedb updatedb options s This command performs an update of the database used by locate To include files in all existing directories run the program as root It also makes sense to place it in the back ground by appending an ampersand amp so you can immediately continue working on the same command line updatedb amp find option s With find search for a file in a given directory The first argument specifies the directory in which to start the search The option name must be followed by a search string which may also include wild cards Unlike locate which uses a database find scans the actual directory 25 3 Important Linux Commands Commands to Access File Contents cat option s file s The cat command displays the contents of a file printing the entire contents to the screen without interruption n Numbers the output on the left margin less option s file s This command can be used to browse the contents of the specified file Scroll half a screen page up or down with and or a full screen page down with Space Jump to the beginning or end of a file using and Eng Press Q
131. programs provided these support the ALSA sequencer structure have one or several MIDI ports for communi cating with each other These ports can be connected with the KDE pro gram kaconnect or the command aconnect On start up kaconnect shows the readable and writable MIDI ports available on your system and the connection status To test the procedure start two MIDI programs with the commands vkeybd and aseqview For the connection between MIDI ports specify the port address of the program after the program name For example assign port number 128 0 to the first program and 129 0 to the second The ports of the programs are also displayed by kaconnect As Vkeybd was executed without the addr parameter the connection between the program port and the WaveTable port or the external MIDI port can now be established manually To do this select the respective ports and click connect To use the command line tool aconnect enter 19 9 ALSA and MIDI aconnect 128 0 73 0 or the respective ports to establish a unidirec tional connection between the sender port 128 0 and the receiver port 1320 You can now establish a connection between the MIDI port of the keyboard and the MIDI port of the ALSA sequencer viewer If you modify keyboard settings such as the panning or the pitch wheel which must first be acti vated under View these changes are promptly reflected in aseqview List the ports available for sending and receiving
132. ptos system security ss cc ue system start up sssese safe settings o u uirinn CEDS E cesses aros text mode clients ius secare cernat 108 M PC CN CE Ee t mezone 6 eee eee eee eee a TY cards iei eren rere updating sees user administration 111 security sendmail sessssss 109 YOU occ cee
133. rollers little stability ergonomically retractable keyboard tray no wrist pad integrated PC case holder and printer stand with paper shelf little stacking space and sometimes little legroom swiveling mouse pad unstable and insufficient working space and good view of the screen too close too high allow you to use a computer for a short time only They should not be used at professional terminal workstations as they hardly meet any criteria of the corresponding standards You will not find much of this kind of computer furniture in professional computer equipment cat alogs because manufacturers indirectly keep an eye on the employees health by observing the minimum standards of computer workstations Even these minimum standards should be improved 26 1 1 The Right Desk A table at the wrong height strains arm and back muscles The resulting cramped posture especially strains the spine Too little leg room can force an unnatural body posture and cause disorders to the blood supply Choosing the right table is very easy It should be as wide and deep as possible An individual adjustment of the table height would be optimal Working tables at which you can change between sitting and standing by turning the table into a writing stand often just at the push of a button are a luxury but changing between a sitting and standing position brings relief The flexible arrangement of working materials requires a table top o
134. selected with a click is moved if you move it by the dis tance in pixels specified in Drag start distance within the period specified in Drag start time 142 52 Settings Mouse Wheel Scrolls By If you have a wheel mouse specify the number of lines the image should scroll per wheel tooth To be able to navigate the mouse pointer with the arrow keys of the num ber pad activate this function under Mouse Navigation and customize the parameters according to your needs Printers The printer administration module mainly consists of three parts The top frame lists all printers available in the network The center part features a configuration and information zone comprising four tabs The lower part indicates the current print system type The following description only cov ers the configuration part doptseq JG eut Note The configuration options relevant for your daily work with the system can be accessed under Jobs and Instances Information and Proper ties mainly provide information or are used for system administration Note Depending on which printer is currently selected in the overview view and modify status and model information and configuration options in the following four tabs at the center of the dialog window Information This tab provides general and unmodifiable information about the printer such as the printer type its status location and designation Jobs
135. selection such as Multimedia or Development selected for update and will automatically be updated Delete Automatically after selection This package is already installed but a predefined selection such as Multimedia or Development requires this package be deleted This does not happen very often Additionally decide to install or not to install the sources for a package This information complements the current package status and cannot be toggled with the mouse or selected directly from the context menu Instead a check box at the end of the package line enables selection of the source packages This option can also be accessed under Package Install Source Also install the source code Do Not Install Source The sources will not be installed The font color used for various packages in the individual package win dow provides additional information Installed packages for which a newer version is available on the installation media are displayed in blue In stalled packages whose versions numbers are higher than those on the in stallation media are displayed in red However as the version numbering of packages is not always linear the information may not be perfect but should be sufficient to indicate problematic packages If necessary check the version numbers in the information window The Information Window The tabs in the bottom right frame provide various information about the selected p
136. sus pect someone is trying to discover your password check the entries in the system log files in var 1og By means of the Allow remote graphical login other users are granted access to your graphical lo gin screen via the network However as this access possibility repre sents a potential security risk it is inactive by default SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 113 114 Add User Settings Every user has a numerical and an alphabetical user ID The correlation between these is established via the file etc passwd and should be as unique as possible Using the data in this screen define the range of numbers assigned to the numerical part of the user ID when a new user is added A minimum of 500 is suitable for users Proceed in the same way with the group ID settings Miscellaneous Settings For Setting of file permissions there are three selection options Easy Secure and Paranoid The first one should be sufficient for most users The YaST help text provides information about the three security levels The setting Paranoid is extremely re strictive and can serve as the basic level of operation for system ad ministrator settings If you select Paranoid remember that some programs might not work or not work correctly because you no longer have the permissions to access certain files In this dialog also define which user should start the updatedb program This pro gram which
137. system such as installing new programs are also usually impossible or restricted for normal users Only the rs roof user or super user has the unrestricted capacity to make changes to the system and has unlimited access to all files Those who use this concept wisely only logging in with full root access when necessary can cut back the risk of unintentional loss of data Because under normal circumstances only root can delete system files or format hard disks the threat from the Trojan horse effect or from accidentally entering destructive commands can be significantly reduced IOUS eut ut BUOM 25 2 File System Permissions Basically every file in a Linux file system belongs to a user and a group Both of these proprietary groups and all others can be authorized to write read or execute these files A group in this case can be defined as a set of connected users with cer tain collective rights For example call a group working on a certain project project3 Every user in a Linux system is a member of at least one pro prietary group normally users There can be as many groups in a system as needed but only root is able to add groups Every user can find out with the command groups of which groups he is a member File Access The organization of permissions in the file system differs for files and directories File permission information can be dis played with the command 1s 1 The output could appear as in Output Exa
138. that is identical to the Default Entry dialog Make Boot Loader Partition Active Use this option to activate the partition whose boot sector holds the boot loader independently from the partition on which the directory with the helper files of the boot loader are stored boot or the root directory Replace Codein MBR Specify whether to overwrite the MBR which may be necessary if you have changed the location of the boot loader Backing up Files and Parts of Hard Disks Backs up the changed hard disk areas Add Saved MBR to Boot Loader Menu Adds the saved MBR to the boot loader menu Using Time out define for how many seconds the boot loader should wait for entries before the default system is booted A number of other options can be specified with Add However the use of these options requires a deeper understanding and is not covered here Refer to the relevant chapter in the Administration Guide and the manual pages of GRUB and LILO man grub man lilo and man lilo conf Additionally a detailed online manual for GRUB is available athttp www gnu org software 4 8 5 LVM The Logical Volume Manager LVM is a tool for individually partitioning hard disks by means of logical drives As this is a genuine expert tool no additional information is provided within the scope of this user guide For information refer to the Administration Guide SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 123 124
139. the respective application for further processing If you click an RPM package the description is displayed Install the package with Install package with YaST If you right click an icon a menu opens The kind of menu displayed de pends on the file type and offers common actions such as Cut Copy Copy Paste and Delete Use Open with to select the application with which to open the file from a list of suitable programs Files can be en crypted directly in Konqueror However to use this function a key must be generated manually or in KGpg Refer to Chapter 15 on page 249 to see how this is done The quickest way to perform many actions is the drag and drop method For instance easily move files from one Konqueror window to another by simply dragging them there while pressing the left mouse button Subse quently you will be asked whether the objects should be moved or copied 5 3 5 Creating an Image Gallery To facilitate the management of extensive image collections in a directory Konqueror can generate an HTML file with thumbnails Open the respec tive directory in Konqueror and select Tools gt Create Image Gallery A dialog opens in which to specify the background and foreground col ors the page title the location to which to save the gallery and other set tings Click OK to start the action By default a file called index html is created If you click this
140. the USB connection can quickly drain your camera s batteries Consider using a power adapter Note Simply connect the camera to the USB port and turn on the camera You may need to switch your camera to a special data transfer mode For this procedure consult the manual of your digital camera 22 2 Installating the Programs Use YaST to install the gtkam package The other required packages are selected automatically Digikam is included in the default installation If it is not installed use YaST to install it if desired For more information about installing packages with YaST refer to Section 4 3 4 on page 59 22 3 Using Konqueror KDE users can easily access digital cameras by means of the familiar Kon queror interface Connect your camera to the USB port A camera icon should appear on the desktop Click this icon to open the camera in Kon queror The camera can also be accessed by entering the URL camera in Konqueror Navigate through the camera s directory structure until the 346 ______ 22 1 Connecting to the Camera files are shown Use the usual Konqueror file management features to copy the files as desired More information about using Konqueror is available in Chapter 12 on page 233 22 4 Using gtKam gtKam is a graphical interface for downloading and deleting pictures from the digital camera To adjust or edit your pictures use The GIMP as de scribed in ChapterD4 on page 357 File Folder Select C
141. the category Network Devices is designed for the configuration of DSL Several dialogs enable you to enter the data for your DSL access YaST supports the configuration of DSL based on the fol lowing protocols PPP over ethernet PPPoE Germany 4 5 Network Devices PPP over ATM PPPoATM England CAPI for ADSL Fritz cards Tunnel protocol for point to point PPTP Austria The configuration of your DSL access with PPPoE and PPTP is only possi ble if your network card is configured correctly If this has not been done select Configure Network Cards to access the dialog for configuring your network card See Figure 4 5 2 on page 96 The DHCP protocol is not used for the automatic assignment of IP addresses for DSL Therefore do not use Automatic address setup with DHCP Instead use a static dummy IP address like 192 168 22 1 In Subnet mask enter 255 255 255 0 For a stand alone system do not make any entries in the Default gateway field UOILOINBWUOD ISOA Note The values for the IP address of your host and Subnet mask are merely placeholders They are not used for establishing a connection with DSL and are only needed for activating the network card Note zl At the beginning of the configuration as shown in Figure 4 18 on the fol lowing page select the PPP mode and the ethernet card to which your modem is connected usually eth0 With Device Activation
142. the files fetched from the network so they can be reused SUSE LINUX User Guide 247 Encryption with KGpg KGpg is an important component of the encryption infrastructure on your system With the help of this program generate and manage all needed keys use its editor function for the quick creation and encryption of files or use the applet in your panel to encrypt or decrypt by dragging and dropping The generation and management of keys is required for other applications such as KMail or Konqueror to handle encrypted files or e mail messages correctly This chapter covers the basic functions needed for daily work with encrypted files 15 1 Key Management llle 250 15 2 The Key Server Dialog 253 15 3 The Applet es smc ad 255 15 4 For More Information 256 6d25 uli uoudA1oU3 15 1 Key Management This section covers operations needed for handling your digital key ring Other programs such as your mail program KMail or Evolution access the managed key data to process signed or encrypted contents 15 1 1 Generating a New Key Pair To be able to exchange encrypted messages with other users first generate your own key pair One part of it the public key is distributed to your communication partners who can use it to encrypt the files or e mail mes sages they send The other part of the key pair the secret key is used to decrypt the encrypted contents
143. the icons shown in the main window Also use this menu to choose a color or image for the background The Go menu contains the navigation functions However you can access these functions more quickly in the toolbar One interesting feature is available under this menu the list of recently viewed direc tories which can be selected and displayed Bookmarks Bookmarks can be Internet addresses URL or paths to spe cific files or directories on your host If you select Add Bookmark the current content of the location bar is saved as a bookmark To access this location simply click this bookmark For practical rea sons arrange bookmarks in folders The SuSE folder already exists This folder contains bookmarks of important SUSE web pages Edit Bookmarks opens the bookmark editor in which to perform tasks like deleting obsolete bookmarks renaming bookmarks and moving bookmarks from one folder to another Settings Use the Settings menu to configure the look and feel of Kon queror Hide the menu bar by deactivating Display Menubar Press Ctrl M to display it again Under Toolbars hide or display the main toolbar an extra toolbar the location bar and the bookmark list If you changed the view of a specific directory save these changes un der View Properties Saved in Directory or Remove Directory Prop erties Using view profiles change the view by means of predefined patt
144. the settings in the field at the bottom of the dialog window Choose parameters that reflect your normal typing habits Enable Slow Keys To prevent accidental typing set a minimum time limit that a key must be pressed and held before it is recognized as valid input by the system Also determine whether audible feedback should be provided for keypress events accepted keypresses and the rejection of a keypress Enable Bounce Keys To prevent double typing set a minimum time limit for accepting two subsequent keypress events of the same key as the input of two individual characters If desired activate audible feed back upon rejection of a keypress event Toggle Keys Itis possible to request audible feedback from the system when a keycap modifier key is pressed Mouse Activates the keyboard mouse the mouse pointer is controlled with the arrow keys of the number pad Use the sliders to set the maximum speed of the mouse pointer the acceleration time until the maximum speed is reached and the latency between the pressing of a key and the cursor movement 6 2 10 Keyboard Shortcuts Use this module to manage global keyboard combinations It is possible to determine the keyboard combinations to use during text input and those for objects on the desktop 6 2 Settings The list overview window displays a list of all currently available actions along with their keyboard shortcuts Deactivate or change a keyboard shortcut by clicking th
145. time by clicking the respective head ing The dialogs displayed enable detailed settings The exact procedure is described in ChapterD on page 11 After the changes you are returned to the overview and can proceed with the installation using the modified values by clicking Accept Caution If the hardware was detected correctly you do not need to change any thing Do not change the boot loader partitioning or hardware settings unless you know what you are doing Caution 1 3 Step Three Installation Before the installation begins YaST asks in a green window whether to in stall with the current settings Confirm the request with Yes to start the installation Depending on the performance of your computer installation of your system with a large selection of application packages takes approxi mately fifteen minutes 1 4 Configuration Following the installation make some important settings before starting using SUSE LINUX see SectionP 6 on page 34 for detailed instructions SUSE LINUX User Guide UuonolipIsul JOINS S a9 Winstalor e Installation Settings Base Installation Language UENEN Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below Installation Settings Perform Installation System Configuration Processor Pentium Ill Katmai a Main Memory 256 MB Network Mode Online Update Users New installation Clean Up Keyboard layout Release Notes
146. to the rsllogin prompt where you enter your user name and password main memory Physical memory of limited capacity that can be accessed rather quickly This is often referred to as RAM random access memory man pages Traditional documentation for Unix systems which can be read using the command man MBR master boot record The first physical sector of the hard disk from which the content is loaded to the main memory and executed by the This code then loads either the operating system from a hard disk partition or a more sophisticated boot loader such as MD5 Algorithm for generating check sums mounting This describes the insertion of file systems into the directory tree of the system MP3 Very efficient compression procedure for audio files that reduces the size by a factor of ten in contrast to an uncompressed audio file SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 431 432 multitasking Operating systems that can invoke more than one program simulta neously are called multitasking systems multiuser Enables more than one user to work simultaneously on the same system network The interconnection of several computers accomplished normally using r serversland clients NFS Network File System A siprotocol for accessing a file system shared over a network NIS Network Information Service A centralized data administration system in networks User names and passwords can be simultaneously managed network wi
147. together with the address of the site from which it originated Use it to reverse previous decisions on whether to accept or reject cookies The Image Manager allows you to block images and adver tising banners from web sites which improves speed The Password Manager can make things easier for you if you frequently log in to sites via web interfaces both in internal networks and on the Inter net Mozilla can remember the passwords for you However this fea SUSE LINUX User Guide JOSMOIG SM OIIZO A SUL 243 244 ture also poses a certain security risk so you may not want use it for sites with high privacy requirements such as online banking sites Window This menu lets you switch to other browser windows and to those of other Mozilla components if installed to the mail client the composer and the address book Help Mozilla is a multipurpose tool so you may want to use this menu to access the online help which provides information and hints about the features of the program 14 1 2 The Navigation Toolbar The buttons of the navigation toolbar give quick access to the basic func tions of the browser Use Forward and Back to jump one step ahead or back in the history of pages viewed previously Reload updates the con tents of a page Usually web sites are stored in the cache for a certain time in case they are called again Reload always loads the current page from the Internet Stop ab
148. touch system helps because the workload is distributed across all fingers Split or individually separable keyboards are something to which you have to get accustomed but nevertheless are an alternative worth considering They have been constructed according to the latest er gonomic findings and are already recommended in some standards They prevent wrist strain to the side The keyboard of a notebook or laptop cannot correspond to the stan dards because of the crowded keys A notebook should therefore not be used as workstation equipment unless it is linked to an external keyboard and mouse 26 2 4 The Mouse Due to the advance of graphical user interfaces users are practically forced to use a mouse The intensive use of the mouse can cause not only fatigue but also disorders in the hands arms and shoulders An example of this is RSI The danger increases when a bad mouse is used So far there are no commonly accepted standards for an ergonomic mouse Often a PC is sold with the standard mouse This mouse should certainly be examined closely Is the mouse really suitable or should it be replaced by a better one Have the dealer unpack several mice for you to try The cable is probably too short Ask the dealer to give you an extension Evaluate your own mouse use Can you reduce the use of the mouse Many professional programs with a lot of interaction do without any mouse clicks Learn how to use 26 2 Office Equipment shor
149. up Affected Disk Areas No start from scratch or reread the Add Saved MBR to Boot Loader Menu No configuration saved on your disk If you have multiple Linux elle Q systems installed YaST can try to find them and merge their menus Add Edit a O To edit boot loader configuration J files manually click Edit Edit Configuration Files Configuration Files Abort Back Einish Figure 4 30 Configuring the Boot Loader with YaST Propose New Configuration Generates a new configuration suggestion Older Linux versions or other operating systems found on other par titions will be included in the boot menu enabling you to boot Linux or its old boot loader The latter takes you to a second boot menu Start from Scratch Enables you to create the entire configuration from scratch No suggestions will be generated Reread Configuration from Disk If you already performed some changes and are not satisfied with the result you can reload your current con figuration with this option Propose and Merge with Existing GRUB Menus If another operating system and an older Linux version are installed in other partitions the menu will be generated from an entry for the new SUSE LINUX an entry for the other system and all entries of the old boot loader menu This procedure might take some time This is not possible if LILO is used Restore MBR from Hard Disk The MBR saved on the hard disk will be written back SUSE LINUX User Guid
150. what processing steps should be applied to the selected image to adapt it optimally to the current screen resolution The options are Wallpaper Centered Scaled and Stretched 6 2 7 Font This module determines the font to use for the desktop In a second step enable optional effects for the improvement of the font quality The upper part of the dialog window shows the fonts selected for Application font Desktop font Window title font and Terminal font Click one of the buttons to open a selection dialog in which to set the font family style and size The options for Font Rendering and the additional configuration op tions accessible through Details are set to optimal values by default 6 2 8 Theme The style for all control elements on the desktop and of GNOME applica tions is set here Choose from various preinstalled themes Selecting a style in the list overview applies it automatically Details opens another dialog in which to customize the style of single desktop elements like window content window borders and icons Making changes and leaving the dia log with Close switches the theme to Custom theme Click Save theme to save your modified theme under a custom name The Internet and other sources provide many additional themes for GNOME as tar gz files Install these with Install theme 6 2 9 Accessibility The settings of this module facilitate
151. with a single click This should enable the green handles on the rectangle s corners and edges which allow you to reshape and resize it Next open the context menu by right clicking After selecting Area a dialog opens in which to change various prop erties When you are done with your modifications click OK As an alter native method to change the fill color select one directly in the object bar at the top to the right of the paintbucket There are many more useful drawing objects available in the toolbar Use it to create circles ellipses lines and even 3D elements 7 9 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 7 9 Creating Presentations with the AutoPilot Less experienced users may prefer to use Autopilot to create presentations Select File gt AutoPilot gt Presentation With the AutoPilot define 7 8 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw the basic structure of a presentation in three brief steps In doing so set backgrounds the output medium and various effects You can also import data from an existing presentation with the help of assistants After completing the procedure by clicking Create Impress offers a num ber of templates for the page layout Select one that suits your purposes and enter a name for the first slide Then click OK to generate the first slide of the new presentation To complete your presentation enter a title and the text for ea
152. with the package such as Install or Delete This status is shown by means of a symbol in a status box at the beginning of the line Toggle the status by clicking or select it from the menu that opens when the item is right clicked Depending on the current situation some of the possible sta tus flags may not be available for selection For example a package that has not yet been installed cannot be set to Delete View the available status flags with Help gt Symbols The package manager offers the following package status flags 4 3 Software Do Not Install This package is not installed and will not be installed Install This package is not yet installed but will be installed Keep This package is already installed and will not be changed Update This package is already installed and will be replaced by the ver sion on the installation medium Delete This package is already installed and will be deleted Taboo NeverInstall This package is not installed and will never be installed It will be treated as if it does not exist on any of the instal lation media If a package would automatically be selected to re solve dependencies this can be prevented by setting the package to Taboo However this may result in inconsistencies that must be resolved manually dependency check Thus Taboo is mainly in tended for expert users Protected This package is installed and should not be modified
153. with the package structure of SUSE LINUX This filter sorts the program packages by subjects such as Applications Development and Hardware in a tree structure to the left The more you expand the branches the more specific the selection is and the fewer packages are displayed in the individual package window to the right The filter additionally provides the possibility to display all packages in alphabetic order To do this select zzz All in the top level As SUSE LINUX contains a large number of packages it may take some time to display this long list The Search Function The Search function is the easiest way to find a specific package By specifying various search criteria restrict the fil ter so much that often only one package is displayed in the individ ual package window Enter a search string and use the check boxes to determine where to search for this string in the name in the de scription or in the package dependencies Advanced users can even define special search patterns using wild cards and regular expres sions and search the package dependencies in the Provides and Requires fields For example software developers who download SUSE LINUX User Guide UOlLOUINBYUOD SDA 61 62 source packages from the Internet can use this function to determine which package contains a specific library needed for compiling and linking this package ie Note In addition to the
154. 1 The Initial Browser Window In its default configuration the window presented by the browser includes these elements the actual document window occupying the majority of the window used to display web pages although it may be empty at the out set the menu bar the navigation toolbar and the personal toolbar There is also a combined status and component bar at the bottom of the window Finally to the left of the document window Mozilla provides a sidebar that contains a number of different tabs each of them giving access to a particu lar task When you right click in the document window Mozilla opens a context menu with a number of entries Use this menu for example to add the cur rent page to your bookmarks Bookmark This Page or to view its source code View Page Source 14 1 1 The Menu Bar The menu bar includes the following menus 242 14 1 The Initial Browser Window File Edit This menu provides the common entries to open save and print files or web pages It also allows you to send an entire web page or only the link to a page as an e mail Selecting Edit Page loads the cur rent page into the Mozilla Composer which allows you to edit web pages and to create your own from scratch Mozilla s online help doc uments include an introduction to creating web pages which you may want to read as a primer on the topic The File menu also in cludes the Work Offline item which tells t
155. 100Hz Hz 32 bit float Mute Solo Proiect rate 44100 Selection 0 58 735329 1 08 038124 0 09 302795 min sec Snap To Off Figure 19 10 Spectral View of the Audio Data 19 6 1 Recording WAV Files and Importing Files Click the red recording button to generate an empty stereo track and start the recording To change the standard parameters specify the settings un der File gt Preferences Audio I O and Quality are important for the recording Even if tracks already exist pressing the recording button cre ates new tracks Initially this may be confusing as these tracks cannot be seen in the standard size program window SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 311 312 To import audio files select Project gt Import Audio The program sup ports the WAV format as well as the compressed MP3 and Ogg Vorbis for mats See Section on page 314 for more information about these for mats 19 6 2 Editing Audio Files The AudioTrack menu can be opened to the left of each track and offers various views One of them is Waveform dB which is not suitable for checking the signal tuning as in this view the data is always adjusted to the maximum amplitude of the track Depending on the application various view formats for segment selections are offered under Set Selection Format With Set Snap To Mode the seg ment boundaries can automatically be adapted to the selec
156. 114 installation dialog Until that point you can safely abort the installation For LVM setup using a non LVM root device and a non LVM swap device is recommended Other than the root and swap devices you should have partitions managed by LVM UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND The table to the right shows the current partitions on all your hard disks me Create Edit Delete Resize RAD CryptFile w Expert v Hard disks are designated like this Abort Back Jf Next Figure 2 8 The YaST Partitioner in Expert Mode Any free hard disk space is also listed and automatically selected To allo cate additional storage space to free the needed space starting from the bottom toward the top of the list starting from the last partition of a hard disk toward the first For example if you have three partitions you cannot use the second exclusively for Linux and retain the third and first for other operating systems Creating a Partition 1 Select New If several hard disks are connected a selection dialog appears in which to select a hard disk for the new partition Then specify the partition type primary or extended Create up to four primary partitions or up to three primary partitions and one ex tended partition Within the extended partition you can create sev eral logical partitions see Section on page 19 2 Select the file system to use to format the partition and a mount point if necessary
157. 1280x938 JPEG 3 faite O x Scan Size Custom Gallery Kooka Gallery Q o RX amp Scanner Settings AGFA SNAPSCAN 1236U e r Autoselection Scan mode a Calor Jl TJ active on black gt r a scanner background WN Halftone pattern DispersedDot8x8 Threshold O A cA J Resolution 600 O zi r Selection Threshold ST a os width 72 mm Brightness ret height 78 mm LI Contrast IB o Hm sec 304 M 2 IO Use custom gamma table Edit O la gt l Final Scan JI Preview Scan j O Loading file home tux kde share apps Scanimages kscan_0001 jpeg 1766x1873 pixel 32 bit O p Figure 23 3 The Kooka Scanning Parameters O 23 5 The Gallery The gallery window shows the default folder where Kooka stores all its image files An example is shown in FigureD3 4 To save an image to your personal home directory click the thumbnail to select it then select File gt Save Image Then enter your personal home directory and give the file a descriptive name 24Kooka Gallery 4 items f kscan_0001jpeg1766x 1873 JPEG 762x811 JPEG Jkscan 0003jpeg 630kB JPEG kscan_0004 jpeg 181MB JPEG Figure 23 4 The Kooka Gallery Rx Image Name Size Format SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 305 To add images to the gallery simply drag and drop them from Konqueror Start Konqueror navigate to the directory containing the images to add to the gallery and drag them with the mouse to a folder of the Ko
158. 20 3 Webcams and Motvl 334 20 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for YourPC 335 20 5 Webcam Operation with gqcad 336 UJO2Q9M PUD Opo O9plA AL 20 1 Watching TV with motv motv is an improved successor to xawtv It incorporates all essential func tions into the user interface Start the application with SUSE gt Multi media gt Video Start it at the command line with motv Initially only a TV window appears after the application starts Open a menu window by right clicking it 591 25 MHz 36 Figure 20 1 The TV Application moto 20 1 1 Video Source and Network Search In Settings gt Input select the video source If you select Television here set up the broadcasting network before starting the application This automatically takes place with the network search also found under the Settings menu If you click Save settings the network found is entered into the xawtv file in your home directory and will be available the next time you start the application Note If you do not want to browse for all available channels find the next channel with PD If needed subsequently adjust the broadcast frequency with or Note 332 20 1 Watching TV with motv 20 1 2 From Silent Film to Sound Film The audio output of the TV card is connected to the line input of your sound card to the speaker
159. 2003 o Stop O Eject uum Previous Next Random Loop E CDDB Extras v Figure 19 8 The kscd User Interface 19 4 Buffering and Latencies This section explains how uninterrupted audio playback can be ensured This problem is by no means limited to Linux but is inherent in all mul titasking operating systems In a multitasking operating system several processes usually run concurrently As the processor can only handle one process at a time each process is assigned a certain amount of time by the operating system s scheduler The switching action between processes nor mally happens so quickly that the user does not notice it However during audio playback even brief interruptions are noticeable in the form of clicks Therefore audio programs use a buffer for the play back enabling the audio data in the buffer to be emitted continuously by the sound card even when the audio program is interrupted by the sched uler Accordingly the playback is click free if the buffer is large enough to bridge the longest possible interruption However the buffer size also determines the reaction time latency of the program Therefore the buffer size is kept as small as possible especially for interactive applications such as real time synthesizers and DJ mixer consoles Basically the length of the interruptions depends on the system load and the priority of the process Consequently the size of the buffer re quired for click fre
160. 33 333 334 334 335 335 336 336 336 337 337 XV xvi 23 Kooka A Scanning Application 23 1 The Kooka Window lle 232 ThePreview Rs 233 TheFinalScan oes 234 The Menus eii 9 ne oko xev da ER Y odd 235 The Gallery x xn rr EE ous 23 6 Optical Character Recognition o oo 24 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 24 Graphics Formats o ooo o o 242 Starting The GIMP o o oo oo oo o patada E v PA Re d d 24 2 2 The Default Windows 243 Getting Started in GIMP o o o oo ooo oo o nite de a a amp eae ee S Pak is See eee Pract tees Sik ee ADAC eS hk e ok cesarean tolerate BO E OMe Sone be OE ea A bbs de RAGA a E che dra os dos erik cn de OOTES Lidia E E E dd da E EE Ee we CETTE EET EC E E E Ie pred ed AN ee A UE E E EEE nd O Gene r eas ae Lp ee Goes een ae a 24 8 Configuring GIMP o o o ooo oo como o bp IO trant a ck da leo 248 2 Setting Preferences o o ooo ooo 24 9 For More Information o lens Contents VI Excursions 25 Working with the Shell 25 1 Introduction to Bash 25 1 1 Commands 25 1 2 Files and Directories 25 1 3 BashFunctions 25 14 Specifying Paths o o oooo o 25 1 5 Wild Cards 25 1 6 More or Less 25 1 7 Pipes 25 1 8 Archives and Data Compression
161. 333 Jaunchers eie deeded 333 proportions ee eee 333 seeking channels 332 video source 6 cee eee 332 A rbi doe Re boe ass 397 mouse DUNE ricotta irritada 412 configuring cooooccccoorocccoooos 1901 Mozilla 5 nite eer Ehe nete 241 configuring ooooooococccccoros S Security rn 247 MS DOS commands sssssss 386 file systems 00020005 386 MOLE titi cx eee deren 86 T eee dos a a a a sectors 394 N Nautilus 4 keen 1771179 configuring 6 06 179 navigating cece eee 177 network configuring 65 109 A ke rere 109 ToT tea dr eee 96 NFS ICONS 1 unes entere ek 107 a ex dove ee 107 NoteEdit sic sath doe rie naaa 328 nslook p esee torte edic ee de 400 NTFS file system ooooooocccoooccc 27 NIP aioz Dalt UE Boars sg Sie areas 108 nxtvepg cece eee cece cece e 335 FGETS ricocg Soi fie eared rer Order eain 336 importing database 335 O office programs Index KAddressBook KOrganizer 005 OpenOffice org sus application modules AutoPilot ooooooooooo o Cale ias cell attributes Charts oseese c nae tah importing spreadsheet tables configuring 1887 90 Draw eese 11991200 graphics cl rra aaron 187 Impress Navigator
162. 4 8 6 Partitioning Although it is possible to modify the partitions in the installed system this should be handled by experts who know exactly what they are doing as otherwise the risk of losing data is very high If you decide to use this tool refer to the description in Section 2 5 4 on page 18 the partitioning tool during the installation is the same as in the installed system 4 8 System 4 8 7 Profile Manager SCPM The SCPM System Configuration Profile Management module offers the possibility of creating managing and switching among system configura tions This is especially useful for mobile computers that are used in differ ent locations in different networks and by different users Nevertheless this feature is useful even for stationary machines as it enables the use of various hardware components or test configurations Although the module with the accompanying help is easy to use the configuration of profiles is a task that should be performed by experts or system administrators For more information about SCPM basics and handling refer to the respective sections in the Administration Guide 4 8 8 Runlevel Editor SUSE LINUX can be operated in several runlevels By default the system boots to runlevel 5 which offers multiuser mode network access and the graphical user interface X Window System The other runlevels offer multiuser mode with network but without X runlevel 3 multiuser mode without network
163. 4 8 9 Sysconfig Editor The directory etc sysconfig contains the files with the most impor tant settings for SUSE LINUX formerly centrally administered in the file etc rc config The sysconfig editor displays all settings in a well arranged form The values can be modified and saved to the individual configuration files Generally manual editing is not necessary as the files are automatically adapted when a package is installed or a service is con figured Caution Do not edit the files in etc sysconfig if you do not know exactly what you are doing as this could seriously inhibit the operability of your system Caution sil More information is provided in the Administration Guide 4 8 10 Time Zone Selection The time zone was already set during the installation but you can make changes here Click your country or region in the list and select Local time or GMT Greenwich Mean Time GMT is often used in Linux systems Machines with additional operating systems such as Microsoft Windows mostly use local time 4 8 11 Language Selection Here select the language for your Linux system The language can be changed at any time The language selected in YaST applies to the entire system including YaST and the desktop environment KDE 3 4 8 System 4 8 12 Keyboard Layout Selection Note Only use this module if you work on a system without the X Window System and a graphical user interface If you use a
164. 4w 4w 6w 8w 8wLite 8z 400w and compatible models Samsung ML 200 210 1000 1010 1020 1200 1210 1220 4500 5080 6040 and compatible models To our knowledge the following GDI printers are not supported by SUSE LINUX This list is by no means complete Brother DCP 1000 MP 21C WL 660 SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 73 Canon BJC 5000 5100 8000 8500 LBP 460 600 660 800 MultiPASS L6000 Epson AcuLaser C1000 EPL 5500W 5700L 5800L HP LaserJet 1000 3100 3150 Lexmark Z12 22 23 31 32 33 82 Winwriter 100 150c 200 Minolta PagePro 6L 1100L 18L Color PagePro L Magicolor 6100DeskLaser 2DeskLaserPlus 2DeskLaserDuplex Nec SuperScript 610plus 660 660plus Oki Okijet 2010 Samsung ML 85G 5050G QL 85G Sharp AJ 2100 AL 1000 800 840 F880 121 Configuration with YaST2 To set up a printer go to Hardware in the YaST Control Center then se lect Printer This opens the main printer configuration window in which the detected devices are listed in the upper part The lower part lists any queues already configured If your printer was not detected restart the autodetection If it fails again select Configure to configure the printer manually Not every printer can be configured for both printing systems Certain configurations are only supported by either CUPS or LPRng and Ipdfilter YaST informs you about this whenever necessary Note In SUSE LINUX the default printing system is CUPS but you
165. 9 on the following page Select the range from A2 to E5 The text appears white on black To create a chart select Insert gt Chart This opens a dialog window The first page in this dialog gives the option to modify the original cell se SUSE LINUX User Guide SLINS eoyo 610 eoyjouedo aul 197 198 Figure 7 9 Expanded Example Spreadsheet lection and to specify whether to use the first row or column as chart labels Usually the settings on this page can be accepted without change Con tinue by clicking Next The dialog consists of four pages The main page shows the available chart types The types offered include line area column and bar charts To the left the page displays a preview of your data according to the type selected The most suitable type for our example is the line chart Click Next to proceed to a page in which to choose from different variants of line charts with or without symbols stacked percent cubic spline and so on For the current example select Symbols If you enable Show text ele ments in preview the column headers January February etc are dis played on the X axis and the numerical values on the Y axis Also a chart legend is added on the right hand side On the next page give the chart as well as its X axis and Y axis a title In this case use Monthly Expenses as a chart title and Euro on the Y axis The X axis title
166. Contact l JL J Antarktis Figure 11 3 Editing Distribution Lists Incremental search Use the drop down menu to determine search de tails such as the Given Name Family Name or Email Address As soon as you enter a character string in the adjacent input field the data is searched by the selected criterion The search result is dis played in the overview and in the detailed view Searching for initials or numbers jump bar Activate this toolbar with Settings gt Show Jump Bar Depending on the activated search criterion in the Incremental search clicking the respective letter or number produces the contact entries whose given name family name or e mail address begins with this letter or number Search in a remote LDAP directory To use this function first configure an LDAP server in your network Go to Settings gt Configure KAddressBook gt LDAP to access a list of various LDAP servers If no selection is offered ask your system administrator for the name of the server the port number and the base DN Enter this data in the dialog opened with Add Host Activate your settings with Apply and OK To start the actual search click the magnifying glass icon in the upper toolbar In the following dialog select a suitable search criterion phone number name e mail and enter the search string in the adjacent input field The result of your search appears in an over
167. EADME txt um O ey 2 e Print system currently used CUPS Common UNIX Print System Connected to localhost 631 y Keep this dialog open after printing D Collapse System Options 9 Help X Cancel Figure 5 1 The Main Window of KPrinter Under Orientation choose between Portrait and Landscape To the right of Orientation specify the settings for two sided printing If None is selected only one page is printed per sheet If you click the circle pre ceding Long side the front and back will be printed like in a book With Short side the back is printed reversely and you have to turn the sheet up to view the text correctly Under Start End mark your document with headlines and subtitles such as confidential or secret Under Pages per Sheet select to print two or four pages on one sheet For this purpose the pages are downsized accordingly If you click Save your settings are adopted for other print jobs too However if you click OK the settings only apply to the current job If you terminate the dialog with Cancel all changes are discarded After making all settings click Expand The second part of the window now becomes visible Click the blue folder icon By default your home di rectory is displayed Select a file and confirm with OK You can also se SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 137 138 General Image T
168. EPrintFax a Click the System icon in the left pane As capisuitefax is largely compatible with the HylaFAX suite se lect HylaFAX under Fax system a Set Command to usr bin capisuitefax d Snumber files Finish the configuration by clicking OK and closing KDEPrintFax Send to Fax is then available in the Print menu of any KDE application Selecting it starts KDEPrintFax which requests the target phone number and sends the fax Non KDE applications can also use this function if their print command can be set manually In this case replace lpr with kprinter When you print a document the KDE print menu will be displayed along with the possibility to transmit fax messages 18 2 Usage Eile Fax Settings Help Add File R Fax system selection Files Use EFax system Use HylaFax system Fax Numbe usr bin capisuitefax d number files E Name Enterprise Comment Cx Idle Hylafax Figure 18 5 Configuring CapiSuite in KDEPrintFax Caution To date capisuitefax does not support the full range of HylaFAX features Thus features such as the resolution settings are currently ignored Caution _ 18 2 3 Operation of the Answering Machine If e mail transmission was not deactivated voice messages left on the an swering machine are sent by e mail to the recipient associated with the di aled phone number Thus the operation of the answering
169. Go On X Show All Details Abort Back POOK Figure 3 2 Automatic Repair Mode 3 3 User Defined Repair The automatic repair explained in the preceding section categorically per forms all tests This is useful if the extent of the system damage is unkown However if you already know what part of the system is affected the range of the applied tests can be narrowed Choosing User defined re pair shows a list of test runs that are all marked for execution at first The total range of tests matches that of automatic repair If you already know where no damage is present unmark the corresponding tests Clicking Continue then starts a narrower test procedure that probably has a sig nificantly shorter running time Not all test groups are applicable individually The analysis of the fstab en tries is always bound to an examination of the file systems including ex isting swap partitions YaST automatically satisfies such dependencies by selecting the smallest amount of necessary test runs 3 3 User Defined Repair 3 4 Expert Tools If you are knowledgeable with SUSE LINUX and already have a very clear idea of what needs to be repaired in your system directly apply the tools necessary for repairing it by choosing Expert tools Install new boot loader This starts the YaST boot loader configuration module Details can be found in Section on page Run partitioning tool This starts the expert partitioning tool in YaST De t
170. If YaST did not detect your mouse automatically press in the sugges tion window several times until Mouse is selected Then use to open the dialog in which to set the mouse type This dialog is shown in Fig ure 2 5 YaS Winstalor e Choose the mouse type of the Mouse configuration mouse attached to your computer Choose your mouse type from the list Use the arrow keysto select a mouse if the salectiar bar Mouse Systems serial mouse ttyS1 COM2 does not move hitthe Tab key maybe repeatedly until it does Use the Test button to apply and test the selected settings If you select None you have to use the keyboard as Mouse Man protocol serial Logitech mouse ttySO COMI Mouse Man protocol serial Logitech mouse ttyS1 COM2 Old Logitech serial mouse series 9 ttyS0 COM1 Old Logitech serial mouse series 9 ttyS1 COM2 Logitech busmouse Sun Mouse Jdev sunmouse Oldest 2 button serial mouse tty50 COM1 Oldest 2 button serial mouse ttyS1 COM2 described in the manual Microsoft busmouse ATIXL busmouse Plug and Play mice ttyS0 COM1 Plug and Play mice ttyS1 COM2 USB mouse IntelliWheel mouse IntelliWheel mouse IntelliMouse Explorer IntelliMouse Explorer regardless of if one exists Cancel Accept Figure 2 5 Selecting the Mouse Type To select the mouse type use T and Q Consult the mouse documentation for information a
171. Otherwise the repeated establishment and termination of the connection can be quite costly doptseq 3d eut 5 4 2 The Download Manager KGet KGet is the download manager for KDE similar to GetRight or Golzilla With KGet manage your transfers in a window Stop resume delete and queue transfers and add new transfers Adding Transfers Start KGet by pressing Alf F2 and entering the command kget When the program is started for the first time a dialog is displayed Confirm this dialog to integrate KGet in Konqueror When you close the dialog KGet is integrated in the system tray of the panel as an icon with a downward arrow Click this arrow to open the dialog displaying your transfers To add a transfer to the list select the menu item File gt Paste A dialog opens En ter a URL in the input field and confirm with OK Then specify the loca tion for saving the downloaded file After all information has been entered the entry for the transfer is added to the main window of KGet and started Another way to add a transfer is by means of drag and drop Simply drag a file e g from an FTP server from Konqueror and drop it in the main window SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 155 156 Timer Controlled Transfers You can also instruct KGet to perform your transfers at a specific time Ac tivate Options gt Offline Mode All transfers inserted from this point are not started immediately bu
172. S1 refer to scenarios 1 and 2a below 1TR6 is a protocol used by older or large phone systems refer to scenario 2b below The standard setting for the US is NIT Select the country code from the selection box In the adjacent input field enter the area code for your location e g 212 for New York If necessary enter the prefix for external calls Use Start Mode to set the start mode for the current ISDN card On Boot initializes the ISDN driver to when the system is booted With Man ual the ISDN driver must be initialized manually by the user root with rcisdn start Hotplug loads the driver when the PCMCIA card or USB device is connected Complete all settings and click OK SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 103 104 Ya S YVinscalor e Start Mode OnBoot the driveris F loaded during system boot e ISDN low level configuration for contro Manual the driver must be started a with the reisdn start command only the userroot can do this HotPlug is a special case for ISDN Card Information PCMCIA and USB devices Vendor Abocom Maaitek ISDN card 28D1 ISDN Protocol In most cases the protocol is Euro ISDN i Area Code Enter your local area code for the ISDN line here without a leading zero and Country Code without a country prefix Selection of ISDN protocol zs Euro ISDN EDSS1 Germany Dial Prefix If you need a prefix ime to get an public line enter it here
173. SUSE LINUX version on your com puter the next dialog asks whether to install SUSE LINUX from scratch or perform an update of your previous system If Linux was not installed on your computer previously or if you select New installation YaST checks all your hardware and list the result in the suggestion dialog shown in Figure 1 1 on pagels This dialog also displays the partitioning suggestion possibly resizing and the selected installation type If installing Linux for the first time accept these suggestions which are usually suitable The following messages and suggestions are displayed after the system check Mode New installation is the default value here Keyboard The keyboard layout defaults to the selected language This can easily be changed Mouse The detected mouse type is listed here 1 1 Step One The Start Screen Partitioning Suggests a suitable partitioning If Windows 9x or ME FAT32 file system exists on the hard disk the resizing rate is indi cated Software A default system with office applications is preset Booting Determines where SUSE LINUX installs the boot manager The Master Boot Record MBR of the first hard disk is the default setting Time Zone Depending on the selected language settings the time zone of the respective country is selected Check this setting as many lan guages are used in several countries Language Shows the language setting Modify the YaST suggestions at any
174. Scan on Scan Parameter 23 3 The Final Scan If you selected Custom for the scanning size use the mouse to select the rectangular area to scan The selected area is confined by a dotted border 23 1 The Kooka Window Eile Image Settings Help o NES FAA Y E ua C 5 Wa ame TS 4Kooka Gallery LY alll jpg 12 Sandreas jpg e x Ms Gallery Kooka Gallery xx Scanner Settings AGFA e SNAPSCAN 1236U Scan mode a Color sj WI e Md ut nx Halftone pattern L Resolution 300 c TEST mt FinalScan j PreviewScan Loading file home tux kde share apps Scanimages all1 jpg 1280x938 pixel 32 bit Figure 23 1 The Kooka Main Window Click Scan Parameter again Choose between color and black and white scanning and set the resolution with the slider See Figure 23 3Jon page 355 The higher the resolution the better the quality of the scanned image is However this also results in a correspondingly larger file and the scanning process can take a very long time at high resolutions Activate Use custom gamma table and click Edit to change the settings for brightness contrast and gamma Once all settings have been made click Final Scan to scan the image The scanned image is then displayed in the image viewer and as a thumbnail When prompted select the form
175. Search filter all lists of the package manager feature a quick search for the current list content For example simply enter the initial letter of a package name to move the cur sor to the first package in the list whose name begins with this letter The cursor must be in the list by clicking the list Note Installation Summary After selecting the packages for installation up date or deletion use the filter selection to view the installation sum mary It shows what will happen with packages when you click Ac cept Use the check boxes to the left to filter the packages to view in the individual package window If for example you merely want to check which packages are already installed start the package man ager and deactivate all check boxes except Keep Of course the package status in the individual package window can be changed as usual However the respective package may no longer meet the search criteria To remove such packages from the list update the list with Update list The Individual Package Window As mentioned above a list of individual packages is displayed to the right in the individual package window The content of this list is determined by the currently selected filter If for example the Selection filter is selected the individual package window displays all packages of the current selec tion In the package manager each package has a status that determines what to do
176. TFS file system Unlike FAT file systems NTFS file systems can currently only be read from Linux Therefore you can read your Windows files from Linux but you cannot edit them If you want write access to your Win dows data and do not need the NTFS file system reinstall Windows on a FAT32 file system In this case you will have full access to your Windows data from SUSE LINUX Note More Partitioning Tips If the partitioning is performed by YaST and other partitions are detected in the system these partitions are also entered in the file etc fstab to enable easy access to this data This file contains all partitions in the system with their properties parameters such as the file system mount point and user permissions 2 5 Installation Suggestion Example 2 1 etc fstab Partition Data dev sdal datal auto noauto user 0 0 dev sda8 data2 auto noauto user 0 0 The partitions regardless of whether they are Linux or FAT partitions are specified with the options noauto and user This allows any user to mount or unmount these partitions as needed For security reasons YaST does not automatically enter the exec option here which is needed for executing programs from the respective location However to run pro grams from there you can enter this option manually This measure is nec essary if you encounter system messages such as bad interpreter or Permission denied Detailed background information and tips for p
177. TM2110S Class spec Disk Class Mass Storage Device 5 DNES 309170W Class spec Disk Class Mass Storage Device Display Floppy disk Framebuffer E Framebuffer device Figure 4 15 Displaying Hardware Information 4 4 6 IDE DMA Mode With this module activate and deactivate the DMA mode for your IDE hard disks and your IDE CD and DVD drives in the installed system This module does not have any effect on SCSI devices DMA modes can sub stantially increase the performance and data transfer speed in your system During the installation the current SUSE LINUX kernel automatically acti vates DMA for hard disks but not for CD drives as default DMA activation for all drives often caused problems with CD drives Use the DMA mod ule if you want to activate DMA for your drives If the drive supports the DMA mode without any problems the data transfer rate of your drive can be increased by activating DMA SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 89 90 Note DMA Direct Memory Access means that your data can be transferred directly to the RAM bypassing the processor control Note 4 4 7 Joystick Use this module to configure your joystick by selecting the manufacturer and the model from the displayed list With Test check if your joystick responds correctly The test dialog shows three charts for the analog axes of the joystick and marks for the four standard buttons
178. The Settings tab features options needed for the creation of CDs with mul tiple data or audio tracks multisession CDs In the Name of Media tab specify a name description publisher and other details for the CD Under File system specify settings for the file system on the CD Rock Ridge Joliet UDF Also determine how symbolic links file permissions and blanks are treated In the Advanced tab experienced users can spec ify additional settings 21 3 Creating an Audio CD Basically there are no significant differences between creating an audio CD and creating a data CD Select File gt New Audio Project Drag and drop SUSE LINUX User Guide uooolddy Buluing Gy eui ae 341 342 Data Project size 71 4 mB Writing Settings Volume Desc Filesystem Advanced Burning Device REN LJ Speed Que jj eJ O X Cancel r Writing Mode Auto r Options E Simulate On the fly Burnfree Only create image f xx Verify written data K3b Defaults User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 21 2 Burning CDs with K3b the individual audio tracks to the project folder The audio data must be in MP3 WAV or Ogg Vorbis format The sequence of the tracks can be deter mined by moving them up or down in the project folder The dialog for burning an audio CD is not very different from the dialog for burning a data CD However the option Disc at once
179. The influence of lighting conditions on our own efficiency is often underestimated If the light is too bright you cannot see what is on the screen If it is too dark sharpness of vision decreases The wrong lighting overstrains the visual system and eventually causes symptoms of fatigue and stress It is assumed that a combination of general lighting and individual work station lighting is best For the workstation at home the combination of a high powered ceiling lamp 500 watts preferably with a dimmer and one or two workplace lamps is recommended The fluorescent lamps usually found in offices for general lighting should be supplemented by individual workstation lamps The lighting should however not be too intense and be individually adjustable Stark contrasts should be avoided Be careful with strong desk lamps Good illumination is unfortunately very expensive and the minimum requirements of lighting can also be fulfilled with cheaper illumination layouts tis important that you are exposed to daylight A view outside is preferable General lighting is considered pleasant if it is not below 250 Ix usu ally 500 Ix is required 1000 Ix for an open plan office 500 750 Ix should be emitted by the individual workstation light ing However individual lamps are often problematic If they are too strong the contrast to the general lighting is too great Harmonic soft transitions are considered more pleasant The ligh
180. Then run gqcam The current picture of your webcam is automati cally shown in the upper part of the application window The lower part 20 5 Webcam Operation with gqcam has sliders for adjusting the brightness white balance contrast tint and color saturation according to your liking The brightness is automatically preset This feature can be set in General in File gt Preferences Filters features false color correction switches because some cameras swap the red and blue channels in transmission If you operate more than one webcam use File Open New Camera to switch to another camera Select the new device from the dialog that opens The first camera is attached to the device dev videoO the second is at tached to dev video1 and so on 20 5 2 Snapshots To take a snapshot with a camera click Snap Picture Select a file name and picture format in the dialog that opens Create a picture series with Camera gt Set Timer Set the capturing frequency in seconds or min utes along with the properties of the images in Set image information An optional script to run after every capture event can be chosen with Run command after snap This could for example be used to upload the cap tured image onto an FTP server 20 5 3 Command Line gqcam can also be run without its graphical user interface This may be in teresting for instance for automatic surveillance contr
181. To check a signed file go to Signature gt Verify Signature and select the file to check in the following dialog As soon as you confirm the selection KGpg checks the signature and reports the result of the operation Another possibility is to load the signed file into the editor and click Sign verify 15 4 For More Information For theoretical background information about the encryption method refer to the brief and clear introduction on the GnuPG project pages athttp www gnupg org documentation howtos html en This document also provides a list of further information sources 15 4 For More Information KMail The KDE Mail Application KMail is the KDE mail application In addition to sending and receiving e mail and using multiple mail protocols it offers the possibility to configure several user defined filters for sorting e mail messages in individual fold ers The encryption decryption and signing of e mail messages can also be handled conveniently in KMail 161 KMail and Kontact o 258 162 Mail Formats llle 258 TED 258 16 4 Configuring KMail 259 16 5 Using KMail ees 261 HUN ieu ws UE dean erm e te dd 262 oi Ole A ee EH 263 16 8 Importing Mail ess 264 16 9 The Address Book 264 T6 TOEilterg suicidas a A x3 265 oo 268 16 12For More Information 270 UOLDIIAAY PIN 30 841
182. UX User Guide UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND 35 36 Vas Winceatter ge Base Installation 8 Network Configuration w Language w Installation Settings w Perform Installation _ Skip Configuration Configuration Use Following Configuration Y Root Password pda Network Interfaces Online Update e Users D Link DFE 500TX Fast Ethernet Clean Up Configured as eth bus pci 0000 00 09 0 with DHCP e Release Notes DSL Connections Device Configuration Not detected ISDN Adapters Not detected Modems Not detected H Figure 2 14 Configuring the Network Devices 2 6 3 Testing the Internet Connection If you configured an Internet connection you can test it right now For this purpose YaST establishes a connection to the SUSE server and checks if any product updates are available for your version of SUSE LINUX Also the latest release notes are downloaded Any available updates can be in stalled in the next step If you do not want to test the connection at this point select Skip Test then Next This also skips downloading product updates and release notes 2 6 4 Loading Software Updates If YaST was able to connect to the SUSE servers select whether to perform a YaST online update If there are any patched packages available on the servers you can download and install them now to fix known bugs or se curity issues 2 6 Finishing the Installation YaS Winceatter
183. Welcome Congratulations for selecting SUSE LINUX A few clicks are all that is needed to prepare the installation which takes fifteen to twenty minutes After configuring the users and their passwords and selecting the screen resolution your SUSE LINUX system is ready for use If you are familiar with earlier versions of SUSE LINUX you will notice how much the config uration with the system assistant YaST has been expanded and simplified The simple quick installation is explained first If you have special wishes in connection with the programs to install the partitioning of your hard disk or other features read the chapter about the custom installation YaST additionally facilitates the configuration and administration of your hard ware Internet access and system without repeated reboots Get to know the graphical desktop environments KDE and GNOME and learn how to adapt them to your personal preferences The following sections introduce some very useful and interesting programs from the large range of available applications including office programs such as OpenOffice org web browsers file managers scanning tools and image editing tools Additionally find information about the SUSE help system and the avail able information sources containing further documentation Also included are a list of frequently asked questions about SUSE LINUX and a glossary of the most important terms from the world of computers and Linux Chang
184. When you move the joystick or press the buttons you should be able to see a reaction in the test dialog As joysticks are usually connected to the sound card you can also access this module from the sound card configuration 4 4 8 Mouse Configure your mouse with this YaST module As the procedure for the selection of the mouse was already explained within the scope of the user defined installation refer to Section on page 18 4 4 9 Scanner If your scanner is connected and switched on it should be detected auto matically when this YaST module is started In this case the dialog for the installation of the scanner appears If no scanner is detected the manual configuration dialog appears If you have already installed one or several scanners a list of existing scanners that can be modified or deleted is dis played Press Add to configure a new device Next an installation is performed with default settings If the installation is successful a corresponding message will appear Now test your scanner by inserting a document and clicking Test Scanner Not Detected Only supported scanners can be autodetected Scanners connected to an other network host will not be detected The manual configuration distin guishes three types of scanners USB scanners SCSI scanners and network scanners 4 4 Hardware USB scanner Specify the vendor and model YaST then attempts to load USB modules If your scanner is very new
185. YaST then runs in console mode as described in Section on page 129 As these start methods are usually used by a normal user YaST opens a small dialog for entering the root password root privileges are required for all YaST modules as only this user is permitted to modify the Linux system files If for any reason YaST cannot be started as described above it can be started from the command line In the shell change to the user root with sux Enter the root password and run the command yast2 Note To change the language of YaST select System gt Select Language in the YaST Control Center Choose a language exit the YaST Control Center log out from your computer then log in and restart YaST Note 4 2 The YaST Control Center When you start YaST in the graphical mode the YaST Control Center as shown in Figure 4 IJon the facing page opens The left frame features the categories Software Hardware Network Devices Network Services Security amp Users System and Miscellaneous If you click one of icons the respective contents are listed on the right hand side For example if you select Hardware and click Sound to the right a configuration dialog opens for the sound card The configuration of the individual items usually comprises several steps Press Next to proceed to the following step 4 1 Starting YaST The left frame displays a help te
186. _____ 179 180 6 4 1 Dictionary Dictionary is a useful applet for checking the spelling and the meaning of words An Internet connection is required as this applet accesses an online dictionary Dictionary Edit Help Word linux v amp Look Up Word Jargon File 4 3 0 30 APR 2001 Linux lee nuhks or li nuks not li nuhks n The free Unix workalike created by Linus Torvalds and friends starting about pronunciation li nuhks is preferred because the name Linus F ee sound in Swedish Linus s family is part of Finland s 6 LI ethnic Swedish minority and Linus considers English short i tc closer to ee than English long i This may be the most remar hacker project in history an entire clone of Unix for 386 486 Pentium micros distributed for free with sources over the net Alpha and Sparc and many other machines are also in use Linux is what GNU aimed to be and it relies on the GNU toolset the Free Software Foundation didn t produce the kernel to go w cq D Lookup done Figure 6 2 GNOME Dictionary Enter the term to look up in Word The menu under Dictionary gives a choice between Look Up Word and Check Spelling By default the query is sent to the dict org server To use a different server select Edit gt Pref erences Refer to Figure 6 2 dict org allows you to choose between various databases for special vocabulari
187. a quarter of an hour the noise in the remaining time should be less than or equal to 55 dB A Workstations can be equipped with partitions sound absorbing floors appropriately wallpapered walls curtains and other sound reducing features 26 1 The Working Environment Loud working equipment such as matrix printers should be in stalled in sound absorbing cases The permissible noise levels for of fice equipment are determined in the DIN standards a An air conditioner should not increase the normal noise level Strain caused by excessive noise can also be reduced by an organiza tional restructuring of work 26 2 Office Equipment 26 2 Buying a Screen If you already have poor sharpness of vision low quality screens can make things even worse Apart from eye problems tenseness fatigue and many other disorders can be caused The latest technological developments are triniton or black matrix screens and TFT flat screens Unfortunately flat screens are still relatively expen sive There are extensive standards that regulate the readability of the de picted information When buying a screen it is recommended to study the extensive standards to avoid a wrong purchase One thing is certain a good screen is usually expensive The normal tube screens do not last for ever They only retain their focus and contrast for a few years All depicted characters should be sharply defined and clearly legible up to the e
188. a there ATAPI Advanced Technology Attachment Packet Interface ATAPI is a type of CD ROM drive that is connected to an E IDE controller Apart from ATAPI drives there are SCSI CD ROM drives handled by a SCSI controller and proprietary CD ROM drives that use their own controller or are connected to a sound card 426 backup A backup is a duplicate of data used to restore data that has been damaged or lost Backups should be done regularly especially the important files bandwidth Maximum load capacity of a data channel BIOS Small component responsible for the initialization of important hard ware processes This essential procedure is complete when the boot menu appears on the screen bookmark A mostly personal collection of interesting web page or file references directly accessible in the browser booting The sequence of computer operations from power up until the system is ready for use browser Program that searches and displays contents Today it is mostly used for programs that graphically display contents of rajworld wide web pages cache In relation to the itis rather small but still a fast mem ory buffer For example open files are saved to the cache to spare the hard disk next time the file is loaded client Workstation in a computer network operated by a command line Text based mode of operating in which commands are entered at a prompt A command line can be accessed from within a graphical en
189. a to show matching Internet addresses from the history automatically as soon as you start typing disable this feature under Smart Browsing gt Automatically complete text 14 3 Preferences typed into Location bar Alternatively configure Mozilla to auto complete addresses in the entry field itself To do so select the Ad vanced button then in the dialog Autocomplete best match as you type One of the options available in the Tabbed Browsing di alog is to have Mozilla open a new tab for a web page whenever you middle click a link Under Downloads specify how the progress of file downloads should be monitored Enabling Open the down load manager causes the browser to open the full featured down load manager dialog Open a progress dialog limits the dialog to a progress bar displayed during download Turn off all download feed back by enabling Don t open anything Privacy amp Security This is one of the most important parts of the prefer ences with a number of settings related to cookie handling and the built in password management In addition to that there is an entry in which to specify from which web sites Mozilla should accept im ages To maintain a degree of privacy it is often a good idea to accept cookies only from the server from which the requested document is received To achieve this enable Enable cookies for the originating web site only Enabling Disable cookies
190. aST then detects and configures the devices automatically Sf eam Winscalor ge Base Installation 8 Hardware Configuration wv Language w Installation Settings v Perform Installation Skip Configuration Configuration Use Following Configuration v Root Password ieee Graphics Cards v Online Update v Users NVidia RIVA TNT2 nv Connected to Monitor v Clean Up BELINEA 105035 800x600 16 bit v Release Notes 3D Acceleration Disabled b Device Configuration Printers Listen to remote CUPS servers to get comfortable access to remote queues Sound Creative Sound Blaster AudioPCI64V AudioPCI128 Configured as snd card 0 TV cards H Change vw Back Next Figure 2 19 Configuring the System Components You may skip any peripheral devices and configure them later However you should configure the graphics card right away Although the display settings as autoconfigured by YaST should be generally acceptable most users have very strong preferences as far as resolution color depth and other graphics features are concerned To change these settings select X Configuration The configuration is explained in Section 4 4 on pagel79 When finished click Finish Installation After YaST has written the configuration data you can finish the installa tion of the SUSE LINUX with Finish in the final dialog 2 7 Hardware Configuration 2 8 Graphical Login SUSE LINUX is now i
191. achine and the Post Office Protocol POP3 for downloading e mails from a mail server a The File Transfer Protocol FTP is used to transfer files For several application programs such as a web browser and an e mail program to use the same Internet connection at the same time sepa rate TCP IP connections are used for each application Large amounts of TCP IP data are also divided into small packets so HTTP packets from the web browser can be sent over its TCP IP connection while alternating with SMTP or POPS packet transfers from the e mail program via other TCP IP connections SUSE LINUX User Guide 95 96 As several applications use the same Internet connection the IP address which only identifies the machine is not sufficient A port number is needed to sort out which TCP IP data belongs to which application These standard services are usually provided on servers at the following port numbers DNS on port 53 HTTP on port 80 SMTP on port 25 and POP3 on port 110 FTP on ports 20 and 21 The client can only use services if it addresses the correct port number on the server 4 5 1 Information about the Internet Dial Up If you activate Dial on Demand or Automatic Dial Up in the YaST mod ules the Internet connection is established automatically whenever nec essary for example when an external URL is entered in the browser or when e mail is sent and fetched Dial on demand or au
192. ackage The description of the selected package is automatically active Click the other tabs to view technical data package size group etc the list of dependencies from other packages or the version informa tion 4 3 Software The Resource Window The resource window at the bottom left displays the disk space needed for your current selection of software on all currently mounted file systems The colored bar graph grows with every selection As long as it remains green there is sufficient space The bar color slowly changes to red as you approach the limit of disk space If you select too many packages for instal lation an alert is displayed The Menu Bar The menu bar at the top left of the window provides access to most of the functions described above and a number of other functions that cannot be accessed in any other way It contains the following four menus File Select File gt Export to save a list of all installed packages in a text file This is recommended if you want to replicate a specific installa tion scope at a later date or on another system A file generated in this way can be imported with Import and generates the same package selection as was saved In both cases define the location of the file or accept the suggestion To exit the package manager without sav ing changes to the package selection click Exit Discard Changes To save your changes select Quit Save Changes In this
193. age and define the desired criteria Enter a Rule Name For the new mail example mentioned above set the criterion to Status is not Read Set the sources as desired Other VFolder searches can be set similarly Click OK when finished This returns to the virtual folder list The order can be changed if desired Click OK to close it The new VFolder is in the folder list under VFolders You can read an swer and delete e mail with the VFolder However deleting the message deletes it from the real folder in which it is stored not just the VFolder 17 5 Calendar 17 5 1 Adding Appointments To add a new appointment to your calendar click New Appointment Un der the Appointment tab enter the details for the appointment Select a category if desired to ease searching and sorting later Optionally set for Evolution to provide a reminder before your appointment under the Re minder tab If the appointment occurs regularly set that under Recur rence Click Save and Close after all settings are made The new appoint ment is then shown in your calendar 17 5 2 Scheduling a Meeting To schedule a meeting with other people click New Appointment then select Actions gt Schedule Meeting Enter information as for an appoint ment Under Meeting add attendees For those in your Contacts click Invite Others and select attendees from the dialog When f
194. ages The Clone Tool The clone tool is ideal for retouching images It enables you to paint in an image using information from another part of the image If desired it can instead take information from a pattern When retouching it is usually a good idea to use a small brush with soft edges In this way the modifications can blend better with the original im age To select the source point in the image press and hold while click ing the desired source point Then paint with the tool as usual When you move the cursor while painting the source point marked by a cross moves as well If the Alignment is set to Non Aligned the default setting the source resets to the original when you release the left mouse button 24 5 4 Adjusting Color Levels Images often need a little adjusting to get ideal print or display results In many programs designed for inexperienced users the brightness and con trast levels are modified This can work and is also available in The GIMP but better results can be obtained by adjusting the color levels To do this select Layer gt Colors gt Levels A dialog opens for control ling the levels in the image Good results can usually be obtained by click ing Auto To make manual adjustments to all channels use the dropper tools in All Channels to pick black gray and white points from the image itself To modify a channel individually select the desired chan
195. ails can be found in Section on pageD2 Fixfilesystem This allows checking the file systems of your installed sys tem You are first offered a selection of all detected partitions and can then choose the ones to check Restore lost partitions It is possible to attempt a reconstruction of dam aged partition tables A list of detected hard disks is presented first for selection Clicking OK starts the examination This can take a while depending on the processing power and size of the hard disk E Note The reconstruction of a partition table is tricky YaST attempts to recognize lost partitions by analyzing the data sectors of the hard disk The lost partitions are added to the rebuilt partition table upon successful recognition This is however not successful in all imaginable cases Note l Save system settings to disk This option allows saving important system files to a floppy disk Should one of these files become damaged it can be restored from disk Check installed software This checks the consistency of the package database and the availability of the most important packages Any damaged installed packages can be reinstalled with this tool SUSE LINUX User Guide Joda LJUSISAS ISOA 49 Part Il Configuration YaST Configuration YaST the setup tool used for the installation is also the configuration tool for SUSE LINUX This chapter covers the configuration of your system with YaST This in
196. amera Help ole ej al Index Settings F View Thumbnails E HS E ES Olympus C 2100UZ 0 J Eh fa DCIM 0 mh 1000LYMP 5 P8280005 Figure 22 1 The Main Window of gtKam Connect your camera to the appropriate port and turn on the camera Start gtKam with the command gtkam amp From the menu select Camera gt Select Camera In the dialog that opens select the camera model or use Detect Select the appropriate port if the detection fails The main gtKam window is divided into three sections the menu and toolbars the left pane with index settings and camera and directory se lection and the right pane for displaying an index listing with or without thumbnails The icons in the toolbar provide the main functions needed The disk icon saves the selected images The trash icon deletes them The icon with the arrows loads the image index displayed in the right pane The icon with the paper and pencil opens the camera configuration options The door icon exits the program Your camera should be listed in the left pane Use the plus sign to the left to expand the tree display of the directory structure Your exact direc tory structure depends on the camera type and model Continue expanding SUSE LINUX User Guide xnur pub spJeuupo orpq 347 348 until you reach the entries that cannot be expanded These are the index listings of the pictures Click an item to select it I
197. an eye dropper With the tool options set whether the foreground or background color should be selected Then click a point in the image that shows the desired color When the color is right click Close to close the tool s dialog Painting and Erasing To paint and erase use the tools from the toolbox There are a number of options available to fine tune each tool Pressure sensitivity options apply only when a pressure sensitive graphics tablet is used The pencil brush airbrush and eraser work much like their real life equiv alents The ink tool works like a calligraphy pen Paint by clicking and dragging The bucket fill is a method of coloring areas of an image It fills based on color boundaries in the image Adjusting the threshold modifies its sensitivity to color changes Adding Text With the text tool easily add text to an image With the tool options select the desired font font size color justification indent and line spacing Then click a starting point in the image A small dialog opens in which to enter your text Enter single or multiple lines of text then press Close 24 5 Editing Images Basics The text tool creates text on a special layer To work with the image after adding text read Section 24 6 1 on the following page When the text layer is active it is possible to modify the text by clicking in the image to reopen the entry dialog Change the settings by modifying the tool options Retouching Im
198. and Import To avoid being asked repeatedly about whether you trust the key and as sume that this key is really used by its authorized owner edit the trust level of the newly imported key By default a newly imported key always ap pears with a instead of a setting regarding the trust level Right click the newly imported key to access a small context menu for the key management Select Edit Key KGpg opens a text console in which to set the trust level by means of a few commands At the prompt of the text console Command gt enter t rust Now assign a value between 1 and 5 indicating how much you trust that the signers of the imported key have checked the true identity of the owner of this key Enter the selected value at the prompt Your decision If you are sure enter 5 Answer the following question by entering y Finally enter quit to exit the console and return to the list of keys The key now has the trust level Ultimate 15 2 2 Exporting Your Keys to a Key Server To export your key to one of the freely accessible key servers on the Inter net select Export in the key server dialog Designate the target server and the key to export by means of two drop down menus Then start the export with Export 15 2 The Key Server Dialog Import Export Key server hkp subkeys pgp net Key to be exported 0x1F47FFAD Tux Pinguin lt tux example com y X Export attributes photo id Fig
199. and deselecting software packages in this dialog alerts about unresolved package dependencies or conflicts may be displayed If you install SUSE LINUX for the first time or if you do not understand the alerts read Section 4 3 4 on page 59 which provides detailed information about the operation of the package manager and a brief summary of the software organization in Linux SUSE LINUX User Guide UOIO OJSU LUOJSND 31 32 M Caution The software preselected for installation is based on long standing experience and is usually suitable for the needs of most newcomers and advanced home users In general there is no need to change any thing here However if you decide to select or deselect any packages you should be aware of the consequences In particular observe any warnings and avoid deselecting any packages of the base system Caution Exiting the Software Selection When satisfied with your software selection and there are no more un resolved package dependencies or conflicts click Accept to apply your changes and exit the program If this module is started in the installed sys tem the changes are applied immediately During the installation how ever the changes are recorded internally and applied later when the actual installation starts 2 5 7 Boot Configuration Boot Loader Installation During the installation YaST proposes a boot configuration for your sys tem Normally you should leave
200. and partitions the hard disk accordingly 2 5 5 Expert Partitioning with YaST With the expert dialog shown in FigureD 8 on the next page manually modify the partitioning of your hard disk Partitions can be added deleted or edited All existing or suggested partitions on all connected hard disks are dis played in the list of the expert dialog Entire hard disks are listed as devices without numbers such as dev hda or dev sda Partitions are listed as parts of these devices such as dev hda1 or dev sdal The size type file system and mount point of the hard disks and their partitions are also displayed The mount point describes where the partition is mounted in the Linux file system tree 2 5 Installation Suggestion YaS Winssaner e Partition your hard disks Expert Partitioner This is intended for experts If you are notfamiliar with the concepts of hard disk Size E Type Mount Start End Usedby Label partitions and how to use 9 GI FIREBALL TM2110S 0 2 them you might wantto go dev sdal 19GB Win95FAT32LBA 0 248 Back Bndiselact a Licet devisdb 85GB DNES 309170W 0 114 paniioning devisdbl 196GB Linux native 0 254 Please note that nothing devisdb2 656GB Extended 255 1114 will be written to your devisdbS 235 MB Linux native 255 257 hard disk until you devisdb6 258 8MB Linux swap swap 258 290 confirm the entire devisdb7 25GB Linux native 291 617 installation in the last devisdb8 38GB Linux native 618 1
201. articular application and you should be able to print from applica tions using the available queues Printing from the Command Line Print from the command line using the command 1pr Plp filename where filename is the name of the file to send to the printer In this example the default printer queue 1p is used but the P option allows you to specify another queue For instance the command 1pr Pcolor filename tells the printing system to use the color queue Using the LPRng Printing System With this printing system applica tions use the 1pr command for printing In the application select the name of an existing queue such as color or enter the respective print command such as lpr Pcolor in the print dialog of the ap plication Using the CUPS Printing System The CUPS printing system provides command line tools such as the 1pr command so the approach as described above works with CUPS too To enable the above for KDE programas it is necessary to use the Print through an external pro gram option in the print dialog There are also several graphical tools such as xpp and the KDE program kprinter which provide SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 77 78 a graphical interface to choose among queues and to change both CUPS standard options and printer specific options as made available through the PPD file If desired configure applications to use kprinter as the standard printing interface by specifying kprinter or kpri
202. artitioning disks and proposesthe displayed partition setup for your hard drive Format Partition dev sdb8 3 8 GB for with reiser You can continue with this Format Partition dev sdb6 258 8 MB for swap proposal based on YaST s Format Partition Jdev sdb5 23 5 MB for boot with ext2 ideas Activate the second radio button in this case It YaST s suggestion does not fit your intentions create your own partition setup starting with the partitions as currently present on the disks Activate the third radio button in this case This is also the option to choose for advanced options like RAID and LVM Choose Accept proposal asis Base partition setup on this proposal Create custom partition setup Abort Back Next Figure 2 6 Editing the Partitioning Setup Setup the Expert Partitioner opens It allows you to tweak the partition setup in every detail This dialog is explained in Section on the next page The original setup as proposed by YaST is offered there as a starting point If you select Create custom partitioning setup a dialog like that in Fig ureD 7 on the following page opens in which to select a hard disk from those on your system SUSE LINUX will be installed on the disk selected in this dialog The next step is to determine whether the entire disk should be used Use entire hard disk or whether to use any existing partitions if available for the installation If a Windows operating
203. artitioning are provided in the Administration Guide 2 5 6 Software SUSE LINUX contains a number of software packages for various applica tion purposes As it would be burdensome to select the needed packages one by one SUSE LINUX offers three system types with various instal lation scopes Depending on the available disk space YaST selects one of these basic systems and displays it in the suggestion screen Minimum System only recommended for special purposes This installs the operating system with various services without the graphical user interface The machine can only be operated by way of the ASCII consoles This system type is especially suitable for server applications requiring little direct user interaction Minimum Graphical System without KDE If you do not want the KDE desktop or if the disk space is insuffi cient install this system type The installed system includes an ele mentary graphical user interface with terminal windows but no real desktop with the usual functionality You can use all programs that have their own graphical user interfaces such as Netscape No office programs are installed SUSE LINUX User Guide UOID OJSU LUOJSND 29 30 Default System with KDE and office package This is the largest of all offered basic systems It contains the KDE desktop together with most of the KDE programs and the office pro grams This is the most suitable system type for normal stand al
204. as or blanks Enter the user name and password received from your provider Then click Next To use Dial on demand see page 4 5 1 on page 96 if you have a stand alone system enter a name server Most providers today support dynamic DNS assignment so a current IP address is forwarded to the name server each time the connection is set up However a suitable dummy name server IP must be entered in this dialog for example 192 168 22 99 If you do not receive a dynamic name server assignment enter the IP ad dresses of the name servers of your provider here Also set the time after which the connection should be terminated automatically if no data ex change has occurred Finally confirm your settings with Next to continue to the overview of the configured interfaces Activate your settings with Finish 4 6 Network Services This group mostly contains tools for professionals and system adminis trators If you have SUSE LINUX Personal Edition some of the tools cov ered in this section are not available as they are only installed in the Profes sional Edition E Note The tools LDAP Client NIS Server NIS Client NIS Client and Proxy are not addressed here as these are genuine expert tools that are usually only used in company networks More information about these modules is provided in the Administration Guide Note 4 6 Network Services 4 6 1 Host Name and DNS The
205. at in which to save the image To save all the future images in that same format check the corresponding box Con firm with OK 23 4 The Menus Some of the functions of the toolbar are also available in the File and Im age menus Modify preference settings for Kooka in Settings File Use this menu to start the KPrinter printing assistant to create a new folder for your images and to save delete and close files The OCR SUSE LINUX User Guide uouooigddy Guiuupo2s v O 00y 353 Eile Image Settings Help cESAJIDA Y Kola Oa al fia Image Viewer Q Scan Preview Preview Scan Size Image Name Size Format 5 tems skscan_0001 bmp 838 5kB BMP skscan_0001jpeg632 8kB JPEG kscan 0002jpeg 1103kB JPEG skscan_0003jpeg 630kB JPEG keran OMMAinen 181MR PER S u S E Linux 4 4 1 Ins vit Custom o FIC amo x Gallery rAutoselection O active on black scanner background r3 Threshold Scanner Settings AGFA SNAPSCAN 1236U Scan mode f Color m Selection 3j Halftone pattern DispersedDot8x8 width 33 mm Resolution 600 B height 33 mm Ts a E aw Size 613 3 kB FinalScan J PreviewScan Figure 23 2 The Kooka Preview Window results of a scanned text document can be saved here Also use this menu to close Kooka Image The Image menu allow
206. ation of your hardware to make sure the value set can be displayed Expert In addition to the resolutions offered in the previous tab this tab enables you to add your own resolutions which will subse quently be included for selection in the tab SUSE LINUX User Guide 83 84 Colors Resolution s for 65536 16 bit colors Expert Select resolutions i C 16001200 i C 1600x1024 C 1600x1000 1400x1050 O 1280x1024 O 1280x960 C 1152x864 C 1024x768 c DC NNNM NN E 640x480 Graphics engine starts with resolution 800x600 Ok Cancel utm lA Figure 4 12 Configuring the Resolution Virtual Resolution Every desktop has a certain resolution that is displayed over the full screen of the monitor Additionally it is possible to set the resolution larger than the visible area of the screen If you move the mouse beyond the margins of the desktop the virtual part of the desktop is displayed on screen This increases the available work space The virtual resolution can be set in two different ways By Drag amp Drop Move the mouse pointer over the monitor image and the mouse will turn into crosshairs Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the mouse to enlarge the raster image which cor responds with the virtual resolution This method is best if you are not quite sure how much virtual space you want on your desktop By selection from the pop up me
207. automatically runs on a daily basis or after booting gen erates a database locatedb where the location of each file on your computer is stored locatedb can be searched by running the 1ocate command If you select Nobody any user can find only the paths in the database that can be seen by any other unprivileged user If root is selected all local files are indexed because the user root as superuser may access all directories Finally make sure the option Current directory in root s path is de activated default Press Finish to complete your security configuration 4 7 4 Firewall Use this module to configure SuSEfirewall2 to protect your machine against attacks from the Internet When the module is started four dialogs appear consecutively In the first dialog select the interface to protect See Fig ure 4 26 on page 116 External interface is the interface facing the Internet Internal interface is only required if you are located in an internal network and intend to use the firewall to protect your computer against internal at tacks In this case your computer would be in a demilitarized zone DMZ Normally a configuration with DMZ is only used for company networks After selecting your interface activate the individual services of your com puter for which to allow access from the Internet See Figure If you do 4 7 Security and Users Ya SYVinscalor l ge With this module chan
208. ave and Print Close closes the current image Quit closes the entire application With the items in the View menu control the display of the image and the image window New View opens a second display window of the cur rent image Changes made in one view are reflected in all other views of that image Alternate views are useful for magnifying a part of an image for manipulation while seeing the complete image in another view Adjust the magnification level of the current window with Zoom When Shrink Wrap is selected the image window is resized to fit the current image dis play exactly 24 4 Saving Images No image function is as important as File gt Save It is better to save too often than too rarely Use File gt Save as to save the image with a new file name It is a good idea to save image stages under different names or make backups in another directory so you can easily restore a previous state When saving for the first time or using Save as a dialog opens in which to specify the file name and type The current directory in shown in a box cen tered above the two columns Select another directory by double clicking it in Folders To save the image as an existing file select it in Files Oth erwise enter a new name in the field at the bottom It is recommended to leave Determine File Type set to By Extension With that setting GIMP determin
209. ays be created with Create Plugin unless you use AlsaModularSynth 19 11 AlsaModularsynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor Available Ladspa Plugins t bode shifter 1431 IE i Bode frequency shifter bode shifter cv 1432 AS ode frequency shifter CV chebstortion 1430 i Chebyshev distortion cmt t comb 1190 ll cry Bode Search Label bodeShifterCW Author Steve Harris lt steve plugin org uk gt Copyright GPL Create Plugin Create Poly Plugin Figure 19 18 The Ladspa Browser as a polyphonic synthesizer Create Poly Plugin generates a separate plug in instance for each part 19 11 3 AlsaModularSynth as a Synthesizer After having used the MIDI patchbay kaconnect to connect AlsaModu larsynth with a master keyboard vkeybd or an external keyboard you can use the program as a synthesizer If polyphony is not explicitly ac tivated with the parameter po1y AlsaModularSynth will be mono phonic just like its classical model The envelope modules are single triggered as is often the case with analog synthesizers This means that they are not restarted during legato play This allows interesting phrasing Multitriggering is activated by connecting the trigger output signal of the MCV module to the retrigger input port of the envelope module A few LADSPA plug ins greatly enhance the virtual analog sound of Al saModularSynth The plug ins Saw VCO Mvelpf 3 Mvclpf 4 a
210. ball in side a stationary casing to control the mouse pointer In contrast to the mouse the trackball reduces the movements in the hand and arm area 26 3 Links and Literature A great manual for staff members and superiors with many checklists and questionnaires that also take the mental strain into account Burmester M G rner C Hacker W K rcher M and others 1997 The SANUS Manual SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 413 EU compliant Screen Work research FB 760 Berlin Series of the Fed eral Office for Work Protection and Work Medicine SANUS Safety and health protection for terminal work on the basis of international standards A clear and well structured guide for analysis and work protection tasks around the terminal workstation Richenhagen G Pr mper J amp Wagner J 1998 2nd edition Handbuch der Bildschirmarbeit trans Manual of terminal work Neuwied Luchter hand Information Network of the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work Available in many languages comprehensive information 414 263 Links and Literature Help and Documentation The SUSE Help Center provides central access to the most important docu mentation resources on your system in searchable form These resources in clude all manuals enclosed with your product online help for the installed applications and databases on hardware and software issues in connection with SUSE LINUX Using the SUSE Help C
211. be entered If it is entered during playback of the welcome message the user is taken to the remote access menu The remote access feature is disabled if the field is left empty OK accepts the changes Cancel closes the dialog without applying any changes 18 2 Usage The following section briefly describes the use of the system Following a short introduction to the reception of messages with the Linux mail system a description is provided for the operation of the fax functionality and the answering machine 18 2 1 General Notes about Reception The development of CapiSuite heavily relied on using already existing ca pabilities of Linux This is why the delivery of incoming faxes and voice messages is handled by the internal Linux mail system instead of propri etary applications and protocols This requires the configuration of a mail client for receiving local messages for each user of CapiSuite For details read the chapter about the mail pro gram or the documentation provided with the application Follow these steps to activate reception of local e mail messages in KMail Start KMail as usual Select Settings gt Configure KMail 18 2 Usage Click the network icon in the list to the left Select the Receiving tab Reception is already configured if an entry with the type local is already present in the list The dialog can be closed with Cancel in that case If not clic
212. ble bandwidth RAM Random Access Memory See rajmain memory ReiserFS A file system that logs its changes to a journal Compared to Ext2 this features allows a file system to be restored very speedily ReiserFS is optimized for small files root The user undertaking the configuration and maintenance of a com plex computer system such as a network This system administrator is usually the only person who has access to all parts of the system root permissions root directory The base directory of the file system that does not have any parent directory all other directories have a parent directory In UNIX the root directory is represented as a SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface Hard disk standard implemented in servers and other high level machines because of its high speed performance See SUSE LINUX User Guide 433 434 server A server is usually a rather powerful computer that offers services such as HTTP DNS and FTP or data to other machines connected via a network There are also programs called servers like the shell An especially flexible command line often equipped with its own specific programming language Examples of shells are Bash sh and tcsh SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol s Protocol for transferring vsje mails SSL Secure Socket Layer Encryption procedure for transferring HTTP data superuser See system administrator See task See proces TCP IP
213. bout the mouse type After selecting a mouse type use D to test whether the device works correctly without selecting it per manently If the mouse does not behave as expected use the keyboard to select another type and test again Use and to make the current selection permanent 2 5 4 Partitioning In most cases YaST proposes a reasonable partitioning scheme that can be accepted without change If desired modify this scheme to meet your needs or create a new one 2 5 Installation Suggestion Partition Types Every hard disk has a partition table with space for four entries Fach entry in the partition table can be a primary partition or an extended partition Only one extended partition entry is allowed however Primary partitions consist of a continuous range of cylinders physical disk areas assigned to a particular operating system Using primary partitions you could not set up more than four partitions per hard disk More do not fit in the partition table This is why extended partitions are used Extended partitions are also con tinuous ranges of disk cylinders but an extended partition may itself be subdivided into logical partitions Logical partitions do not require entries in the partition table In other words an extended partition is a container for logical partitions If you need more than four partitions create an extended partition This extended partition should span the entire remaining free cylinder range
214. boxes in the overview Upon completion of the search configuration click Search The relevant items are then displayed in the view window and can easily be navigated with mouse clicks SUSE LINUX FAQ OVv4 XANI ISNS This section provides answers to frequently asked questions 1 I am the only person using my computer Why do I always need to log in Linux is a multiuser system A user name and a password are neces sary so Linux knows who is working with it Only log in as root to make changes to your system installing software or changing config uration For everyday use create a regular user This prevents acci dental damage to the installation 2 Where can I find the SUSE manuals in PDF or HTML format Our manuals are also available on our CDs The PDF files or HTML versions are available in the packages suselinux adminguide_en and suselinux userguide en In the installed system go to the directory usr share doc packages suselinux adminguide en or usr share doc packages suselinux userguide en 3 Where can I get more information about SUSE LINUX Most of the information about the installation and features of SUSE LINUX is provided in the manuals Documentation for applications is available in usr share doc packages and the HowTos are located in usr share doc howto en Read these files with a command like less usr share doc howto en DOS to Linux HOWTO txt gz Terminate the command by pressing
215. by means of the timidity ap plication To enable all users on your system to execute timidity with root privileges modify the file etc sudoers See and for the proce dure If you are not familiar with vi select a different editor such as joe by exporting the desired editor for example with the command export EDITOR joe Then execute visudo as root and append the following line at the end of the file etc sudoers ALL ALL ALL usr bin timidity Now all system users are permitted to run timidity in root mode with the command sudo timidity The password of the respective user is requested if more than five minutes passed since the last sudo command SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 309 310 19 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit Using the JACK Audio Connection Kit packages named jack and qjackconnect applications can exchange audio data with each other and with the sound card This is only possible if the respective applica tion has a JACK interface JACK support has become a standard feature so there are many applications that have the needed interface File About alsa pcm l ams 129 0 i monitor 1 i capture 1 capture 2 Readable Clients Ports Writeable Clients Ports 7 8lsa pcm i uplayback_1 jo playback 2 ams 129 0 Pon ID4 1 bridge 25018 t meter 1 Connect Disconnect Show All Ports Hide All Ports CPU load 12 87 Sample rate 48000 Figure 19 9
216. can also run the YaST Online Update from the command line of a console win dow The desired actions are in this case passed as command line param eters online update command line parameter The available pa rameters are displayed in the following list along with their purpose SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 57 58 u g i c P v a n S VaS Winstaler Ae the easy way to get all YaST Online Update You is Welcome to YaST Online Update recommended patches and security fixes from a SuSE update server If Manually Select Patches is checked all available patches will be shown from which to select the patches to install If Reload All Patches from Server is checked all patches will be fetched from the server even when they already are locally available from a previous download After clicking New Server select a local installation source instead of an FTP or HTTP server or select another FTP or HTTP server Click Edit Server to edit the location of the selected server Clicking Configure Fully Automatic Update opens a dialog in which to configure YOU ta check for undates ance LY System Information There was no update executed up to now Product SuSE Linux Version 9 0 42 Base Architecture i386 Update Configuration Installation source USAS Location zj ftp download sourceforge net pub mirrors su
217. can switch from CUPS to LPRng and back at any time To do so select Change gt Advanced in the YaST printer configuration module Then select either printing system and configure it Note Automatic Configuration YaST configures the printer automatically if these requirements are met 1 The parallel or USB port can be set up automatically in the correct way and the connected printer can be autodetected 4 4 Hardware 2 The ID string of the printer as supplied to YaST during hardware au todetection is included in the printer database As this ID may be different from the actual name of the model you may need to select the model manually To make sure everything works properly each configuration should be checked with the print test function of YaST The YaST test page also pro vides important information about the configuration selected Manual Configuration If one of the requirements for automatic configuration is not met or if you want a custom setup configure the printer manually Depending on how successful the autodetection is and how much information about the printer model is found in the database YaST may be able to determine the right settings automatically or at least make a reasonable preselection The following parameters must be configured Hardware Connection Port The configuration of the hardware connec tion depends on whether YaST has been able to find the printer dur ing hardware
218. ccess from multiple applications If a sound application freezes this might be the cause Note 19 2 1 gamix If you have multiple sound cards gamix provides a set of controllers for each card Slide the control sliders to set the levels as desired Prog Sound Blaster 16 CTL1745 Input Gain PC MIC Synth PCM Output Master Tone Auto Speaker Gain Control Gain Con BST trol Lal EE Fl Lock Lock Lock 7 Lock T Lock Figure 19 1 The Mixer gamix 19 2 2 qamix QAMix is a mixer with a QT interface If necessary the application interface can be configured in a flexible way in an XML file All parameters can be controlled via MIDI On start up the application first searches the directory qamix for an XML file corresponding to the name of the ALSA driver of your sound card If such a file does not exist it searches the same direc tory for the file default xml If this file does not exist either the program continues its search in the directory usr share gamix If you have several sound cards select the desired card with the parameter c hw 0 stands for the first sound card hw 1 for the second and so on SUSE LINUX User Guide xnu ui PUNOS 301 302 The parameter g can be used to specify a file for the XML description of the application interface explicitly Detailed information about the XML format is available in the directory usr share doc packages
219. ce and Microsoft Office formats available After selecting a format click Next then specify where OpenOffice org should look for documents to convert and in which directory the converted files should be placed Before continuing make sure all other settings are appropriate Note Documents from a Windows partition are usually in a subdirectory of windows Note Click Next to see a summary of the actions to perform which gives an other opportunity to check whether all settings are correct Finally start the conversion by clicking Convert 7 5 Changing the Global Settings Global settings can be changed by selecting Tools gt Options This opens the window shown in Figure 7 2 on the facing page A tree structure is used to display categories of settings OpenOffice org This entry covers various basic settings This includes your user data like your address and e mail important paths and settings for printers and external programs 7 4 Converting Microsoft Office Documents OpenOffice org User Data E Read m Memory um he 3 Print External Programs Paths gt Colors sE Font Replacement lt I No automatic postonng E Paste clipboard y e cm me m Chart El Data Sources LI Li Iv mi i M M Figure 7 2 The Options Dialog Load Save This entry includes settings related to the opening and sav ing of several file t
220. ce on your machine select Start New Session from the main menu Your current session remains active while you are taken to the lo gin screen Log in You can also start another window manager Ac cess the first session by pressing F7 Press F8 instead of to access the new session Additional sessions can be accessed by pressing Ctrl Alf F9 to F12 Run Command Enter a command in the dialog that opens In this way easily start applications whose name you know without having to navigate through the menu Bookmarks By way of this menu start the bookmark editor with Edit Bookmarks to manage your bookmarks If you select a bookmark from the menu the browser starts and loads the desired URL Search Search starts the program KFind Use Help to access the pro gram manual which provides information about all details If you forget where a certain file is enter it in the Named field and start a search in your home directory This default setting can be changed to a different directory such as Documents by clicking Browse If you are not sure what the exact file name is use wild cards If you can remember that the file name contains the character string blubb simply enter blubb This tells the program that blubb can be pre ceded and followed by any characters Use the tabs at the top left of the window to change to Contents and Properties In Contents use File type
221. cessing a Print Job 1 The user or an application generates a new print job 2 The print data is temporarily stored in the print queue The print spooler sends it from there to the printer filter 3 Now the printer filter performs the following steps a It determines the type of print data b The print data is converted into PostScript if not in PostScript already ASCII text for example is normally converted into PostScript by the filter program Q2ps SUSE LINUX User Guide 71 72 c If necessary the PostScript data is converted to another printer language f the printer is a PostScript model the PostScript data is sent directly to the printer f the printer is not a PostScript model Ghostscript uses a driver suitable for the respective printer to generate the printer specific data that is subsequently sent to the printer 4 After the entire print job has been sent to the printer the print spooler removes the print job from the print queue Available Printing Systems SUSE LINUX supports two different printing systems LPRng and Ipdfilter This is a traditional printing system that consists of the print spooler LPRng and the printer filter lpdfilter The entire con figuration of this printing system is left to the system administrator Regular users can only choose between the different print queues that have already been set up To allow users to choose between different options for a given print
222. ch page When finished view the presentation by selecting Slide Show gt Slide Show To advance to the next page during the show click To exit from it press Esc Refer to the help system of OpenOffice org to learn more 7 9 2 Adding a Slide To add another slide to your presentation select Insert gt Slide This opens the dialog window shown in Figure 7 11 Enter a name for the slide and determine which of the predefined layouts to use Then click OK to insert the slide or Cancel to abort the procedure To use templates select File gt New gt From Template Figure 7 11 Inserting Slides in Impress SUSE LINUX User Guide SLINS SOO 810 eoyjouedo SUI 201 The KWrite Text Editor KWrite can be used to write simple texts or lists As well as text editing KWrite can also be used to view and edit various different types of source code or HTML with syntax highlighting This chapter provides a brief overview of the main features of KWrite introducing the main menus and tools Q 204 205 eese dus u enka ces 5 206 TERT 207 DS eae A irae Acetone d EUR 207 T 207 Serene er rere TT E RE 208 Tm 208 JOJlp3 4X01 ei Moi eui 204 Start KWrite from the main menu or using the command kwrite The command can be entered on the command line together with the name of the file to open As well as using t
223. click Add Click Next to access the assistant Enter your name and your e mail ad dress in the respective fields Additional addresses can be configured later Click Next Select the appropriate incoming e mail format for this address in Server Type POP is the most common format for downloading mail from a re mote server IMAP works with mail folders on a special server Obtain this information from your ISP or server administrator Complete the other rel evant fields displayed when the server type is selected Click Next when finished The next set of information to enter is about mail delivery This is used for all configured e mail addresses To submit outgoing e mail on the local sys tem select Sendmail For a remote server select SMTP Get the details from your ISP or server administrator For SMTP complete the other fields displayed after selection Click Next when finished By default the e mail address is used as the name to identify the account Enter another name if desired The field Make this my default account de termines whether the account should be used as the default The default ac count is the e mail address initially selected for sending e mail Another ac count can be selected in the message composition window if desired Click Next The time zone information from the next window is used for the calendar functions It is important to select the
224. cludes most of the hardware the graphical user interface Internet access security settings user administration installation of soft ware system updates and system information This chapter also provides instructions for using YaST in text mode 41 Starting YaST s e seene RE as m 54 4 2 The YaST Control Center 54 a ae a 55 exh Mla al e ee eae 70 45 Network Devices 0 000000 94 4 6 Network Services 0 000000 4 106 47 Security and Users o oo 110 5 SOystem coc d eed nde e d ot dex do 115 49 Miscellaneous llle 127 4 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses 129 uouounByuo2 ISOA 54 4 1 Starting YaST System configuration with YaST uses various YaST modules serving dif ferent purposes such as the configuration of the keyboard or the selec tion of the system language These modules can be accessed in various ways An overview of all modules is available in the YaST Control Cen ter which can be started from the SUSE menu the SUSE icon at the bot tom left of your KDE panel Select SUSE gt System gt YaST The indi vidual modules can also be accessed from the KDE Control Center If you use KDE you can also start YaST by pressing F2 In the window that opens enter kdesu sbin yast2 and confirm with Enter If you do not want to start the graphical version of YaST enter sbin yast in stead of sbin yast2
225. contains suitable default values for the di mensions of the touchscreen Normally no additional configuration is required Graphics Tablet Currently XFree86 only supports a limited number of graphics tablets SaX2 enables the configuration of graphics tablets connected to the USB port or the serial port From the configuration perspective a graphics tablet is just an input device like a mouse Start SaX2 and select Input devices gt Graphics tablet Click Add select the vendor from the following dialog and add a graphics tablet from the selection list Mark the check boxes to the right if you have connected a pen or eraser If your tablet is connected to the se rial port verify the port dev ttyS0 refers to the first serial port dev ttyS1 refers to the second Additional ports use similar nota tion Save the configuration by clicking Finish SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 87 AccessX If you do not use a mouse on your computer start SAX2 and activate Ac cessX to be able to control the mouse pointer with the keys on the numeric keypad See Table 1 1 Table 4 1 AccessX Operating the Mouse with the Numeric Keypad Key description E selects the left mouse button GO selects the middle mouse button O selects the right mouse button 5 invokes a click event of the previously selected mouse but ton The left mouse button is preset if no other button was selected T
226. cord The following access per missions are granted rws x 1 root users 281356 2004 03 12 21 30 cdrecord By means of the setuid bit all users belonging to the group users can use the program In effect this means that the program is executed as root 25 2 Users and Access Permissions Caution Setting the setuid bit for a program makes your computer more vulner able to attacks Only do this in exceptional cases when you know the program well and are aware of the potential risks Caution l 25 2 4 The setgid Bit The setuid attribute applies to users However there is also an equiva lent property for groups the setgid attribute A program for which this attribute was set runs under the group ID under which it was saved no matter which user starts it Therefore in a directory with the setgid bit all newly created files and subdirectories are assigned to the group to which the directory belongs Consider the following example directory drwxrwxr 2 root archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup Set the setuid bit with the command chmod g s test Subsequently the access permissions appear as follows drwxrwxr 2 root archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup 25 2 5 The Sticky Bit There is also the sticky bit It makes a difference whether it belongs to an executable program or a directory If it belongs to a program a file marked in this way will be loaded to the RAM to avoid needing to get it from the hard disk each time
227. correct time zone for using the ap pointment scheduling functions Click the dot on the map for a city in your time zone Selection zooms the display to that area and a change can be made if desired When the correct time zone is displayed under Selection click Next In the next window click Finish to save the data entered Use Back to make changes 17 2 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs Evolution can import e mail from other e mail programs such as Netscape or KMail To do so select File gt Import For KMail or mutt 17 1 Starting Evolution select Import a single file For Netscape select Import data and settings from older programs Get more information with Help 17 3 Evolution Overview The default window view is shown in Figure The available menus menu items and the icons in the toolbar vary from window to window Use the Shortcuts panel to the left to select the information to display in the right panel Adjust the size of any panels by dragging the dividing bars Use View to remove the Shortcuts Bar or add a Folder Bar at any time The different items listed in Shortcuts are described in the following File View Actions Tools Help 1 O New v Qi sena Receive El Print Reload pere ECT ic 9 Wednesday May 7 2003 Summary My Weather 3 Qv Mail summary Boston Dutbox 0 0 Overcast Moderate m
228. cted for Update In case several versions of SUSE LINUX are installed on your system this item enables selection of a partition for the update from the list Update Options Here set the update method for your system Two options are available See Figure 4 7 on page 69 Update with Installation of New Software To update the entire system to the latest software versions select one SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 67 68 eam Winstaler cre Use Accept to perform an update i s with the values displayed Installation Settings Change the values by clicking on the respective headline or by using the Change menu Click any headline to make changes or usethe Change menu below Update Options t Your hard disk has not been modified in any way so you can still safely abort Update to SuSE Linux 9 0 42 Only Update Packages Affected Packages 2 Backup Create Backup of Modified Files Create Backup of etc sysconfig Directory Language English US Mtn imanni Change w Abort Figure 4 6 Suggestion Dialog for Updates of the predefined selections These selections are the same as those offered during the installation They make sure new packages that did not exist previously are also installed Only Update Installed Packages This option merely updates packages that already exist on the system No new features will be installed Additionally yo
229. ction if you change the basic selection might not function anymore Active Delete Unmaintained Packages to delete those packages during the update Cancel Accept UOILOINBWUOD ISOA Figure 4 7 Update Options Backup During the update the configuration files of some packages may be re placed by those of the new version As you may have modified some of the files in your current system the package manager normally makes backup copies of the replaced files With this dialog determine the scope of these backups Caution This backup does not include the software It only contains configura tion files Caution _ Important Information about Updates The system update is a very complex procedure For each program pack age YaST must check which version is installed on the computer and what needs to be done to replace the old version with the new version correctly YaST also tries to adopt any personal settings of the installed packages However some configurations may cause problems after the update if the SUSE LINUX User Guide 69 70 old configuration is unable to handle the new program version as expected or if unexpected inconsistencies arise between various configurations The older the existing version is and the more the configuration of the packages to update diverges from the standard the more problematic the update will be Sometimes the old configuration cannot be adopted cor r
230. ctions gt New Event Enter the de sired details Under Reminder specify the exact time minutes hours or days in advance at which the attendees should be reminded of the event If an event recurs specify the interval Another way to create an event at a specific point in the calendar is to double click the corresponding field in one of the program s calendar views This opens the same dialog window as that available from the menu Specify the attendees of an event by entering their data manually in the dialog or by inserting data from the address book To enter such data man ually select New To import data from the address book select Address Book then the corresponding entry from the dialog 10 3 2 Attendees Participants for a schedule item are listed under Attendees in the item view Sort the attendee list by clicking the column header of the value by which to sort To add an attendee for an item click New Then enter the name in Name and the e mail address in the field below Use Address Book to query the address book and select entries from it In Role de fine the function of an attendee observer chair participant which can 10 3 Using the Calendar General Attendees Recurrence Attachments Tile Meeting Location p Date amp Tim oso32004 3 3 Start 05 03 200 jle End 05 03 2004 j l23
231. cylinder to hold the kernel and the boot loader Also create a swap partition of approximately 256 MB then use the rest for the root partition For more than 4 GB Boot boot swap root 250 MB home directories home with about 200 MB for each user and the rest for programs and data usr You may also reserve an extra partition each for opt and var Some commercial programs install their data in opt If necessary create a separate partition for opt or make the root partition large enough KDE and GNOME are also installed in opt ik Note Things should be fine if your partitioning setup is similar to that pro posed by YaST This is usually a small partition for boot at the begin ning of the hard disk about 10 MB or 1 cylinder on a large hard disk a swap partition between 128 and 256 MB and the rest for Note Partitioning with YaST When you select the partitioning item in the suggestion window for the first time YaST displays a dialog listing the partition settings as currently proposed Accept these current settings without change or change them before continuing Alternatively discard all the settings and start over from scratch Nothing in the partitioning setup is changed if you select Accept Sug gested Partitioning Setup If you select Change Suggested Partitioning 2 5 Installation Suggestion Y aS Ninscanor 6 suse YaST has checked your hard Suggested P
232. d DVD drives because otherwise you will not be able to eject the CD You can also select Eject which causes the medium to be unmounted and ejected Both methods only work if the CD or DVD is no longer accessed and any file manager window displaying the content of the CD or DVD has been closed 5 1 4 The Printer Icon Click the printer icon on the desktop to start KPrinter This program en ables you to adjust a number of settings and send print jobs directly The upper part of the main window like that in Figure 5 I on the facing page shows the selected printer and allows selection of a different printer Click the black arrow next to the printer name to display a list of all available printers and select the desired printer To configure the selected printer click Properties A configuration dialog like that shown in Figure 5 2 on page 138 opens enabling you to change the paper format e g from A4 to letter or change between multiple paper trays The latter is especially useful if one of the trays contains letterhead paper and another contains plain white paper 5 1 Desktop Components r Printer Name JUYJLZ J 3 Properties State Idle accepting jobs m Type prnigang Location 3 Etage Raum neben Teek che N Comment HP Laserjet 4050 Series PS z E U E D Files Copies Advanced Options Additional Tags wn 2 Name Type Path Em O J README txt Plain Text home tux tmp en R
233. d below 4 3 Software The Filter Window Selecting all packages of an installation one by one would be vary laborious and time consuming Therefore the package manager offers various filter methods for arranging the packages in categories and limiting the number of displayed packages The filter window is located to the left under the menu bar It controls and displays various filter methods The filter selection box at the top deter mines what will be displayed in the lower part of the filter window Click the filter selection box to select a filter from the list of available filters The Selections Filter At start up the Selections filter is active This filter groups the program packages according to their application purpose such as Multimedia or Office Applications The various groups of the Selections filter are listed under the filter selection box The packages already installed on the system are preselected Click the status box at the beginning of a line to toggle the status flags of a se lection You can also select a status directly by right clicking the se lection and using the context menu The individual package window to the right displays the list of packages included in the current selec tion enabling selection and deselection of individual packages The Package Groups Filter The Package Groups filter provides a more technical overview of the range of packages and is suitable for users who are familiar
234. d one after an other to carry out the data transfer There are two different sync methods 1 A HotSync operation only synchronizes the data for which any con duits have been enabled 2 A backup operation performs a full backup of all data stored on the handheld Some conduits need to open certain files during a sync operation which means the corresponding program should not be running at the given time Specifically KOrganizer should not be running during a sync operation 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot The conduits used by KPilot can be enabled and configured after selecting Settings gt Configure Conduits The following conduits are available KDE Addressbook Conduit This conduit handles the data exchange with the handheld s address book The KDE counterpart is KAd dressBook Start it from the main menu or with the command kaddressbook 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot KPilot KNotes Conduit This conduit allows you to transfer notes created with KNotes to the handheld s memo application Start the KDE ap plication from the main menu or with the command knotes KPilot Expenses Conduit This conduits allows you to transfer data from the handheld s expenses program to the desktop computer Data can be imported as a comma separated list CSV format or directly into a PostgreSQL or MySQL database table KOrganizer Todo Conduit KOrganizer Calendar Conduit These two conduits are responsible for syncing with the to do and
235. dapter is con nected This is of importance if you concurrently use an ISDN PBX E Note Use only the answering machine module if you intend to receive both fax messages and regular calls under one number as this module in cludes the functionality for recognizing and receiving fax messages See Section on page 289 To be able to send fax messages configure a suitable entry in the fax module but leave the field for incoming phone numbers empty Note l Use the buttons under the list to edit or delete existing entries or create new entries When editing or creating a dialog opens in which to enter or mod ify the following data SUSE LINUX User Guide uouooiunuJulooelel NASI 287 VAS Vinstaler e The fax system for one or a imb n 4 more users can ba set up in HB Fax Machine Configuration this dialog Each user must have at least one unique fax number configured Refer to the telecommunication chapter in the manuals for further details r User Table User Fax Numbers MSN Action StationID Headline Prefix Only for users behind a PBX Enter the prefix number for getting a public line This number will be dialed before any destination number When adding or editing a user a dialog will be shown with the following fields User The system user to which this fax account belongs Prefix Fax Numbers The numbers separated by commas on which faxes should be
236. de by NIS operating system Program that permanently runs in the background on a computer and enables basic system operations partition Logically independent section of a hard disk each possibly contain ing different file systems In Windows also known as drives path Unique description of a file s position in a file system plug and play Automatic hardware component configuration technology Resources such as IRQ and DMA are configured and managed separately from the system process In Linux started programs or executable files run as processes often referred to as tasks Processes can be controlled by commands like top entered in the 3jshell Glossary processor The processor is the brain of every computer working through and performing commands given by a user or a program in machine language The processor has control over the entire system and is responsible for the actual performance of the computer prompt See protocol Standard specifically defined for regulating communication for hard ware software or networks There is a multitude of these standards The most common examples are HTTPland FTP proxy Most commonly used cache implemented by Internet providers that stores frequently requested contents in a database to allow other machines requesting those pages to load them directly from it This process not only reduces the time it takes to download this information but also conserves the availa
237. default settings 5 4 9 KSnapshot Taking Screenshots With KSnapshot create snapshots of your screen or special applications Start the program from the main menu or from the command line with the command ksnapshot The dialog window of KSnapshot consists of two parts see Figure 9 The upper area Current Snapshot contains a pre view of the current screen and three buttons for creating and saving the screenshots In the lower part of the window determine further options for the actual creation of the screenshot r Current Snapshot New Snapshot Print Snapshot r Options Snapshot delay No delay z R Only grab the window containing the pointer Help v G Quit Figure 5 9 Taking Screenshots with KSnapshot To take a screenshot use Snapshot delay to determine the period in sec onds to wait between the click on New Snapshot and the actual creation of the screenshot If Only grab the window containing the pointer is ac tive only the window containing the pointer is photographed To save the screenshot click Save Snapshot and designate the directory and file SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq JG eut 163 164 name for the image in the following dialog Use Print Snapshot to print the screenshot 5 4 10 Kontact The application Kontact bundles the display of e mails notes contacts news weather and a calendar into one window Open it by p
238. dges of the screen A positive representation dark charac ters on a light background as in a book is recommended As the depicted characters must be large enough a 17 inch monitor is recommended at least for graphical user interfaces like KDE For the processing of CAD layout and graphics it should be 21 inches It is especially important that the screen does not flicker In concrete terms the minimum sync frequency with 15 inch monitors should be at least 73 Hz However 85 Hz is recommended For larger screens such as 21 inch 100 Hz is a good value Luminosity and contrast should be variable The focus of the charac ters should not differ with adjustments of brightness or contrast The image should be free from distortion and show no color errors SUSE LINUX User Guide 92DJ O 0MA SUI ui so luouo813 409 To avoid reflex glare a good antireflective coating of the screen sur face is recommended The screen should be rotatable and inclinable A vertical adjustment is recommended Colors make the displayed information easier to comprehend How ever the display of colors can also be straining for the eyes because different colors are refracted differently by the lenses For red col ors people are farsighted but for blue colors people are nearsighted Older screens often have convergence errors the three beams of the screen tube are no longer aligned precisely so colored borders appear around let
239. disorders This module contains the Bell and Keyboard tabs doptseq 3d eut Audible bell System bells can be communicated to the user in a visible or in an audible form The default setting is the audible variant with Use System bell To configure a specific sound activate Use cus tomized bell and use Browse to select a suitable sound from the list Visible bell For system bells to be communicated visually activate Use visible bell If no other modifications are performed the screen is in verted when a system bell rings Invert screen is activated by de fault The duration of the visual bell can be adjusted with the slider Instead of the inversion the screen can be set flash To do this acti vate Flash screen and select a suitable color in the color editor by clicking the color bar Sticky Keys Some shortcuts require a key to be held down this is the case with Att Ctrl and Shift while the second part of the shortcut is entered If sticky keys are used the system considers these keys to be pressed continuously even if they are only pressed once Slow Keys Here determine if and to what extent the system delays the output of characters on the screen when a key is pressed The longer the interval adjusted with the slider is the longer a key can be pressed without triggering a repeated output of the respective charac ter on the screen Bounce Keys If you activate this option pressing a
240. djust the output volume and play a test sound With Options manually customize the sound card options Set up your joystick by clicking the respective check box Select the joy stick type in the following dialog and click Next The same dialog appears when you click Joystick in the YaST Control Center Sound Card Volume Test your sound configuration in this test screen Use and to adjust the volume Start at about ten percent to avoid damage to your speakers or hearing A test sound should be audible when you press Test If you cannot hear anything increase the volume Press Continue to complete the sound configuration The volume setting will be saved 4 4 Hardware Sound Configuration Use Delete to remove a sound card Existing entries of configured sound cards are deactivated in the file etc modules conf Click Options to open a dialog in which to customize the sound module options manually In Volume configure the individual settings for the input and output of each sound card Next saves the new values and Back restores the de fault configuration Under Add Sound Card configure additional sound cards If YaST detects another sound card continue to Configure a Sound Card If YaST does not detect a sound card automatically be directed to Manual Sound Card Selection If yu usea Creative Soundblaster Live or AWE sound card auto matically copy SF2 sou
241. do items All the common program actions such as saving printing and creating or deleting events can be performed from the menus See Figure 10 1 Elle Edit View Go Actions Schedule Settings Help pa Idee amp QOmmm 129020 ojo March 2004 LOJIO T Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed3 Thu4 Fri5 Sat6 Sun7 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun BEEE ra nje 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 00 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 9 00 09 00 14 29 30 31 c To do items p M Summary v Priority Cor 12 00 13 00 e em Incoming messages 0 Outgoing messages Figure 10 1 The Main Window of KOrganizer KOrganizer can also be started in a windows containing other tools for of fice planning More details are available in Section 5 4 10 on page 10 2 Configuring KOrganizer To configure KOrganizer select Settings gt Configure KOrganizer This opens a dialog in which to enter your name and e mail address When working with the program the name is used to indicate who is the owner of a given to do item or event The e mail address is used to identify the owner of the calendar A user who is not the owner can read the calendar but not modify it Send copy to owner when mailing events should be en abled if you want to receive a copy of every e mail sent out by the program in your name to the attendees of an event For KOrganizer to save your scheduling items automatically when exiting
242. dule to load the required drivers from the vendor CD after the installation 4 9 Miscellaneous 4 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses YaST can also be controlled by means of a text based terminal This is espe cially useful in the case of systems that cannot run the X Window System or where X is unneeded as in dedicated server or firewall machines It is also good for administrators remotely accessing a system 4 10 1 Controls The usage may be unfamiliar but is very simple Basically the entire pro gram can be controlled with Tab Alf Tab Space the arrow keys and 1 Enter and shortcuts The YaST Control Center appears first as shown in Figure 4 32 UOILOINBYUOD SOA t date Hardware Installation into Directory System Online Update Network Devices Install and Remove Software Netw Quit Figure 4 32 The Main Window of YaST2 ncurses The left frame which is surrounded by a thick white border features the categories to which the various modules belong The active category is in dicated by a colored background The right frame which is surrounded by a thin white border provides an overview of the modules contained in the active category The bottom frame contains the buttons for Help and Exit When the YaST Control Center is started the category Software is selected automatically Use Q and 7 to change the category To start a module from the selected category pr
243. e 121 122 Use Edit Configuration Files under to edit the relevant configuration files in an editor To edit a file load it by means of the selection field Click OK to save your changes To exit the boot loader configuration click Cancel Click Back to return to the main window Caution Remember that the sequence of the options or commands is very im portant in CRUB If the specified sequence is not followed the machine may not boot Caution N Boot Loader Configuration Options For less experienced users the configuration with YaST is much easier than editing the files directly Select an option and click Edit to open a dialog in which to change the settings according to your needs Click OK to confirm the changes and return to the main menu where you can edit other op tions The available options depend on the boot loader used The following list introduces some options of the boot loader CRUB Boot Loader Type Use this option to switch between GRUB and LILO You will be taken to another dialog in which to specify the way in which this change should be performed For instance convert the current GRUB configuration into a similar LILO configuration However some settings may be lost if no equivalent options are available You can also create a new configuration from scratch or generate and edit a suggestion for a configuration If you start the boot loader configura tion i
244. e as Mail for a new mail storage folder Use the mouse to de termine the parent folder under which to place the new folder Exit the dia log with OK To move a message into a folder select the message to move Right click to open the context menu Select Move to Folder and in the dialog that opens the destination folder Click OK to move the message The message header in the original folder is shown with a line through it meaning it is marked for deletion in that folder The message is stored in the new folder Messages can be copied in a similar manner Manually moving a number of messages into different folders can be time consuming Filters can be used to automate this procedure 17 4 6 Filters Evolution offers a number of options for filtering e mail Filters can be used to move a message into a specific folder or to delete a message Messages can also be moved directly to the trash with a filter There are two options for creating a new filter creating a filter from scratch or creating a filter based on a message to filter The latter is extremely useful for filtering mes sages sent to a mailing list Setting up a Filter Select Tools gt Filters This dialog lists your existing filters which can be edited or deleted Click Add to create a new filter Enter a name for the new filter in Rule Name Select the criteria to use for the filter Options include sender recipients sou
245. e a name service set up local users intended for normal operations on the system An additional overview displays the detected screen graphics card and other hardware components printer sound card etc If necessary change settings such as the suggested screen resolution or the color depth Refer to Section 2 7 on page 42 Some of the dialogs for the configuration of the ad ditional hardware are able to search for connected devices However these settings do not need to be made at this stage You can also skip this step and do it later After the completion of this last step your newly installed system is booted and you can start using it Have a lot of fun with SUSE LINUX SUSE LINUX User Guide UO PO JOJSU JONO Custom Installation The previous chapter covered the quick installation procedure This chap ter provides detailed information about the settings you can modify by starting the relevant module from the suggestion window This gives com plete control over the installation 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM 12 22 The Boot Screen 13 23 Language Selection onoono 15 24 Installation Mode 16 EE A dea 16 A 34 trote 42 e ee ei Hare eae ees 43 UOILDJIOJSU LUOJSND 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM Insert the first SUSE LINUX CD or the DVD into the drive Then reboot the computer to start the installation program from the m
246. e company provided socket If it is connected to a PBX put in the MSN stored in the PBX e g your phone extension orthe last digit or digits of your phone extension If this fails E Add syncppp interface ipppO Connection Settings My phone number a Start Mode try using 0 which normally OnBoot x means the default MSN is actually used X ChargeHUP Start Mode OnBoot the driver is loaded during system boot Channel bundling Manual the driver must be started with the relsdn aturt X Activate firewall R Firewall QuickMode command only the user root can do this HotPlug is a special case for PCMCIA and peas USB devices If you select manual you have to start stop the service E m PEZ mem LPS PTS Figure 4 21 ISDN Interface Configuration systems use an internal S0 bus and use internal numbers for the connected devices Use one of the internal numbers to specify the MSN One of the MSNs of your phone system should work provided external access is possible with this MSN As a final resort a single zero might work For more information refer to the documentation of your phone system b For commercial use Normally the 1TR6 protocol is used for the internal ports of large phone systems Here the MSN is called EAZ and is usually the extension For the Linux configuration the last digit of the EAZ is normally sufficient If this does not work try the digits 1 to 9
247. e Control Center To check which fonts are currently available type the URL fonts into the address field of a Konqueror session This displays two windows Personal and System User installed fonts are installed to the folder Personal Only root can install to the System folder To install fonts as a user follow these steps 1 Start the Control Center and access the appropriate module with Sys tem Administration Font Installation SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq 3d eut 167 168 2 Choose Add Fonts from the icon bar or from the menu available when right clicking the list 3 In the dialog that opens select one or more fonts for installation 4 The marked fonts are then installed to your personal font folder Se lecting a font shows a preview To update system fonts first select System administration mode and enter your root password then proceed as described for user font installation The feature for deactivating installed fonts is very useful They are not re moved but are made unavailable to the system Select the deactivate icon or its counterpart from the context menu This makes the green checkmark disappear The new settings become active after confirmation with Apply The deactivated fonts are then no longer available to applications This re duces the size of font lists displayed in applications 5 4 Important Utilities The GNOME Desktop GNOME GNU N
248. e Stylist The Stylist can help you format text in a number of ways It can be opened or closed at any time by toggling Format gt Stylist or by pressing F1T The dialog window of the Stylist is shown in Figure 7 5 on the facing page If you set the drop down list at the lower edge of the Stylist to Automatic OpenOffice org tries to offer a selection of styles adapted to the task at hand On the other hand if you select All the Stylist offers all styles from the currently active group Groups are selected with the buttons at the top Text can be hard formatted or soft formatted Hard Formatting Formatting properties are directly assigned to a text range and each property must be applied to each range by hand The assignment is static and can only be changed manually This is only recommended for short documents Soft Formatting With this method text is not formatted directly It has a style applied to it The style itself can be modified quite easily Mod ifying a style automatically results in a formatting change of all the text to which it is assigned This approach has many advantages when creating larger documents theses books and the like Although not as intuitive it is very efficient and fast if the formatting needs to be changed extensively and consistently Using this method also makes it much easier to try different layouts with the document Define the format of paragraphs pages and frames for a style
249. e _______ 119 module disk and the contained modules will be listed Select the de sired module Watch the system messages carefully Loading module lt modulename gt failed indicates that the hardware could not be rec ognized by the module Some older drivers require specific parame ters to be able to address the hardware correctly In this case refer to the documentation of your hardware User Defined Disk This option enables you to write any existing floppy disk image from the hard disk to a floppy disk Download Disk Image This option enables you to enter a URL and au thentication data to download a floppy disk image from the Internet To create one of these floppy disks select the corresponding option and click Next You will be asked to insert a floppy disk If you click Next again the floppy disk is created 4 8 4 Configuring the Boot Loader with YaST This YaST module simplifies the configuration of the boot loader How ever you should not experiment with this module unless you understand the concepts behind it Read the corresponding parts of the Administration Guide before changing the boot loader configuration The following discus sion mainly covers the default boot loader GRUB Note Do not change the boot method of a running system unless you really know what you are doing Note In the YaST Control Center select System gt Boot Loader Configuration The current b
250. e and Close when finished 17 6 2 Making a List If you frequently send e mail messages to a group of people make this eas ier by creating a list Click New gt Contact List in the Contacts view The contact list editor opens Enter a name for the list Add addresses by typing the address in the box and clicking Add or by dragging contacts from the Contacts view and dropping them in the box Toggle Hide ad dresses to select whether the recipients can see who else has received the mail Click Save and Close when finished The list is now one of your con tacts and appears in the composition window after the first few letters are typed 17 6 Contacts 17 6 3 Sharing Contacts To send contact information from your address book to another Evolution user right click the contact to share Select Forward Contact This sends the contact card as an attachment in an e mail Compose and send this mes sage as usual To add a contact you have been sent go to the contact in the e mail message and click Save in addressbook to add the complete contact card to your address book 17 7 Public Address Books in Evolution By means of the LDAP protocol Evolution can access public address books such as those used by SUSE LINUX Openexchange Server or Microsoft Ex change Evolution offers full access to these address books it can read them and add new entries If you use SUSE LINUX in a large network e g
251. e causes a received fax message to be saved in the system and forwarded to the user by e mail The SaveOnly option merely causes the fax to be saved to the hard disk This option is recommended for expert users only Click OK to accept the changes Click Cancel to drop the changes and close the form 18 1 2 Configuring the Answering Machine The provided standard scripts also offer a comfortable multiuser answering machine This can be be configured with the YaST Answering Machine module in the Network Devices group Similar to the fax configuration there is a list with the already configured users which is empty when the module is started for the first time The recorded incoming call is sent to the user associated with the phone num ber This shows the importance of assigning unique phone numbers to the SUSE LINUX User Guide uoiooiunuJulooeje NASI 289 290 F Note Sf a9 Winstanor An answering machine for e one or more users can be set up in this dialog Each user must have at least one unique phone number configured Refer to the telecommunication chapter in the manuals for further details When adding or editing a user a dialog will be shown with the following details User The system user who wants to receive calls with the answering machine Phone Numbers One or more phone numbers separated by commas that belong only to this user You can also enter which means the us
252. e changed by the owner and of course by root with the command chmod which must be entered together with the parame ters specifying the changes to perform and the names of the respec tive files Both parameters are comprised of 1 the categories concerned u user owner of the file g group group that owns the file o others additional users if no parameter is given the changes apply to all categories 2 a character for deletion amp 48211 setting or insertion 3 the abbreviations r read a w write m x execute 4 file name or names separated by spaces If for example the user tux in ExampleD5 2 on the facing page also wants to grant other users write w access to the directory ProjectData he can do this using the command chmod o w ProjectData If however he wants to deny all users other than himself write permissions he can do this by entering the com mand chmod go w ProjectData To prohibit all users from adding a new file to the folder ProjectData enter chmod w ProjectData Now not even the owner can write to the file with out first reestablishing write permissions SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 389 390 Changing Ownership Permissions Other important commands to control the ownership and permis sions of the file system components are chown change owner and chgrp change group The command chown can be used to transfer ownership of a file to another user H
253. e corresponding shortcut entry Then enter a new shortcut or delete the current one with Delete All changes take effect im mediately Restore the current keyboard shortcut by clicking its entry and leaving the dialog with Close 6 2 11 Sound system alerts This module allows the association of certain system events and applica tion alerts with characteristic audio signals The dialog box consists of two tabs General and Sound Events The two check boxes in the General tab must be activated to use audio signals for certain desktop events doptsed 3INONO SUL In the second tab determine which events and application alerts should be associated with which sounds All sound associations already defined for applications are listed Test a sound by first selecting the correspond ing notice in the Event column then clicking Play Change the sound by clicking Event then Browse The dialog that appears provides a list of files from which to choose Close it with OK 6 3 File Management with Nautilus Nautilus is the file manager and viewer of GNOME The following section provides an overview of the basic functions of Nautilus as well as a few tips on its configuration More information can be found in the help pages for Nautilus 6 3 1 Navigating in Nautilus Nautilus has a navigation behavior similar to most web browsers Open a new window by right clicking a free area of the desktop then selec
254. e individual YaST modules can also be started directly To start the modules enter yast followed by the name of the module SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBYUOD SOA 13 The KDE Desktop KDE is the default desktop in a standard installation of SUSE LINUX It is easy to use and highly configurable The following sections introduce the basic desktop and customization of the desktop Konqueror is essential for file management A number of additional applications are also described ride 134 Ie 4d aw Oe E ET E 141 heehee hese od 150 mac MES 154 dop1seq 30 sul 134 5 1 Desktop Components The graphical desktop environment should not pose any problems for for mer Windows or Macintosh users The main components are the icons on the desktop and the panel at the bottom of the screen The mouse is your most important tool Click a symbol or an icon once to start the associated program or the file manager Konqueror If you right click an icon different menus appear depending on the program As well as the icons there are two desktop menus 5 1 1 The Desktop Menus If you middle click the desktop if your mouse only has two buttons press both buttons at the same time a window and desktop management menu are displayed If you keep the mouse button pressed select a menu item directly Alternatively release the mouse button and click the respective menu item Unclutter Windows If you have several windows on your deskto
255. e left and numbers to the right To confirm your entry hit Enter To change the formatting of selected cells right click to open a context menu and select Format Cells This opens a dialog in which to SUSE LINUX User Guide SLINS eoyjo 810 eoyouedo eu 195 196 change the cell attributes The dialog as shown in Figure 7 7 on the follow ing page has the tabs Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Bor ders Background and Cell Protection By enabling Protected under Cell Protection prevent a cell from being modified All E Standard User defined 1234 Number 1234 12 1 234 1 234 12 1 234 12 Figure 7 7 The Cell Attributes Dialog 7 7 2 A Practical Example Monthly Expenses Calculations can be done using formulas Any numeric values entered in cells can be used in formulas by referring to the unique coordinates of each cell For example you may want to keep a record of your monthly ex penses This could be done by writing a few items into a very basic spread sheet as in Figure 7 8 on the next page The cell B3 contains the phone bill for January and B4 the fuel expenses To add both amounts together enter B3 B4 in cell B5 Now cell B5 should display the corresponding result If you have mistyped the numbers or estimated your phone bill inaccu rately just reenter the amounts and Calc will automatically update the sum 7 7 Spr
256. e lost and prompted to confirm KFloppy informs you if any problems occur during the formatting procedure including informa tion about any bad sectors Click Help to access a short menu that offers the KFloppy handbook Ad ditionally use it to send a bug report or other concerns to the developers of KFloppy Selecting About KFloppy accesses information about the ver sion authors translation and license About KDE provides information about KDE and web pages of the KDE developers Exit KFloppy by clicking Quit 5 4 7 Ark Displaying Decompressing and Creating Archives To save space on the hard disk use a packer that compresses files and di rectories to a fraction of their original size The application Ark can be used to manage such archives It supports common formats such as zip tar gz tar bz2 lha rar and zoo 5 4 Important Utilities Start Ark from the main menu or from the command line with the com mand ark If you already have some compressed files move these from an open Konqueror window to the Ark window to view the contents of the archive To view an integrated preview of the archive in Konqueror right click the archive in Konqueror and select Preview in Archiver Alterna tively select File gt Open in Ark to open the file directly See Figure 5 7 File Edit Action Settings Help 174803 9 Filename Size Method Size Now Ratio Timestamp CRC FAQ 67 306 Def
257. e main menu or from the command line with the command kfloppy KFloppy opens a dialog shown in Figure 6jon the next page in which to specify a number of settings Under Floppy Drive select the primary or the secondary drive provided your machine has two floppy disk drives The default setting for the size is 3 5 1 44 MB which is the most com monly used floppy disk type The setting for the file system is very impor tant Choose between the Linux format ext2 and MS DOS If you select MS DOS you will be able to read and write the floppy disk on a Windows ma chine In the center select Quick Format or Full Format The quick format pro cedure merely rewrites the file system and deletes all data The full format procedure rewrites all tracks and sectors and is able to detect and mark bad sectors Sectors marked as bad are not used for writing data Select Verify Integrity to have the formatting checked and verified upon completion If you activate Volume Label designate a name for the floppy disk in the input field below SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 159 160 Floppy drive Primary Size 3 5 1 44MB File system DOS Quick format 2 Full format X Verify integrity IR Volume label Y Help KDE Floppy O Quit 0 Figure 5 6 The Floppy Disk Formatter KFloppy After making all settings click Format You will be warned that all data on the disk will b
258. e or more target fax numbers and one or more documents in the PostScript format This format is generated by most Linux applications when printing to a file capisuitefax supports parameters such as the following hor help Returns a short summary of valid parameters SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 293 294 d number or dialstring lt number gt This parameter declares the target number to which the fax should be sent qor quiet capisuitefax usually generates a few informative mes sages This option suppresses this and only allows the display of pos sible error messages The following command would send the two documents document 1 ps and document2 ps to the target number 089123456 capisuitefax d 089123456 documentl ps document2 ps capisuitefax converts the documents to the correct format and stores them together with a description file in a special folder from which they are then fetched and sent by CapiSuite There can be a short delay between the execution of the command and the actual sending The user is notified by e mail when a fax message has been successfully sent or after the failure of a set number of attempts In the standard desktop KDE fax messages can easily be sent from any KDE application with the help of the KDEPrintFax utility Configure KDE PrintFax as follows Start KDEPrintFax This can be done by pressing F2 and enter ing kdeprintfax Select Settings gt Configure KD
259. e path to your image folders the location where your photographs are saved can be specified in the same dialog under the General Settings tab You can also determine the size of the thumbnails the way file names are displayed and some other settings After your camera has been detected correctly and you have configured the program as desired confirm with OK The name of your camera is then displayed at the bottom left in the main window Double click it or select Camera gt Connect to connect Digikam to your camera The thumbnails are displayed to the right Right click the image to open a pop up menu with which to view save or delete the image or view its properties Select all photographs to download from the camera by pressing the left mouse button or clicking individual photographs with pressed Se lected photographs appear with inverted colors Drag the selected pho 22 5 Using Digikam tographs to the desired directory Digikam then downloads the pho tographs and saves them in the selected directory More information about Digikam is available in theDigikam help Help gt Digikam Handbook Information is also available on the Internet at http digikam sourceforge net 22 6 For More Information For more information about using digital cameras with Linux refer to the following web sites http www gphoto org Information about gPhoto gPhoto2 and gPhoto2 compatible GUIs s http w
260. e people need considerably more 40 262 Office Equipment tis a good idea for users to look away from the screen from time to time In this way their eyes can adapt to a different distance If a document is being copied it should be at the same distance as the screen to avoid frequent changes of focus The difference in luminance between the direct working area the screen and the immediately surrounding areas such as the screen case should not be more than three to one For this reason computer cases in offices are not black The difference between the working area and the surroundings should not be more than ten to one Shiny areas create large differences of luminance This is why office furniture is not available in bright colors and has a matt surface To minimize the reflex glare on the screen the screen and the key board should be arranged so the line of vision is parallel to window panes The further the screen is away from the window the better The screen should not be directly under a lighting strip but to the side of it The line of vision should be parallel to the lighting strip 26 2 3 The Keyboard and the Wrists It is well known that the keyboard arrangement derived from the type writer is not necessarily ergonomic During typing the fingers hands arms and shoulders are strained This leads to tense muscles The strain caused by a keyboard of inferior quality adds up over time Unfortunately th
261. e phone numbers for which messages should be recorded for the user Faxes can also be sent to the declared phone numbers as the answering machine has an automatic fax recognition feature Separate multiple numbers with commas Response Time This value defined in seconds determines after how much time the answering machine should answer an incoming call A value can be selected from the list or entered Duration Determines the maximum recording time for the answering machine the maximum duration of a recorded incoming call in sec onds This value is usually of secondary importance as the recording is usually terminated when the caller hangs up However to avoid extensive recordings this value should be set to a reasonable time such as two minutes 120 seconds SUSE LINUX User Guide uoiooiunuJulooeje NASI 291 292 Action The answering machine features various processing options for incoming messages The default setting MailAndSave records a mes sage saves it in the system and delivers it to the user by e mail The SaveOnly option can be chosen if the reception of e mails is not de sired It merely saves the message to the hard disk This option is only recommended for expert users The None option completely deacti vates the recording of messages It plays the welcome message then hangs up PIN Enter a personal identification number PIN for remote access A numerical code of any length can
262. e playback can be reduced by increasing the priority of the audio program or by switching to a real time scheduler For this rea son many audio programs attempt to switch their processes to a real time scheduler but switching a process to another scheduler is only possible with root privileges The application setpriority in the rt stools package is required for this task For example proceed as follows to run the application timidity with the 19 4 Buffering and Latencies FIFO scheduler 1 Start timidity Open a root console session Usepidof timidity to find the process ID of timidity PB op M Change the scheduler with the command setpriority lt processID gt fifo 10 xnur ui punos You can use the following command in a root shell to speed up this proce dure for i in pidof timidity do setpriority i fifo 10 done Running a program in root mode is always risky as the program is per mitted to do anything If the computer is connected to the Internet the se curity risk would be unacceptable Security bugs in the program could be exploited for the purpose of gaining access to the system Caution The commands described in the following paragraphs should never be executed on machines that can be accessed from the Internet or if a system crash or data loss would have serious consequences Caution The sudo mechanism should be used for running a program in root mode This mechanism is demonstrated
263. e resizing according to YaST s current proposal Figure 2 10 on the following page Accept the proposed settings or use the slider to change the partition sizing within certain limits If you leave this dialog by selecting Next the settings will be stored and you will be taken back to the previous dialog The actual resizing will take place later before the hard disk is formatted SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 27 VaS Winstalor e Choose the new size for your Windows partition The actual resizing will be performed only after you confirm all your settings in the last installation dialog Until then your Windows partition will remain untouched To skip resizing your Windows partition press Back The upper bar graph displays the current situation The lower bar graph displays the situation after the installation after the partition resize Drag the slider or enter a numeric value in either input field to adjust the suggested value Within the space you reserve for Linux partitions will Resizing the Windows partition After installation Linux 1140 MB 609 MB Windows free MB Linux MB 200 H L LL n 8 automatically be created as necessary Abort Back T Next Figure 2 10 Resizing the Windows Partition M Note Windows Systems Installed on NTFS Partitions By default the Windows versions NT 2000 and XP use the N
264. e set wild card to address all sample files whose last character is a number 1s Testfile 1 9 Of the four types of wild cards the most inclusive one is the asterisk It could be used to copy all files contained in one directory to another one or to delete all files with one command The command rm il for in stance would delete all files in the current directory whose name includes the string fil SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ULM BUOM 383 384 25 1 6 More or Less Linux includes two small programs for viewing text files directly in the shell Rather than starting an editor to read a file like Readme t xt sim ply enter less Readme txt to display the text in the console window Use to scroll down one page Use Page Up and Page Down to move forward or backward in the text To exit less press 9 The program less got its name from the the precept that less is more and can also be used to view the output of commands in a convenient way To see how this works read Section 25 1 7 Instead of less you can also use the older program more However it is less convenient because it does not allow you to scroll backwards 25 1 7 Pipes Normally the standard output in the shell is your screen or the console window and the standard input is the keyboard To forward the output of a command to an application such as less use a pipeline To view the files in the test directory enter the command 1s test l
265. e the configuration of the messenger account by clicking Finish Here You Can Manage All Your Accounts New Behavior kd Appearance g U Ye y Cw 3 Help J J w ok L JI 3 Cancel J Figure 5 11 Kopete Configuration Panels The next item in the configuration dialog is Appearance It influences how Kopete is displayed The tab Emoticons provides a selection of various types of smileys The tabs Chat window and Colors amp Fonts offer the possibility to adjust the appearance of the chat windows for communication with other partic ipants Choose between the classic themes of the corresponding providers or to create a custom theme by adjusting the font or color to personal pref erence Adding Contacts It is necessary to add contacts in order to chat with a participant If you have already created an account on another PC this data is readily im SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq JG eut 165 166 ported and automatically added to your contact list To create a contact entry manually click File gt Add contact A new assistant appears automatically that will accompany you until com pletion However consider that must be online to add a contact to your list Adding Groups Access this with File gt Create New Group Name the group and confirm this with OK A new folder appears in the contact list that can be used to store the desired c
266. e tiny movements produced while typing are very difficult to measure Risk factors include the RSI syndrome The keyboard is without doubt the most frequently used computer in put device Therefore it must be especially well designed Ergonomic spe cialists often criticize the fact that the and keys are too small Another basic problem is the cable which is often too short preventing a comfortable individual placement Consider buying a wireless keyboard or an extension for the cable The keyboard should be separate from the screen It should also be in clinable but set in a stable position sufficiently large rubber coated feet The middle key row should not be more than 30 mm above the sur face of the table SUSE LINUX User Guide 92DJ O 0MA SUI ui so luouo813 411 412 There should be room to rest your hands in front of the keyboard If there is no built in wrist pad get one The marking must contrast with the color of the plastic and be easy to read The keyboard should have no intense color and a satin matt finish For the keyboard legend a dark script on a light background is rec ommended Black keys are not ergonomic The form of the keys should enable light and accurate typing The lift of key should be 2 4 mm and the working point should be distinctly felt Here 50 80 g is recommended as the force of the key depression stroke Those who type a lot should take regular breaks Learning the
267. eached via the menu to avoid going through the entire file system again and again Use the configuration menu acces sible with the wrench button to customize the way in which the items in the dialog are sorted and viewed Save Ct S This saves the document in its current form If you have been editing a new document the program display a dialog with which to specify the name of the file and its location directory Save As This opens a dialog in which to specify the name and the directory under which to save the document The dialog is essentially the same as the one displayed after selecting File gt Open Print Ctr P This opens a simple dialog in which to define print ing options for the document and start the print job Close Ct W This closes the currently loaded document If there are changes that have not yet been saved a dialog opens to ask whether to do so Quit Ci Q This exits the editor If there are unsaved changes to a loaded document KWrite shows a dialog asking whether to save before exiting 8 2 The Edit Menu This menu provides all the program s editing functions such as selecting and searching or replacing text according to certain patterns Undo Redo Use this to undo any unwanted changes and to restore the original text after an undo step These functions are also available using the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl and Ctrl Shift
268. eadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc Figure 7 8 A Spreadsheet Example for Calc Calc offers many functions beyond the four fundamental arithmetic oper ations A comprehensive list arranged in categories is available under In sert gt Function Any spreadsheet can be easily extended For instance to insert another row between Fuel and Sum right click the 5 button to the left and select Insert Row from the context menu A new row is inserted below the current one and can immediately be used for additional input Entering formulas in the above way is cumbersome when many cells are involved For example if you have several items in your A column and want to add them try the SUM function In the field B6 enter the formula SUM B3 B5 An alternative possibility is to click the Sigma Sigma icon next to the input line and enter the range manually This formula adds all numbers from B3 to B5 You can also specify several ranges at once As shown in the above formula a range is defined by two cell addresses separated by a colon Separate ranges by semicolons Accordingly the for mula SUM B3 B5 D3 D5 adds everything from B3 to B5 and from D3 to D5 Basically the formula is a short form of a longer one which would read B3 B4 B5 D3 D4 D5 7 7 3 Creating Charts Now add some more entries to the spreadsheet for instance by including some more months in row 2 After doing so the table could look like Fig ure 7
269. ectly In this case an entirely new configuration must be made Before starting the update the existing configuration should be saved 4 4 Hardware New hardware must first be installed or connected as specified by the ven dor Turn on external devices such as the printer or the modem and start the respective YaST module Most devices are automatically detected by YaST and the technical data is displayed If the automatic detection fails YaST offers a list of devices model vendor etc from which to select the suitable device Consult the documentation enclosed with your hardware for more information Note If your model is not included in the device list try a model with a simi lar designation However in some cases the model must match exactly as similar designations do not always indicate compatibility Note 4 4 1 CD ROM Drives Within the scope of the installation all detected CD ROM drives are inte grated in the installed system by means of entries in the file etc fstab The respective subdirectories are created in media Use this YaST module to integrate additional drives in the system When the module is started a list of all detected drives is displayed Mark your new drive using the check box at the beginning of the line and com plete the integration with Finish The new drive will be integrated in the system 4 4 2 Printer A Linux system manages printers through printer queues Before any data
270. ectory with the command cd Then create a directory in it with the name test 2 by entering mkdir test2 Change into the new directory with cd test2 and create a subdi rectory in it with the name subdirectory To change into it use the expansion function enter cd su then press Tab The shell will ex pand the rest of the directory name Now try to move the previously created file Test backup into the current directory subdirectory without changing the direc tory again To achieve this specify the relative path to that file mv test Testbackup The dot at the end of this command is required to tell the shell that the current directory is the destina tion to which to move the file in this example refers to your home directory 25 1 5 Wild Cards Another convenience offered by the shell is wild cards There are four dif ferent types of these in Bash Matches exactly one arbitrary character Matches any number of characters set Matches one of the characters from the group specified inside the square brackets which is represented here by the string set set Matches one character other than those identified by set Assuming that your test directory contains the files Test file Testfilel Testfile2 and datafile the command 1s Testfile lists the files Testfilel and Testfile 2 With 1s Test the list will also include Test file The command 1s fil shows all the sam ple files Finally you can use th
271. edium in the drive 2 1 1 Possible Problems when Starting from the CD DVD If you experience problems booting from CD 1 one of the following items is probably the cause Resolve the problem as described The CD ROM drive is not able to read the boot image on the first CD In this case use CD 2 to boot the system CD 2 contains a conven tional 2 88 MB boot image which can be read even by older drives The boot sequence in the BIOS Basic Input Output System is in correct The BIOS is a software for activating the basic functions of a computer Motherboard vendors provide a BIOS that is adapted to the hardware Information about changing the BIOS settings is pro vided in the documentation of your motherboard and in the follow ing paragraphs Normally the BIOS setup can only be accessed at a specific time when the machine is booting During this initialization phase the ma chine performs a number of diagnostic hardware tests One of them is a memory check recognizable from the memory counter When the counter appears look for a line usually below the counter or some where at the bottom mentioning the key to press to access the BIOS setup Usually the key to press is Del FT or Esc Press this key until the BIOS setup screen appears To change the boot sequence in an AWARD BIOS look for the BIOS FEATURES SETUP entry Other manufacturers may have a different name for this such as ADVANCED CMOS SETUP When you
272. een mode Note The xawtv file is created automatically and updated by clicking Set tings gt Save settings Here the broadcasters are saved along with the configuration More information about the configuration file can be found in the man page for xawtvrc Note 20 1 4 The Launcher Menu Use the launcher menu to start other applications to use with motv Start the audio mixer gamix and the video text application alevt for example using a keyboard shortcut Applications to launch from motv must be en tered in the xawtv file The entries should look like this SUSE LINUX User Guide UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA Al 333 334 launch Gamix Ctrl G gamix AleVT Ctrl A alevt The shortcut then the command used to start the application should follow the application name itself Start the applications entered under launch via the Tool menu 20 2 Video Text with alevt Use alevt to browse video text pages Start the application via SUSE gt Multimedia gt Video gt alevt or at the command line with alevt The application saves all the pages of the selected station just activated with motv Browse pages by entering the desired page number or by click ing a page number Move forward or backward through the pages by click ing or located in the lower window margin 20 3 Webcams and motv If your webcam is already supported by Linux access it with
273. efine a signature footer to use for ev ery message To use this feature select Enable signature Insert the signa ture from a file an input field or a command output Confirm your profile settings with OK 16 4 2 Setting up Network Connections The settings under Network in the Configure KMail menu instruct KMail how to receive and send e mail There are two tabs one each for sending and for receiving mail Many of these settings vary depending on the system and network in which your mail server is located If you are not sure about the settings or items to select consult your Internet service provider or system administrator Sending Create outgoing mail boxes under the Send tab Add gives the choice of either SMTP or sendmail For most purposes select SMTP SUSE LINUX User Guide UOHOOIAAY oN Id SUL INN 259 here After making this selection a window appears in which to enter SMTP server data such as Name Server and if needed the re quired authorization A preprocessing command to run before send ing each message can be entered in the corresponding field Security settings are under the Security tab Specify your preferred encryp tion method here If uncertain about which one to choose click Test server capacity The respective settings are then tested and applied If necessary consult your system administrator Receiving Make settings for receiving e ma
274. ems 2 er ias shortcuts processing a print job advantages of 44 413 QUCUES croata e petes software supported printers installing oooooooooooo de switching the printing system removing cessit cece eee eee eee 594165 troubleshooting sound A ie banesen ies taane configuring in YaST jun m ON S din kiling ee mixers aerae aa eee ee eee eee Ooverview 12 cee eee eee eee eee aleamixer 000 0 programs amp gamix AAA AA A A installing oooooocoocoooo 422 GNOME eerte evt p p O 399 KMix oo eee eee eee MAMI vocetur ere ser anata Q NoteEdit oooocccccccccoooon AMIX ee eee 301 AplayerS asas GNOME copian dosis 307 BOURNE oder To n A le 1255126 SUPPOTE iereesee iy ie fe ades ee es 127 7 default pha ene ahah ante 125 SuSEWatcher usseeesss 1156 A re e IMeru 125 system configuring S language ccoooccocccncccncnoso Samba rebooting 0 eee eee Cltents ius nee ten ceteris us 108 SSECUEILV aa SOULS nadas 108 Services curiae ais SAX ces iasves fatture ba nca a Ie e rt shutdown sssssss SaX2 updatihg iiec eee hes 66 multihead sssse system messages sss 421 scanning character recognition T configuring 0 005 90 TA ee 2Kook soriana TCPZIB aaa SUSE LINUX User Guide
275. enter When you start the SUSE Help Center for the first time from the main menu SuSE Help the view as shown in Figure A 1 on the following page is displayed The dialog window consists of three main areas Menu Bar and Toolbar The menu bar provides the main editing naviga tion and configuration options File contains the option for print ing the currently displayed content Under Edit access the search function Go contains all navigation possibilities Home home page of the Help Center Back Forward and Last Search Result With Settings gt Configure KDE Help Center gt Create Search In dex generate a search index for all selected information sources The toolbar contains three navigation icons forward back home and a printer icon for printing the current contents Navigation Area with Tabs The navigation area in the left part of the window provides an input field for a quick search in selected infor mation sources Details regarding the search and the configuration of the search function in the Search tab are presented in Section Ajon page 417 The Contents tab presents a tree view of all available and currently installed information sources Click the book icons to open and browse the individual categories uoiuojueuunoo pup d eH 416 View Window The view window always displays the currently selected contents such as online manuals search results o
276. er a number of print queues must be defined each with a different printer configuration CUPS In the CUPS printing system users can determine individual print ing settings as the entire configuration of a queue is not defined by the system administrator Rather printer specific settings are stored in a PPD PostScript Printer Description file for each queue and can be Offered to users in a print dialog Because of conflicts between these two printing systems you cannot have both installed at the same time More information about CUPS is available athttp www cups org and in the Administration Guide Queues In most cases more than one print queue is required Different printer de vices must be addressed through different print queues The printer filter can be configured differently for each print queue By having different queues for one printer it can be operated with a different set of options However this is not required when using the CUPS printing system be cause CUPS allows users to set options individually for each print job One standard configuration is sufficient for plain black and white printers such as most laser printers However color ink jet printers usually require at least two configurations two queues 4 4 Hardware A standard 1p configuration for quick and inexpensive black and white printouts A color queue for color printing Supported Printers Because most Linux printer drivers are n
277. er will get any call Delay Delay in seconds before the answering r machine responds to the call H t Answering Machine Configuration User Table User Phone Numbers Delay Duration Action Abort Figure 18 3 YaST Module for Configuring the Answering Machine users The individual user welcome message cannot be set at this point The recording can be made later with the remote access function of the con figured answering machine The answering machine has an automatic si lence recognition routine that terminates the recording session after five seconds without noises Incoming fax calls are also automatically recognized and received in most cases This automatic routine can however fail with older fax machines which is why a separate fax number is to preferred wherever possible Note User 18 1 Configuration Use Add Edit and Delete to administer the entries The entry form for creating a new entry or for modifying an existing one contains the follow ing fields Select the system user for whom the answering machine should be User lgernot gt Phonenumbers fi 24 Delay 115 Duration Action Pin kgg 2 Figure 18 4 Answering Machine User Preferences configured One or more fax numbers are assigned to each registered user Incoming calls to these numbers are then sent to the user as e mails Phone Numbers Set th
278. erFS is the default for Linux partitions ReiserFS as well as JFS and Ext3 are journaling file systems These file systems are able to re store your system very quickly after a system crash as write pro cesses are logged during the operation Furthermore ReiserFS is very fast in handling lots of small files Ext2 is not a journaling file system It is rock solid and good for smaller partitions as it does not require too much disk space for management File System Options Here specify various parameters for the selected file system Depending on the file system used various options are offered Only make changes if you are absolutely sure what you are do ing Encrypt File System Installation Suggestion If you activate the encryption all data is written to the hard disk in encrypted form This increases the security of sensitive data This specifies the directory at which the partition should be mounted in the file system tree Various YaST suggestions can be expanded at the respective entry field If you accept these suggestions the default file system structure is implemented However you can also specify any other names but reduces the system speed as the encryption takes some time O fstab Options S Here you can specify various parameters for the administration S file of the file systems etc fstab Experienced users have m the possibility to modify a number of options Refer to the rele 2 vant chapter in the Admin
279. eral areas By de fault the icon for the main menu is located to the far left Other icons are lined up alongside it The house icon provides quick access to your home directory with all subdirectories The other icons start applications such as OpenOffice org K Mail and the web browser Konqueror if these pro grams were installed Next to these icons are the numbered buttons with which to switch desk tops These multiple desktops enable you to organize your work if you use many programs simultaneously as if you had several desks for various tasks doptseq 3d eut The taskbar is located next to the virtual desktops All started applications are displayed in the taskbar If you click a window title in the taskbar the application is moved to the foreground If it is already in the foreground clicking minimizes the application If you click it again it reopens Next to the taskbar find applets such as the clipboard Klipper SuSEwatcher and any other applets you have started The clock helps you keep track of the time If you right click an empty space in the panel a menu providing the usual help and configuration options for the panel is displayed Use the menu to change the size of the panel and add and remove applications To add an application search for the respective application in the menu and select it Remove applications or applets by right clicking the corresponding icon and selecting Remove from the displayed menu
280. erns The default setting is File Management Under Load View Profile switch to File Preview Midnight Commander or Web SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq 3d eut 151 192 Browsing For example when you click the Konqueror icon in the panel the web browser profile is displayed Specify individual key board shortcuts with Configure Shortcuts customize the toolbar with Configure Toolbars and configure global settings for the file manager with Configure Konqueror Window In the Window menu you can split the main window hor izontally and vertically With Remove Active View remove the split New Tab creates an empty window in the Konqueror window Switch between these windows with tabs With Duplicate Current Tab generate a second identical window that can be loaded to a sep arate Konqueror window with Detach Tab You can also close the active subwindow Help Under the Help menu access the Konqueror handbook or the What s This function This function can also be accessed via the question mark symbol at the top right in the title bar The mouse pointer is then displayed with a question mark If you click an icon a brief help text is displayed The Help menu also provides a short in troduction to Konqueror and the possibility to report bugs and other concerns to the developers About Konqueror and About KDE pro vide information about the version
281. ers that appears select the folder to which to move your messages Messages can also be moved by dragging the message from the upper window and dropping it into the appropriate folder in the left window To remove all the messages from a folder click Folder gt Empty All mes sages located in the folder are then moved to the trash Note Messages are not deleted permanently until you empty the trash Note 16 8 Importing Mail KMail assists in importing e mail messages from previously used applica tions Select Extras gt Import messages KMail currently features import filters for Outlook Express 4 5 and 6 the mbox format simple e mail texts and Pegasus Mail folders The import utility can also be started separately by pressing and entering the command kmailcvt Select the corresponding application from the pop up menu and confirm with Continue A file or a folder must be provided depending on the se lected type KMail then completes the process 16 9 The Address Book Save frequently used addresses and contacts in the address book Access it from the Tools menu with the respective icon in the main window or from the Composer window Create a new entry with File gt New Con tact A window opens in which to enter the data of the person under the General tab The View menu allows creation of custom views of the contacts The ta ble view is the defau
282. es such as jargon or computer terminology Under Default strategy specify what to look for the exact word parts of the word or the prefix or suffix Under Help access the online manual of the application with Contents and information about the author and ver sion of the application with About 6 4 2 Managing Archives with File Roller In GNOME manage file archives with File Roller This application is able to handle archives of the following types tar tar gz tgz tar bz tar bz2 tar Z zip 1ha rar 1zh ear Jjar and war Easily view archive contents from File Roller with other applications with out having to decompress the archives File Roller supports drag and drop 6 4 Important Utilities allowing you to drag file icons from the desktop or from the file manager Nautilus to the File Roller dialog and drop them there To create a new archive select Archive gt New In the next dialog spec ify the directory in which to create the new archive in the left window En ter the file name of the new archive in the input field below without the file extension Then determine the archive type with the drop down menu above the name field Exit the dialog with OK and return to the main view of File Roller Now add files to the archive by inserting files from the desk top or the file manager with drag and drop or by selecting Edit gt Add Files In the following dialog
283. es in the User Guide The documentation of the previous version SUSE LINUX 9 0 has been modified as follows The instructions for the installation and configuration with YaST have been updated Due to new features the following chapters have undergone substan tial editing The KDE desktop everything about KDE The following chapters are new in this edition A section about Kopete an instant messenger application has been added A section explains the configuration of SPAMassassin in KMail The section about gqcam shows how to create picture series with webcams Typographical Conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this book etc passwd files or directories placeholder replace the character string placeholder including the angle brackets with the actual value PATH an environment variable ls commands user users Alf a key to press a File menu items buttons Acknowledgements With a lot of personal commitment the Linux developers continue to pro mote the development of Linux We would like to express our sincere grat itude for their efforts Without them this distribution would not exist Ad ditional thanks go to Frank Zappa and Pawar Special thanks of course to LINUS TORVALDS Have a lot of fun Your SUSE Team Contents Part Installation Quick Installation In the best case a few clicks are sufficient to install SUSE LINUX on
284. es the file type based on the extension appended to the file name The following file types are frequently useful 24 4 Saving Images XCF This is the native format of The GIMP It saves all layer and path in PAT JPG GIF formation along with the image itself Even if you need an image in another format it is usually a good idea to save a copy as XCF to sim plify future modifications Information about layers is available in Section 24 6 1 on page This is the format used for GIMP patterns Saving an image in this format enables using the image as a fill pattern in GIMP JPG or JPEG is a common format for photographs and web page graphics without transparency Its compression method enables re duction of file sizes but information is lost when compressing It may be a good idea to use the preview option when adjusting the com pression level Levels of 85 percent to 75 percent often result in an ac ceptable image quality with reasonable compression Saving a backup in a lossless format like XCF is also recommended If editing an im age save only the finished image as JPG Repeatedly loading a JPG then saving can quickly result in poor image quality Although very popular in the past for graphics with transparency GIF is less often used now because of license issues GIF is also used for animated images The format can only save indexed images See Section on page 371 for information about indexed images The file size can
285. ese options can be accessed through a single dialog via Tools gt Cookies gt View Cookies 13 5 For More Information For more information about Galeon see http galeon The GNOME home page http www gnome org can also be helpful SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 239 The Mozilla Web Browser Mozilla is a web browser developed as an Open Source program with the aim of providing an Internet application that is fast compliant with stan dards and portable across different computing platforms In addition to the basic browser Mozilla includes a number of extra components such as a mail component and a web page design component This chapter focuses on the web browser component 14 1 The Initial Browser Window 242 142 Working with Tabs 245 143 Preferences 246 JOSMOIG SM DPINIZON SUL 14 1 The Initial Browser Window File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Q Q Q Q Ie a S fi 4 Home EJBookmarks S The Mozilla Or Latest Builds S Mozilla deutsch Sidebar Tabsw X What s Related Bookmarks Home User Contact Site Map Links Register Softward Add Manage Search Home User gt Products gt SuSE Accessories gt Linux Penguins Name D EjPersonal Toolbar Fol Linux Penguins b E3Mozilla Projekt History Mozilla deutsch 4 LJ 4 94 E Done Figure 14
286. ess 2 The module selection then appears with a thick border Use Q and 7 to select the desired module Keep the arrow SUSE LINUX User Guide 129 130 keys pressed to scroll through the list of available modules When a mod ule is selected the module title appears with a colored background and a brief description is displayed in the bottom frame Press to start the desired module Various buttons or selection fields in the module contain a letter with a different color yellow by default Use Alf yellow letter to select the respective button directly without navigat ing there with Tab Exit the YaST Control Center by pressing Exit or by selecting Exit in the category overview and pressing Enter 4 10 2 Restriction of Key Combinations If you have system wide key combinations when the X server is run ning the combinations in YaST might not work Furthermore keys like or might be occupied by the settings of the terminal Replacing Alt with Esc Alt shortcuts can be executed with Esc instead of Alt For example Esc KH replaces AXE Replacing backward and forward navigation with CtrXF and Ctrl B If the and combinations are occupied by the window man ager or the terminal the combinations forward and backward can be used instead Restricted function keys The F keys are also used for functions Cer tain function keys can be occupied by the terminal so might not be a
287. ess The contents of the test directory will be displayed with less This only makes sense if the normal output with 1s would be too lengthy For instance if you view the contents of the dev directory with 1s dev you will only see a small portion in the window View the entire list with 1s dev less It is also possible to save the output of commands to a file For example 1s test gt Content generates a new file called Content that contains a list of the files and directories in test View the file with less Content You can also use a file as the input for a command For example sort the text lines in Test file with sort lt Testfile The output of the com mand sort is sent to the screen The text is sorted by the first letters of the individual lines If you need a new file containing the sorted list pipe the output of the com mand sort to a file To test this create an unsorted name list in an editor and save it under list in the test directory Then change into test and enter the command sort lt unsortedlist gt sortedlist Finally view the sorted list with less Just like the standard output the standard error output is sent to the con sole as well However to redirect the standard error output to a file named 25 1 Introduction to Bash errors append 2 errors to the corresponding command Both stan dard output and standard error are saved to one file named alloutput if you append gt amp alloutput Finally
288. essed Note All settings as listed above are applied globally they are used as defaults for every new document you create Note 7 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer 7 6 1 Creating Texts with the AutoPilot To use a standard format and predefined elements for your own docu ments try the AutoPilot This is a small utility that lets you make some ba sic decisions then produces a ready made document from a template For instance to create a business letter select File gt AutoPilot then select Letter This opens the dialog as shown in Figure 7 3 on the next page Click Next in each page to proceed to the next one To modify any pre vious entries use Back When finished click Create to generate the let ter according to your specifications Exit the dialog with Cancel Access a help document with Help When finished click Create OpenOffice org produces a letter according your specifications Now compose the text body of the letter itself Au toPilot is not limited to letters but can also assist in the creation of faxes agendas memos and presentations 7 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer Figure 7 3 The OpenOffice org AutoPilot 7 6 2 Creating Texts without the AutoPilot Create a new text document by selecting File gt New gt Text Document When editing a text document a second too
289. et Min Max Min 10 508 3 702 Max 10 000 Enable note events Cj Follow Configuration Dialog Follow MIDI Add to Parameter View Bind Clear Binding Clear All Toggle MIDI Sign MIDI Channel Omni Figure 19 19 MIDI Controllers and Module Parameters in the Control Center The list to the left displays the MIDI controllers used in a patch In this tree view the parameters associated with a controller are shown under the re spective controller As soon as a controller event that does not exist in the list is received via MIDI it is added to the list The list to the right shows 19 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor the modules and their parameters If you select a parameter here the re spective control appears enabling modification of the parameter and range limits To create a MIDI binding select a controller in the list to the left and a pa rameter in the list to the right Then click Bind To clear a MIDI binding simply select the respective parameter in the list to the left under the con troller and click Clear Binding Clear All clears the entire list of MIDI controllers and bindings With Toggle MIDI Sign determine whether a parameter should increase or decrease with rising controller values The settings of these MIDI controllers become effective only when the current parameter value has been attained This prevents sudden parameter jolts xnu ui PUNOS Add to Pa
290. etfile is overwritten r Copies recursively includes subdirectories mv option s sourcefile targetfil Copies sourcefiletotargetfile then deletes the original sourcefile b Creates a backup copy of the sourcefile before moving i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing targetfile is overwritten rm option s file s Removes the specified files from the file sys tem Directories are not removed by rm unless the option r is used r Deletes any existing subdirectories i Waits for confirmation before deleting each file ln option s sourcefile targetfil Creates an internal sallink from the sourcefile to the targetfile Normally such a link points directly to the sourcefile on the same file system However if 1n is executed with the s option it creates a symbolic link that only points to the directory in which the sourcefile is located enabling linking across file systems s Creates a symbolic link ed options s directory Changes the current directory cd without any parameters changes to the user s home directory mkdir option s directoryname Creates a new directory rmdir option s directoryname Deletes the specified directory if it is already empty chown option s username group file s Transfers ownership of a file to the user with the specified user name R Changes files and directories in all subdirectories 25 3 Important Linux Commands chgrp option s
291. etscape or Mozilla as additional browsers it is not necessary to recreate your bookmarks File gt Import Netscape Book marks in the bookmark editor enables you to integrate your Netscape and Mozilla bookmarks into your most current collection The reverse is also possible via Export as Netscape Bookmark Change your bookmarks by right clicking the entry A pop up menu ap pears in which to select the desired action cut copy delete etc When you achieve the desired results save it with File gt Save To save your bookmark list and have instant access to it make your book marks visible in Konqueror Select Settings gt Show Bookmark Toolbar SUSE LINUX User Guide JOJONOUOY JOSMOIG SM SUL 235 236 A bookmark panel is automatically displayed in the current Konqueror window 12 5 Java and JavasScript Do not confuse these two languages Java is an object oriented platform independent programming language from Sun Microsystems It is fre quently used for small programs applets which are executed over the Internet for things like online banking chatting and shopping JavaScript is an interpreted scripting language mainly used for the dynamic structur ing of web pages e g for menus and other effects Konqueror allows you to enable or disable these two language This can even be done in a domain specific way which means that you can permit access for some hosts and
292. etwork Object Model Environment is a fast Linux desk top The aim of its development was to make the user interface more uni form while streamlining the various aspects of the look and feel The basic components for window management and other components enable data sharing among various applications and are based on a uniform operating concept and help system 61 TheDesktop o ooo oo 170 6 2 et tips cope a s 172 6 3 File Management with Nautilus 177 6 4 Important Utilities 179 dopiseq INONI SUL 170 6 1 The Desktop The most important elements of the GNOME desktop are the icons on the desktop the panel at the lower border and the desktop menu The mouse is your most important tool 6 1 1 The Icons By default the desktop features three symbols your personal folder the start dialog for the configuration of the desktop and the trash can If you double click your personal folder Nautilus starts and displays your home directory More information about the use of Nautilus is available in Sec tion 6 3Jon page 177 All files deleted with Nautilus are sent to the trash can Right clicking an icon displays a menu offering file operations like copy ing cutting or renaming Selecting Properties from the menu displays a configuration dialog The title of an icon as well as the icon itself can be changed with Use custom icon The Emblems tab offers the possibilit
293. ext HP GL 2 Driver Settings wu Page size A4 Paper type Paper source Tray 2 Orientation 34 p Duplex Printing a Portrait As None Y Landscape ma P ed ong side El Reverse landscape OL Short side C Reverse portrait r Banners _ Pages per Sheet n Start none ol O2 End none Q4 4 Save i 3 Cancel Figure 5 2 Settings in KPrinter lect the file by double clicking it The respective file then appears in the overview of the main window together with the name type and path specification Now click Print to send the job to the printer The job is placed in the queue and can be monitored with KJobViewer On the other hand if you click the document two additional buttons become active to the right Use the X button to remove the document from the selection or use the magnifying glass icon to display edit and save the file with Kwrite or OpenOffice org depending on the document type Afterwards sim ply close the editing program and click Print in the KPrinter dialog Your changes are then adopted for printing All KDE applications use KPrinter for printing For example if you click the printer icon in KWrite the KPrinter dialog appears The file to print is already preselected 5 1 Desktop Components 5 1 5 The Panel The panel at the lower edge of the screen consists of sev
294. ey are sent to the printer consecutively As long as your jobs are not printed edit them with the Jobs menu or by clicking the respective icon See Figure 5 5 File Jobs Filter Settings Help Name Zo Fl Owner Completed 291 Li gv 3eb92946 1 Completed 333 1 H 1 i gt leia Ici Keep window permanent Max Unlimited Figure 5 5 Monitoring Print Jobs with KJobViewer If for example you want to check if you sent the correct document to the printer you can stop the job and resume it if you decide to print it Remove your own print jobs from the queue with Remove To change the printer select a different printer with Move to Printer With Restart reprint a document To do this select Toggle Completed Jobs from the Filter menu select the desired document and click Restart in the Jobs menu Job IPP Report contains the technical details of a job Use Increase Priority and Decrease Priority to set the priority depending on how quickly you need the document Filter enables you to switch between various printers toggle completed jobs and limit the view to your own print jobs by selecting Show Only User Jobs The current user will be displayed in the top right field 5 4 Important Utilities Settings gt Configure KJobViewer opens a configuration dialog Here dete
295. f View Thumbnails is activated the picture names and thumbnails are displayed in the right win dow pane Otherwise the names and an icon are displayed Images in the right pane can be selected or deselected by clicking them Select all images with Select gt All or A To save the selected images use the disk icon in the toolbar select File gt Save Selected Photos or use the shortcut Ctrl S The Save dialog shown in Fig ure 22 2 on page 50 has a number of options Under What to Save select whether to save the thumbnails the images or both With Open image s with save the image and open it in another program To open the images in Ihe GIMP immediately enter gimp Using the file names suggested by the camera is recommended 22 5 Using Digikam Digikam by Renchi Raju is a KDE program for downloading photographs from digital cameras On start up Digikam presents a window with three sections your home directory is displayed to the left the photographs available in the camera are displayed to the right and a list of cameras is displayed below To set up a camera in Digikam select Configure gt Setup A window dis playing a list of supported cameras opens First try to autodetect the cam era with Auto Detect If this fails browse the list for your model If your camera model is not included in the list try an older model Normally this should work Th
296. f at least 160 x 80 cm Workstations made of several interlinked boards are recommended Tables that cannot be vertically adjusted must be 72 cm high Tables that are vertically adjustable must be between 68 and 76 cm high Even more width is needed for certain working tasks such as CAD workstations When changing between screen work and other kinds of work at least 200 cm is required 26 1 The Working Environment There should be at least 60 cm leg room Previous experience has shown however that this leg room is often too little When using large screens tables should be 100 or even 120 cm deep The table surface should not be in bright colors and should have min imal reflection A lot of office furniture is available in a subdued grey only 26 1 2 Sitting Correctly on the Right Working Chair Sitting in a working chair makes you sit in the same posture for a long time unlike in an easy chair where you can move around easily Constant sitting in the wrong position such as bending forward or twisting to the side can harm the respiratory and digestive organs This leads to prema ture fatigue circulatory disturbances and backache resulting from over straining the spine and the vertebrate disks In extreme cases years of sit ting in the wrong position can lead to muscular and skeletal illnesses Correct sitting means a frequent change of posture Different parts of the body are then constantly being used Basically
297. f a document with Home and End End this viewing mode by pressing G Learn more about the man command itself with man man There are many more commands than listed in this chapter For informa tion about other commands or more detailed information the O Reilly pub lication Linux in a Nutshell is recommended In the following overview the individual command elements are written in different typefaces The actual command is always printed as command Without this nothing can function Options without which the respective program cannot function are printed in italics Further details like file names which must be passed to a command for correct functioning are written in the Courier font Specifications or parameters that are not required are placed in square brackets Adjust the settings to your needs It makes no sense to write 1s file s if no file named file s actually exists You can usually combine several parameters for example by writing 1s lainsteadofls 1 a 25 3 1 File Commands File Administration ls option s file s Ifyou run 1s without any additional pa rameters the program lists the contents of the current directory in short form l Detailed list SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ULM 8uptoM 393 394 a Displays hidden files cp option s sourcefile targetfil Copies sourcefiletotargetfile i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing targ
298. f the file system of the root partition is damaged In this case you might also need the module disk with various drivers to be able to access the system e g to access a RAID system SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 117 118 VaS Winstaitor e Restore module P Archive selection Restore module can restore gt your system from backup archive Backup archive Archive selection Archive can be read from Local file Archive file name Local file Select file Archive is already available in thi te It ted Beer an unie C Network NES ste buie IP adress or name of NFS server Network Backup archive can be read Archive file name from network using NFS Removable device The archive is on a removable device or on an unmounted file Removable device system The device can be selected from a list or you can sj enterthe device file name e g dev hdc if not listed Archive file name If you press Select file the device will be mounted and you can selectthefilefroma y I t Abort Back Nex dialog s u Ru ga mm Figure 4 28 Start Window of the Restore Module Standard boot disk Use this option to create a standard boot disk with which to boot an installed system This disk is also needed for start ing the rescue system Rescue disk This disk contains a special environment that allows you to perform maintenance tasks i
299. file in Konqueror your images are displayed in a miniaturized well arranged view Click an image to access the full size view SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq 3d eut 153 154 5 4 Important Utilities The following pages introduce a number of small KDE utilities intended to assist in daily work These applications perform various tasks such as managing your keys for encrypting and signing files and e mail messages managing your clipboard formatting floppy disks compressing and de compressing diverse file archive types and sharing your desktop with other users 5 4 1 Klnternet Connecting to the Internet To surf the Internet or send and receive e mail messages connect a modem or an ISDN or Ethernet card to your machine and configure it This can be done with the help of the system assistant YaST As soon as the respective device has been configured correctly control the Internet dial up with KIn ternet On start up KDE loads KInternet The program checks whether an Inter net connection can be established If this is possible the application icon a plug automatically appears in the right part of the KDE panel The follow ing is an overview of the icons and their meanings R Currently there is no connection to the Internet The connection is just being established or terminated The connection has been established Pd Ss S Data is transmitted to or from the Internet p An error has occurred If
300. file name then Open to import the table SUSE LINUX User Guide ejns eoyo 61o eoyjouedo SU 199 200 7 8 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw Draw can be used to create vector graphics Vector graphics are images in which lines and curves are defined through certain parameters such as the location of points and the curvature To create a new drawing start Draw from the main menu Applications gt OpenOffice org Draw If OpenOffice org is already running select File gt New gt Drawing The graphical objects available in Draw can be modi fied in various aspects such as line thickness line type color and fill Try to draw a rectangle In the main toolbar which is displayed on the left side click the filled rectangle button fifth from top and keep the mouse button pressed for a few seconds until an additional toolbar opens The latter includes a selection of filled and unfilled rectangles and squares some of them with rounded corners Select one of the filled rectangles The mouse cursor should turn into a cross Now move the cursor to the canvas and click it dragging the mouse towards the bottom right Draw shows the outline of a rectangle that is reshaped as you move When you are satisfied with the size of the object release the mouse button The properties of the rectangle such as its fill color can be modified with the following steps First activate the object
301. four lines shown in Example 19 3 are relevant All other lines can be deleted Example 19 3 timidity cfg of eawpats12_full rar Source gravis cfg Source gsdrums cfg Source gssfx cfg Source xgmap2 cfg Then the file permissions must be updated To do this enter the com mand chmod R a r usr share timidity eawpats To use sound fonts instead of the Gravis instrument patches modify the file usr share timidity timidity cfg For example to use the Vintage Dreams sound font with timidity create a timidity cfg consisting of a single line soundfont usr share sounds sf2 Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 More information about this subject is available in usr share doc packages timidity C README sf 19 10 3 Starting timidity with the Graphical Interface There are few programs that offer as many program interfaces as timid ity For an overview enter man timidity The Athena Widget Interface is a mature interface that is started with usr bin timidity iatv amp Note You should not be in the directory usr share timidity when you start timidity Note 322 19 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card 19 10 4 The ALSA Server Mode of timidity To start timidity in the ALSA server mode enter usr bin timidity iA B2 8 Os amp A message suchas Opening sequencer port 128 0 128 1 will be displayed showing the MIDI port by means of which the synthesizer can be addressed e g with vkeybd
302. fy it or exe cute it Other users do not have any access to this file Other permis sions can be assigned by means of ACLs Access Control Lists See Section on page 392 for details and refer to the chapter in the Administration Guide for further background information Directory Permissions Access permissions for directories have the type d For directories the individual permissions have a slightly different meaning Example 25 2 Sample Output Showing Directory Permissions drwxrwxr x 1 tux project3 35 Jun 21 15 15 ProjectData In Output the owner tux and the owning group project3 of the directory ProjectData are easy to recognize In contrast to 25 2 Users and Access Permissions the file access permissions from Section 52 1 the set reading per mission r means that the contents of the directory can be shown The write permission w means new files can be created The exe cutable permission x means the user can change to this directory In the above example this means the user tux as well as the members of the group pro ject3 can change to the ProjectData directory x view the contents r and add new files to it w The rest of the users on the other hand are given less access They may enter the directory x and browse through it r but not insert any new files w 25 2 2 Modifying File Permissions IOUS eut ULM 8uptoM Changing Access Permissions The access permissions of a file or direc tory can b
303. ge to the respective directory with cd usr share sounds sf2 and enter the command sftovkb Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 gt vintage vkb to save the names in your home directory in vintage vkb The vkeybd interface can be configured with the view menu SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 317 318 The mapping of the keys to the sent MIDI notes is saved in the file vkeybdrc Additional specifications can be made in this file To imple ment your own modifications retrieve the designations of keyboard events with the Xev program 19 9 3 Establishing Connections between MIDI Ports Eile Help Writeable Ports 64 0 External MIDI 0 65 0 Emu10k1 WaveTable Readable Ports 64 0 External MIDI 0 72 0 External MIDI 1 80 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 0 81 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 1 82 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 2 83 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 3 129 0 Virtual Keyboard 130 0 Virtual Keyboard 65 1 Emu10k1 WaveTable 65 2 Emu10k1 WaveTable 65 3 Emu10k1 WaveTable 72 0 External MIDI 1 80 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 0 81 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 1 131 0 MIDI Viewer 82 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 2 133 0 Virtual Keyboard 83 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 3 134 0 MIDI Viewer 131 0 MIDI Viewer 132 0 Client 132 132 1 Client 132 134 0 MIDI Viewer connect disconnect Figure 19 14 Connecting MIDI Ports and Status Display with kaconnect ALSA provides an efficient infrastructure for the connection of several MIDI ports Sound cards and MIDI
304. ge works like cutting the edges off a piece of paper Se lect the crop tool from the toolbox it resembles a scalpel or with Tools gt Transform Tools gt Crop amp Resize Click a starting corner and drag to outline the area to keep A small window opens with information about the starting point and the size of the selected area Adjust these values by clicking and dragging a corner of the crop box or by adjusting the values in the window From Se lection adjusts the crop to fit the current selection selections are explained in Section on the next page Auto Shrink makes the crop smaller based on color changes in the image Press Cancel to abort the crop Press Crop to crop the image The results of Resize are identical to those of Change Canvas Size described in Sec tion 24 5 1 on the facing page Scaling an Image Select Image gt Scale Image to change the overall size of an image Select the new size by entering it in New Width or New Height or by adjusting the Ratio To change the proportions of the image when scaling this dis torts the image click the chain icon to the right of the ratio fields to break the link between them When those fields are linked all values are changed proportionately when the value in one of the four fields is changed When the link is broken width and height can be adjusted independently of each other or the X and Y rat
305. gethe f X A lt local security settings Local Security Configuration Q The local security settings C include the boot configuration login settings password settings some user creation settings and file permissions All particular settings are Current Security Settings described in the respective dialogs C Level 1 Home Workstation O You a C Level 2 Networked Workstation preset configurations or you Level 3 Network Server can make your own settings h amp Custom Settings O Use Home Workstation for a home computer not connected to any type of a network Use Networked Workstation Q fora computer connected to k any type of a network or the O Internet Use Network Server for a computer that will be providing any type of service network or f Abort Back I Ne anv other B Figure 4 25 Security Settings not offer any server services but only use your computer for surfing the In ternet and sending and receiving e mail skip this dialog without activating any of the services If you are not familiar with the terms masquerading and traceroute simply accept the third dialog without any modifications You can also accept the final dialog as the default log options are usually sufficient When you click Next a small window asks for confirmation Then the new configuration is saved to the hard disk The next time your Internet connection is started your computer will be protec
306. gistration documents 4 5 Network Devices Ya GS Winctatter ge Access to your Internet provider If q y lt you have selected your provider Provider Parameters Q from the list these values are meum provided UN Enter a Provider Name forthe 1 provider and a Phone Number to Name for Dialing tonline ds access your provider Enter the Line ID e g 00056780362 the T Online Provider Nara Number e g 870008594732 O the User Code typically 0001 T Online Info and the Password to use as the lo Authorization gin ask your provider if unsure ZA Line ID T Online Number a Check Always Ask to be asked O for the password every time C User Code Passwor d 0001 O C Always Ask for Password E Abort Back Next Eg UT Ju I Figure 4 19 T DSL Configuration in Germany 4 5 5 ISDN This module enables the configuration of one or several ISDN cards in your system If the ISDN card is not automatically detected by YaST select the card manually Theoretically you can configure several interfaces How ever this is usually not necessary for home users as several providers can be configured for one interface The following dialogs provide for the con figuration of the various ISDN parameters for operating the card The next dialog shown in Figure 4 20 on the following page is used for the Selection of ISDN protocol The standard setting for Europe is Euro ISDN EDS
307. graphical system such as KDE set up the keyboard with the module Display and Input Devices See Section on pagel79 Note The desired keyboard layout usually matches the selected language Use the test field to see if special characters such as the pipe symbol are dis played correctly 4 9 Miscellaneous 4 9 1 Submitting a Support Request By purchasing SUSE LINUX you are entitled to free installation support For information about the support scope address and phone numbers visit our web site at YaST offers the possibility to send a support request directly by e mail to the SUSE team Registration is required first Start by entering the required data your registration code is located at the back of the CD cover Re garding your query select the problem category in the following window and provide a description of the problem Figure 4 31 on the following page Also read the YaST help text which explains how best to describe the problem so the support team can help you Note If you need advanced support such as for special problems consider using the SUSE Professional Services Refer tolhttp www suse for details Note 4 9 2 Boot Log The boot log contains the screen messages displayed when the computer is started It is logged to var 10g boot msg Use this YaST module to SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 127 128 YaS Vinstatter e 1 SUSE Support
308. h a sound font before any sound can be heard 19 9 1 Loading Sound Fonts SB Live and AWE The package awes fx contains the s x1oad command for loading sound fonts in Soundblaster AWE and Live cards Suitable sound font files are available on the driver CD of your sound card The start up script of ALSA can automatically load the sound fonts required for the WaveTable synthe sis provided the respective files were installed from the Creative driver CD using YaST Currently the script only works for one sound card However ALSA can easily manage up to eight sound cards Sound fonts can be loaded with a command like s xload D n usr share sfbank creative 8MBGMSFX SF2 n stands for the number of the sound card 0 1 etc This may not be the number under which the sound card was configured This number is instead determined by the order in which the individual sound drivers are loaded You can also load one of the sound fonts installed in usr share sounds s 2 The sound font Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2by IAN WILSON contains 128 analog synthesizer sounds and eight drum sets It is suitable for SB AWE as well as for SB Live cards The ROM sound font gu11 rom sf2 by SAMUEL COLLINS is only suitable for SB AWE cards It provides an extended general MIDI bank for these cards Re view the copyright files and the documentation in usr share doc packages snd sf2 More sound fonts are available at URLs such as http www hammersound net
309. has been corrupted you can try to make the system bootable again with System Repair Without a previously installed ver sion of SUSE LINUX it is only possible to perform a new installation The following sections describe the procedure of installing a new system Detailed instructions for a system update can be found in Chapter on page 66 A description of the system repair options can be found in Chap terB on page 5 Click OK to continue See FigureP 3 It appears that your machine has a Linux system installed m Please select d r RER Th a New installation To verify this existing partitions must be mounted This can be a _ Update an existing system time consuming process for large m RE 9 Repair Installed System partitions s _ Boot installed system Please choose whatto do Select New Installation if there is no Abort Installation existing Linux system on your machine or if you want to replace an existing Linux system completely abandoning all its configuration data Select Update an Existing System to update a Linux system already Figure 2 3 Selecting the Installation Mode 2 5 Installation Suggestion After hardware detection the suggestion window shown in FigureD 4 on the facing page displays some information about the hardware recognized 2 4 Installation Mode and proposes a number of installation and partitioning options When se lecting any of these items and conf
310. have found the entry select it and confirm with Enter In the screen that opens look for a subentry called BOOT SE QUENCE The boot sequence is often set to something like C A or A C In the former case the machine first searches the hard disk C then the floppy drive A to find a bootable medium Change the settings by pressing Page up or Page down until the sequence is A CDROM C 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM Leave the BIOS setup screen by pressing Esc To save the changes se lect SAVE amp EXIT SETUP or press F10 To confirm that your settings should be saved press Y If you have a SCSI CD ROM drive you need to change the setup of the SCSI BIOS In the case of an Adaptec host adapter for instance open the setup by pressing A After that select Disk Utilities which displays the connected hardware components Make a note of the SCSI ID for your CD ROM drive Exit the menu with then open Configure Adapter Settings Under Additional Options select Boot Device Options and press Enter Enter the ID of the CD ROM drive and press again Then press twice to return to the start screen of the SCSI BIOS Exit this screen and confirm with Yes to boot again UOID OJSU LUOJSND Your CD ROM drive may not be supported because it is an older model 2 2 The Boot Screen Boot from Hard Disk boots the already installed system This item is se lected b
311. he choice with Finish This completes the SpamAssassin installation process Create an additional folder in KMail naming it spam for instance in which to store the messages classified as spam If you already have col lected some spam messages move as many of them as possible into this folder This folder can be later used as a training stock and allows the tool to decide which of your incoming messages should be classified as spam Spam Filtering KMail requires two filters for spam processing 1 The first filter examines the size of a message Select Settings Configure filters In the dialog that appears create a new filter entry and name it SpamAssassin modify the name if desired Se lect Size in bytes gt as the filtering property and is less than as the qualifier Set the threshold to 300000 Select pipe through application for filtering actions and enter spamc in the field next to it The option abort processing here upon matching filter condition must be deactivated Confirm the first filter with Apply This filtering rule specifies that KMail passes only messages to spamc whose size is less than 300 KB It is possible to adjust other thresh old values The processing time for messages rises however with an increasing size threshold SpamAssassin then tests all messages for characteristics of spam and alters the message header by adding the line X Spam Status
312. he foreground If the program is already in the foreground a mouse click min imizes it Clicking a minimized application reopens the respective window Beside the taskbar the Workspace Switcher provides access to additional work areas These virtual desktops provide extra space in which to ar range open applications and windows For example put an editor on one workspace some shells on another and your e mail application and web browser on a third If you right click an empty spot in the panel a menu opens offering help information and commands for GNOME and panels Select Properties to open a configuration dialog in which to change the position and back ground of the panel If desired create additional panels or add launchers tools and various applets to the existing panels with Add to Panel Use drawers to organize your favorite applications or important documents The contents are only displayed when the drawer is opened with a single click Right click the drawer and select Properties to modify its size and appearance Click the icon to change it Remove panel elements by right clicking the respective icons and selecting Remove 6 1 4 The Main Menu Open the main menu by means of the icon to the far left of the panel Apart from the applications which are organized in categories find default func tions such as Log out and Lock screen Use Open Recent to gain quick access to recent files
313. he browser to use only locally stored or cached web pages Edit includes the common editing operations such as Undo Cut Copy Paste and Delete There is also an item to search for words or text strings in web pages Find Previous repeats the previous search action Preferences opens a dialog in which to change the browser s configuration options The details of this are described in Section on pagep46 View The View menu includes items to display or hide the different ele ments of the browser and also to stop loading a web page or reload it There are also items to change the text zoom for the pages displayed and to change the character coding Another item in this menu lets you view the source of a web page This is the navigation menu with items to go Back or Forward in the page history or to jump to the Home page Selecting History opens a window thats lists the addresses of all the web pages recently visited with the browser Bookmarks Use Bookmarks to create and edit bookmarks Bookmarks can be arranged in folders Any previously created bookmarks can be selected from the menu Tools A number of useful browser functions can be accessed via the Tools menu For example access a search engine to find certain contents on the Internet The Cookie Manager gives control over the cookies the browser has stored on your computer and lists each cookie
314. he canvas resize Note The same results can be achieved using the Resize option of the crop tool Note 24 5 2 Selecting Parts of Images It is often useful to perform an image operation on only part of an image To do this the part of the image with which to work must be selected Ar eas can be selected using the select tools available in the toolbox using the quick mask or combining different options Selections can also be modified with the items under Select The selection is outlined with a dashed line called marching ants Using the Select Tools The main select tools are rather easy to use The paths tool which can also be used for more than selecting is more complicated so is not described SUSE LINUX User Guide dINIS SUL ui saludos Buyoindiuny 365 366 here In the tool options for the other select tools determine whether the selection should replace be added to be subtracted from or intersect with an existing selection Rectangular Select This tool can be used to select rectangular or square areas In the tool options select among Free Select Fixed Size and Fixed Aspect Ratio to control the shape and size of the selection Elliptical Select Use this to select elliptical or circular areas The same options are available as with rectangular selection Lasso Draw a selection area freehand with this tool by dragging the mouse over the image with the left mou
315. he last line The most important commands in command mode are Table 25 2 Simple Commands of the vi Editor Changes to last line mode i Changes to insert mode characters appear at the current cursor position a Changes to insert mode characters appear after the current cursor position A Changes to insert mode characters are added at the end of the line R Changes to command mode overwrites the old text r Changes to insert mode and overwrites each character s Changes to insert mode the character where the cursor is positioned is replaced by the next entry you make C Changes to insert mode the rest of the line is re placed by the new text SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ULM 8uptoM 401 402 o Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted after the current one O Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted be fore the current one x Deletes the current character dd Deletes the current line dw Deletes up to the end of the current word cw Changes to insert mode the rest of the current word is overwritten by the next entries you make u Undoes the last command J Joins the following line with the current one Repeats the last command Changes to last line mode Each command can be preceded by a number specifying on how many ob jects the following command should operate Delete three words at once by entering 3dw The command 10x deletes ten characters after the cursor p
316. he menu bar the toolbar and a number of shortcuts you can right click the opened document to access a context menu providing basic editor functions KWrite supports the drag and drop functions of KDE which means that you can simply drag documents with the mouse from one application into another or paste data from the clipboard see Section 5 4 4 on page 156 To edit a text file for which you have put an icon on the desktop click the icon with the left mouse button and hold the button while dragging it into the editor window You can now edit the file as usual Paste text from the clipboard by middle clicking To edit or view the source code of an HTML page drag the URL into the editor window of KWrite keeping the left mouse button pressed index html KWrite 3 pS File Edit View Bookmarks Tools Settings Help aGoer rvd4 rh XAA2QR lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC w3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd 2 htmi 3 lt head gt lt link rel SHORTCUT ICON href favicon ico title external favicon ico gt lt title gt Willkommen bei SuSE lt title gt m El voyou lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt 10 kmeta name robots content noarchive gt 11 lt META NAME description CONTENT SuSE Linux AG The Linux Experts Ihr globaler L sungsanbieter rund um Linux gt 12 lt META NAME keywords CONTENT SuSE SuSE
317. he selection is reset to its default after the event acts like 5 except is a double click event acts like 5 except is a click and hold event geo releases the click and hold event previously invoked with O moves the cursor toward the upper left moves the cursor straight upwards moves the cursor towards the upper right moves the cursor towards the left moves the cursor towards the right moves the cursor towards the lower left moves the cursor straight downwards 3 9 Oo0e2o moves the cursor towards the lower right With the slider set the speed of the mouse pointer movement when a key is pressed For More Information For more information about the X Window System and its properties refer to the Administration Guide 4 4 Hardware 4 4 5 Hardware Information YaST detects hardware for the configuration of hardware components The detected technical data is displayed in this screen This is especially useful for example if you want to submit a support request for which you need information about your hardware ee suse YaS Vinscanor The Hardware Information module displays the hardware details of your computer Click any nodefor more information You can save hardware information to a file Click Save to File and enter the file name PF Hardware info All Entries Architecture 1386 BIOS e Bios video Boot architecture grub Boot disk CDROM CPU Disk FIREBALL
318. held cradle select Settings gt Configure KPilot First specify the correct device file under Pilot de vice If you have a USB cradle enter dev ttyUSBO If you have a serial cradle connected to the first or second serial port enter dev ttyS0 or dev ttyS1 respectively The connection speed should normally be set to 57600 Also provide the user name set on the handheld in the corre sponding field The program checks that the name actually matches the user name on the handheld when you first sync with it The configuration dialog is shown in Figure 2 General Address DB Specials sync About r Device Options Pilot device devttyso Speed 57600 ES Pilot user r Startup Options iXj Start HotSync Daemon at login IR Show daemon in panel itj Stop daemon on exit d X Cancel Figure 9 2 Configuring the Connection in KPilot Creating a dev pilot Link There should be no need to create a dev pi lot link if you have config ured the cradle connection as a regular user As a handheld cradle is nor mally connected to one specific computer possibly with several users on it it may still be useful to configure the connection with administrator per missions 9 Conduits Used by KPilot 7 Note The following configuration steps require administrator permissions and cannot be performed from a regular user account After complet ing the step
319. horized access from the Internet using various security measures free software See FTP file transfer protocol A protocol based on 3 TCP IP for transferring files GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment A user friendly graphical desktop environment for Linux Glossary GNU GNU is Not Unix GNU is a project of the Free Software Foundation FSF Closely linked to the GNU Project is the name of RICHARD STALLMAN RMS The aim of the GNU Project is to create a free Unix compatible operating system free not so much in the sense of free of cost but in the sense of freedom having the right to obtain modify and change the software To guarantee the freedom of the source code the actual program code every change of the original code must be free as well so modifications of or additions to the original software cannot compromise this freedom in any way The now classic GNU Manifesto explains many aspects of this thinking In legal terms GNU software is protected by the GNU General Public License or GPL http www gnu org copyleft gpl html and by the GNU Lesser General Public License or LGPL step mnr gnu org copyleft lgpl html ln connec tion with the GNU Project all Unix tools and utilities are being redeveloped and in part provided with more or enhanced function alities Even complex software systems such as Emacs or glibc are integral components of the project The ra Linux kernel subject to the
320. host name and the domain name can be changed here If the provider has been configured correctly for DSL modem or ISDN access the list of name servers contains entries made automatically as they were extracted from the provider data If you are located in a local network you might re ceive your host name via DHCP in which case you should not modify the name 4 6 2 NFS Client and NFS Server You need these two tools only if you are located in a network In this case you have the possibility to operate a file server that can be accessed by members of your network On this file server you can make programs files or storage space available for users Use the NFS Server module to set up your computer as an NFS server and to determine the directories to export for use by the network users The NFS server should be set up by an expert To configure an NFS server refer to the brief instructions in the Administration Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA Subsequently any user with the needed permissions can mount these di rectories in his own file tree The easiest way to do this is by means of the NFS Client module in which the user merely needs to enter the host name of the computer acting as NFS server and the mount point on his computer To do this select Add in the first dialog and enter the needed data See Figure Host name of the NFS server Choose Remote filesystem Mountpoint local Select Browse Option
321. hould start when SUSE LINUX boots These services enable external hosts to connect to your computer You can also configure various parameters for each service By default the master service that manages the individual services inetd or xinetd is not started When this module starts choose which of the two services to configure The selected daemon can be started with a standard selection of network services If desired Add Delete or Edit services to compose your own selection of services Caution This is an expert tool Only make modifications if you are familiar with network services Caution 4 7 Security and Users A basic aspect of Linux is its multiuser capability Consequently several users can work independently on the same Linux system Each user has a 4 7 Security and Users user account identified by a login name and a personal password for log ging in to the system All users have their own home directories where per sonal files and configurations are stored 4 7 1 User Administration Use the check boxes to select to edit users YaST provides an overview of all local users in the system If you are part of an extensive network click Set Filter to list all system users e g root or NIS users You can also create user defined filter settings Instead of switching between individual user groups combine them according to your needs To add new users fill in the required blanks in
322. i A predefined configuration includes a suitable Ghostscript driver and if available a set of options for the driver related to output qual ity Not all selectable combinations of driver settings work with every printer model This is especially true for higher resolutions Always 4 4 Hardware check whether your settings work as expected by printing the test page If the output is garbled for example with several pages almost empty you should be able to stop the printer by first removing all pa per then stopping the print test from YaST However in some cases the printer will refuse to resume work if you do so It may then be better to stop the print test first and wait for the printer to eject all pages by itself If the printer model is not listed in the printer database YaST offers a selection of standard drivers for the standard printer languages Advanced Settings Use this dialog to access some additional hardware dependent driver specific and hardware independent options If needed change special queue settings or restrict access to the printer However normally there should be no need change anything here Details about the possible settings are provided in the printing chap ter of the Administration Guide uoiuoun8yuo2 ISOA Configuration for Applications Applications rely on the existing printer queues in the same way as any command line tools do There is usually no need to reconfigure the printer for a p
323. iguring them in the corresponding di alogs you are always returned to the suggestion window which is updated accordingly The individual settings are discussed in the following sections YVaS Vinstalor e Installation Settings Base Installation L M EBnquage Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below b Installation Settings e Perform Installation System Configuration Processor Pentium Ill Katmai Root Password Main Memory 256 MB e Network Mode Online Update PUTET New installation e Clean Up Keyboard layout Release Notes Device Configuration English US Mouse IntelliMouse Explorer Partitioning Format Partition dev sdb8 3 8 GB for with reiser Format Partition dev sdb6 258 8 MB for swap Format Partition dev sdb5 23 5 MB for boot with ext2 Software H Change w gt qu O Abort Accept IA A Figure 2 4 Suggestion Window 2 5 1 Installation Mode Use this to change the installation mode The options are the same as al ready described in Section 2 4Jon the preceding page 2 5 2 Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard layout By default the layout corresponds to the se lected language After changing the layout test Y Z and special characters to make sure the selection is correct When finished select Next to return to the suggestion window SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND 17 18 2 5 3 Mouse
324. il under the Receiving tab Use Add to create a new account Choose between different meth ods for fetching mail such as local Mbox or Maildir format POP3 or IMAP Usually POPS is suitable After making your selection a window appears in which to enter the POPS server data Enter the name of the server in the field at the top In the other fields enter the values provided by your Internet service provider or your sys tem administrator The fields User Server and Password are re quired The Extras tab offers several methods for encryption and authorization If you are uncertain about which options your server provides try Test server capabilities 16 4 3 Configuring the Appearance of KMail Under Appearance customize KMail according to your preferences Use the Fonts tab to configure the fonts for the various displays such as the message text and first level quoted text To do this activate Use custom fonts To customize the colors activate Use custom colors in the Colors tab Double click an entry to access a dialog in which to select the colors The Layout tab offers options for splitting the KMail window and for display ing a MIME tree A MIME tree shows all the attachments to a message The Header tab provides options for general settings like displaying the file size or encryption symbols Also customize the date display and mes sage grouping Profi
325. iles in the directory usr bin in green Also recognize them by the x in the first col umn rwxr xr x 1 root root 64412 Jul 23 15 23 usr bin ftp 10 I want to remove Linux How does this work With disk delete the Linux partitions You might need to run fdisk in Linux Afterwards boot from the MS DOS disk and run fdisk MBR in DOS or Windows 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 How can I access my CD First mount the CD with the mount command Information about this command can be found in Section 25 3 1 on page I cannot get my CD out of the drive What should I do now First unmount the CD with the umount command More information about this can be found in Section 25 3 1 on page 398 In KDE just right click the CD ROM icon and select Unmount Drive If YaST is running on your computer exit it OVv4 XANI ISNS How can I find out how much space is available in Linux With the df hT command See Section5 3 2 on page Can I copy and paste in Linux Yes this is possible To copy and paste in the text mode you must have gpm running In the X Window System and in the text mode highlight the text block by clicking and dragging with the left mouse button then insert by clicking with the middle mouse button The right mouse button has a special function in most programs and ap plications Do I need to be afraid of a virus in Linux In Linux there have been no serious viruses found Also viruses can
326. in a file for example as an e mail attachment inte grate it in your key ring with the feature Import Key and use it for en crypted communication with the sender The procedure is similar to the procedure for exporting keys described above 15 1 4 Signing Keys Keys can be signed to guarantee authenticity and integrity If you are ab solutely sure an imported key belongs to the individual specified as the owner express your trust in the authenticity of the key by means of your signature M Note Encrypted communication is only secure to the extent that you can pos itively associate public keys in circulation with the specified user By cross checking and signing these keys you contribute to the establish ment of a web of trust Note Select the key to sign in the key list Select Keys gt Sign Key In the fol lowing dialog designate the secret key to use for the signature An alert reminds you to check the authenticity of this key before you sign it If you have performed this check click Yes and enter the password for the se lected secret key in the next step Other users can now check the signature by means of your public key 252 15 1 Key Management 15 2 The Key Server Dialog Several Internet based key servers offer the public keys of many users To engage in encrypted communication with a large number of users use these servers to distribute your public key For this purpose export yo
327. ines on the Internet The abbreviation for this is TCP IP Every machine on the Internet has an ID number the IP address It can only be addressed by TCP IP with this number Normally a machine also has a text name The Domain Name System DNS is responsible for con verting the IP address to a text name This particular service is offered by name servers A machine or an application offering a service is called a server for example a DNS server and a machine or application making use of a service is called a client UOHDINBYUODO SDA Under TCP IP there are various standardized protocols for forwarding the appropriate TCP IP data transfers to the given transmission method For network connections via a network card the ethernet protocol is used For modem and ISDN telephone connections it is the point to point protocol PPP For ADSL and T DSL connections the point to point over ethernet Protocol PPPoE is used To establish an Internet connection the ethernet PPP or PPPoE connection between your host and a host of the Internet provider must be established first Then the TCP IP connection must be established Various standard ized protocols work on top of TCP IP for proper data transfer to the appli cation The HyperText Transfer Protocol HTTP is used for the transfer of web sites in HyperText Markup Language HTML format The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is responsible for sending e mails to another m
328. ing mkdir test Now launch the KEdit editor by pressing F2 and entering kedit in the input field Type a few letters in the editor then save the file as Test file in your home directory Linux distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase For this example use an uppercase T View the contents of your home directory again Instead of typing 1s again just press 7 twice and the 1s command should reappear at the prompt To execute the command hit Enter The newly created directory test should appear in blue letters and Test file in black This is how directories and files can be distinguished in a console Move Testfile into the subdirectory test with the command mv To speed this up use the expansion function just enter mv T and press Tab As long as there is no other file beginning with this letter SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ULM BUOM 381 382 in the directory the shell expands the file name and adds the string estfile Otherwise add a letter or two yourself and test each time to see whether the shell can now expand the name Finally type a space then test after the expanded file name and press to exe cute the command 7 At this point Test file should no longer be in the directory Check this by entering 1s again 8 To see whether the file has been successfully moved change into the directory test with the command cd test Now enter 1s again You should see Test file in the listing Change
329. ing mode DPMS SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 81 Erequencies Model Vendor and Name selection perum BARCO e yo 4065 el BRIDGE A 105045 BTM 105046 BUS COMPUTER SYSTEMS 105050 CALCOMP 105060 CARROLL TOUCH 105065 co 105066 CHENBRO 105075 CLAXAN 105076 CMC 105080 COLORGRAPHIC 105095 COMMODORE 105520 COMPAQ 105540 COMPAQ USA FOCUS 105550 COMPUDYNE 105570 COMPUTER 2000 gi 105575 4 COMTECH H 105575 H Manufacturer Disk Figure 4 10 Monitor Selection Caution There are safety mechanisms but you should still be very careful when manually changing the allowed frequencies False values may destroy your monitor If in doubt refer to the manual of the monitor Caution Graphics Card The graphics card dialog has two tabs General and Expert In General select the vendor of your graphics card on the left side and the model on the right Expert offers more advanced configuration possibilities On the right side turn your screen to the left or to a vertical position useful for some turn able TFT screens The entries for the BusID are only relevant if you operate several screens Normally nothing needs to be changed here You should not modify the card options unless you have experience in this field and know what the options mean If necessary check the documentation of your graphics card 4 4 Hardware
330. ings In Local security configuration which can be accessed under Secu rity amp Users select one of the following four options Level 1 is for stand SUSE LINUX User Guide 111 Ya 6 Vinstalor e Linux is a multiuser system Ir Several different users can be 8 User and Group Administration logged in the system at the sametime To avoid confusion each user must e Users Q Groups Filter Custom have a unique identity if they want to use Linux Furthermore every user at least belongs to one group Login Name UID Groups TuX SUSE 500 _audio dialout uucp video users geeko In this dialog get information about existing Users To shift to the group dialog select Groups To create a new user push the button Add To edit or delete an existing user select one user from the list and click Edit or Delete Users and groups are arranged in various sets Change the set A EA Y PEA currently shown in the table with Set Filter Customize your view filter with Customize Filter Seer w Expert Options v Abort Back Einish lt Figure 4 23 User Administration alone computers preconfigured Level 2 is for workstations with a net work preconfigured Level 3 is for a server with a network preconfig ured Use Custom Settings for your own configuration If you click one of the first three items incorporate one of the levels of p
331. inished click Save and Close The attendees will be sent an e mail about the scheduled meeting SUSE LINUX User Guide WUDIBOld Jopue o2 PUD ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 281 282 This system can also be used to schedule a time that fits all attendees or to reserve resources For more information about the scheduling functions refer to the internal help 17 5 3 Adding Tasks Evolution helps to keep track of your tasks To add a new task to your list click New Task Enter summary information due and start dates and a description Enter task status and other information under Details Click Save and Close to add the task to your list Double click the task to reopen the dialog and make changes or mark it as completed 17 6 Contacts 17 6 1 Adding Contacts Along with the name and e mail address Evolution can store other address and contact information about a person The e mail address of a sender can quickly be added by right clicking the marked address in the message pre view Select Add to Contacts and confirm the inclusion in the following pop up To enter more information click Edit Full to open the contact ed itor Otherwise click OK If you have selected Edit Full click Save and Close to exit the contact editor when you are finished To enter a completely new contact click New Contact in the Contacts view Enter all desired contact information Click Sav
332. ink itto get enough free space If you delete Windows all data on this partition will be irreversibly lost in the installation When shrinking Installing on Windows we strongly recommend a data backup 1 SCSI 1 96 GB dev sda QUANTUM FIREBALL TM21105 because the data must be reorganized This may fail This disk appears to be used by Windows under rare circumstances There is not enough space to install Linux Delete Windows completely Shrink Windows partition Abort Back p Next Figure 2 9 Possible Options for Windows Partitions Caution If you delete Windows all data will be lost beyond recovery as soon as the formatting starts Caution E To shrink the Windows partition interrupt the installation and boot Win dows in order to prepare the partition from there Although this step is not strictly required for FAT partitions it speeds up the resizing process and also makes it safer These steps are vital for NTFS partitions FAT file system In Windows first run scandisk to make sure the FAT partition is free of lost file fragments and crosslinks After that run defrag to move files to the beginning of the partition This will accel erate the resizing procedure in Linux 2 5 Installation Suggestion E Note If you have optimized virtual memory settings for Windows in such a way that a contiguous swap file is used with the same initial minimum and maximum size limit
333. instead use Print and Save Settings Cancel aborts printing 24 8 Configuring GIMP 24 8 1 Customizing Windows It is possible to customize your window layout extensively Dialogs can be combined as multiple items in one window or with tabs Do this by drag SUSE LINUX User Guide dINIS OUL uii soyda Buyoindiuny 371 Preview Printer Settings Image Output Settings Printer Name od Printer Model PostScript Level 2 Setup Printer New Printer Media Size Letter y Dimensions Width 0 00 Height 0 00 Media Type Standard y Media Source Standard y Ink Type Standard O y Resolution Standard Position Orientation Auto T Lett oso Top tos Rigt s75 Botom sss Right Border 2s Bottom Border niz Center Vertically Both Horizontally Size Scaling 1 72 0 Scale by C Percent Width 8 25 Units Use Original PPI Height 5 29 C cm Image Size amp Print Print and Save Settings Save Settings X Cancel Ae Figure 24 3 The Print Dialog ging and dropping a dockable window into a dock bar or existing tab New dialogs can be opened with File gt Dialogs from the toolbox 24 8 2 Setting Preferences A number of configuration options are available in File gt Preferences The default settings should meet the needs of the average u
334. int and other de tails To go from one match of the search term to the next select Find Next F3 To go to a previous match of the search term select Find Previous Shif F3 To replace a search term with another string use Replace CiD R Go to Line Tojump to a particular line in the document select this menu item enter the line number in the dialog that opens then con firm with OK 8 3 The View Menu From this menu change several aspects of the text display in KWrite En able or disable the editor s word wrap feature and toggle the display of line numbers FID Also decide whether to display the icon border F6 to see 8 3 The View Menu or hide the bookmarks Finally the menu has an item to set the encoding of the text document 8 4 The Bookmarks Menu In KWrite bookmarks are references to specific positions in the document They can be used to navigate quickly to a given line which is especially useful with longer documents To use bookmarks first enable the icon bor der View gt Show Icon Border Add a bookmark by clicking the icon border at the desired line A paper clip should appear after this to indicate that the bookmark has been set Remove a bookmark by clicking the corre sponding clip To navigate between bookmarks press Alf Page down next bookmark and previous bookmark Remove all bookmarks in one step by selecting Clear Bo
335. interval in minutes 10 Fonts Xj Confirm deletes e Mail Client Colors amp Kmail B Sendmail Group Scheduling I Export to HTML with every save p New Events Todos Should Group Automation Be added to the standard resource amp Be asked which resource to use Help Detaults v OK i ES Cancel Figure 10 2 Configuring KOrganizer SUSE LINUX User Guide Jeziuo81Oy UM Guinpeuos 219 220 10 3 Using the Calendar The calendar of KOrganizer can be displayed in a number of different views to show a certain month day week or work week There is also a view of the next three days Details of these views can be configured with Settings gt Configure KOrganizer under the Views item Switch be tween the different views with the View menu or by clicking the corre sponding button in the toolbar Existing event items can easily be modified with the mouse One possibil ity is to change the start and end date or time by clicking the item s upper or lower edge then dragging it to the desired position In the day week and work week view directly move an item to another time by clicking it then dragging it to the new position You can also move events outside the time of the current view For instance an item can be dragged to the date navigator to the left Even drag an item to the date navigator of another KOrganizer window 10 3 1 Events To schedule a new event select A
336. ions of the manufac turer then start Linux b Log in as the root user c Partition the new hard disk with fdisk For further informa tion refer to the manual page of fdisk with man fdisk d Format the partition with mke2fs dev hdbl e Enter the following commands cd opt mkdir opt2 mount dev hdbl opt2 cp axv opt2 SUSE LINUX User Guide OVv4 XANI ISNS 423 424 28 29 Check thoroughly to see whether all the data has been copied Afterwards move the old directory and add a new one an empty mount point mv opt opt old mkdir opt Use an editor to add the new partitions in etc fstab This could resemble the line in File B 1 Example B 1 Sample Line in etc fstab for an Additional Partition dev hdb1 opt ext2 defaults T 2 Now shut down the computer and reboot f After rebooting check that dev hdb1 has actually been mounted to opt using the command mount If everything is working as desired remove the old data from opt old cd rm fr opt old My computer crashed Can I just press the reset button without risking anything If your computer no longer reacts to your mouse or keyboard this does not necessarily mean that your entire system has crashed Possi bly one program is blocking the mouse or the keyboard but all other programs are still running If your machine can be accessed remotely serial terminal network log in elsewhere and abort the respective pr
337. ios can be adjusted individually The values in the Print Size are independent of the pixel size In that sec tion modify the image resolution by modifying the resulting image size 24 5 Editing Images Basics when printed or modifying the resolution itself Use the unit drop down boxes to change the measuring unit Interpolation is an expert option that controls the scale method When finished adjusting the size press OK to scale the image Reset restores the original values Cancel aborts the procedure Changing the Canvas Size Changing the canvas size is like putting a mat around an image Even if the mat is smaller the rest of the image is there but you can only see part of it If the mat is larger you see the original image with extra space around it To do this select Image gt Canvas Size In the dialog that opens enter the new size By default the width and height maintain the same proportions as the current image To change this click the chain icon to the right of Ratio Enter the desired size in the height and width fields or adjust the ratios After adjusting the size determine how the existing image should be po sitioned in comparison to the new size Use the offset values or drag the box inside the frame at the bottom When satisfied with the changes click OK to change the canvas size Click Reset to restore the original values or Cancel to cancel t
338. is URL Click Actions Enabled to disable this function Clear Clipboard History Deletes all entries from the clipboard Configure Klipper This opens the Klipper configuration dialog Klip per can be customized in many ways Control the program with key board shortcuts or use regular expressions Check the Klipper hand book for details Former Windows users may appreciate the option for activating the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl C and Ctrl for cut ting and V for pasting under the General tab To use this fea ture activate the entry Synchronize contents of the clipboard and the selection in Clipboard Selection Behavior Subsequently use the mouse or the keyboard shortcuts to which you are accustomed SUSE LINUX User Guide 1597 158 Help This item opens a submenu from which to open the Klipper hand book send a bug report to the developers and view information about Klipper and KDE Quit If you click Quit a dialog is displayed asking whether Klipper should be started automatically the next time you log in If you click No start the program from the main menu the next time you want to use it If you click Cancel the program will not be terminated 5 4 5 Monitoring Print Jobs Start KJobViewer from the main menu or with the command k jobviewer from the command line This program assists with monitoring print jobs Print jobs are placed in a queue from which th
339. is disabled by default Finally after clicking Create the chart is inserted into your spreadsheet Figure 7 10 on the next page shows the sample chart in its final form 7 7 4 Importing Spreadsheet Tables There is often a need to import data available as a table so it can be pre sented as a spreadsheet In Calc there are two ways to achieve this Importing Data from the Clipboard For instance you may want to import stock exchange data Display the desired table in your web browser Then select the table with the 7 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 900 800 500 400 300 200 100 Overview of expenses 3 Telephone Gas v Sum 0 January February March April Figure 7 10 A Chart in Calc mouse or using Copy depending on the browser This copies the se lected data to the clipboard After that open a new OpenOffice org document with File gt New gt Spreadsheet Select the cell in which the inserted table should start Then select Edit gt Paste This inserts the table into the document with all the formatting specifications hyperlinks and other information included Importing Data with a Filter Import a saved HTML file to Calc by se lecting File gt Open This opens a dialog window in which to select Web Page OpenOffice org Calc under File type Use the arrow keys to scroll the list of file types Finally select the
340. is used specify the NIS domain and the NIS server manually To search for NIS servers broadcasting in the network check the relevant option You can also specify several NIS domains and set a default domain For each domain select Edit to specify several server addresses or enable the broadcast function on a per domain basis In the expert settings use Answer to the Local Host Only to prevent other network hosts from being able query which server your client is using If you activate Broken Server responses from servers on unprivileged ports are also accepted For more information refer to the man page of ypbind SUSE LINUX User Guide 39 40 2 6 7 Creating Local User Accounts When user accounts are created locally any data related to user accounts name login password and so on is stored and managed on this host Linux is an operating system that allows several users to work on the same system at the same time Each user needs a rs user account to log in to the system By having user accounts the system gains a lot in terms of security Regular users cannot change or delete files needed for the system to work properly Similarly the personal data of a given user cannot be modified viewed or tampered with by other users Each user can set up his own working environment and always find it unchanged when logging back in YaS Winseatter e Base Installation 8 Add a New Local User w Language w ins
341. ist 13 0 C Inbox 0 1 Calendar 4 Appointments re Doro Today t o Sensors Online Is Linux Bringing Open Ho appointment Systems to the Factory Floor o NewsFactor Where Are All the Cool Embedded Linux Gadgets o Open Source Digest Network Programming q with ID Socket c o Debian Weekly News May 6 2003 Tasks o Release Digest KDE May 6 2003 Figure 17 1 The Evolution Window with Shortcuts and Summary 17 3 1 Summary The Summary provides some basic information about e mail appoint ments and tasks along with personally configurable weather and news SUSE LINUX User Guide uJDJ80Jg Jopue o2 pub ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 275 276 sources This window is shown in Figure on the preceding page Use Tools gt Settings gt Summary Preferences to configure the information displayed 17 3 2 Inbox In this view the upper half of the window shows the contents of the folder Inbox The lower half is a preview pane used to display the selected mail message Disable the preview pane with View gt Preview Pane To change the folder displayed click the down arrow next to Inbox and select another folder from the list Use the search bar to search the messages in a folder If desired click a table header for the message list to sort the messages by that header The sort can be either ascending or descending as shown by the arrow to the right Click the header until the correct direc
342. isting schemes The preview window displays all desk top elements in the defined colors To change the color of one or several widgets select the name of the widget from the drop down menu under Widget Color and click the color bar below to choose a suitable color in the color editor Finally adjust the contrast settings and save the modified scheme under a name of your choice To apply this scheme globally acti vate Apply colors to non KDE applications Window Decorations Select a decoration style for your application windows from the list un der the General tab Click Apply to test the selected style To position or SUSE LINUX User Guide 145 146 move individual elements of the title bar activate Use custom titlebar but ton positions and rearrange the elements under the Buttons tab If addi tional configuration options are available for the selected style access these under the Configure tab Background Determine a background for your desktop By default your modifications are applied to all virtual desktops To configure the backgrounds separately for the individual virtual desktops deactivate Common Background The effect of your configuration can be seen in the preview at the top right of the dialog window The background colors can be selected under the Background tab To modify the color components click the color bar next to Color 1 or Color 2 to o
343. istration Guide before changing any thing Q Mount Point o O J 3 Select Next to activate the partition A Note If you partition manually create a swap partition The swap partition is used to free the main memory from data that is not used at the present moment This keeps the main memory free for the most frequently used important data Note zi Resizing a Windows Partition If a hard disk containing a Windows FAT or NTFS partition was selected as installation target YaST offers to delete or shrink this partition In this way you can install SUSE LINUX even if there is currently not enough space on the hard disk This functionality is especially useful if the selected hard disk contains one Windows partition that covers the entire hard disk which is often the case with preinstalled computers If YaST sees that there is not enough space on the selected hard disk but that space could be made available by deleting or shrinking a Windows partion it will present a dia log in which to choose one of these two options If you select Delete Windows completely the Windows partition will be marked for deletion and the space will be used for the installation of SUSE LINUX SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 25 26 S a 9 Winstalor ge The selected hard disk is Preparing Hard Disk Step 2 probably used by Windows There is not enough space for SuSE Linux You can either delete Windows completely or shr
344. it is a tool to synchronize data on a handheld with that used by the KDE applications KAddressBook KOrganizer and KNotes 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot 210 9 2 Working with KPilot 215 JO ldM ULM anduon pjeupupH o Bulzluolyo s 210 The main purpose of KPilot is to allow the sharing of data between the applications of a handheld computer and their KDE counterparts KPilot does come with its own built in memo viewer address viewer and file in staller but these cannot be used outside the KPilot environment Indepen dent KDE applications are available for all these functions except the file installer For the communication between the handheld and the different desktop programs KPilot relies on conduits KPilot itself is the program that over sees any data exchange between the two computer devices Using a partic ular function of the handheld on your desktop computer requires that the corresponding conduit is enabled and configured For the most part these conduits are designed to interact with specific KDE programs so in general they cannot be used with other desktop applications The time synchronization conduit is special in that there is no user visible program for it It is activated in the background with each sync operation but should only be enabled on computers that use a network time server to correct their own time drift When a synchronization is started the conduits are activate
345. it is used This attribute is used rarely as modern hard disks are fast enough If this attribute is assigned to a directory it prevents users from deleting each other s files Typical examples include the tmp and var tmp directories drwxrwxrwt 2 root root 1160 2002 11 19 17 15 tmp SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ULM BUPOM 391 392 25 2 6 Access Control Lists The traditional permission concept for Linux file system objects such as files or directories can be expanded by means of ACLs access control lists They allow the assignment of permissions to individual users or groups other than the original owner or owning group of a file system ob ject Files or directories bearing extended access permissions can be detected wit asimple 1s 1 command rw r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap The output of 1s does not reveal much of a change compared to an 1s on a file without an ACL Roadmap is owned by tux who belongs to the group project3 tux holds both write and read access to this file and his group as well as all other users have read access The only difference that distin guishes this file from a file without an ACL is the additional in the first column holding the permission bits Get details about the ACL by executing getfacl Roadmap file Roadmap owner tux group project3 user rw user jane rw ffective r group r group djungle rw ffective r mask r other
346. iver To do this select the respective parameters and enter the new value in the parameter line Confirm the new values with Apply or restore the default values with Reset The dialog TV and Radio Cards Audio enables you to connect your TV or radio card with the installed sound card You must use a cable to con nect the output of the TV or radio card with the external audio input of the sound card This only works if the sound card is already configured and the external input is active If you have not yet configured your sound card select Configure Sound Card to go to the respective dialog described in Section 4 4 10Jon page 92 If your TV or radio card has speaker jacks you can also connect the speak ers directly without configuring the sound card There are also TV cards without any sound function which do not require an audio configuration e g for CCD cameras 4 5 Network Devices All the machines connected to the Internet form a large network in which various operating systems run with different hardware The Internet uses 4 5 Network Devices a standard communication protocol that can be understood regardless of the hardware or software used This is made possible by means of the In ternet Protocol IP together with the Transmission Control Protocol TCP the User Datagram Protocol UDP and the Internet Control Message Pro tocol ICMP These protocols comprise the common language used by all mach
347. ivided into two tabs Display Modes and Advanced Select the screensaver in Display Modes The Advanced tab contains a few special options that normally do not need to be modified Select the screen saver mode under the Display Modes tab Choose from Random Screen Saver random selection of screen savers from a custom defined list Only One Screen Saver Blank Screen Only or Disable Screen Saver SUSE LINUX User Guide doptsed JWONSD SUL 173 174 Select one or more screensavers from the list for the operating modes Only One Screen Saver or Random Screen Saver The currently selected screen saver is displayed in the small preview window The Preview button launches a fullscreen preview of that screensaver which can be aborted by pressing any key Select the previous or following screensaver for preview by clicking the corresponding triangles below the selection list In the last step determine after how long the screen should be made com pletely black Blank After the screensaver module should be changed Cycle After or the screen should be locked Lock Screen After All time references are given in minutes 6 2 5 Windows This module controls the behavior of application windows Determine how the window should react to contact with the mouse pointer or to double clicks on its title and define the key to hold for moving an application win
348. k Add Select Local mailbox from the list and confirm with OK Name the new account for example local inbox by entering the name in the upper input field All the other settings can be left at their default values Then complete the configuration by clicking OK If you have not disabled the sending of mail in the CapiSuite configura tion you will receive all incoming voice and fax messages in your e mail program where you can view them or listen to them as usual UoinpoolunuJuJo29e 9 NASI 18 2 2 Fax Operation No further instructions are necessary for receiving fax messages As soon as a fax is received for a number assigned to a user the message is stored in the system and delivered to the user as an e mail with a PDF attachment PDF is a common exchange format for documents and can be read in vir tually all operating systems with Acrobat Reader from Adobe The user can open read and print the document as in his mail program For backup purposes every received document is also stored on the hard disk in var spool capisuite users username received This directory can be accessed if anything goes wrong during the e mail transmission of if an e mail message was accidentally deleted More infor mation can be found in the CapiSuite documentation in usr share doc packages capisuite manual index html The command line tool capisuitefax is available for sending faxes It ac cepts on
349. key twice is only in terpreted as two characters if the interval selected with the slider has elapsed If a key is pressed twice inadvertently this will be ignored SUSE LINUX User Guide 149 5 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Konqueror is a unified web browser file manager document viewer and image viewer The following paragraphs cover the use of Konqueror for file management Start Konqueror by clicking the house icon in the panel The contents of your home directory are then displayed The file manager window consists of the menu bar at the top the toolbar and the location bar The lower part of the window is split vertically into the navigation panel and the main window which displays the contents Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help QQQ0 O DRAE E gt Location E nenomerw sj al Gy suse JA FTP Archives D Local Network FA Web Sites KDE Applications Y A KDE Home Page bin Desktop Mail OpenOffice org1 1 i KDE News A V suse orbit tux public html Novell Fonts sxw Welcome txt LEO newor gt de ray 8 items 2 Files 7 2 KB Total 6 Folders Figure 5 3 The File Manager Konqueror 5 3 1 The Konqueror Menu Location Using the Location menu open additional Konqueror win dows If you click New Wind
350. l N 24 890 63 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 35c0301b be 254 087 Defl N 67 352 74 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 6efaaffc b 1669 157 Defl N 115 423 83 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm11cbad55 doptseq JG eut 0 files selected 3files 967 3 KB Figure 5 7 Ark File Archive Preview Once you have opened an archive perform various actions Action offers options such as Add File Add Directory Delete Extract View Edit With and Open With To create a new archive select File gt New Enter the name of the new archive in the dialog that opens If you enter a file extension an archive with the specified format is generated If you omit the extension zip is used as the default After you have entered the archive name an empty window is displayed Move files or directories into this window from Konqueror Ark com presses and lists the files For more information about Ark go to Help gt Ark Handbook 5 4 8 Desktop Sharing You can share your desktop for use by other users on their hosts Desk top sharing makes use of the REB protocol more commonly referred to as VNC This feature enables a Linux desktop to be made available for clients using other operating systems provided they support VNC To grant trustworthy users access to your desktop send them a password This can be done by means of an invitation Start the Control Center from SUSE LINUX User G
351. l is used to control the level of the AC97 recording sources Further more Wave and Music can be selected as recording source This internal loopback capture can be activatedin the AC97 standard by selecting the Mix control as recording source 19 2 7 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 envy24control is a mixer application for sound cards using the Envy24 ice1712 chip Start this mixer with SUSE gt Multimedia gt Sound or from the command line with envy24control amp The flexibility of the Envy24 chip can result in varying functionalities in different sound cards The latest details on this sound chip are available in usr share doc packages alsa alsa tools envy24control SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 303 Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About Digital Mixer PCM Out 1 PCM Out 2 PCM Out 3 PCM Out 4 PCM Out 5 CM Out 6 d 17 17 Let Right Let Right Let Right Len Right Let Right Len Right Mute Mute mute mute Mute mute mute mute mute Mute mute mue Left Right Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Reset Peaks Figure 19 3 Monitor and Digital Mixer of envy24control Monitor and Patchbay of envy24control The Monitor Mixer of envy24control shows the signal levels that can be mixed digitally in the sound card The signal
352. lained in the Administration Guide The following only explains the basic setup of the client side Y aS Winctatier SG Enter your NIS domain e g E O foo com and the NIS server s Configuration of NIS client j address e g nis foo com or 10 20 11 Do not use NIS Specify multiple servers by s 2 separating their addresses with Use NIS c spaces f p NIS client Q The Broadcast option enables P Automatic Setup via DHCP searching in the local network to find a server after the specified d Static scum Q servers fail to respond It is a NIS domain security risk id suse de O If you are using DHCP and the d y Addresses of NIS servers server provides the NIS domain name or servers you can enable 22 0 0 11 22 0 0 12 22 0 100 11 their use here DHCP itself can be set up in the network module Broadcast Find Automounter is a daemon that Additional NIS domains mounts directories automatically suse de Edit such as users home directories It is assumed that its configuration X files auto already exist either locally or over NIS Expert Abort Back T Net Figure 2 17 NIS Client Configuration In the following dialog shown in Figure 2 17 first select whether the host has a fixed IP address or gets one via DHCP DHCP also provides the NIS domain and the NIS server For information about DHCP see the Adminis tration Guide If a static IP address
353. lar to the desired color The larger box to the left then shows available nuances Click the desired color It is then shown in Current If that color is not what you want try again The arrow button to the right of Current enables saving a number of pos sible colors Click the arrow to copy the current color to the history A color can then be selected by clicking it in the history A color can also be selected by directly entering its hexadecimal color code in Hex Triplet The color selector defaults to selecting a color by hue which is usually eas iest for a new user To select by saturation value red green or blue select the corresponding radio button to the right The sliders and number fields can also be used to modify the currently selected color Experiment a bit to find out what works best for you When the desired color is shown in Current click OK To restore the original values shown when the dialog was opened click Reset To abort changing the color click Cancel SUSE LINUX User Guide AINID OUL ui soyda Buyoindiuny 367 368 e H we 0 c sw 0 O VW o j CRW C GNU o C BNE o Hex Triplet 000000 Current MM gt Od mm 10 jReset X Cancel D OK Figure 24 2 The Basic Color Selector Dialog To select a color that already exists in your image use the color picker tool the icon for which resembles
354. larSynth as a WAV file in CD quality In the configura tion dialog of the module select New File to open a file browser If the file SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 327 328 displayed under File is successfully generated the buttons under Record are activated and can be used 19 12 NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers NoteEdit is one of the most comprehensive Linux applications for editing scores with a graphical interface As the entered notes are sounded imme diately by the selected MIDI device even newcomers can easily prepare scores with NoteEdit This program offers the entire range of music sym bols for writing scores With NoteEdit even play and record MIDI files The scores can be exported in several formats including MusicTeX and LilyPond Figure 19 20 The Composition Editor NoteEdit Start the application with noteedit A few examples can be found in usr share doc packages noteedit examples which can be opened with File gt Open Use TSE3 gt TSE3 Midi In to import MIDI files These are loaded into the editor with TSE3 gt Score Set various op tions for the conversion in the Filter dialog box Midi gt Devices allows selection of one of the ALSA MIDI devices con figured in the system This device is then used for playback as well as for recording The instrument the MIDI channel and many other para
355. lbar called the object bar is available just below the standard function bar Move the mouse pointer over an icon to get a short help text Documents can also be formatted with the Stylist which is described in Section 6 4 on the following page 7 6 3 Selecting Text To select text click the desired beginning of the selection and keeping the mouse button pressed move the cursor towards the end of the range which can be characters lines or entire paragraphs Release the button at the end of the desired selection While selected text is displayed in in verted colors Open a context menu by right clicking the selection Use the context menu to change the font the font style and other text properties The Navigator displays information about the contents of a document It also enables you to jump quickly to the different elements included For example use the Navigator to get a quick overview of all the chapters or to see a list of the images included in the document Figure 7 4 on the next page shows the Navigator in action The elements listed in the Navigator vary according to the document loaded in Writer Open the Navigator by selecting Edit gt Navigator SUSE LINUX User Guide SLINS SOO 810 eoyjouedo SUI 191 192 Hg He E ex 4 d e E ii mi Le TUE EJ Text frame Graphics OLE objects Untitied1 active Figure 7 4 The Navigator in Writer 7 6 4 Working with th
356. le player The encoder is started from the command line with oggenc The only parameter needed is the WAV file to compress The option h displays an overview of the other parameters The latest version of the Ogg encoder even supports en 19 8 Compressing Audio Data coding with a variable bit rate In this way an even higher degree of com pression can be achieved Instead of the bit rate specify the desired quality with the parameter q The parameter b determines the average bit rate m and M can be used to specify the minimum and maximum bit rate 099123 is a command line Ogg player The program requires the spec ification of a playback device Start it with a command like 099123 d alsa09 mysong ogg 19 9 ALSA and MIDI Apart from the possibility to play PCM data many sound cards also of fer MIDI functionality The ALSA MIDI sequencer implements an effi cient architecture for routing MIDI data You need the packages pmi di aseqview vkeybd awesfx snd s 2 and kalsatools Many sound cards have an external MIDI port for connecting MIDI de vices such as synthesizers keyboards and sound modules If the MIDI port of the card is supported by ALSA use a sequencer application such as jazz to record and play MIDI files An overview of the MIDI devices pro vided by your card is available in the KDE Control Center under Sound amp Multimedia gt Sound System gt MIDI Here also determine the de vices t
357. les is responsible for the administration of default appearance presets Some standard profiles are provided already like those for users who prefer high contrast Selecting a profile overwrites the cur rent layout settings 260 16 4 Configuring KMail 16 5 Using KMail When KMail starts the main window opens By default the main window consists of the following three sections File Edit View Go Folder Mes Tools Settings Help B EG 9200 Folder w Subject Receiver Date Order of Arrival w Local Folders J E ux Pinguin Today 15 46 40 box From To Tux Pinguin lt tux example com gt Date Toda on 40 no Car oz Figure 16 1 Main Window of KMail after Start Up Folder Area left This section contains a list of your mail folders mail boxes indicating the total number of messages and how many are still unread To select a folder simply click it The messages it con tains appear in the top right frame The number of messages is also displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the application window Header Area right The subject sender and time of reception of received messages are listed in this area Click a message to select it and dis play it in the message window Sort the messages by clicking one of the columns subject sender date etc Message Area below The contents of the currently selected message are displayed in this frame Attachments are depicted as icons a
358. license authors and translations of the project 5 3 2 The Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to frequently used functions that can also be accessed via the menu If you let the mouse pointer rest above an icon a short description is displayed Right click a free space in the toolbar to open a menu with which to change the position of the toolbar switch from icons to text change the icon size and display or hide the individual bars The configuration dialog can be started with Configure Toolbars To the right the toolbar features the Konqueror icon which is animated while a directory or web page is loaded 5 3 3 The Location Bar The location bar is preceded by a black symbol with a white X If you click this icon the contents of the line are deleted allowing entry of a new lo cation Valid locations can be path specifications like the one that appears when the home directory is displayed or web page URLs After entering 5 3 Konqueror as a File Manager an address press or click Go to the right of the input line Access directories or web pages visited recently via the black arrow to the right of the location bar This function saves some typing if you need to access certain contents repeatedly For even more convenience create a bookmark 5 3 4 The Main Window The main window displays the content of the selected directory If you click an icon the respective file is displayed in Konqueror or loaded into
359. lt setting Add view opens a dialog in which to name 264 ____ 16 8 Importing Mail the view View type has options for whether the contacts should be dis played as icons in a table or as cards OK continues to the next dialog box in which to select the fields to include in the custom view Filters and preferences can be set in the corresponding items OK activates the newly created view 16 10 Filters Filters enable automatic processing of incoming messages and manual pro cessing of selected messages in a folder To filter selected messages to a spe cific folder highlight the messages and enter J to activate existing filter rules or select Message gt Create Filter to create a new one In do ing so all existing filter rules are applied to this message There is no way to use only certain filters 16 10 1 Filter Rules A filter consists of one or several filter rules and filter actions A filter rule can select messages according to criteria such as the sender content or re cipient The respective filter action can perform tasks like moving deleting marking or forwarding these messages 16 10 2 Examples of Filters Assume for instance to be subscribed to the KDE user list kde org Whenever a message from the mailing list arrives the message is moved into another folder The following steps are necessary for creating this filter 1 Add a new folder as described in Section on page A na
360. m analyzer If the xmms plugins package is installed try the Infinity plug in To the left under the menu button there are five buttons with different let ters on them These buttons allow quick access to additional menus dialog boxes and configurations The playlist can be opened with the PL button and the equalizer can be activated with the EQ button 306 193 Players OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer Xnur ui punos X MULTIMEDIA SY STEM b 60 170 310 600 IK 3K 6K 12k 14K 16K Figure 19 7 XMMS with Equalizer OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer and Infinity Plug Ins 19 3 2 kscd Audio CD Player kscd is an easy to use audio CD player It can be accessed from the SUSE menu under Multimedia gt CD gt KsCD To access the configuration menu click the tool icon kscd can be configured to search an online CDDB server for the name and track names of a CD 19 3 3 The Audio CD Player WorkMan WorkMan offers a simple user interface with an abundance of functions It is ideal for those who prefer a CD player without the KDE look and feel 19 3 4 GNOME CD Player Applet This is a simple applet that can be added to a GNOME panel Add it by right clicking the panel and selecting Add to Panel gt Multimedia gt CD Player SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 307 308 01 mixed by Paul Oakenfold 5 Vol 40 Deep House Mix March
361. mber It is mainly used for GIF images If you need an indexed image it is normally best to edit the image in RGB then convert to indexed right before saving If you save to a format that requires an indexed image GIMP offers to index the image when saving 24 6 3 Special Effects The GIMP includes a wide range of filters and scripts for adding special effects to an image or making artistic manipulations They are available in Filters and Script fu Experimenting is the best way to find out what is available Xtns in the toolbox includes a number of items for creating buttons logos and other things 24 7 Printing Images To print an image select File gt Print from the image menu If your printer is configured in SUSE it should appear in the list In some cases it may be necessary to select an appropriate driver with Setup Printer Select the appropriate paper size with Media Size and the type in Media Type Other settings are available in the Image Output Settings tab In the bottom portion of the window adjust the image size Press Use Original Image Size to take these settings from the image itself This is rec ommended if you set an appropriate print size and resolution in the image Adjust the image s position on the page with the fields in Position or by dragging the image in Preview When satisfied with the settings press Print To save the settings for fu ture use
362. me like kde user can be assigned 2 First find a way of identifying messages to filter The messages of the KDE user list described in our example can be identified by the kde user kde org address found in the To or Cc field 3 Click Settings gt Configure Filters The left side of the window that opens displays the existing filters The right side is composed of two panels filter rules and filter actions SUSE LINUX User Guide uoupolddy ION Idy eut ION 265 266 4 Click the New icon to create an empty filter It appears as unknown 5 Select To or Cc from the first drop down menu and contains from the second drop down menu Enter kde user kde orgin the text field 6 In Filter actions select Move to Folder from the first drop down menu A second drop down menu with the list of folders appears Choose the folder to which the filtered messages should be moved if they meet the desired criteria In this case choose kde user from the drop down menu 7 Confirm the changes with OK More complex filters are also possible For example you may want to save only the messages written by Fred Johnson to the KDE user list j anywhere com Here the remaining filter criteria come into play 1 Click Settings gt Configure Filters and mark the newly created fil ter 2 To filter all messages containing kde user kde orgjin the
363. meters such as the stereo panorama can be set under Staff gt Staff Properties 19 12 NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers Notes can easily be entered with the help of the mouse First choose the length of the note and any required accidental in the toolbar Click to insert a note or right click to insert a rest The Insert menu provides objects like clef meter and key More information about NoteEdit is available in the directory usr share doc packages noteedit In Linux there are several MIDI sequencers some of which are very ma ture For example Jazz is a proven stable program The development of Rosegarden the classic among sequencer programs and notation editors for Linux has been resumed Therefore this program may also be of inter est to you MusE is also a very active project Meanwhile the program can be used as a sequencer SUSE LINUX User Guide xnu ui PUNOS 329 TV Video Radio and Webcam The configuration of TV cards is integrated in the configuration tool YaST If your card has been correctly identified it can be automatically config ured Otherwise enter the card settings manually The following sections focus on the motv application created by the au thor of the BTIV driver Another TV application is KWinTV If you prefer KWinTV it should be easy to use after reading this chapter 20 1 Watching TV with motv 332 20 2 Video Text withalevt 334
364. mple www suse de Konqueror displays the address Writing the protocol http at the be ginning is optional as it is recognized automatically by the program This feature only works properly with web addresses however For FTP servers enter ftp at the beginning of the entry line Dokument Bearbeiten Ansicht Gehezu Lesezeichen Extras Einstellungen Fenster Hilfe i f 71 QQa0 0 M2KARA E E gt Adresse http www suse de en gt ie Ez suse t6 At Last Communication without Limits f MES SUSE LINUX Openexchange Server 4 1 Business Customers Home Users Partners About SUSE ge y Modern enterprises need Your PC has more to offer Linux offers perspectives SUSE LINUX more than big names and than the market leading Secure your share inone headquartered in the treacherous security operating system reveals ofthe IT markets of Nuremberg Germany is thatconventional more stability more tomorrow without any one of the world s leading a n i mt manuisinmnk E cia Figure 12 1 The Browser Window of Konqueror 12 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics As in other browsers you can save web pages To do this select Location gt Save as and specify a name for your HTML file However images will not be saved To archive an entire web page including the images se lect Extras gt Archive Web Page Konqueror suggests a file name that you can usually accep
365. mple 25 1 Sample Output Showing File Permissions rw r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 387 388 Type As shown in the third column this file belongs to user tux It is as signed to the group pro ject3 To discover the user permissions of the Roadmap file the first column must be examined more closely rw T Users Permissions Group Permissions Permissions for Other Users This column is comprised of one leading character followed by nine characters grouped in threes The first of the ten letters stands for the type of file system component The dash amp 8211 shows that this is a file A directory d a link 1 a block device b or a character device could also be indicated The next three blocks follow a standard pattern The first three char acters refer to whether the file is readable r or not amp 8211 A w in the middle portion symbolizes that the corresponding object can be edited and a dash amp 48211 means it is not possible to write to the file An x in the third position denotes that the object can be exe cuted Because the file in this example is a text file and not one that is executable executable access for this particular file is not needed In this example tux has as owner of the file Roadmap read r and write access w to it but cannot execute it x The members of the group pro ject3 can read the file but they cannot modi
366. n Evolution offers extensive internal help pages Use the Help menu to access this information For more information about Evolution refer to Ximian s web site at ht tp www ximian com 17 8 For More Information ISDN Telecommunication Even in this age of the Internet and e mail traditional communication means like phone and fax are still important The communication pack age Capisuite offers an ISDN based solution for a computer supported answering machine and fax The following chapter explains how CapiSuite works This is followed by a description of its configuration with YaST and a brief introduction to the usage of the system 18 1 Configuration o o o 286 18 2 Usage 4 seme a e Rak ex 292 uoiooiunuJulooeje NASI 286 Capisuite is a daemon a program that runs in the background that pro vides basic telecommunication functions The current version mainly offers functions for telephone and fax connections For example the system supports the establishment and termination of in coming and outgoing fax and voice connections Fax and audio files can then be sent and received over these connections Some special functions like the switching of a phone connection to a fax connection and the pro cessing of DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency common touchtone phone tones are supported However the system does not constitute a complete application suite for certain tasks such as an answeri
367. n the widely used SoundFont format Suitable files are available on the Inter net fluidsynth has numerous command line options that can be displayed with fluidsynth h 19 10 2 Configuration of timidity timidity is configured by means of the configuration file usr share timidity timidity cfg View documentation for the configuration with man timidity cfg Also refer to the documentation in usr share doc packages timidity Suitable instrument patches are available at http www stardate bc ca eawpatches html default htm From this URL you can down load the file eawpats12 full rar Although the size of this file is 22 MB the download is worthwile as it equips you with a full set of GM GS and XG instruments To use these patches with timidity proceed as follows First assume the root user identity Then create the directory usr share timidity eawpats copy eawpats12_full rar there SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 321 and change to this directory The command unrar x eawpats12_ full rar decompresses the archive Now edit the file timidity cfginthe directory usr share timidity It should only contain the two lines shown in File Example 19 2 timidity cfg dir usr share timidity eawpats source timidity cfg eawpats12_full rar also contains a file called timidity cfg which is placed in the directory eawpat s following the decompression The file is included with the source command In this file only the
368. n a separate subwindow What s Related Under this tab Mozilla can list a number of sites whose topic is related to the current one Search This is an interface to several well known search engines Bookmarks This tab is an additional entry point to your bookmarks which are presented here in a tree structure History This tab provides a list of the recently visited web pages 14 2 Working with Tabs Mozilla can display several web pages at a time in one window by us ing tabbed browsing This is often more convenient than opening a new browser window for each new document To display a document open a link under a new tab right click the corresponding link then select Open Link in New Tab from the context menu The different documents are now directly available by clicking the different tabs arranged at the top of the main window As soon as you start using tabs an extra button appears to the left of the tab bar which allows you to open a new empty tab Press Dto achieve the same To close the currently active tab click the button with the X to the very right of the tab bar Right click a tab to open context menu that offers several related actions such as closing the tab or closing all other tabs SUSE LINUX User Guide JOSMOIG SM OIIZO A SUL 245 246 14 3 Preferences Many often needed browser settings are available in the dialog that opens when you select Edit gt Preferences Categ
369. n be accessed with the mouse If your mouse pointer does not move the mouse has not been correctly detected In this case use the keyboard for navigation 2 3 Language Selection Select the language to use for SUSE LINUX and YaST English is the default setting for the international distribution If your mouse does not work nav igate with the arrow keys until the desired language is selected After this press until Next is highlighted Then press to confirm your lan guage selection YaS Winceanter Se Welcome to YaST the SuSE Linux installation and system administration program Base Installation b Language installa Perf Select your language Configuration Root Password Deutsch e Network English GB Espa ol Francais Release Notes ExrxXAnvtka e Device Configuration HAE ES te Lietuviy Magyar Nederlands Portugu s brasileiro fal fk rc Sloven ina Sloven ina Svenska Al Ei La a Abort P Accept v Figure 2 2 Selecting the Language SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND 15 2 4 Installation Mode Select between a New Installation and an Update of an installed system The latter is only possible if a previous version of SUSE LINUX is already present In this case you can also boot this system with Boot Installed Sys tem If your installed system fails to boot perhaps because some important system configuration
370. n dialog with the correct criteria already selected Add additional criteria if desired Select the appropriate filter action Click OK when fin ished Applying Filters Filters are applied in the order listed in the dialog accessed with Tools gt Filters Change the order by highlighting a filter and clicking Up or Down Click OK to close the filter dialog when finished Filters are applied to all new mail messages They are not applied to mail already in your folders To apply filters to messages already received select the desired messages then select Actions gt Apply Filters 17 4 7 Virtual Folders VFolders are a unique feature of Evolution A VFolder is a virtual folder that displays messages based on search or filter criteria Rather than mov ing the messages into a folder messages shown in a virtual folder remain 17 4 E Mail in their original folder Actions are applied to the message in the original folder VFolders are a useful means of reading new mail in one place after it has been sorted into a number of different folders with filters For example a VFolder could be created to search all your folders for unread e mail To create a new virtual folder select Tools gt Virtual Folder Editor In the dialog click Add Like filters virtual folders can also be created from e mail messages Right click the e mail message select Create Rule from Mess
371. n the running system you can load the configuration from the hard disk If you decide to return to the original boot loader you can load its configuration by means of the last option However this pos sibility only exists as long as you do not close the boot loader module Boot Loader Location Use this dialog to define where to install the boot loader in the master boot record MBR in the boot sector of the boot partition if available in the the boot sector of the root partition or on a floppy disk Use Others to specify a different location Refer to the information about GRUB in the Administration Guide Disk Order If your computer has more than one hard disk specify the boot sequence of the disks as defined in the BIOS setup of the ma chine 4 8 System Default Section With this option set which kernel or operating system to boot by default if no other entry is selected in the boot menu The de fault system is booted after the time out Click this option and Edit to see a list of all boot menu entries Then select one entry from the list and click Set as Default Click Edit to modify an entry The dia log that opens allows changing the order of entries in the boot menu adding modifying and deleting entries and setting a default entry Available Sections The existing entries of the boot menu are listed under this option in the main window If you select this option then click Edit a dialog opens
372. n your installed system such as checking and repairing the file system and updating the boot loader To start the rescue system boot with the standard boot disk then select Man ual Installation gt Start Installation or System gt Rescue System You will then be prompted to insert the rescue disk If your system was configured to use special drivers such as RAID or USB you might need to load the respective modules from a module disk Module disks Module disks contain additional system drivers The standard kernel only supports IDE drives If the drives in your sys tem are connected to special controllers such as SCSI load the needed drivers from a module disk If you select this option and click Next you will be taken to a dialog for creating various mod ule disks USB modules 4 8 System YaS Vinstatter ge Manual installation gt Start installation system gt Rescue system You will be prompted forthe rescue floppy Module Floppies Custom Floppy Download Floppy Image Module Floppies All SuSE kernels are modularized This means that most drivers are loaded as To create a boot modules or i a lt rescue floppy select the Ea Create boot or rescue floppies Q appropriate item from the list and click Next to continue UN Boot Floppies 1 These boot floppies can be TP used to boot your installed issu system or a rescue system from
373. namically linked programs proc process file system usr local local distribution independent extensions opt optional software larger add on program packages such as KDE GNOME Netscape 380 25 1 Introduction to Bash 25 1 3 Bash Functions There are two important functions of the shell that can make your work a lot easier The history function To repeat a command that has been entered before press 1 until the previous command appears at the prompt Move forward through the list of previously entered commands by pressing 1 To edit the command line just move the cursor to the desired position using the arrow keys and start typing Use R to search in the history The expansion function Expand a file name to its full length after typing its first letters until it can be uniquely identified To do so type the first letters then hit Tab If there are several file names starting with the same letters obtain a list of them by hitting twice First Example Managing Files Now that you know what a command looks like which directories exist in SUSE LINUX and how to speed up things when using Bash put this knowledge into practice with a small exercise 1 2 Open a console from the KDE desktop by clicking the shell icon Enter the 1s command to see the contents of your home directory Use the command mkdi r which stands for make directory to create a new subdirectory called test by enter
374. nd Phaser1 by Fons Andersen deserve special attention Saw VCO is de signed to resemble an analog saw toothed wave generator Mvclpf 3 and Mvclpf 4 are very realistic reproductions of the filter cascade invented by R A Moog These plug ins represent a milestone in the digital reproduc tion of this legendary low pass filter An effect module frequently featured SUSE LINUX User Guide xnu ui PUNOS 325 326 in a classic modular system is the Bode Frequency Shifter The plug in of the same name implemented by Steve Harris allows experimenting with frequency shifting 19 11 4 Keeping Track with the Control Center Select the MIDI channel in the Control Center build connections between the MIDI controllers and the module parameters and create individually operable user interfaces for example for live performances Range limita tions for the sliders can also be set here MIDI Controller Parameter Module a i Volume 3 Mixer 4 gt 1 type 10 channel 0 param 30 type 10 channel O param 31 type 10 channel 0 param 32 is Frequency Poly Mvclpf cz type 10 channel 0 param 33 Module Parameter MIDI Sig Mixer 4 gt 1 ID 14 Exp FM gain Output gain dB Resonance Poly Mvclpf Resonance type 10 channel 0 param 34 Resonance gain Input gain dB Poly opa Poly Saw VCO ID 10 H T e 9 Input gain dB Cj Log Set Min Set Max Res
375. nd display devices is started in a separate window This window is shown in Figurel4 9 File Help 7 ear Extended X11 Configuration ite pes JE J Welcome to the SuSE X11 Configuration Manager XFreeB6 Version 4 3 99 902 4 4 0 RC 2 Selected component Desktop Cancel ancel l j Finalize gt gt To start double click an item in the component list Figure 4 9 The Main Window of the New SaX2 SaX2 Main Window In the left navigation bar there are four main items Display Input de vices Multihead and AccessX Configure your monitor graphics card color depth resolution and the position and size of the screen under Dis play The keyboard mouse touchscreen monitor and graphics tablet can be configured under Input devices Use Multihead to configure multiple 4 4 Hardware screens see Section on page 85 AccessX is a useful tool for control ling the mouse pointer with the number pad Select your monitor and graphics card Usually the monitor and graphics card are autodetected by the system In this case no manual settings are required If your monitor is not autodetected you will automatically be taken to the monitor selection dialog Select your monitor from the extensive list of vendors and devices or manually enter the monitor values specified in the monitor manual Alternatively select one of the preconfigured VESA modes Afte
376. nd fonts to your hard disk from the original Sound blaster driver CD ROM with Install Sound Fonts The sound fonts will be saved in the directory usr share sfbank creative Enable or disable the start up of ALSA when booting the machine with Start ALSA For playback of MIDI files activate Start Sequencer This way the sound modules required for sequencer support are loaded along with the ALSA modules The volume and configuration of all sound cards installed will be saved when you click Finish The mixer settings are saved to the file etc asound conf and the ALSA configuration data is appended at the end of the file etc modules conf Configuring a Sound Card If multiple sound cards were detected select your preferred card under List of Automatically Recognized Continue to Setup with Next If the sound card was not automatically detected click Select from List and with Next proceed to Manual Sound Card Selection Manual Sound Card Selection If your sound card was not automatically detected a list of sound card drivers and models are shown from which to choose With All see the entire list of supported cards Refer to your sound card documentation for the information required A reference list of sound cards supported by ALSA with their correspond ing sound modules is available in usr share doc packages alsa cards txt and athttp www alsa project org goemon
377. nd increased susceptibility to colds Things get complicated when people who work in the same room are accustomed to different base tem peratures For your well being it is important to observe the recommended basic values for temperature and humidity and to avoid strong air move ment The working material itself should not contribute to the increase of temperature For activities in a sitting position or simple work a room temperature of 20 to 22 C is recommended In summer the temperature should be 26 C at the most This value should only be exceeded for a short time when the outdoor temperature is higher A lot of equipment as well as people emit heat and influence room air conditions This should be reduced as much as possible The air humidity should be between 40 sometimes 50 and 65 per cent and should be checked This value is especially affected by heat ing systems Draft possibly from open windows and doors or air conditioning should not exceed 0 1 to 0 15 m s Draft on individual parts of the body should be avoided SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 407 408 An air conditioner should be individually adjustable It should be serviced regularly The windows should be able to be opened and have sunshades to avoid glare effects Sunlight can increase the room temperature con siderably Sunshades attached to the outside of the building provide the best protection Plants can improve room conditions and a
378. ndent Settings provider vpivel If you are using PPP over Ethemet first configure your Ethernet card ethernet card eth bus pci 0000 00 09 0 Configure Network Cards The PPP Mode Dependent L Settings are settings required to set up your DSL connection The VPI VCI makes sense only for PPP over ATM connections Modem IP Address Ethernet card is needed for Device Activation PPP over Ethemet connections Manually For PPPoATM enter your VPI VCI pair for example 0 38 for British Telecom If pore Li Abort Back Net unsure ask your provider g i AY Rud ga mh Figure 4 18 DSL Configuration E Note If you select Dial on Demand the connection is not terminated com pletely after the time out but remains in a standby mode that enables the automatic establishment of a connection as soon as data needs to be transferred If you do not use Dial on Demand the connection is terminated completely requiring the manual establishment of a con nection before data can be transmitted For this case block automatic establishment of a connection by setting the idle time to 0 Note The configuration of T DSL German Telecom is similar to ADSL If you select the provider T Online continue automatically to the configuration dialog for T DSL Furthermore you need the connection ID T Online num ber user ID and personal password specified in your T DSL re
379. nel in Modify Levels for Channel Then drag the black white and middle markers in the slider in Input Levels Alternatively use the dropper tools to select points in the image that should serve as the white black and gray points for that channel If Preview is checked the image window shows a preview of how the im age would look with the modifications applied When the desired result is achieved press OK to apply the changes With Resest restore the origi nal settings Cancel aborts level adjustment SUSE LINUX User Guide dINID OUL ui soyda Buyoindiuny 369 370 24 5 5 Undoing Mistakes Most modifications made in The GIMP can be undone To view a history of modifications use the undo dialog included in the default window layout or open one from the toolbox menu with File gt Dialogs gt Undo His tory The dialog shows a base image and a series of editing changes that can be undone Use the yellow arrow at the bottom left to undo changes Use the green arrow at the right to redo an undone change In this way you can work back to the base image If you undo a modification then make a new one the undone modification cannot be redone Changes can also be undone and redone with the Edit menu Alterna tively use the shortcuts Ctrl and Ctrl Y 24 6 Editing Images Advanced Features 24 6 1 Layers Layers are a very important aspect of The GIMP
380. ng machine application The actual appli cation was written in the Python scripting language a language especially suitable for beginners and can thus be freely adjusted to the your require ments CapiSuite merely processes the provided scripts and executes the specified commands This allows the creation of flexible solutions from a simple answering machine or fax program to a small call center for which the system is still lacking some basic features The CapiSuite package includes some ready made scripts that enable a comfortable multiuser answering machine and fax solution The following pages refer to the use of these scripts Following the installation details on the system as well as instructions for writing custom scripts are available in usr share doc packages capisuite manual index html and on the project page http www capisuite de 18 1 Configuration CapiSuite makes use of the CAPI programming interface for ISDN hard ware Because this interface has only been available for Linux for a short time suitable drivers are not yet available for all ISDN adapters However drivers are already available for ISDN adapters from AVM and can easily be installed and configured with YaST Refer to the chapter on the ISDN configuration and the help texts of the YaST module for more information Test the functionality of the CAPI driver by executing the command capiinfo as the user root If detailed information about the capabili ties
381. nserting a Table Using the Toolbar If your table should have two columns and two rows for instance just run the mouse over that range of columns and rows to select them from the grid When you release the button the table is inserted into the document at the current text cursor position Note The Insert icon changes depending on the last object selected for inser tion This also means that you can now insert a table again with just a short click without any need to reopen the pop up toolbar Note 7 6 6 Inserting Graphics Graphics can be inserted with the same vertical pop up toolbar as tables only you need to select its second button Alternatively select Insert gt Graphics gt From File This opens a dialog window in which to select the desired file If you check Preview the selected image is displayed in the right part of the dialog Such a preview may take some time in the case 194 7 6 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer of larger images After confirming your choice the inserted image is placed in the document at the cursor position In the document itself select an image by clicking it When selected an im age has little square handles on its edges Then select Graphics from the context menu to open a dialog in which to change various image settings such as the wrap type and border style To change the size of an image first click it to activate it No
382. nstalled You can start right away without passing the login procedure if you checked automatic login in the local user adminis tration module If not the graphical Log n window shown in Figure is displayed on your screen Enter a previously determined user name and password to log in to the system PM SUSE LINUX tux OUT LOB wilder i Username Password Login Menu v Figure 2 20 The Login Screen SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILDJIDJSU LUOJSND 43 YaST System Repair Despite its robustness the SUSE LINUX system can be damaged by con figuration blunders or other accidents While this is quite unlikely when logged in as a regular user the superuser root is allowed to change all sys tem files and configuration making it possible for him to accidentally cause damage There are good chances of putting the system back on track with the YaST System Repair in such a case It is impossible to correct all imagin able defects but many of the common problems can be solved TTE 46 a e 47 bik ene aro e toi 48 TJ vn 49 Joda LUSISAS ISOA 3 1 Starting YaST System Repair Because it cannot be assumed that a damaged system can boot by itself and a running system cannot be easily repaired the YaST System Repair utility is run from the SUSE LINUX installation CD or DVD Follow the steps out lined in ChapterD on page t1 to get to the dialog page offering the various installation
383. nteed under these conditions Caution 4 3 5 System Update This module enables an update of the version installed on your system During operation you can only update application software not the SUSE LINUX base system To update the base system boot the computer from an installation medium such as the CD When selecting the installation mode in YaST select Update an Existing System instead of New Installation The procedure for updating the system is similar to the new installation Initially YaST examines the system determines a suitable update strategy 4 3 Software NM Warning o a a t E Dependency Conflict A sendmail 8 12 10 129 conflict Conflicts with postfix conflicts with sendmail i sendmail conflicts with postfix Conflict Resolution O Do Not Install sendmail L0 Remove the Conflicting Package Delete postfix Ne Ignore Conflict and Risk System Inconsistencies Expert v Cancel 4 D OK Try Again Figure 4 5 Conflict Management of the Package Manager and presents the results in a suggestion dialog like that in Figure 4 6 on the following page Click the individual items with the mouse to change any details Some items such as Language and Keyboard Layout are cov ered in the section explaining the installation procedure Therefore the fol lowing paragraphs only cover update specific settings Sele
384. nter stdin as the printing command in the respective dialogs of these applications Which of the two commands to use depends on the behavior of the application itself If this is set up correctly the application should call the kprinter dialog whenever a print job is issued from it so you can use kprinter to select the queue and to set other options This requires that the application s own print setup does not conflict with that of kprinter and that the setup is left unchanged after kprinter has been enabled Troubleshooting If there is some kind of error in the communication between the computer and the printer the printer may no longer be able to interpret data cor rectly This can cause the output to be garbled and use up large amounts of paper 1 To stop the printing take out all paper or open the paper trays 2 As the print job will be removed from the printer queue only after having been sent completely to the printer it will usually still be there Even a reboot will not remove it To delete the print job use a tool like kprinter Instructions for managing print jobs from the com mand line are provided in the Administration Guide 3 Itis possible that some data is still transmitted to the printer even though the print job has been deleted from the queue To stop all processes still using the printer device use the fuser command For a printer connected to the first parallel port enter user k dev 1p0 To achieve the
385. nter administration Help z Quit Ctri Q us sckage Datak 9 d 85 Figure 7 1 The OpenOffice org Quickstarter The Quickstarter icon then appears in the desktop panel at the lower right edge of the screen Right clicking it displays a menu like the one shown in Figure 7 1 which gives access to a number of possibilities directly start the individual OpenOffice org application modules quickly reopen the recently used files or create a new document from a template Customize the Quickstarter settings by selecting Configure OpenOffice org Quick starter Once enabled the Quickstarter is started automatically each time you log in to your desktop To stop this from happening in the future click Quit in the Quickstarter menu shown in Figure 7 1 186 ______ 7 1 The Quickstarter 7 2 Overview of the Application Modules OpenOffice org comprises several application modules subprograms which are designed to interact with each other Table 7 1 The OpenOffice org Application Modules Writer Powerful word processor application Calc Spreadsheet application that includes a chart utility Draw Drawing application for creating vector graphics Math Application for generating mathematical formulas Impress Application for creating presentations The discussion in this chapter is focused on Writer and Calc The other modules are only explained briefly A full description of each module
386. nts 10 3 2 Attendees 10 3 3 To Do Items M 104 Printing 10 5 Address Book 10 6 Help 11 Address Management with KAddressBook 11 1 Creating a New Contact o o o 112 Creating Address Lists o o 11 3 Searching Address Data o 11 4 Importing and Exporting Address Data IV Internet 12 The Web Browser Konqueror 12 1 Opening Web Pages 122 Saving Web Pages and Graphics 12 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords 12 4 Bookmarks 12 5 Java and JavaScript 13 The Web Browser Galeon 13 1 Optimized for the Web o ooo o 13 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs lt o ooo 13 3 Smart Bookmarks 13 4 Settings and Controls 13 5 For More Information Contents 217 218 218 220 220 220 221 221 222 222 223 225 226 227 227 229 231 233 234 234 235 235 236 14 The Mozilla Web Browser 241 aa ere 242 14 1 1 The MenuBar 0 00 0000 ee 242 T PEE 244 14 13 The Personal Toolbar 244 14 1 4 Sidebar 245 A aoe ee Re Qo GE eee uem od 245 143 Preferences 22s 246 15 Encryption with KGpg 249 151 Key Management ooo 250 ara a da 250 15 1 2 Exporting the Public Key 251 Gk dd ue Se ee FE 252 wi Word A e esa i i a 252 15 2
387. nu In the pop up menu in the middle of the raster image the currently used virtual resolution is displayed To use one of the default virtual resolutions select one from the menu 4 4 Hardware File Help K Desktop 0 Select virtual resolution for Mode 800x600 al 800 600 800x600 Cancel f Fjnish Configure virtual resolutions Figure 4 13 Configuring the Virtual Resolution 3D Acceleration Optionally activate the 3D acceleration of your graphics card A dialog is displayed in which to activate the 3D properties of your graphics card Image Position and Size Under these two tabs precisely adjust the size and the position of the im age with the arrows See Figure 4 14 on the next page If you have a mul tihead environment more than one screen use Next screen to switch to the other monitors to adjust their size and position Press Save to save your settings Multihead If you have installed more than one graphics card in your computer or a graphics card with multiple outputs you can connect more than one screen to your system If you operate two screens this is referred to as dualhead More than two is referred to as multihead SaX2 automatically detects mul tiple graphics cards in the system and prepares the configuration accord ingly Set the multihead mode and the arrangement of the screens in the SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 85 86
388. nuela Piotrowski Thomas Schraitle Setting DocBook XML und TEX This book has been printed on 100 chlorine free bleached paper Contents I Installation ee RPSL UPS SE leh ERES RR CS RP ERIS AS 2 Custom Installation 2 1 Starting Your System from the CD ROM 2 1 1 Possible Problems when Starting from the CD DVD 22 The Boot Screen o 2 3 Language Selection ooo o 24 Installation Model 2 5 Installation Suggestion 2 2 0 oo o 2 5 1 Installation Mode lees 252 KeyboardLayout lees Ea AA a BES de A 25 4 Partitioning o 2 5 5 Expert Partitioning with YaST E ox ded IIA 2 5 7 Boot Configuration Boot Loader Installation ju HG NUS eR ek oboe YES Ep d ed 11 12 12 Pupuve Xue pede xu de AA RUE eR CePA Ee dedos Ehe modd bd Ot ace See ba Ud dete a 2 6 1 rootPasswordl o a BOY Ee a a ia 2 6 4 Loading Software Updates 2 65 UserAuthentication o 2 6 6 Configuring the Host as a NIS Client eel TTE quen TE o eo oo os aia e PEE ad O ete ae O EE E E pay II Configuration 4 YaST Configuration 4 1 Starting Yabl cce m Rh 42 The YaST Control Center llle 43 Software arua Sore mE dese RC babe d aia 4 3 1 Change Installation Source
389. o Rmo Orem Rom SUSE LINUX User Guide 4 8 1 Backup Copy of the System Areas 115 Ok E df eee 116 4 8 3 Creating a Boot Rescue or Module Disk 117 4 8 4 Configuring the Boot Loader with YaST 120 ee O osse s 123 4 8 6 Partitioningl o oo 124 4 8 7 Profile Manager SCPM o oo o 125 4 8 8 Runlevel Editor o a 125 a e A a ee 126 ee 126 TT A a 126 addet MURR ade Rc apar 127 49 Miscellaneuus ens 127 4 9 1 Submitting a Support Request 127 4 9 2 BOOtLOg o sac paa apote dos Re d 127 49 3 System Log lees 128 dte mU rH ES ee ER 128 4 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses o 129 410 1 Controls 2 522 ee ek mE RES 129 ue dee eon ua NS 130 LORS Eod cher NUR Ede ee ERS pd 130 Cx oa 131 5 The KDE Desktop 133 TL ee a A eee ees 134 O e d RO a rer Bg ier 134 CES Oed GRRE d du ERS a x 135 T 136 boi d de diode de qo Wh dira dee 136 5 15 TheP n l 4 9 Baw RRR ES RE 139 E een ue een he ee 139 5 1 7 _ The WindowWS o e ee eee 141 Contents A A RUNS 141 5 2 1 Peripherals taco ia moe BA a REOR SR s 141 5 2 2 Desktop 6 eoe st e aw wn 144 Ee ep doge qoid rale ee d d 144 rU 145 5 25 Regional amp Accessibility 147 C 150 5 3 1 The Konqueror Menu 04 150 532 The Joolbar cesa cae ek o RR AR GG 152
390. o use for playing MIDI files On the command line list the available MIDI devices and their internal ALSA port numbers with the command pmidi 1 For a Soundblaster Live card the listing would appear as in Example Example 19 1 MIDI Devices of a Soundblaster Live Card Port Client name Port name qa External MIDI 0 IDI 0 0 1330 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port O0 Toe Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 1 qT3v9 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 2 LIS Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 3 The first column lists the internal port numbers by which the device is addressed by the ALSA driver The other columns show the designa tion and port name of the device Apart from the external MIDI port sev eral WaveTable ports are listed Use a command like pmidi p 73 0 mysong mid to play a MIDI file over one of the listed ports SUSE LINUX User Guide xnur ui PUNOS 315 316 Note If a MIDI player is interrupted during playback a continuous sound may persist If this happens run the a11 notes off script or restart ALSA as root with rcalsasound restart Note Many sound cards like Soundblaster AWE and Live have an internal WaveTable synthesizer that converts MIDI events into audible sounds These MIDI events can be sent to the WaveTable synthesizer by an exter nal MIDI keyboard or by a program such as a MIDI player or sequencer For Soundblaster AWE and Live cards the WaveTable synthesizer must be initialized wit
391. ociated configuration files and documentation A package containing the source files for the re spective program is normally available as well The sources are not needed for running the program However you may want to install the sources to compile a custom version of the program In Linux this is possible and per mitted Some packages depend on other packages This means that the software of the respective package only works properly if another package is also in stalled package dependency Furthermore the installation not only the operation of some packages is only possible if certain other packages are installed perhaps because the installation routine needs specific tools Ac cordingly such packages must be installed in the correct sequence More over there are some packages with identical or similar functionalities If these packages use the same system resource they should not be installed concurrently package conflict Dependencies and conflicts can occur be tween two or more packages and are sometimes very complex The fact that a specific package version may be required for smooth interaction can make things even more complicated All these factors must be taken into consideration when installing unin stalling and updating software Fortunately YaST provides an extremely efficient tool for this purpose the software installation module usually re ferred to as the package manager When the package manager is started
392. of audio CDs How ever it is not supported by all CD writers In the TAO mode track at one a separate write process is applied for every individual track The RAW mode is not used very often as the writer does not perform any data corrections The best setting is automatic as it allows K3b to use the most suitable settings Simulate This function can be used to check if your system supports the selected writing speed The writing is performed with the laser deactivated to test the system On the fly Burns the desired data without first creating an image file do not use this feature on low performance machines An image file also known as an ISO image is a file containing the entire CD content that is subsequently written to the CD exactly as it is Burnfree This option was formerly known as burn proof It helps to avoid buffer underruns of a CD writer If burnfree is selected the CD writer will mark the current position and can return here in the event of a buffer underrun However this causes small data gaps that are audible in audio CDs It is preferable to select a suitable burning speed that avoids buffer underruns Create Image File only This option creates an image file Set the path for this file under Temporary File The image file can be written to CD at a later time To do this use Tools gt Write ISO Image If this option is used all other options in this section are deactivated
393. ogram with killall program name If this does not work try killall 9 program name If this is not possible try switching to another console using to kill the faulty process from there If the computer does not respond to any of the keys and network intervention is not possible wait at least ten seconds before pressing reset to make sure there is no hard disk activity How can I switch from a virtual text console to the graphical user interface By default there are six virtual text consoles that can be accessed with CtDXAIPHCFT to F6 Press AIDXF7 to go to the graphical user interface Glossary access permissions The account is defined by the user name or login name and the pass word The access permissions are generally set by the The access permissions define to which user group the new user is assigned and the resulting permissions account See rajaccess permissions ACL Access Control List Extension of the conventional permission concept for files and direc tories ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line Transmission procedure that transmits data about one hundred times faster than ISDN in the telephone network AGP Accelerated Graphics Port A high speed slot for graphics cards based on PCI but offering a larger vsibandwidth Furthermore AGP graphics cards can revert directly without routing around the processor to the access memory and in contrast to PCI models to swap graphics dat
394. oka gallery 23 6 Optical Character Recognition If the character recognition module is installed documents can be scanned in lineart mode saved in the proposed format then processed for text recognition from the Image menu Process the entire document or only a previously selected area A configuration dialog tells the module whether the original text is in printed type handwriting or standardized type Also set the language so the module can process the document correctly See Fig ure 23 5 OCR Image Spellchecking Starting Optical Character Recognition with GOCR GOCR is an Open Source project for optical character recognition The author of gocr is Joerg Schulenburg For more information about gocr see http jocr sourceforge net Using GOCR binary usr bin gocr i o m 1 F Dust size E ucc 10 Space width aer LT eet ERO 4 Figure 23 5 OCR with Kooka Optical Character Recognition Switch to the OCR Result Text window and check the text which may need to be proofread To do this save the text with File gt Save OCR Re sult Text The text can then be processed with OpenOffice or KWrite 356 23 6 Optical Character Recognition Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP The GIMP The GNU Image Manipulation Program is a program for creat ing and editing pixel graphics In most aspects its features are comparable to those of Adobe Photoshop
395. okmarks 8 5 The Tools Menu This menu provides a number of actions that can be used to format the cur rent document in a basic way Highlight Mode This is set to Normal by default but you can choose from numerous highlight modes for different document formats such as HTML and programming languages End of Line The end of line characters as stored by KWrite should al ways be set according to the operating environment in which the doc uments will be used and distributed Use this menu to choose UNIX Windows DOS or Macintosh Indent Text blocks can be indented by a certain amount as defined un der Settings gt Configure Editor gt Editing To indent the cur rent text select Indent or press I To undo one level of inden tation select Unindent or press 1 8 6 The Settings Menu Show Toolbar Enable this to display a toolbar of the main editing func tions SUSE LINUX User Guide JOPPA 4X91 eiuM eui 207 208 Show Statusbar Enable this for KWrite to include a status bar at the lower edge of its window The status bar would display the current line and column number the input mode and the save status of the document Show Path If this is enabled KWrite displays the file name of the loaded document together with its complete path rather than just the file name in the window title bar Configure Editor This opens a
396. ol to Verify the 3D Configuration Selection acroread Acrobat Reader for PDF Files J Graphical Base System bitstream vera Bitstream Vera tm Truetype fonts vj KDE Desktop Environment v cabextract A Program to Extract Microsoft Cabinet files All of KDE CheckHardware CheckHardware tool GNOME system desktop data SuSE SuSE Theme Files for KDE and GNOME Help Support Documentation expat XML Parser Toolkit Office Applications fontconfig Library for Font Configuration Games freeglut A freely licensed alternative to the GLUT library Multimedia freetype2 A TrueType font library LSB Runtime Environment fribidi Free Implementation of the BiDi Algorithm Simple Webserver with Apache2 fvwm2 An Improved Version of the FVWM Window Manager Simple Webserver ghostscript fonts std Standard Fonts for Ghostscript H LDAP Sever an Tol re CON Network Server cm tool Description Technical Data Dependencies versions Kernel Development KDE Development 3ddiag A Tool to Verify the 3D Configuration GNOME Development Tcl Tk Development System With 3Ddiag you can verify the 3D configuration I Fxnerienced User Name DiskUsage Used Free Total I MIO 56 GB 155 7 MB 1 72 GB aoo ooo Check Dependencies C Autocheck Cancel Accept Figure 4 4 YaST Package Manager The window comprises various frames The frame sizes can be modified by clicking and moving the lines separating the areas The contents of the frames and their uses are describe
397. olled by a cron job This requires that all the necessary settings be passed to the application as parameters Running gqcam t JPEG s d webcam jpg saves the cur rent image captured by the camera with the file name webcam jpg The option t defines the file format Possible values are JPEG PNG and PPM The command line switch s activates the color correction The file name for saving is passed with the option d If more than one webcam is oper ated the name of the device must be passed If no device is given the de fault device dev videoO is used To capture an image from the second camera the option v dev videol must be added List all options with gqcam help SUSE LINUX User Guide UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA Al 337 K3b The KDE Burning Application K3b is a comprehensive program for writing data and audio CDs Along with the usual features the program offers some additional options that fa cilitate work especially in the field of multimedia Start the program from the main menu or by entering the command k3b The main program fea tures are described in the following sections rr 340 prox 340 PET 341 ERI Ga UR EE deep 342 21 5 WrtingleSOImages lesse 343 21 6 For More Information 344 uouooiddy Buung 3C Sul ae 340 21 1 Creating a Data CD Creating a data CD is easy Go to File gt New Project gt New Data Project The projec
398. omated and does not require any interaction This only works if a connection to the update server such as an Internet connection exists at the time of the update If you decide to perform a manual update default click Next to load a list of all available patches and start the package manager described in Sec tion 4 3 4Jon page 59 In the package manager the filter for YOU patches is activated enabling selection of updates to install Patches recommended for installation are preselected Normally you should accept this sugges tion After making your selection click Accept in the package manager All se lected updates are then downloaded from the server and installed on your machine Depending on the connection speed and hardware performance this may take some time Any errors are displayed in a window If neces sary skip the respective package Prior to the installation some patches may open a window displaying details allowing you to confirm the instal lation or skip the package While the updates are downloaded and installed track actions in the log window Following the successful installation of all patches exit YOU with Finish If you do not need the update files after the installation delete them with Remove Source Packages after Update Finally SuSEconfig is executed to adapt the system configuration to the new circumstances In addition to the common operation from the YaST interface experts
399. omplex mathematical algorithms Files compressed in this way are given the extension gz and need to be uncompressed before they can be used To compress several files or even entire directories use the tar command d Decompresses the packed gzip files so they return to their orig inal size and can be processed normally like the command gunzip SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 395 396 tar options archive file s tar puts one or more files into an archive Compression is optional tar is a quite complex command with a number of options available The most frequently used options are f Writes the output to a file and not to the screen as is usually the case c Creates a new tar archive r Adds files to an existing archive t Outputs the contents of an archive u Adds files but only if they are newer than the files already con tained in the archive x Unpacks files from an archive extraction z Packs the resulting archive with gzip j Compresses the resulting archive with bzip2 v Lists files processed The archive files created by tar end with tar If the tar archive was also compressed using gzip the ending is tgz or tar gz If it was compressed using bzip2 the ending is tar bz2 Application examples can be found in Section 25 1 8 on page locate pattern s The locate command can find in which direc tory a specified file is located If desired use w wild cards to specify file names The
400. on with the respective button Enter the LDAP administration pass word when required to do so Complete all settings and click Next In the following dialog define the resources If you activate Share homes the home directories of the users appear as Windows shares on the clients If you activate Share printers use Select to share individual printers 4 6 4 Configuration of Samba Clients Configure a Samba client to access resources files or printers on the Samba server In the Samba Workgroup dialog enter the domain or work group Use Browse to display all available groups and domains and select one of them with a mouse click If you activate Also Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication user authentication is conducted via the Samba server After specifying all settings click Finish to complete the configura tion 4 6 5 NTP Client NTP Network Time Protocol is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of network hosts In the respective YaST module select a type with Add 4 6 Network Services Several options are then displayed Server and Radio clock are the most frequently used options Radio clock requires special hardware If you select Server enter the address of an NTP server when prompted Normally your system administrator does this for you However you can also enter one of the public NTP servers listed at http www eecis udel edu mills nt
401. one check boxes to tum on your modem speaker Speaker on or for your modem to wait until it wer detects a dial tone Detect Dial Details tone Press Details to configure the baud rate and the modem initialization strings Abort Back Next Figure 4 17 Modem Configuration If a PBX is interposed you may need to enter an extra number to dial exter nal numbers usually a zero but you can find this out in the operation in structions for your telephone system Also decide between tone and pulse dialing whether the speaker should be switched on and whether it should wait for the dial tone The last option should not be used if your modem is connected to a PBX The baud rate and the initialization string settings for the modem can be specified under Details Only make changes if your modem has not au tomatically been recognized and special settings must be made for data transfer This is primarily the case for ISDN terminal adapters Exit this dia log with OK Select the ISP Internet Service Provider in the following dialog To se lect your provider from a list of preconfigured providers in your country activate Countries Configure the ISP parameters manually by pressing New In the dialog that opens enter the name of the dial up connection SUSE LINUX User Guide 99 100 the provider and the provider s phone number Furthermore enter the user name and the password assigned by y
402. one machines If possible YaST selects this system type Click Software Selection in the suggestion screen to open a dialog in which to select one of the basic systems To start the software installation modules package manager and modify the installation scope click De tailed Selection see Figure 2 11 File Package Extras Help Package Summary Filter Selections A Tool to Verify the 3D Configuration Selection acroread Acrobat Reader for PDF Files bitstream vera Bitstream Vera tm Truetype fonts vj KDE Desktop Environment v cabextract A Program to Extract Microsoft Cabinet files All of KDE Ej CheckHardware CheckHardware tool GNOME system BA desktop data SuSE SuSE Theme Files for KDE and GNOME Help amp Support Documentation EZ expat XML Parser Toolkit Office Applications fontconfig Library for Font Configuration Games freeglut A freely licensed alternative to the GLUT library Multimedia freetype2 A TrueType font library LSB Runtime Environment EZ fribidi Free Implementation of the BiDi Algorithm Simple Webserver with Apache2 EZ fvwm2 An Improved Version of the FVWM Window Manager ghostscript fonts std Standard Fonts for Ghostscript gt CC es Description Technical Data Dependencies Versions B Simple Webserver LDAP Server and Tools Network Server C C Compiler and Tools Kernel Development
403. ontacts You can drag and drop contacts into the desired folder This allows grouping contacts for a better overview File Edit Settings Help GR a wae Contacts Figure 5 12 The Main Kopete Application Using Kopete It is necessary to establish a connection to the Internet to be able to chat with other participants When this is done clicking File Connection Connect All then establish a connection between Kopete and the selected messaging service The main application windows features a list of contacts When you right click a contact marked as online a menu opens with various options Send that person a message or start a chatting session A chat allows invitation of other participants for real time discussion The connection to all other participants is closed when the creator of the chat session leaves the room first 5 4 Important Utilities Files can be transferred comfortably with an instant messenger by right clicking a user and then clicking his name Many options like Delete Con tact Show User Information Block User and Send File can be found here Clicking Send File opens a dialog for selecting the desired file Con firming with OK sends a dialog to the receiving user asking whether he wants to accept the file If he accepts the file transfer starts 5 4 12 Font Administration with KFontinst By default SUSE LINUX provides various fonts commonly available
404. ool 16 11 Encrypting Mail with PGP or GnuPG You can encrypt outgoing e mail with KMail To encrypt your e mail first generate a key pair as described in Chapter I5 on page 249 Then log out and log in again With Settings gt Configure KMail gt Security gt Crypto plugins gt Configure determine in what cases and with which process your e mail messages should be encrypted The corresponding module usually openpgp must be activated first In path enter the file name of the crypto 16 11 Encrypting Mail with PGP or GnuPG library In the case of OpenPGP this is usr lib cryptplug gpgme openpgp so usr lib cryptplug gpgme smime so is valid for smime An asterisk in the displayed table marks the active module If de sired select to be alerted when attempting to send an unencrypted e mail To encrypt any attachments as well check Encrypt all message parts in Settings gt Configure KMail gt Security gt Crypto Plugins gt Con figure After setting the preferences click Identities under Configure KMail Select the identity with which encrypted or signed messages should be sent and choose Change Select the Advanced tab in the dialog that opens Click Change for OpenPGP key to display a selection box from which to choose the keys Confirm with OK The encryption system is now ready The public key must be
405. oot loader configuration of your system will be displayed en abling you to make any needed changes see Figure on the next page The Main Window The table listing the configuration data consists of three columns Under Changed to the left flags mark the changed options listed in the center column To add an option click Add To change the value of an existing option select it with a mouse click and click Edit If you do not want to use an existing option at all select it and click Delete Reset to the right under the configuration window offers the following options 120 48 System Yas Wiseeatisn e To edit boot loader settings 1 lt choosethe appropriate entry or X a Boot Loader Setup O thetable then click Edit To add a new option use Add To remove C an option click Delete To edit the settings of sections has Cation choose Available Sections or Boot Loader Type Default Section and editthem e s Boot Loader Location 1 SCSI 1 96 GB dev sda QUANTUM FIREB O The Ch column of the table is Disk Order Idev sda dev sdb Q meant for detecting whether the option was Changed Default Section Linux 5 Available Sections Linux default Diskette Failsafe Via the Reset button you can Activate Boot Loader Partition No clear the current configuration Replace Code in MBR Leave Untouched O and propose a new configuration Back
406. option user in the appropriate line in the etc fstab file separated by com mas and save this change Further information is available in umount option s mountpoint This command unmounts a mounted drive from the file system To prevent data loss run this command before taking a removable data medium from its drive Normally only root is allowed to run the commands mount and umount To enable other users to run these commands edit the etc fstab file to specify the option user for the respective drive 25 3 2 System Commands System Information df option s directory The df disk free command when used without any options displays information about the total disk space the disk space currently in use and the free space on all the mounted drives If a directory is specified the information is limited to the drive on which that directory is located H Shows the number of occupied blocks in gigabytes megabytes or kilobytes in human readable format t Type of file system ext2 nfs etc du option s path This command when executed without any parameters shows the total disk space occupied by files and subdi rectories in the current directory a Displays the size of each individual file h Output in human readable form s Displays only the calculated total size free option s Thecommand free displays information about RAM and swap space usage showing the total and the used amount in both categories
407. options and select Repair Installed System See Figure 3 1 It appears that your machine has a Linux system installed r Please select 34 E M em J New installation To verify this existing partitions must tel be mounted This can be a 1 _ Update an existing system time umi for ime cons ming process for large AEAEE ME e partitions n _ Boot installed system Please choose what to do Select New Installation if there is no Abort Installation existing Linux system on your machine or if you wantto replace an existing Linux system completely abandoning all its configuration data Select Update an Existing Systemto 4 update a Linux system already Figure 3 1 Selecting the YaST System Repair Utility Note Because the test and repair procedure is loaded from CD or DVD it is essential to run it from an installation medium that exactly corresponds to your installed version of SUSE LINUX Note In the next step choose how the system repair should be performed The following options are available and are described below Automatic repair User defined repair Expert tools 3 1 Starting YaST System Repair 3 2 Automatic Repair This method is best suited to restoring a damaged system with unknown cause Selecting it starts an extensive analysis of the installed system which will take quite some time due to the large amount of tests and exami na
408. org Office Suite OpenOffice org is a powerful Linux office suite that offers tools for all types of office tasks such as writing texts working with spreadsheets or creating graphics and presentations With OpenOffice org use the same data across different computing platforms You can also open and edit files in Microsoft Office formats then save them back to this format if needed This chapter only covers the basic skills needed to get started with OpenOffice org 71 TheQuickstarter 186 7 2 Overview of the Application Modules 187 73 Get ngHelp lees 187 Tan 188 ppp 188 iss 090 xu 195 ZE Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw 199 73 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 200 SLING eoyo 810 eoyouedo eu 7 1 The Quickstarter When started for the first time from the main menu Applications gt Ac cessories gt More gt OpenOffice org Quickstarter you will be asked whether the quickstart function of the program should be enabled If you intend to use OpenOffice org frequently and have enough RAM avail able it can be useful Es amp Open Ctrl O Open Recent gt 14 OpenOffice org Calc 7 OpenOffice org Draw OpenOffice org Impress OpenOffice org Global X OpenOffice org Math OpenOffice org Web OpenOffice org Writer Y Start with 3 Configure OpenOffice org Quickstarter 24 Start OpenOffice org pri
409. orts the loading of a page so no further data is trans ferred from the corresponding site The next element to the right is the location bar in which to enter Internet addresses URLs or search terms If you enter a search term then press Search Mozilla searches the web for that term using the search engine set in the preferences After having visited a number of sites directly se lect their addresses again by clicking the down arrow which opens a drop down list Mozilla stores the contents of this list so it is available in your next browser session Start typing a previous address then hit to com plete it automatically Print prints the current page The downward arrow to its right also gives access to a print preview of the document To the very right the navigation toolbar displays the Mozilla logo which is animated as long as the browser is transferring data 14 1 3 The Personal Toolbar The personal toolbar is a customizable toolbar that is preconfigured to in clude the following elements Home This points to a web address configured to be displayed as Mozilla s start page 14 1 The Initial Browser Window Bookmarks This button lets you access the bookmarks collected from in tranet or Internet sites The Mozilla Organization This points to the home page of the Mozilla project SuSE The Linux Experts This points to the home page of SUSE LINUX 14 1 4 Sidebar The sidebar is located to the left i
410. ory b Appearance Navigator History Languages Helper Applications Smart Browsing r When Navigator starts up display O Blank page Home page Q Last page visited Internet Search Tabbed Browsing r Home Page Downloads Clicking the Home button takes you to this page or group of pages D Composer D Mail amp Newsgroups Location http mozilla kairo at Choose File Restore Default D Privacy amp Security P Advanced Use Current Page Use Current Group Offline amp Disk Space m Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars Y Bookmarks 7 Search O Go EY Print 7 Home Figure 14 2 Preferences Appearance Under this entry set the fonts and colors the browser should use select a theme and switch between the German and the English language version Navigator The first thing that can be changed under this entry is the start page for the browser Configure Mozilla to start with a blank page the home page as defined below which may be your organization s intranet portal for instance or the last page visited In the History dialog define the number of days for which the addresses of visited pages should be stored Languages lets you define a list of preferred languages which is useful for pages that are available in several lan guages Under Internet Search tell Mozilla which search engine to use If you do not want Mozill
411. osition and 20dd deletes twenty lines The most important commands in last line mode are Table 25 3 Complex Commands of the vi Editor q exits Vi without saving any changes w filename saves as filename ix saves the modified file and exits the editor e filename edits loads filename u undoes the last edit command 25 4 The vi Editor Ergonomics in the Workplace This chapter is a short discussion of the ergonomic issues involved in the layout of computer workplaces This text should not be seen as a substitute for studying the respective standards No citations from these are included here and footnotes with references to other literature are completely omit ted to preserve readability The items referred to in each section are mostly gathered from German literature and are almost always based on regula tions and policies in the Federal Republic of Germany This information is still useful in designing an ergonomic work area 26 1 The Working Environment 404 26 2 OffireEquipment ooo oo 409 26 3 Links and Literature 413 3PIAAJOM SUL Ul SOILUOUVOBIJ 404 26 1 The Working Environment If ergonomics specialists examined the home workstations of computer users systematically they would find many problems Unfortunately no standard has yet prevented individual users from buying so called spe cial computer tables The low priced metal tube frames with practical
412. ot written by the maker of the hardware it is crucial that the printer can be driven through one of the generally known languages Normal printers understand at least one of these common languages In the case of a GDI printer however the manu facturer has built a device that relies on its own special control sequences Many inexpensive ink jet models belong to this group Such a printer only runs out of the box under the versions of the operating systems for which the manufacturer has included a driver As the device cannot be operated through one of the standard languages it cannot be used with Linux or can only be used with difficulties UOILOINBWUOD ISOA Nevertheless a number of these printers are supported by SUSE LINUX However their use is often rather problematic and some features might not be available at all for example the printer could be limited to low res olution monochrome printing The following list includes the GDI models that can be directly configured with YaST Because SUSE does not test GDI printers there is no guarantee that the list is correct Brother HL 720 730 820 1020 1040 MFC 4650 6550MC 9050 and compatible models HP DeskJet 710 712 720 722 820 1000 and compatible models a Lexmark 1000 1020 1100 2030 2050 2070 3200 5000 5700 7000 7200 Z11 42 43 51 52 and compatible models Linux drivers from Lex mark are available at http www lexmark com printers linuxprinters html a Oki Okipage
413. ough the sound card does not support this frequency In this case ALSA can automatically convert the data in the plug in layer to a format supported by the sound card The conversion af fects the following parameters sample format sample frequency and num ber of channels Activate the plug in layer by selecting the PCM type plughw If the PCM type hw is selected ALSA tries to open the PCM devices directly with the parameters required by the application The complete designator for a PCM device consists of the PCM type followed by a colon the card num ber and the device number for example plughw 0 0 The dmix output plug in is a recent addition to the PCM types It allows applications to share access to a PCM device on sound cards that do not support this natively The complete identifier in this case is plug dmix More information about dmi x can be found athttp alsa opensrc 19 2 Mixers Mixers provide a convenient means of controlling the volume and balance of the sound output and input of computers The main difference between the various mixers consists in the outer appearance of the user interface Select one that best suits your needs 300 19 1 The ALSA PCM Types M Note Generally it is advisable to open a mixer application prior to opening other sound applications Use the mixer to test and adjust the control settings for the input and output of the sound card Some sound cards may not allow simultaneous a
414. our machine Rescue System If you are unable to boot into your installed Linux system for some reason you can boot the computer from the DVD or CD1 and select this item This option starts a rescue system a min imal Linux system without a graphical user interface which allows experts to access disk partitions for troubleshooting and repairing an installed system Less experienced users can alternatively use the Sys tem Repair tool supplied with YaST Refer to Chapter Blon page 45 for details Memory Test This tests your system RAM by means of repeated read and write cycles This is done in an endless loop as memory corrup tion often shows up very sporadically so many read and write cycles might be necessary to detect it If you suspect that your RAM might be defective start this test and let it run for several hours If no errors are detected after a longer time period you can assume that the mem ory is intact Terminate the test by rebooting 2 2 The Boot Screen A few seconds after starting the installation SUSE LINUX loads a minimal which takes control and performs the installation A num ber of messages and copyright notices are displayed then at the end of the loading process the YaST installation program is started After a few more seconds the screen should display the graphical interface that will guide you through the installation The YaST screens have a common format All buttons entry fields and lists ca
415. our provider Activate Always ask for password to be prompted for the password every time a connection is established Enter the connection parameters in the final dialog Dial on Demand Refer to Section on page 96 Enter at least one name server to use dial on demand Modify DNS when Connected This check box is activated by default Accordingly the name server is adjusted each time a dial up con nection is established Deactivate this setting and specify static name servers for Automatic Dial Up Stupid Mode This option is activated by default Input prompts by the dial up server are ignored to facilitate the establishment of the con nection Activate Firewall Here activate the SUSE Firewall to implement protec tion against intruders when connected to the Internet Idle Time seconds Here specify the period after which the connection should be terminated if there is no data transfer IP Details With this button enter the address configuration dialog If your provider has not assigned a dynamic IP address deactivate Dy namic IP Address and enter the local IP address of your host and the remote IP address Contact your provider for information about these settings Leave the Default Route setting active and exit the dialog with OK Press Next to return to the overview and view the configuration Com plete the configuration with Finish 4 5 4 DSL The YaST module DSL in
416. ow your home directory is displayed in a new window Duplicate Window produces a second window with the same content You can also send a file or a link using the browser function by e mail If you click one of these menu items the KMail composer opens Specify the recipient and compose a text De pending on the selected item the file is already attached or the link 150 5 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Edit is displayed in the e mail body You can also print directly from this menu Most items under Edit only become active if you select an object in the main window Standard editing functions are available The Shred function destroys the data permanently Create new directo ries and files or change file properties such as the file permissions Grant or deny the user a group or all users read write and execute permissions In the main window one or several files can be selected by moving the mouse pointer over them while keeping the left mouse button pressed or by using the selection functions in the Edit menu View Use the View menu to change views If a directory is very full the text view or the tree view may be more efficient To view HTML pages activate Use index html With Lock to Current Location stop animated images and with Unlock View resume the anima tion Icon Size Sort Preview Show Hidden Files and Folder Icons Reflect Contents control
417. owever only root is permitted to perform this change Suppose the file Roadmap from Exam ple 25 2Jon page 388 should no longer belong to t ux but to the user geeko root should then enter chown geeko Roadmap chgrp changes the group ownership of the file However the owner of the file must be a member of the new group In this way the user tux from OutputD5 1 on page 387 can switch the group owning the file ProjectData to project 4 with the command chgrp project4 ProjectData as long as he is a member of this new group 25 2 3 The setuid Bit In certain situations the access permissions may be too restrictive There fore Linux has additional settings that enable the temporary change of the current user and group identity for a specific action For example the cdrecord program normally requires root permissions to access the writer for burning CDs or DVDSs Thus a normal user would not be able to create CDs as it would be too dangerous to grant all users direct access to all devices A possible solution to this problem is the setuid mechanism setuid set user ID is a special file attribute that instructs the system to execute programs marked accordingly under a specific user ID Consider the usr bin cdrecord command rwxr x 1 root root 281356 2004 03 12 21 30 cdrecord Set the setuid bit with the command chmod u s usr bin cdrecord Then assign the cdrecord program to the group users with the com mand chgrp users usr bin cdre
418. owing options Permanent Select this option if you have a dedicated line to the Internet Your machine will be online permanently so no dial up is required If your system is part of a local network with a central e mail server se lect this option to ensure permanent access to your e mail messages SUSE LINUX User Guide uouounGyuo2 ISOA 109 110 Dial up This item is relevant for all users who have a computer at home are not located in a network and establish dial up connections with the Internet occasionally via modem DSL or ISDN No connection If you do not have access to the Internet and are not lo cated in a network you cannot send or receive e mail Furthermore you can activate virus scanning for your incoming and outgo ing e mail with AMQViS by activating the respective check box The pack age is installed automatically as soon as you activate the mail filtering fea ture In the following dialogs specify the outgoing mail server usually the SMTP server of your provider and the parameters for incoming mail If you use a dial up connection you can specify diverse POP or IMAP servers for mail reception by various users By means of this dialog you can also assign aliases use masquerading or set up virtual domains Click Finish to exit the mail configuration 4 6 8 Network Services inetd This tool allows you to determine which network services such as telnet finger talk and ftp s
419. p they are placed next to each other and aligned with the top left corner Cascade Windows Starting from the top left corner the windows on the desktop are placed on top of each other in such a way that only the top and left borders of the lower windows are visible Desktop 1 Desktop 1 is your default desktop All open windows are listed under this menu item Click windows to move them to the fore ground additional desktop You can use additional virtual desktops Switch to another desktop with the menu or the panel All functions are avail able on all desktops This limits the number of programs and associ ated windows that need to be arranged on one desktop These virtual desktops resemble additional desks in your office If you right click the desktop a more complex menu is displayed allowing you to customize your desktop Create New Enables creation of new elements such as directories files or URLs on the desktop A list of possible elements is provided for selection in a submenu 5 1 Desktop Components Bookmarks This item opens the bookmark editor KEditBookmarks With it create group change or delete bookmarks The browser and file manager Konqueror can access these bookmarks Undo This option allows you to undo the last action For example if you just created a new directory on the desktop clicking this item reverts the creation so the directory disappears Paste To have a desktop icon for a folder or documen
420. p with DHCP If a DHCP server exists in your network automatically retrieve the configuration data for your network card from there Activate the address assignment with DHCP if your DSL provider has not given you a static IP address for your system Click DHCP Client Options to access the client configuration Here specify whether the DHCP server should always respond to a broadcast Additionally you can specify an ID By default the host is identified by means of the hardware address of the network card However if you have several virtual machines using the same network card distinguish them by means of various IDs Static Address Configuration If you have a static IP address activate the respective check box Enter the IP address and the correct subnet mask for your network The preset value for the subnet mask should meet the requirements of a typical home network Exit this dialog with Next or configure the host name name server and routing Refer to Sections on page 107 and on page 109 Cable Modem In some countries US Austria Internet access via cable modems has be come relatively widespread The cable subscriber gets a modem like device from the ISP which is connected to the TV cable network on one side and to the computer on the other using a 10BaseT twisted pair cable and a net work card As far as the computer is concerned this is basically a perma nent network link with a static IP addres
421. p servers html Confirm with OK To start the NTP daemon when the system is booted select When boot ing system Save your settings with Finish Consult the Administration Guide for more information 4 6 6 Routing This tool is only needed if you are located in a local network or are con nected to the Internet by way of a network card as is the case with DSL As indicated in Section 4 5 4 on page 100 for DSL the gateway data is only needed to configure the network card correctly However the entries are dummies that do not have any function The value is important only if you are located in a local network and use your own computer as gateway the gateway to the Internet 4 6 7 Mail Transfer Agent This configuration module allows you to adapt your mail settings if you send your e mail with sendmail postfix or the SMTP server of your provider You can fetch mail via the fetchmail program for which you can also enter the details of the POP3 server or IMAP server of your provider You can also use a mail program of your choice such as KMail see Sec tion 16Jon page 257 or Evolution to set your POP and SMTP access data as usual to receive mail with POP3 and send mail with SMTP In this case you do not need this module Connection Type If you want to configure your mail with YaST specify the desired type of connection to the Internet in the first dialog of the e mail configuration module Choose one of the foll
422. pen a color editor Here change the color settings as desired or use the pipette to adopt a color from any desktop element or a loaded image or web page Select special gradient effects under Mode To use an image as a background for one or several backgrounds activate Single Wallpaper Then select the scaling mode or the position of the wall paper on your desktop and designate a suitable wallpaper with the drop down menu or the Browse button Alternatively drag and drop image files from your file manager see Section 5 3 on page 150 or the desktop to the preview image For wallpaper variety activate Multiple Wallpapers and proceed with the further configuration using Setup Multiple The Advanced tab features some special settings that usually do not need to modified Fonts All fonts and font attributes used on the desktop can be configured here Click Choose then specify your settings in the dialog that opens By de fault antialiasing is activated for all fonts To deactivate or customize an tialiasing select the respective check boxes Note Changes to the antialiasing settings are only applied to newly started programs Programs already open are not affected by the changes Note 5 2 Settings Style Here select the style for all widgets elements of the graphical interface in KDE applications The configuration contains three tabs Select the style un der Style using the
423. prefer to operate programs without using the mouse click Keys to view a list of shortcuts Dependency Check Check Dependencies and Autocheck are located in the information win dow If you click Check Dependencies the package manger checks if the current package selection results in any unresolved package dependencies or conflicts In the event of unresolved dependencies the required addi tional packages are selected automatically For package conflicts the pack age manager opens a dialog that shows the conflict and offers various op tions for solving the problem If you activate Autocheck any change of a package status triggers an au tomatic check This is a useful feature as the consistency of the package selection is monitored permanently However this process consumes re sources and can slow down the package manager For this reason the au tocheck is not activated by default In either case a consistency check is performed when you confirm your selection with Accept In the following example sendmail and postfix may not be installed concurrently Figure 4 5 on the next page shows the conflict message prompting you to make a decision post fix is already installed Accord ingly you can refrain from installing sendmail remove post fix or take the risk and ignore the conflict Caution Ignoring a conflict is strongly discouraged as the stability and operabil ity of your system can no longer be guara
424. qamix Eile About Playback Tone 3D Control Ext Source Playback Capture IEC958 Playback 1EC958 Capture r Master r Stereo r Surround KJE E zm un M 100 100 ES VENE IG G E ST TESTI IRL DPS T HEC EE S en LEE rita 6 ELE gg 06 ggg Lo IAN Le G GG N VELLE G I IEEE E GE GG IG PCM Wave Music 18 Lock Xj Lock s E Lock rround Digital Wave Surround Center LFE Wave Center Wave LEE ute IR Lock IR Lock Figure 19 2 The Mixer QAmix 19 2 3 KMix KMix is the KDE mixer It provides a convenient and familiar interface for KDE users It can also be integrated into the KDE panel 19 2 4 The GNOME Mixer Applet If you use GNOME the GNOME Mixer appler can added to the panel for convenient volume control Simply right click the panel then select Add to Panel gt Multimedia gt Volume Control Right click the volume control applet then select Run Volume Control to access the more advanced mixer functions 19 2 5 alsamixer alsamixer can be run from the command line without the X environment The application is operated with the cursor keys Use Q W E Y CO and C to set different levels for the left and right channels M mutes sin gle channels In this case MM appears above the muted controller To ter minate alsamixer press Esc The basic controls for sound output are Master PCM and CD Master
425. questions regarding KOrganizer consult the detailed instructions for the program Access them with Help gt KOrganizer Handbook Jeziuo81Oy ul Guinpeuos SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 223 Address Management with KAddressBook KAddressBook provides quick and comfortable access to all address data of your contacts As well as managing your local address data KAddress Book can access if available a central LDAP server that hosts contact data for your entire department or your entire company KAddressBook sup ports the import and export of vCard data ensuring the smooth interaction with other programs 11 1 Creating a New Contact less 226 112 Creating Address Lists 227 113 Searching Address Data 227 11 4 Importing and Exporting Address Data 229 YOOGSSSIOPVY ULIM JUSUSIBDUDIA sseJppv 226 KAddressBook can be started independently from the main menu from the appointment scheduler KOrganizer or the mail program KMail On start up the KDE Address Book window consists of three frames shown in Figure 11 1 The top frame contains the menu and toolbars The two lower frames contain the current list of contacts and the address data of the cur rently selected contact File Edit View Tools Settings Help je 34 a f oj 38 x Search Al Fielas Eiter None zj Given Name Family Name Email Address Tux Pinguin tux example com Tux Pinguin
426. r desktop display There is a wide variety of window managers available one of the more popular ones being kwm for KDE WWW World Wide Web Based on the a HTTP protocol this is a hyperlinked collection of doc uments files and images that can be viewed with a web browser X Window System The X Window System is the standard for graphical interfaces in Linux Itis simply the middle layer between the hardware and the ca such as KDE or GNOME SUSE LINUX User Guide 435 436 X11 See va X Window System YasT Yet another Setup Tool The SUSE LINUX system assistant YP See Glossary Index A access permissions 38711391 file systems 00 0005 287 ACPI disabling 1 5 2d im cnica address management see KAddressBoo Aley 334 alsamixer sssssssssessssssee 302 A riais Enion creating with YaST AA commands functions 00 e cece eee PIPE Pm wild cards suuuuu BIOS id iwi t tT US booting BIOS reete cese rb ti CD from iaa configuring 00005 NAST as sloadet 2 ie dee mn locations for O ii a ae bugs misere n ns duscnisingaenn gaa aiia 422 C calendars Evolution sss 27611281 cards Egrapliies uste SISIDN cisco audio creating players booting 6c eee eee eens burning 08 A beiia ecaa data CAOS ii ees oor n
427. r verification purposes the password for root must be entered twice Do not forget the root password It cannot be retrieved later 2 6 Finishing the Installation Caution The user root has all the permissions needed to make changes to the system To carry out such tasks the root password is required You cannot carry out any administrative tasks without this password Caution Vea S Winseatter ge Base Installation 8 Password for root the system administrator v Language w installation Settings w Perform Installation Configuration b Root Password Network Do not forget what you enter here Online Update Users Enter a password for the root user Clean Up errores Release Notes ecc i Device Configuration Reenter the password for verification enne Expert Options Figure 2 13 Setting the root Password 2 6 2 Network Configuration In this step configure network devices for a connection to the outside world If you have these devices such as network cards modems and ISDN or DSL hardware it is a good idea to configure them now An Inter net connection allows YaST to retrieve any available SUSE LINUX updates To configure your network hardware here refer to the relevant parts of Sec tion 4 5 on pageD4 Otherwise choose to Skip Network Setup and confirm this with Continue The network hardware can also be configured after system installation has completed SUSE LIN
428. r web pages File Edit Go Settings Help AQAA m SuSE HelpCenter Contents Search Gl J Application Manuals Administration Development Y Online Resources Development Documentation for Developers o Bash Reference o Tools o Languages o Libraries Administration o Linux Documentation o Hardware o System Application Manuals o KDE Application Manuals Manuals of applications sorted as in start menu o Reference documentation Online Resources o SuSE Hardware Database o SuSE Homepage D e Figure A 1 The Main Window of the SUSE Help Center Contents of the SUSE Help Center The SUSE Help Center bundles useful information from various sources It contains special documentation for SUSE LINUX User Guide and Admin istration Guide all available information sources for your workstation en vironment online help for the installed programs and help texts for other applications Furthermore the SUSE Help Center provides access to SUSE s online databases that cover special hardware and software issues in con nection with SUSE LINUX All these sources can be searched comfortably once a search index has been generated The Search Function of the SUSE Help Center To search all installed information sources of SUSE LINUX generate a search index and set a number of search parameters To do this open the Search tab See Figure A 2 Search Contents Search
429. r you click Finish in the main window following the completion of the settings for your monitor and your graphics card test your settings This ensures that your configuration is suitable for your devices If the image is not steady terminate the test immediately by pressing and reduce the refresh rate or the resolution and color depth Regardless of whether you run a test all modifications are only activated when you restart the X server Display With Edit configuration gt Properties a window with the tabs Monitor Frequencies and Expert appears Monitor In the left part of the window select the vendor In the right part select your model If you have floppy disks with Linux drivers for your monitor install these by clicking Driver disk Frequencies Here enter the horizontal and vertical frequencies for your screen The vertical frequency is another designation for the image refresh rate Normally the acceptable value ranges are read from the model and entered here Usually they do not need to be changed Expert Here enter some options for your screen In the upper se lection field define the method to use for the calculation of the screen resolution and screen geometry Do not change anything unless the monitor is addressed incorrectly and the display is not stable Fur thermore you can change the size of the displayed image and acti vate the power sav
430. rameter View adds the currently marked module parameter to the Parameter View dialog The parameters can be easily arranged into tabulators and labeled frames 19 11 5 The MIDI Out Module The output of the MIDI events generated by a MIDI Out module is re alized by way of the two readable MIDI ports of AlsaModularsynth in the left list of kaconnect If several MIDI Out modules are used simul taneously the MIDI events are merged accordingly As both notation and controller events can be sent the module can also be used to con trol all kinds of parameters via control voltage To do this the readable MIDI ports must be connected with the writable MIDI port The example example midiout controller ams shows the change in an envelope with autogenerated controller events Easily follow the movement of the envelope by opening the configuration dialog of the ENV module ID 5 with the right mouse button The option Follow MIDI in the Control Cen ter should be deactivated while this patch is running If you connect the readable MIDI ports of AlsaModularSynth with a MIDI sound generator example midiout note ams plays scales controlled by an LFO example midiout note velocity ams shows that the velocity data can also be autogenerated example_midiout_random ams generates random music with drums 19 11 6 Writing WAV Files with the WAV Out Module Using the WAV Out module directly record the signals generated or pro cessed by AlsaModu
431. rating System Consulting SuSE Linux Support Business Solutions Solutions Figure 13 1 The Main Window in Galeon Galeon s most essential navigation tools are available in the first toolbar Next and Back flip through the history of visited Internet sites as in other browsers Reload updates the contents of a site Cancel stops a con nection or transfer from taking place Zoom the magnification level of a document is usually scaled to 100 a 1 1 display of the document The up and the down arrows to its right set the zoom levels in intervals of ten Enter Internet addresses URLs in the following entry box The GNOME foot shows Galeon s progress If the icon is animated Galeon is working and transferring data 13 1 Optimized for the Web Galeon is primarily designed to make surfing the Internet as convenient as possible In the default configuration Galeon presents a second toolbar en abling quick access to the popular Google search engine and its news and image search function It can also offer access to an online dictionary and use the bookmarklets This is made possible by small JavaScript functions built into Galeon for example find out how current a page is or allow the Internet site to slowly scroll down the screen 13 1 Optimized for the Web 13 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs Galeon can display multiple documents in a single application window To open a link in a web site in the fo
432. rce account subject date and status The drop box showing Contains provides a variety of options such as contains is and is not Select the appropriate condition Enter the text for which to search Click Add criterion to add more filter criteria Use Execute actions to determine if all or only some of the criteria must be met to apply the filter In the lower part of the window determine the action to take when the fil ter criteria are met Messages can for example be moved or copied to a folder or assigned a special color When moving or copying select the des tination folder by clicking In the folder list that appears select the folder Use New to create a new folder Click OK when the correct folder is se lected When finished creating the filter click OK SUSE LINUX User Guide WUDIBOld Jopue o2 PUD ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 279 280 Rule name Untitled Add criterion Execute actions if all criteria are met w Sender X J contains y l d Remove Then d Add action Move to Folder v click here to select a folder dj Remove ok X cane Figure 17 2 Setting up a Filter Creating a Filter fom a Message Select the message on which to base the filter Right click and select Create Rule From Message Select the desired filter option This opens the filter creatio
433. re configured system security options To do this simply click Finish Under Details access the individual settings that can be modified If you choose Custom settings proceed to the different dialogs with Next Here find the default installation values Password Settings For new passwords to be checked by the system be fore they are accepted mark Checking new passwords and Plausi bility test for password Set the minimum and maximum length of passwords for newly created users Define the period for which the password should be valid and how many days in advance an expira tion alert should be issued when the user logs in to the text console Boot settings Specify how the key combination Strg AI should be interpreted by selecting the action from the drop down list Usually this combination entered in the text console causes the sys tem to reboot Do not modify this setting unless your machine or 112 A47 Security and Users YaS instalo e Linuxis a multiuser system OF A lt Several different users can be User and Group Administration O logged in the system at the e same time To avoid confusion each user must Users Groups Filter Custom 1 have a unique identity if they want to use Linux hits more Group name Group ID Group members every user at least belongs to games geeko one group powersave 1000 O In this dialog get
434. re therefore recommended in all cases They increase the relative humidity and filter pollutants from the air 26 1 5 Noise Levels Noise is a physically powerful stress factor Although it is often played down too much noise makes you ill Apart from health impairments such as defective hearing vegetative disorders and psychic changes noise af fects our efficiency by impairing our ability to concentrate Furthermore discontent can reduce working motivation The fact that proper noise abatement can possibly cost a lot of money is also problematic A calm working environment improves efficiency Work at terminal work stations is often characterized as mental activity Therefore the maximum load value for scientific work or programming is 55 dB A The dB A rep resent a weighted evaluation of the acoustic pressure The A filter curve most resembles human perception An increase of the sound level by 10 dB A is normally perceived as a duplication of volume Because mainly mental work is done at terminal workstations quiet working materials should be used from the start The maximum limiting value for office work is 55 dB A With espe cially high mental demands or necessary communication of language as low as 35 45 dB A is required This is the case for instance for specialized work scientific work or programming Furthermore the evaluation level of a maximum of 55 dB A is im portant If 70 dB A is measured for
435. ressing F2 and entering kontact See Figure File Settings Help Wednesday 03 March 2004 4 z o Kk EE EE G N A No birthdays or anniversaries pending within the next 62 days i iG o a z vd X 3 Figure 5 10 Kontact In Settings gt Configuring Kontact select which components should ap pear in the window 5 4 11 Chatting With Friends Kopete Kopete is an online messenger application allowing multiple partners con nected to the Internet to chat with each other Kopete currently supports all common messenger protocols such as ICQ MSN Yahoo SMS Jabber and IRC Configuring Kopete Configure Kopete by entering your personal user data Click Settings gt Configure Kopete Connections shows all currently available protocols Check the desired connection type to activate it 5 4 Important Utilities With Accounts enter your user data You must register with a provider offering instant messaging services before using such service Click New to open a configuration assistant that can assist you in completing your user profile The next step lists the avilable messaging services Select the service with which you have registered and click Continue In the next step enter the user data received upon registration with the messaging service This usually consists of the nickname or e mail address and the password you chose Complet
436. rm of a new tab right click that link Select Open in new tab in the pop up menu Create a fresh Galeon tab by clicking File gt Open New Tab Click the tabs to switch the display 13 3 Smart Bookmarks Smart bookmarks give access to a site s functions along with its address for example searching the Internet for terms with Google Enter the word in the input field after the Google icon The result is displayed after a few seconds To activate or create additional smart bookmarks select Bookmarks gt Smart Bookmarks Toolbar gt Folder actions gt Edit A window opens in which to edit the bookmarks To create a new bookmark mark Smart Bookmarks Toolbar and select File gt New item Enter a name in Name and the web address in URL The Smart URL field is a URL that addi tionally contains a wild card for the entered string For example the smart URL for Google is http www google com search q s s is the wild card Save your bookmark settings with File gt Save UO9SJ D2 JOSMOIG JSM SUL 13 4 Settings and Controls Modify the configuration of the browser with Settings gt Preferences This dialog provides access to settings controlling both appearance and functionality Galeon features built in password management and cookie controls It also has options that specify the web sites from which images may be down loaded All th
437. rmine the maximum number of print jobs to display Enter a number in the field or use the slider to the right to determine a value Press OK to save the setting or Cancel to exit the dialog without saving The icons in the toolbar correspond to the functions you can access by way of the menu A help text explaining the function is displayed when you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons The job list consists of eight columns The job ID is automatically assigned by the print system to identify the various jobs The next column contains the login of the user who sent the job followed by the file name of the doc ument The status column indicates whether a job is still in the queue cur rently being printed or already completed Next the size of the document is displayed in kilobytes and number of pages The default priority of 50 can be increased or reduced if necessary Billing information can be cost centers or other company specific information If you right click a job in the list the Jobs menu opens under the mouse pointer allowing you to select an action Only a few functions are available for completed jobs If you acti vate Keep window permanent KJobViewer window opens automatically when you log in the next time You can also start KJobViewer using the printer icon in the panel doptseq JG eut 5 4 6 Formatting Floppy Disks with KFloppy KFloppy is the floppy disk formatter of KDE Start the program from th
438. runlevel 2 single user mode runlevel 1 and S system halt runlevel 0 and system reboot runlevel 6 The various runlevels are useful if problems are encountered in connection with a particular service X or network in a higher runlevel In this case the system can be booted to a lower runlevel to repair the service Many servers operate without a graphical user interface and must be booted in a runlevel without X such as runlevel 3 Usually home users only need the standard runlevel 5 However if the graphical user interface freezes at any time you can restart the X Window system by switching to a text console with ED logging in as root and switching to runlevel 3 with the command init 3 This shuts down your X Window System leaving you with a text console To restart the graphical system enter init 5 In a default installation runlevel 5 is selected To start a different runlevel when the system is booted change the default runlevel here With Runlevel properties determine which services are started in which run level SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBYUOD SDA 125 126 Caution Incorrect settings for system services and runlevels can render your system useless To retain the operability of your system consider the possible consequences before modifying any of these settings Caution For more information about the runlevels in SUSE LINUX refer to the Ad ministration Guide
439. rupted record ings even on slow hardware especially if it is run with real time priority see Section 19 4 on page 308 During the recording the currently used buffer size is displayed in the status line under Buffer and the maximum buffer size required so far for this recording is displayed under Peak Eile About File tmpitake01 wav Time 0 00 00 amp Capture B R l Record l Pause l Stop Butter Peak Figure 19 12 QARecord A Simple Hard Disk Recording Application 19 8 Compressing Audio Data Uncompressed audio data in CD quality consumes almost ten MB per minute The MP3 procedure was developed by Fraunhofer IIS for the purpose of drastically compressing this data Unfortunately this pro cedure is patented Therefore companies that distribute MP3 encoders are required to pay license fees The powerful MP3 encoder Lame was developed for Linux Although the source code of Lame is under the GPL SUSE is not allowed to include this encoder in our distribution For more information about the legal situation visit the project web page at In some countries including Ger many and the USA the use of Larne is permitted for research purposes only Ogg Vorbis package name vorbis tools isa free audio compression format that is now supported by the majority of audio players The web page of the project is http www xiph org ogg vorbis The vorbis tools package includes an encoder and a simp
440. s defaults OK Cancel JI Help Figure 4 22 Configuration of NFS Clients SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 107 108 4 6 3 Configuration of a Samba Server Set up a Samba server to share resources such as files or printers with Win dows hosts In the first dialog define the role of the Samba server You can deactivate it use it as a file and print server or use it as a backup or primary domain controller A file and print server makes directories and printers available A domain controller enables its clients to log in to a Win dows domain The primary domain controller manages users and pass words A backup domain controller uses another domain controller for au thenticating the users More information about Samba is available in the Administration Guide After determining the use enter the Windows domain or workgroup Use Browse to display all existing domains and workgroups Under Server Description enter a text to display to all clients Use Authentication De tails to enter an advanced configuration dialog in which to set the user authentication mode If you activate smbpasswd all users and their pass words are saved in the file smopasswa If you opt for LDAP the user infor mation is stored on an LDAP server Specify the LDAP server by entering the server name Base DN and Administration DN Detailed information about LDAP is available in the Administration Guide Test the LDAP con necti
441. s Following your provider s specification select either Automatic Address Setup with DHCD or Static Address Configuration for the configuration of your network card Most providers today use DHCP A static IP address is generally included in a provider s business package In this case the provider should have assigned a static IP address Regarding the setup and configuration of cable modems refer to the Support Database article avail able online athttp sdb suse de en sdb html cmodem8 html 4 5 Network Devices 4 5 3 Modem In the YaST Control Center the modem configuration is available under Network Devices If the autodetection fails select the manual configura tion In the dialog that opens enter the port under Device Ya S YVinscalor e UOILOINBWUOD ISOA Enter all modem configuration H values Modem parameters Modem Device specifies to which port your modem is connected ttySO ttyS1 etc refer to serial ports and usually correspond to COMI COM2 etc Madam dece in DOS Windows ttyACMO and E ttyACM1 refer to USB ports faewmoaem If you are on a PBX you probably need to enter a Dial prefix Often Dial prefix if needed this is 9 or O Choose Dial mode according to your phone link Most telephone Dial mode Special settings companies use tone dia as the Tone dialing Xj Speaker on Dial mode Check the additional Bulse dialing Rj Detect Dial T
442. s Attention Even correctly configured M sever O packet filtering rules cannot iL smtp save you from vulnerabilities Cj Pops O that may be present in the CJ POP3 with SSL POP3s J services to which you allow C map h access from the Internet Use YOU YaST2 Online Update to IL JIMAD WII SE UM ADS O keep your system up to date Otner Seite C with the latest update ie packages from the SuSE FTP IL Secure Shell ten p servers O telnet Q C Remote Synchronization rsync HTTP Service to run a web server Additional Services O such as Apache oe 5 Expert SMTP Service used by mail servers amp RR E that accept incoming e mail SUN Um pm Figure 4 27 SuSE Firewall Externally Accessible Services Additionally there are two dialogs for uninstalling packages that were added since the last backup and for the reinstallation of packages that were deleted since the last backup These two steps enable you to restore the ex act system state at the time of the last backup Caution As this module normally installs replaces or uninstalls many packages and files use it only if you have experience with backups as otherwise you may lose data Caution zl 4 8 3 Creating a Boot Rescue or Module Disk Use this YaST module to create boot disks rescue disks and module disks These floppy disks are helpful if the boot configuration of your system is damaged The rescue disk is especially necessary i
443. s click Next to begin the in stallation Confirm with Yes in the green dialog that opens Installation usually takes between fifteen and thirty minutes depending on system per formance and the software selected 2 6 Finishing the Installation After completing the basic system setup and the installation of all selected software packages provide a password for the account of the system ad ministrator the root user Then configure your Internet access and net work connection if available With a working Internet connection it is pos sible to update the system with security patches and software updates dur ing installation If desired configure a name server for centralized user ad ministration in a local network Also configure any hardware devices such as printers and scanners 2 6 1 root Password sfrootlis the name of the superuser the administrator of the system Un like regular users which may or may not have permission to do certain things on the system root has unlimited power to do anything change the system configuration install programs and set up new hardware If users forget their passwords or have other problems with the system root can help The root account should only be used for system administration maintenance and repair Logging in as root for daily work is rather risky a single mistake could lead to many system files being irretrievably lost Figure on the facing page shows the relevant dialog Fo
444. s or to an amplifier Some TV cards can change the volume of the audio output The volume can then be set with the slid ers that appear after selecting Settings gt Slider This window also pro vides the sliders for brightness contrast and color To use your sound card for audio playback check the mixer settings using gamix described in Section 19 2 on page 00 For sound cards meeting the AC97 specifications set Input MUX to Line The volume can then be ad justed with the Master and Line sliders 20 1 3 Screen Proportions and Full Screen Mode Most television images have a height and width ratio of 4 3 These propor tions can be set with Tools gt Screen Dimensions If 4 3 is selected here this is the default setting the screen dimensions are retained automati cally even when the display size is changed With or Tools gt Fullscreen switch to full screen mode If the TV im age in full screen mode is not scaled to the full monitor size some fine tuning is required Many graphics cards can scale the full screen mode television image to the full monitor size without changing the graphical mode If your card does not support this function the graphics mode must be switched to 640x480 for the full screen mode Create the related config uration in Settings gt Configuration After restarting motv the monitor mode is also changed if you have switched to full scr
445. s as described below add users to the uucp group to allow them to use KPilot Note zl USB Cradle To connect over a USB cradle create a symbolic link from dev ttyUSB to dev pilot To to so first check to which USB bus the cradle is connected If you do not have any other USB de vices on the same first USB bus it can be safely assumed that this is dev ttyUSBO In this case the command to create the symbolic link would be as follows 1n s dev ttyUSBO dev pilot Serial Cradle First determine to which port the cradle is connected The device files for serial ports are named dev ttyS and just as USB ports the counting starts from zero for the first port To create the link for a cradle connected to the first serial port enter the command ln s dev ttyS0 dev pilot 9 1 2 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit Initially it should be sufficient to enable the KAddressBook conduit with out changing any of the defaults After the data has been synchronized for the first time configure the details what to do in case of conflicts the way in which backup databases are saved and how certain fields as stored on the handheld should be assigned to the fields expected by KAddressBook 9 1 3 Managing To Do Items and Events On the KDE desktop to dos tasks and events appointments are man aged with KOrganizer Start the application from the main menu or with the command korganizer After enabling the calendar and the to do con
446. s designated as PCM Out are generated by applications that send PCM data to the sound card The sig nals of the analog inputs are shown under H W In The S PDIF inputs are shown to the right The input and output levels of the analog channels must be set under Analog Volume Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About HAW Out 1 L H W Out 2 R H W Out 3 L HAW Out 4 R HAW Out 5 L H W Out 6 R HW Out 7 D HAY y PCMOut1 PCMOu2 PCMOu3 PCMOut4 PCMOutS PCMOutB y PCMOuUt yt Digital Mix L Digital Mix R v SPDIF InL yv S PDIF InL y S PDIF In L ly S PDIF InL S PDIFInL S PDIF InL S PDIF nL y SIPDIF INR y S PDIF InR v S PDIF INR S PDIF InR S PDIF InR y S PDIF INR y S PDIFInR v y HAW Ind v HAW in 1 HAW In 1 HAW In 1 HW Ind y HA In 1 HAW In 1 y HW In 2 v Hew In 2 QHWIn2 HWIn2 vOHIN In 2 y HAW In 2 y HAW In 2 v HAW In 3 y HW In 3 eHWIn3 HWing y HW In 3 v HAV In 3 y HAW In 3 y HAV In 4 v Hil In 4 y HAW In 4 v HW In 4 y Hi In 4 v HAW In 4 y HAW In 4 y HAN In 5 y HAV In 5 HWInS HWInS y HW In 5 y HW In 5 v HAW In S y HW In 6 y HAV In 6 y HAV In 6 v HAW In B v HW In 6 y HAW In 6 y HAV In 6 y HA In 7 v HAV In 7 wv HAW In HAW In y HAW In 7 y HAW In 7 y HAW In 7 vt y HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 vHWing HAW In 8 y HW In 8 v HAW In 8 y HAW In 8 vt Figure 19 4 The Patchbay Use the
447. s except they are prefixed with an m mdir a displays the contents of the floppy disk in drive a mcopy Testfile a copies the file Test file to the floppy disk mdel a Testfile deletes Test fileina mformat a formats the floppy disk in MS DOS format using the fdformat command mcd a makes a your current directory mmd a test creates the subdirectory test on the floppy disk mrd a test deletes the subdirectory test from the floppy disk 25 1 10 Cleaning Up After this crash course you should be familiar with the basics of the Linux shell or command line You may want to clean up your home directory by deleting the various test files and directories using the rm and rmdir com mands At the end of this chapter find a list of the most important com mands and a brief description of their functions 25 1 Introduction to Bash 25 2 Users and Access Permissions Since its inception in the early 1990s Linux has been developed as a mul tiuser system Any number of users can work on it simultaneously This resulted in some notable distinctions from the Microsoft end user Windows operating systems The most important distinguishing feature is the necessity for users to log in to the system before starting a session at their workstation Each user has a user name with a corresponding password This differentiation of users guarantees that unauthorized users cannot see files for which they do not have permission Larger changes to the
448. s for the key to use As soon as you have selected a key the file is encrypted without any further messages In the file manager encrypted files are designated with the suffix asc and the padlock icon These files can be decrypted by clicking the file icon drag ging it to the KGpg symbol in the panel and dropping it there Then select whether the file should be decrypted and saved or displayed in the edi tor If you select Decrypt and Save KGpg prompts for the password of your secret key and saves the decrypted file in the same directory as the encrypted file 15 3 3 The KGpg Editor Instead of creating contents for encryption in an external editor then en crypting the respective file with one of the methods described above you can use the integrated editor of KGpg to create the file Open the editor context menu gt Open Editor enter the desired text and click Encrypt Then select the key to use and complete the encryption procedure To de crypt files use Decrypt and enter the password associated with the key Generating and checking signatures is just as easy as encrypting directly from the editor Go to Signature Generate Signature and select the file to sign from the file dialog Then designate the secret key to use and enter the associated password KGpg informs you about the successful gener ation of the signature Files can also be signed from the editor by simply clicking Sign verify
449. s starting a graphics application for post processing or optical character recognition of an image The recog nized text from an OCR operation is displayed in its own frame Var ious tools for scaling rotating and flipping an image are available These functions can also be accessed from the toolbar The submenu Create From Selection allows saving an area of an image previously marked with the mouse Settings Settings adjusts of the look and feel of Kooka The toolbar and status bar can be switched on and off and keyboard shortcuts for menu entries can be defined Configure Toolbars provides a list of all the functions available to the toolbar Configure Kooka opens a configuration dialog in which to modify the look and feel of Kooka Normally however the defaults are sufficient In Tool Views enable and disable the thumbnail viewer the preview the gallery the scan ning parameters and the OCR result window Help The Help menu provides access to the online help manual for Kooka Also use it to access a feedback channel for problems and wishes It also provides information about the version authors and license of Kooka and KDE 354 23 4 The Menus Eile Image Settings Help gt BG s a ANDA Y Edad C 56 rX Image Name Size Format al e Viewer Scan Preview N z 4Kooka Gallery 28 items lel Q fy alll jpg
450. same for a USB printer enter fuser k dev usb 1p0 4 Do a complete reset of the printer by switching it off Wait a few sec onds before putting the paper back into the trays and switching the device back on The printer should now be ready to accept new jobs 4 4 Hardware For More Information Details about the Linux printing systems are provided in the printing chap ter in the Administration Guide which should already be installed on your system To read the manual start SuSE Help and click Administration Guide The PDF file is also available in usr share doc packages suselinux reference en and can be opened with a browser If you have problems with your printer check the Support Database ar ticles Installing a Printer and Printer Configuration with SuSE Linux 9 0 and Later which you can find by searching for the keyword installation or on line at http sdb suse de de sdb html jsmeix print einrichten html http sdb suse de de sdb html jsmeix print einrichten 82 html The most important problems are summarized in a central article http portal suse de sdb en 2004 02 bugs91 html 4 4 3 Hard Disk Controller Normally YaST configures the hard disk controller of your system during the installation If you add controllers integrate these into the system with this YaST module You can also modify the existing configuration but this is generally not necessary The dialog presents a list of detected hard
451. se button pressed The end points will be connected with a straight line when you release the tool The area inside is then selected Magic Wand This tools selects a region based on color similarities By Color With this select all the pixels in the image with the same color as the clicked pixel Intelligent Scissors Click a series of points in the image As you click the points are connected based on color differences Using the Quick Mask The quick mask is a way of selecting parts of an image using the paint tools A good way to use it is to make a rough selection using the intelligent scissors or the lasso freehand selection tool Then activate the quick mask by pressing the small icon with the dashed box in the lower left corner The quick mask displays the selection using an overlay of red Areas shaded with red are not selected Areas appearing as they did before the mask was activated are selected To modify the selection use the paint tools Painting with white selects the painted pixels Painting with black unselects pixels Shades of gray colors are treated as shades of gray are a partial selection Partial selection allows smooth transitions between se lected and unselected areas Note To use a different color for displaying the quick mask right click the quick mask button then select Configure Color and Opacity from the menu Click the colored box in the dialog that opens to select a new color Note
452. se suse New Server Edit Server Rj Manually Select Patches CJ Reload All Patches from Server L Configure Fully Automatic Update H Abort Figure 4 3 YaST Online Update URL Base URL of the directory tree from which the patches should be fetched Download the patches without installing them Install already fetched patches without downloading anything Check for existing new patches Show current configuration without further action product Product for which patches should be fetched version Product version for which patches should be fetched architecture Base architecture for which patches should be fetched Dry run cycle Fetch patches and simulate installation for test pur poses The system remains unchanged No signature checking of the fetched files Display list of available patches 4 3 Software V Verbose mode Print progress messages D Debug mode for experts and for troubleshooting 4 3 3 Patch CD Update The Patch CD Update is for SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server customers Patches are installed from CD instead of from an FTP server 4 3 4 Installing and Removing Software This module enables installation uninstallation and update of software on your machine In Linux software is available in the form of packages Normally a pack age contains everything needed for a program such as an editor or a com piler Usually this includes the actual program ass
453. selection The leftmost table column shows the current status of each package Two status flags are especially relevant for the installation Install the box in front of the package name is checked and Do Not Install the box is empty To select or deselect individual soft ware packages click the status box until the desired status is displayed Alternatively right click the package line to access a pop up menu listing various status options However the other status settings are not needed for the installation They are described in detailed in Section on page 59 Other Filters Click the filter selection box to view the range of possible filters The se lection according to Package Groups can also be used for the installation This filter sorts the program packages by subjects in a tree structure to the left The more you expand the branches the more specific the selection of packages is and the fewer packages that are displayed in the list of associ ated packages to the right Use Search to search for a specific package This is explained in detail in Section on page 59 Package Dependencies and Conflicts Instead of rewriting the same basic functions in each software package programmers access the functions of other packages For this reason many packages require that other packages are installed for the programs to func tion In rare cases programs interfere with each other causing conflicts When selecting
454. sequently clicking the desired item in the At tach menu You can also attach PGP keys to your messages by means of this menu PGP keys are treated like file attachments Their MIME type is application pgp keys 16 7 Message Folders Message folders serve as an organizing tool for your messages By default all message folders are stored in the Mail folder in your home directory The inbox outbox sent mail and trash folders are created when KMail is started for the first time These folders have the following func tions inbox KMail stores new messages here unless a filter has been de fined outbox Messages to send are stored here sent mail Copies of all e mails sent are stored here a trash Stores deleted e mails Using Folder gt New Folder create additional folders for organizing your e mail messages Enter the name of the new folder in the dialog that SUSE LINUX User Guide uoupoliddy ON Idy eut ION 263 opens shown in Figure 16 3 on page 71 To create a subfolder select the parent folder from Belongs to Specify the folder type any mailing list associated with it and an expiration date after which the messages are marked for deletion Additionally you can select an identity or display a certain sender or recipient To move messages from one folder to another highlight the message to move then press M or click Message gt Move to In the list of fold
455. ser It may be useful however to review the options under Environment gt Resource Levels and Interface gt Image Windows 3712 248 Configuring GIMP 24 9 For More Information The following are some resources that may be useful for the GIMP user Unfortunately the newness of this version means that many resources may be outdated Help provides access to the internal help system The GIMP User Group offers an informative and interesting web site athttp gug sunsite dk http www gimp orgis the official home page of The GIMP Grokking the GIMP by Carey Bunks is an excellent book based on an older GIMP version Although some aspects of the program have changed it can provide excellent guidance for image manipulation http gimp print sourceforge netis the web page for the GIMP print plug in The user manual available from the site provides detailed information about configuring and using the program SUSE LINUX User Guide AINID OUL ui soyda Buyoindiuny 373 Part VI Excursions Working with the Shell Graphical user interfaces are increasingly becoming important for Linux but using the mouse is not always the best way to perform daily tasks The command line provides high flexibility and efficiency The first part of this chapter provides an introduction to the Bash shell It is followed by an ex planation of the user permissions concept in Linux and a list of
456. sis Yas Vinstanor ge Manufacturer LA Manufacturer and model of the printer Select the manufacturer of your gt printer z Model Select manufacturer Select model After a manufacturer is selected BROTHER a t the list of models is updated with CALCOMP 9 Pin Series printers made by the selected CANON ActionLaser 1100 manufacturer Choose one CITIZEN ActionLaser Il If you cannot find your printer try CITOH ActionPrinter 3250 the Generic printers or COMPAQ AcuLaser C1000 Ghostscript devices If you do not DELL AcuLaser C1900 know which protocol your printer DIGITAL AcuLaser C1900PS uses consult the printer s manual DYMO COSTAR AcuLaser C2000 or contact the manufacturer AcuLaser Ca000r Adding PPD Files to FUJITSU AcuLaser C4000 Database HEIDELBERG AcuLaser C4000PS If your printer manufacturer HITACHI MAECEN CUSNe provides PPD files you can add HP AcuLaser C8500PS them to the database PPD files IBM AcuLaser C8600 t can be downloaded from FTP or IMAGEN AcuLaser C8600PS A HTTP servers or copied from hard disk or removable media Add PPD Fileto Database w Abort Figure 4 8 Selecting the Printer If your printer was autodetected using the printer database or if the model has been selected manually YaST presents a choice of suitable Ghostscript drivers usually with a number of predefined configura tions for each of them for instance monochrome color 300 dpi a photo 600 dp
457. spectrum in their name feature corresponding modules whose visualiza tion can be opened by right clicking the module title Experiment a little for example and experience how the character of the music changes when SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 323 324 File Synthesis Module View About Advanced MCV LADSPA Saw VCO 1D1 PA Saw VCO Slew Limite ID 39 Out NN In Figure 19 17 The AlsaModularSynth Main Panel the quantization of the Quantizer module ID 7 is changed from penta tonic to 1 6 full range scale Complete instruments can be found in the folder instruments The patches miniams ams as well as phaser_ instrument ams are actually quite versatile These patches are supplied with a number of presets that can be called with MIDI program changes A few of the presets are defined with the Parameter View dialog available from View A systematic guide to the creation of custom patches is pro vided in the tutorial folder 19 11 2 AlsaModularSynth as an Effect Processor Especially in the JACK mode AlsaModularSynth can be used as a versatile effect processor One example for this is example capture ams lf you connect an external sound source to your sound card and use alsamixer to specify the correct settings for the capture the example will work even without JACK With the Ladspa Browser started with Module gt Show Ladspa Browser generate modules for LADSPA effects Plug ins should alw
458. system was found on the disk or if there is some other FAT file system select whether to delete or resize the partition Before doing so read Section 2 5 5 on page 25 If desired go to the Expert Partitioner dialog to create a custom partition setup at this point see Sectionp 5 5 on the following page Caution If you choose Use entire hard disk all data on that disk will be lost Caution l SUSE LINUX User Guide 21 22 Sf eg 9 Winstanor ge All hard disks automatically Preparing Hard Disk Step 1 detected on your system are shown here Selectthe hard disk on which to install SuSE Linux r Choose a hard disk 1 1 SCSI 1 96 GB Jdev sda QUANTUM FIREBALL_TM21105 You may select later which 2 2 SCSI 8 54 GB dev sdb IBM DNES 309170W part of the disk is used for SuSE Linux Custom partitioning for experts The custom partitioning option for experts allows full control over partitioning the hard disks and assigning partitions to mount points when installing SuSE Linux Abort Back f Next Figure 2 7 Selecting the Hard Disk YaST checks during the installation whether the disk space is sufficient for the software selection made If not YaST automatically removes parts from the software selection as needed The suggestion window then includes a notice to inform you about this As long as there is sufficient disk space available YaST simply accepts your settings
459. t The file name ends with war the extension for 1 Opening Web Pages web archives To view the saved web archive later simply click the respec tive file and the web page is displayed in Konqueror along with its images 12 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords Searching the web using Konqueror is very practical Konqueror defines a number of search engines for you all with a specific shortcut To search for a certain topic on the Internet enter the shortcut and the keyword sep arated by a colon The relevant page containing the search results is then displayed You can also define your own shortcuts Simply select Settings gt Con figure Konqueror gt Web Shortcuts A dialog appears in which to define your own abbreviations 12 4 Bookmarks If you frequently visit certain pages it can be useful to save them as book marks Use the Bookmark menu to save all important locations of web pages or directory links on your local hard disk To create a new bookmark in Konqueror click Bookmarks gt Add Book mark If you have already added some bookmarks also see them in this menu It is recommended to arrange your collection by subjects grouped hierarchically Create a new group for bookmarks with New Directory Open the bookmark editor by selecting Bookmarks gt Edit Bookmarks Use this program to organize rearrange add and delete bookmarks If you are using N
460. t copy the icon from the file manager by right clicking and selecting Copy then moving the mouse to the desired location on the desktop Right click again and select Paste The icon is now available on your desktop and can be moved around by dragging it with the left mouse button pressed Icons Rearranges the symbols on the desktop You can also change the order of the icons Windows The windows on the desktop are either placed on top of each other at the top left corner or next to each other Configure Desktop This menu item starts a configuration dialog with which to configure the appearance of the desktop Details about the configuration of the desktop are provided in Section 2 on page Help Use this submenu to open the KDE manual or write a bug report to the developers via the KDE web site You can also start an informa tion page about KDE Lock Screen If you leave your workstation and do not log out you should use this function to prevent others from gaining access to your files Depending on the setting the screen either turns black or a screensaver starts To continue using the computer enter your pass word Logout User Log out from your system if you are not going to use the system for some time 5 1 2 The Trash Bin The trash bin is a directory for files marked for deletion Drag icons from the file manager or the desktop to the trash bin icon by keeping the left mouse button pressed then release to drop them
461. t drag the art emblem to the file and drop the emblem on top of the file Emblems are removed by dropping the Eraser emblem over a file Notes Notes is useful for managing personal information about objects These notes are saved along with the object Nautilus tries to select appropriate icons for objects according to their as sociated file information Image and text files are shown as a thumbnail Double clicking shows the file in a viewer The left sidebar in its Informa tion view shows a list of applications with which the file can be opened The file cannot be processed directly with Nautilus Nautilus also manages bookmarks Access the Bookmarks menu to edit access or create your bookmarks 6 3 File Management with Nautilus 6 3 2 File Management Nautilus supports dragging and dropping for managing files To move files from one directory to another use New Window from the context menu or the File menu in Nautilus to open two windows Access the path of the original location of the objects in one window and access the destination path for those files in the second window To move the files drag the files from one window to the other and drop them there Copying files is a lit tle more complicated Right click the object to copy and select Duplicate Then move the copy to the new directory The context menu that appears when right clicking an object provides functions for renaming files and other tasks
462. t handed users should activate Left handed mouse to swap the right and left mouse buttons Use the slider to determine the max imum delay in seconds between two clicks that the system should inter pret as a double click The appearance and size of the cursor can be changed under the Cursor tab Four different settings are available Changes are not activated until the next login Under Locate Pointer activate an option that causes the cur sor to be highlighted when you press Ctr making it easier to find Under Movement set the Acceleration and Sensitivity of the screen cursor 6 2 3 Menus and Toolbars The settings in this module affect the menus and toolbars of all GNOME compatible applications Select for toolbar icons to be displayed as Text Only Icons Only Text Beside Icons or Text Below Icons The default setting is Text Only Activate Toolbars can be detached and moved around to allow the de tachment of the toolbar from all other window elements and allow its free positioning on the desktop This makes a grabbing area appear on the left side of the toolbar Clicking and holding this area relocates the toolbar Every menu entry in any application menu can be displayed with the cor responding icon Activating Show icons in menus tests the settings with the provided example menu 6 2 4 Screensaver The module for configuring the screensaver is subd
463. t queued To start the clock double click the re spective entry A dialog opens Select Advanced The dialog is expanded by the settings needed for starting the transfer at a certain time Enter the day month year and time Then close the window After making the desired settings for all your transfers set KGet back to the online mode by deactivating Options gt Offline Mode The transfers should start at the specified times Settings In Settings gt Configure KGet set preferences for the connection de termine directories for specific file extensions and specify other settings 5 4 3 SuSEWatcher SuSEWatcher is a program that is integrated in the system tray of the panel It checks for new updates and new hardware To be able to find any new updates it requires an online connection The program SuSEWatcher is located in the package kdebase3 SuSE The status of SuSEWatcher is displayed by means of colorful icons in the panel When you click the icon in the panel a window opens informing you about the status of your online updates and the availability of any new updates You can also launch the check manually by clicking Check for updates Start the online update by selecting Start online update and en tering the root password The YaST Online Update window is displayed 5 4 4 The Clipboard Klipper The KDE program Klipper serves as a clipboard for selected text normally marked b
464. t the end of the message based on the MIME type of the attachment Use and PgDn to scroll through the pages of the message or use CD and Q to scroll line by line The shortcuts are indicated after the respective menu items in the main menu Messages can be marked with different status flags Change the status with Message gt Highlight as The available flags are SUSE LINUX User Guide uouporddv PIN 305 SUL IIDIADI 261 New red dot header in red The message is new and has not yet been read Unread green dot header in blue A message changes its status from New to Unread after the folder containing it is reopened Read dash The message has been read Replied blue U shaped arrow The message has been answered Forwarded blue straight arrow The message has been forwarded to another e mail address Waiting envelope The message has been placed in the outbox to send later Sent slanted envelope The message has been read Important flag The message is important 16 6 Creating a New Message To compose new messages select Message New Message or press N Alternatively click the envelope and paper icon in the toolbar to start the mail editor Message Edit View Options Attach Tools Settings Help ex i j euo Y cb Y a 2 smime plugin z To Tuxine lt tuxine example com gt ce Subject Test mail
465. t view appears in the lower part of the window as shown in Figure 21 1 Drag the desired directories or individual files from your home directory to the project folder and drop them there Save the project under a name of your choice with File gt Save as Eile Project Plugins Tools Settings Help Br ERI 1 09 Oil sl TOSHIBA DV bin Home 3 Desktop o bin Mail d Desktop OpenOffice org 1 orbit tux mai EJ OpenOffice amp public html T Novell Fonts sxw Welcome txt o000 7 Filter All Files z RX j E3orbit tux R public_html 83 Root Welcome to K3b 0 11 5 The CD DVD Burning Facility T G L Y Da7 New Audio CD Project New Data CD Project New Data DVD Project UEM o Y Id Copy CD New eMovix CD Projet Burn DVD ISO Image Temp 28 5 GB 30 0 GB K3b 0 11 5 Figure 21 1 Creating a New Data CD Then select Burn from the toolbar A dialog with five tabs offering various options for writing the CD opens See Figure on page 21 2 Burning CDs The detected writer is displayed under Device in the burning dialog Set the burning speed in Burning Speed The following options are offered here 21 1 Creating a Data CD Mode This option determines how the laser writes a CD In the DAO disk at once mode the laser is not deactivated while the CD is writ ten This mode is recommended for the creation
466. tallation Settings w Perform Installation User Data Configuration w Root Password v Network w Online Update User Login Eull User Name Tux SUSE b Users geeko Suggestion Clean Up Password e Release Notes m Device Configuration Verify Password m I Receive System Mail Password Settings X Auto Login Details User Management fr Abort Back Next Figure 2 18 Entering the User Name and Password A user account can be created using the dialog shown in Figure 18 After entering the first name and last name specify the user name login If you cannot think of a suitable user name click Suggestion for the system to generate one automatically Finally enter a password for the user Reenter it for confirmation to ensure that you did not type something else by mistake The user name tells the system who a user is and the password is used to verify this identity 2 6 Finishing the Installation Caution Remember both your user name and the password because they are needed each time you log in to the system Caution J To provide effective security a password should be between five and eight characters long The maximum length for a password is 128 characters However if no special security modules are loaded only the first eight characters are used to discern the password Passwords are case sensitive Special characters like umlauts
467. tasks SUSE LINUX User Guide JOlldM ULM Je1nduuo2 pjeupunoH o BurziuoJu2Ag 215 216 9 2 2 Installing Programs on the Handheld The File Installer module is an interesting and useful tool for the installa tion of handheld programs These programs normally have the extension prc and they are ready to start immediately after uploading them to the handheld Before using such add on programs read their licenses as well as the instructions included 9 2 Working with KPilot Scheduling with KOrganizer KOrganizer is a KDE application for scheduling and managing events and tasks Because of the variety of ways in which the program can present your schedule it is a very helpful tool for keeping track of deadlines out standing tasks and appointments It can also remind you of birthdays and meetings if you enable this function 10 1 Starting KOrganizerl less 218 10 2 Configuring KOrganizer 218 10 3 Using the Calendar o 220 II used ek bw ew eee eae ee 222 10 5 Address Book 222 10 6 Help fsa eis ae we Rae de pe amp 223 JeziuoBJOM UM Guinpeuosg 218 10 1 Starting KOrganizer Start KOrganizer from the main menu or with korganizer The main window has several toolbars a menu bar the date navigator with a month view of the calendar the main part displaying the currently selected calen dar view and a list containing all the current to
468. tcuts to operate programs It takes time to learn but you can work up to four times as fast Often a combination of mouse and keyboard operation is recommended The ergonomic mouse feels good in your hand The keys should not be too close or too small There are even mice for children s hands a Your fingers should be able to rest on the keys in a relaxed position The mouse should be next to the keyboard Left handed users have an advantage because the keyboard has several function keys and the numerical key block between letter keys and a mouse on the right side These extend the gripping distance If you are left handed get a mouse for left handers The cable should be long enough If necessary purchase an extension A wireless mouse is a luxury The mouse needs a proper base to function well Get a good mouse pad 92DJ O 0MA SUI ui so luouo813 Pay attention to the mouse driver Good mice have mouse drivers with a multitude of functions You can for example adjust the cursor movement exactly according to your requirements or assign special instructions to the different mouse buttons The double click might be placed on the middle button with the mouse driver Make sure you adjust the acceleration and double click adjustment of the mouse to your own preferences Some people work with the mouse from the hand joint Others prefer moving their complete fore arm An alternative to the mouse is a trackball Here you move a
469. ted Expiration a dg Awe of Dew g Alo t P 13 05 2003 11 03 18 13 05 2003 pen 13 05 2003 11 033813 05 2003 1 2 S 13 05 2003 11 05 3913 05 2003 8 S 13 05 2003 11 05 47 13 05 2003 o iue ce EJ Subject Desktop Sharing VNC invitation You have been invited to a VNC session If you have the KDE d IO IH Connection installed just click on the link below vnc invitationtUe eQO 910 10 100 189 0 Otherwise you can use any VNC client with the following paramete AAA CON Column 1 Line 1 L IATA o AREA Defaults Figure 5 8 Desktop Sharing with Invitation by E Mail Use Delete All to revoke all invitations To delete an individual invita tion select it then click Delete If an invited person requests a connection KDE informs you about this re quest Decide to accept or deny the connection If you accept the connec tion also use the check box to release the keyboard and mouse control For security reasons the maximum duration for a connection is one hour 5 4 Important Utilities To change the default settings start the Control Center via Settings in the main menu In the left frame select Internet amp Network gt Desktop Shar ing Various configuration options are available in the lower part of the window However for security reasons you should not modify the
470. ted effectively against attacks For more information about the SUSE Firewall refer to the Admin istration Guide 4 8 System 4 8 1 Backup Copy of the System Areas The YaST backup module enables you to create a backup of your system The backup created by the module does not comprise the entire system SUSE LINUX User Guide 115 116 Ya CY Eo ge This tool aims to be an easy to use configuration Firewall Configuration Step 1 of 4 Basic Settings front end for the Linux packet filter engine The configuration items in the following menus are a collection of the most important ee Ge functions of the SuSEfirewall2 package Take a few moments to go througitallrrenus and select External Interface ethO eth1 eth2 is typically the options calefuli uo used for ethernet cards ippp0 for J ISDN and ppp0 for modem and ADSL External Interface connections Choose the interface connected Internal Interface Leave this empty if you do not to the Internet for which to have nn Meema network configure the firewall none Internal Interface Choose your internal network Warning Interact DSL with PPP over Ethernet uses ppp0 ppp ppp2 etc as the external It is possible to specify more interface Your ethernet interface is not the external interface in this external or internal interfaces by case entering their names separated by spaces for example ethO eth1 Abort I Net
471. ted view format For example if you select PAL frames as the view format and activate Snap To the segment boundaries will always be selected in multiples of frames The many editing tools are all equipped with tool tips and should therefore be quite easy to use The Undo History function which can be accessed with View gt History is a useful feature for viewing recent editing steps and undoing them by clicking the respective item in the list Use Discard with caution because it deletes editing steps from the list Subsequently these steps can no longer be undone The built in spectrum analyzer assists in quickly tracking down any noises View the spectrum of the selected segment with View gt Plot Spectrum Select a logarithmic frequency scale in octaves with Log frequency If you move the mouse pointer within the spectrum the frequencies of the peaks are automatically displayed together with the respective notes Unwanted frequencies are best removed with Effect gt FFT Filter In con nection with the filtering process it may be necessary to readjust the signal amplitude with Amplify Additionally Amplify can be used to check the amplitude By default the New Peak Amplitude is set to 0 0 dB This value represents the highest possible amplitude in the selected audio for mat Amplification shows the value needed to amplify the selected seg ment to this peak amplit
472. teria such as Live Stereo or Subtitle Start the application via the SUSE gt Multimedia gt Video menu or at the command line with nxtvepg 20 4 1 Importing the EPG Database To set up and update the program database via the EPG signal set the tuner of your TV card to a station that broadcasts EPG This can be done using a TV application such as motv or nxtvepg Only one application at a time can access the tuner If you set an EPG broadcaster in motv nxtvepg immediately begins im porting the current list of TV programs The progress will be displayed Control Configure Fiter Navigate Heip 7 Tte Netvok Fri 09 50 30 ESI 3 Fea A Tune TV Parental Rating Sound PG CER Editorial Rating Format r Digital _ Buide for Your PC d Themes eux Series em e Add filter shortcut aduit Update filter shortcut Reset Acquisition is waiting for reception forced passive Figure 20 2 The Electronic TV Magazine nxtvepg SUSE LINUX User Guide UJO2Q9M PUD OPD O9pIlA AL 335 336 If you have not started a TV application let nxtvepg search for EPG broad casters To do this use Configure gt Provider scan Use xatv is acti vated by default This indicates that nxtvepg is accessing the broadcasters saved in this file Note If there are problems check to see if the proper video source has been
473. ters for example Electromagnetic radiation emitting from the screen should be kept to a minimum 26 2 2 Screen Location A screen put in the wrong place leads to a cramped posture at work which can cause illnesses A work table that has insufficient depth often prevents the screen from being placed reasonably The natural position of the head and arms is designed for work that lies in front of the body Ergonomics specialists have developed their own guidelines for the vision and gripping area These reject placing the screen to the side An excep tion is only when the screen is rarely used A reason for this placement is the fact that even the required minimum 80 cm worktable depth is insuf ficient with a large screen and the use of working documents Often the screen is placed as shown in many PC manual pictures on top of the computer case This also leads to an unnatural posture Observe yourself while you are reading Are you looking straight ahead or slightly down Shoulder keyboard and screen should be in one line so you always look directly at the screen This rule does not necessarily need to be observed all the time Ultimately the workstation should be individually adapted to the person and the working task Flexibility is the key Easily movable rotatable and ideally screens that retract into the table are encour aged A comfortable visual distance varies individually At least 50 cm is required Som
474. th a POP3 client in this case KMail This method is used frequently by Internet Service Providers ISPs IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol With IMAP e mail messages can be received and administered on 16 1 KMail and Kontact the server without downloading them to the hard disk This is often used in internal networks as it allows access to mail from different computers 16 4 Configuring KMail When KMail is started for the first time a Mail folder is added to your home directory This folder contains some basic mail directories inbox outbox drafts sent and trash Go to Settings gt Configure KMail to enter the information needed for sending and receiving messages All con figuration options can be accessed under Configure KMail wrench icon 16 4 1 Defining Your User Identity You can manage several e mail addresses e g your private e mail address and your business address with KMail Select from the defined identities when writing e mail To create a new identity profile select New and enter a name for the profile such as Private or Office Click OK to proceed to a dialog in which to enter some additional infor mation Under General enter your name organization and e mail ad dress Under Advanced enter your OpenPGP key specify a default BCC field or reply to address and determine the folder in which your messages should be stored Under Signature d
475. the first CD ROM orthe P rescue floppy 3 Standard boot floppy 1 Rescue Floppy Standard boot floppy 2 Q To start the rescue system CEINE y boot from the boot floppy or Ji h the SuSE CD ROM and select Rescue Floppy O O kernel modules on demand Because the space on one single floppy is not sufficient t Cancel dH for all kernel modules consider Figure 4 29 Creating a Boot Rescue or Module Disk This floppy disk contains the USB modules you might need if USB drives are connected IDE RAID and SCSI modules As the standard kernel only supports normal IDE drives you will need this module disk if you use special IDE controllers Furthermore all RAID and SCSI modules are provided on this disk Network modules If you need access to a network load the suitable driver module for your network card from this floppy disk a PCMCIA CD ROM non ATAP FireWire and file systems This floppy disk contains all PCMCIA modules used especially for laptop computers Furthermore the modules for FireWire and some less common file systems are available here Older CD ROM drives that do not comply with the ATAPI standard can also be operated with drivers from this floppy disk To load drivers from a module disk to the rescue system select Ker nel Modules hardware drivers and the desired module category SCSI ethernet etc You will be prompted to insert the respective SUSE LINUX User Guid
476. the following screen Subsequently the new user can log in to the host with the login name and password The user profile can be fine tuned with Details You can manually set the user ID the home directory and the default login shell Furthermore the new user can be as signed to specific groups Configure the validity of the password in Pass word settings Click Edit to change these settings whenever necessary To delete a user select the user from the list and click Delete UOHDINBYUODO SKA For advanced network administration use Expert Options to define the default settings for the creation of new users Select the authentication method NIS LDAP Kerberos or Samba as well as the algorithm for the password encryption These settings are relevant for large corporate net works 4 7 2 Group Administration Start the group administration module from the YaST Control Center or click Groups in the user administration Both dialogs have the same func tionality allowing you to create edit or delete groups YaST provides a list of all groups To delete a group select it from the list the line will be highlighted dark blue and click Delete Under Add and Edit enter the name group ID gid and members of the group in the respective YaST screen If desired set a password for the change to this group The filter settings are the same as in the User Administration dia log 4 7 3 Security Sett
477. the home directories of the example users xyz linux and tux The directory tree of a Linux system has a functional structure that follows the File System Standard The following list provides a brief description of the standard directories in Linux Cin bor AE lib Gin Fost 9p pre mane ung esr wae ox kde ida da 507 yx9 Linux tux X11R6 bin etc ib local sbin share Gin Cai Be Figure 25 1 Excerpt from a Standard Directory Tree root directory starting point of the directory tree home private directories of users dev device files that represent hardware components etc important files for system configuration SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ut BUMOM 379 etc init d bootscripts usr bin generally accessible programs bin programs needed early in the boot process usr sbin programs reserved for the system administrator sbin programs reserved for the system administrator and needed for booting usr include header files for the C compiler usr include g header files for the C compiler usr share doc various documentation files usr share man system manual pages man pages usr src source code of system software usr src linux kernelsource code tmp var tmp temporary files usr all application programs var configuration files e g those linked from usr var log system log files var adm system administration data lib shared libraries for dy
478. the most important commands The chapter closes with a description of the vi text editor 25 1 Introduction to Bash 378 25 2 Users and Access Permissions 387 25 3 Important Linux Commands 393 25 4 The vi Editor 401 IOUS eut ut BUMLOM 378 Text based applications are especially important for controlling older Linux computers that do not have the resources for demanding display sys tems Virtual consoles are used in this case Six of them are available in text mode Press FD through F6 The seventh console is reserved for X 25 Introduction to Bash In the KDE taskbar there is an icon depicting a monitor with a seashell When you click this icon a console window opens in which to enter com mands The console normally runs Bash Bourne again shell a program developed as part of the GNU project It is by far the most widely used derivative of the Bourne shell sh Once you have opened the shell see the prompt on the first line The prompt usually consists of the user name host name and current path but it can be customized When the cursor is behind this prompt you can send commands directly to your computer system tux gt 25 1 1 Commands A command consists of several elements The first element is always the actual command followed by parameters or options Commands are exe cuted when you press Enter Before doing so easily
479. the use of the keyboard for users with motion impairments The module consists of the three tabs Basic Filters and Mouse Before modifying settings activate Enable keyboard accessi bility features Features The keyboard accessibility functions can be deactivated auto matically after a certain time Set an appropriate time limit measured in seconds with the slider The system can additionally provide audi ble feedback when the keyboard accessibility functions are activated and deactivated SUSE LINUX User Guide doptsed 3INON9 SUL 175 176 Enable Sticky Keys Some keyboard shortcuts require that one key is kept pressed constantly this applies to A or Shift while the rest of the shortcut is typed When sticky keys are used the system re gards those keys as pressed after being hit once For an audible feed back generated each time a modifier key Ctrl or Alp is pressed ac tivate Beep when modifier is pressed If Disable if two keys pressed together is selected the keys do not stick anymore once two keys are pressed simultaneously The system then assumes that the keyboard shortcut has been completely entered Repeat Keys Activate Repeat Keys to make settings with sliders for De lay and Speed This determines how long a key must be pressed for the automatic keyboard repeat function to be activated and at what speed the characters are then typed Test the effect of
480. there Alternatively right click an icon and select Move to Trash from the menu Click the trash bin icon to view its contents You can retrieve an item from the trash if desired SUSE LINUX User Guide doptseq JG eut 135 136 Files removed with Delete are not moved to the trash bin but deleted completely To delete the files in the trash bin completely right click the trash bin icon and select Empty Trash Bin 5 1 3 CD ROM DVD ROM and Floppy Disks If you click the floppy disk icon when a floppy disk is inserted the file manager starts and displays the content of the floppy disk Display a con text menu with various options by right clicking the individual icons on the floppy disk It is also possible to move the icon to a different location such as the desktop or your home directory by simply keeping the left mouse button pressed and dragging it to the appropriate icon You will be asked whether you want to move or copy the file or create a link You can also copy or move files from your home directory to the floppy disk Right click the floppy disk icon to access the context menu Unmount is a very important option Be sure to unmount the drive before removing a floppy disk from the drive as this is necessary to trigger the actual writing of the data to the floppy disk The handling of CDs and DVDs is similar with the only difference that these media are not writable Nevertheless you must unmount CD an
481. these settings unchanged However if you need a custom setup modify the proposal for your system One possibility is to configure the boot mechanism to rely on a special boot floppy Although this has the disadvantage of requiring the boot floppy in the drive for boot it allows you to leave an existing boot mechanism un touched This should not normally be necessary however because YaST can configure the boot loader to boot existing operating systems as well Another possibility with the configuration is to change the location of the boot mechanism on the hard disk To change the boot configuration proposed by YaST select Booting to open a dialog in which to change many details of the boot mechanism For information read Section on page 120 Note The boot method should only be changed by experienced computer users Note 2 5 Installation Suggestion 2 5 8 Time Zone In this dialog shown in Figurel2 12 choose between Local Time and UTC under Hardware clock set to The selection depends on how the hardware BIOS clock is set on your machine If it is set to GMT which corresponds to UTC your system can rely on SUSE LINUX to switch from standard time to daylight savings time and vice versa Sf eam Winseatter e Selectthe appropriate time Clock and Time Zone Configuration zone Choose the country or region where you are located Region Time Zone Specity whether the hardware Europe Alaska
482. thin double line right above the frame Any frame except the main window can be placed within any other frame aligned to the left right top bottom or centered Centered windows have the same size are stacked and can be brought to the foreground with tabs The Image Viewer and the Scan Preview frames share a window by default Tabs allow switching between them The left frame provides the gallery This is a small file browser for accessing the scanned images The frame to the lower right is shared by the OCR optical character recogni tion and the thumbnails which can be loaded into the image viewer with a simple click of the mouse See Figure 23 1Jon the next page Selecting Show Scan Parameters in the Tool Views subentry of the Set tings menu creates a third tab labeled Scan Parameter next to the already existing Image Viewer and Scan Preview tabs in the main window This is where the actual scanning parameters are set 23 2 The Preview A preview should always be created when the object to scan is smaller than the total scanning area Set a few parameters to the left of the preview frame Select the scanning size with Custom or one of the standard for mats See Figure 23 2 on page 354 The Custom setting is the most flexible because it allows selection of the desired area with the mouse Once the set tings have been made request the preview of the image to scan by clicking Preview
483. ting new window Alternatively double click the personal folder The standard window is shown in Figurel6 IJon the next page Use the icons in the toolbar to move forward and backward to move one level up in the directory tree to stop loading a document to reload the document or to go to the preferred starting page Location shows the path to the cur rent directory or to the current file A different path can be directly entered here SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 177 178 Elle Edit View Go Bookmarks Help tO RQ Back Forward Up Stop Reload Home m Location nomegeeko 02 View as Icons La um a a Desktop Documents nsmail public html 6 items 1 item 0 items 0 items Ms y hvaes jpg proofed tar gz sample txt suse gnome theme E 1096K 448K 13 bytes 0 2 184 rpm A 48 7K titlebar sh 334 bytes Figure 6 1 Nautilus Showing a Home Directory The left sidebar contains the current object and some information about it A drop down menu is located right above the sidebar and is set by de fault to Information It is however possible to switch this to other display modes Tree The Tree view shows the complete directory tree of the system History The History view lists objects that have been accessed previ ously Emblems The Emblems view presents all available emblems These are used for marking files for instance as art To mark a file as ar
484. ting should not flicker In the case of worn out fluorescent lamps a flickering can sometimes be noticed from the corner of the eye Avoid dark shadows Ceiling lights should emit light diagonally from above Lighting strips should be set perpendicular to the screen table The line of sight at the screen table should run parallel to the lighting strips 26 1 The Working Environment Whether the lighting is considered to be pleasant depends on the color temperature and light color of the lamp type Warm white or neutral white is recommended The light requirement depends not only on the working task but also on age older people need more light The fact that older people often have only a small lamp in their homes has nothing to do with their light requirement but rather with the fact that they want to save elec tricity A screen workstation near daylight requires optimum shielding against direct and reflex glare especially when the line of sight is directly out the window or at a 45 degree angle to it The built in antiglare facilities should be variable Under no circumstances should artificial illumination cause reflex glare on the screen 26 1 4 Optimum Climate 92DJ O 10MA SUI ui SOILIOUOBIJ The room climate determines our well being to a great extent Problems arise more often if it is too cold too warm too drafty or too dry Low rela tive humidity can lead to burning eyes dry mucous membranes skin irri tations a
485. tion is displayed 17 3 3 Calendar The initial display shows a day view of the current day with the month and a task list shown in an additional pane to the right Week work week and month views are also available from the toolbar or the View menu Use the search bar to find an entered appointment Add appointments and tasks using the buttons in the toolbar Also use the toolbar to page through the calendar or jump to a specific date 17 3 4 Tasks Tasks provides a list of tasks Use the toolbar to add tasks Search the tasks with the search bar 17 3 5 Contacts This view shows all the addresses in your address book To locate a partic ular address use the search bar or click the button to the right displaying the first letter of the contact s last name Add contacts or lists with the tool bar 17 3 Evolution Overview 17 4 E Mail To configure the mail settings in Evolution go to Shortcuts gt Inbox Then activate Tools gt Settings 17 4 1 Configuring Accounts Evolution is capable of fetching e mail from multiple mail accounts The account from which to send e mail can be selected when composing a mes sage To edit a current account select the account in Settings gt Mail Ac counts and click Edit To add a new account click Add The configu ration assistant described in Section 17 1 on pageD74 opens To delete an account select it and click Delete
486. tion status in the first column of the list Click Activate or Deactivate to activate or deactivate individual installation sources During the installa tion of software packages or updates YaST selects the suitable installation source from the range of activated installation sources When you exit the module with Close the current settings are saved and applied to the con figuration modules Install and Remove Software and System Update Vea S instale e Software packages canbe f Software Source Media installed from the CD over a network or from the hard disk Status Name URL To install packages from CD havethe amp product CD set or the DVD available On I device 0000 00 06 0 0 6 0 The amp product CDs can be copied to the hard disk Then use that as the installation source Insert the path name where the first CD is located for example datal CD1 Only the base path is required if all CDs are copied into one directory Network installation requires a working network connection Configure YaST2 s Network Base module first if Add hd L Up j required Specify the directory where the packages from the Edit M l Down J first CD are located such as datal CD1 Only the base Delete l Enabje or Disable J path is required if packages are not divided for H Abort examnle u rfulli3RS The 9 Figure 4 2 Change Installation Source 4 3 2 YaST
487. tions The progress of the procedure is displayed at the bottom of the screen with two progress bars The upper bar shows the progress of the currently running test The lower bar shows the overall progress of the analysis process The log window above allows tracking of the currently running activity and its test result See FigureB 2 on the following page The following main test runs are performed with every run They contain in turn a number of individual subtests Partition tables of all hard disks The validity and coherence of the parti tion tables of all detected hard disks are checked Swap partitions The swap partitions of the installed system are detected tested and offered for activation where applicable The offer should be accepted for the sake of a higher system repair speed File systems All detected file systems are subjected to a file system specific check Entries in the file etc fstab The entries in the file are checked for completeness and consistence All valid partitions are mounted Boot loader configuration The boot loader configuration of the installed system GRUB or LILO is checked for completeness and coherence Boot and root devices are examined and the availability of the initrd modules is checked Package database This checks whether all packages necessary for the op eration of a minimal installation are present While itis optionally possible to also analyze the base packages this takes a long time be
488. to exit the program grep option s searchstring filenames The grep command finds a specific search string in the specified file s If the search string is found the command displays the line in which the searchstring was found along with the file name i Ignores case 1 Only displays the names of the respective files but not the text lines n Additionally displays the numbers of the lines in which it found a hit 1 Only lists the files in which searchst ring does not occur diff option s filelfile2 The diff command compares the contents of any two files The output produced by the program lists all lines that do not match This is frequently used by programmers who need only send their program alterations and not the entire source code q Only reports whether the two files differ File Systems mount option s device mountpoint This command can be used to mount any data media such as hard disks CD ROM drives and other drives to a directory of the Linux file system r mount read only t filesystem Specifies the file system The most common are ext 2 for Linux hard disks msdos for MS DOS media vfat for the Windows file system and iso9660 for CDs SUSE LINUX User Guide IOUS eut ULM BUOM 397 398 For hard disks not defined in the file etc fstab the device type must also be specified In this case only root can mount it If the file system should also be mounted by other users enter the
489. to append the output of a command to an already existing file the command must be followed by instead of a single gt 25 1 8 Archives and Data Compression Now that you have already created a number of files and directories con sider the subject of archives and data compression Suppose you want to have the entire test directory packed in one file that you can save ona floppy disk as a backup copy or send by e mail To do so use the command tar for tape archiver With tar help view all the options for the tar command The most important of these options are explained here IOUS eut ULM BUOM C for create Create a new archive t for table Display the contents of an archive X for extract Unpack the archive v for verbose Show all files on screen while creating the archive f for file Choose a file name for the archive file When creating an archive this option must always be given as the last one To pack the test directory with all its files and subdirectories into an archive named testarchive tar use the options c and f For the testing purposes of this example also add v to follow the progress of the archiving although this option is not mandatory After using cd to change to your home directory where the test directory is located enter tar cvf testarchive tar test After that view the contents of the archive file with tar tf testarchive tar The test directory with all its files and directories
490. tomatic is only advisable if you have a flat rate for Internet access With manual the com puter only establishes a connection to the Internet when you want it to do so Background processes such as fetching e mail in regular intervals fre quently establish connections to the Internet which can be expensive To connect to the Internet you can use the KDE program KInternet described in Section on page 154 4 5 2 Network Card When the YaST module is started an overview of the network configura tion is displayed The upper part of the dialog lists all network cards that were automatically detected or manually configured If your card was de tected correctly when the system was booted the name of the card appears here Devices that were not recognized are listed as Other not detected The lower part of the screen lists configured devices including the network type and the address You can configure new network cards or modify the configuration of a configured device 4 5 Network Devices Manual Configuration of the Network Card Make the following basic settings to configure a network card that was not recognized Network Interface Specify the network type and the device number Support for Wireless Connections If you are located in a wireless LAN and your network card supports this connection type use Wireless Device to access the Wireless Settings dialog in which to configure the operating mode network name
491. tual desktops should be displayed in the taskbar and which actions should be associated with mouse clicks in the taskbar Under Panels set the position and size of the panels and configure their hiding mode You can also place additional menus in the panel If the stan dard number of virtual desktops is not sufficient set up additional virtual desktops under Multiple Desktops and assign them names 5 2 3 Sound Multimedia Here perform all settings for the playback of audio CDs and for the sound system Under System Bell switch from system notification to a system bell and specify the volume pitch and duration of the bell By default system notifications are used Use this module to determine how the system should inform you in the event of a problem when a task is performed or if an event requiring your immediate attention occurs In the upper part of the dialog select the application for which to configure the system notifications As soon as you select a program all events the application can send to the user are listed in the lower window Determine the notification type for each notification in the Actions dialog The standard view of the system notification dialog only offers the acti vation of a Play a sound check box for audible notification Click More Options to access other action modes You can log the notification to a file execute a program or show the message in a pop up window
492. twork A popular digital standard for high speed data transferral over the telephone network KDE K Desktop Environment User friendly graphical desktop environment for Linux kernel The kernel is the central core of the Linux operating system It man ages memory contains the drivers that enable communication with the hardware and handles processes and tasks Applications run on top of the kernel LAN local area network A LAN is a local spietwork and is usually rather small LILO Linux Loader Small program installed in the boot sector of the hard disk that not only can start Linux but other operating systems as well link A link is a pointer to a file just as widely used in the Internet as in the Linux file system In Linux there is a distinction made between hard and symbolic links While hard links refer to the exact position in the file system the symbolic link only points to the respective name Glossary Linux High performance UNIX like operating system core distributed freely under the GPL sGNU The name is an acronym Linus uniX and refers to its creator LINUS TORVALDS Although the name in a strict sense only refers to the kernel itself the popular understanding of the term Linux usually entails the entire system login Authentication of a user by user name and password to gain access to a computer system or network logout The procedure of closing down an interactive Linux session and get ting back
493. u can use Delete Outdated Packages to remove packages that do not exist in the new version By default this option is preselected to prevent outdated packages from unnecessarily occupying hard disk space Packages Click Packages to start the package manager and select or deselect indi vidual packages for update Any package conflicts should be resolved with the consistency check The use of the package manager is covered in detail in Section on page 59 4 3 Software Ya S YVinscalor ots The update option differs between two modes In either case itis recommended to make a backup of your personal data With New Software This default setting updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of the new SuSE Linux version The selection is based on the former predefined software selection Only Installed Packages This selection only updates the packages already installed on your system Note New software in the predefined software selection such as new YaST modules is not available after the update You might miss advertised features After the update some software Update Options Update from error to SuSE Linux 9 0 42 Update Mode Update with Installation of New Software and Features Based on the Selection Only Update Installed Packages C Delete Unmaintained Packages You have already chosen software from Detailed selection You will lose that sele
494. ude A negative value indicates overamplification 19 6 3 Saving and Exporting To save the entire project select File gt Save Project or Save Project As This generates an XML file with the extension aup which describes 19 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity Cursor 587 Hz D4 10dB Peak 623 Hz D 4 Spectrum FI 1024 FT Export Hanning window zi Log frequency FT Close Figure 19 11 The Spectrum the project The actual audio data is saved in a directory named after the project with _data appended The entire project or the currently selected segment can also be exported as a stereo WAV file To export the project in MP3 format refer to the informa tion in Section on the next page 19 7 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files arecord and aplay from the kalsatools package provide a simple and flexible interface to the PCM devices arecord and aplay can be used to record and play audio data in the WAV format among other formats The command arecord d 10 f cd t wav mysong wav records a WAV file of ten seconds in CD quality 16 bit 44 1 kHz List all options of arecord and aplay by running them with the he1p option gqaRecord is a simple recording program with a graphical interface and level display As this program makes use of an internal buffer of about 1 SUSE LINUX User Guide xnu ui PUNOS 313 314 MB configurable with buffersize it enables uninter
495. uide _______ 161 162 the main menu and select Desktop Sharing in the Internet amp Network module Click Create amp manage invitations and choose between Create Personal Invitation and Invite via Email If you click Create Personal Invita tion an invitation indicating the IP address of the host password and expiry of the invitation is generated Send this data manually to the respec tive person If you click Invite via Email all required data is transmitted by e mail KMail starts automatically and generates an e mail message with the needed data host password and expiry At the end of the e mail a link which the recipient of the message merely needs to click to view your desktop in a browser is provided Simply enter the e mail address of the recipient and modify the standard text if necessary Then send the mes sage Refer to Figure 5 8 Ea Eile View Help Access Network Invitations Open invitations 4 Index Search Help r Appearance amp Themes Desktop Internet amp Network 43 Email File Sharing V Local Network Brows 4 Preferences h3 Proxy L Create amp Manage Invitations j Uninvited Connections iL Allow uninvited connections SES fi Desktop Sharing VNC invitation KMail gt Manage Invitations De Message Edit View Options Attach Tools Settings Help 8 Pl crea
496. ur public key to one of these server Similarly KGpg enables you to search one of these servers for the keys of certain people and import their public keys from the server 15 2 1 Importing a Key from a Key Server By means of the Import tab in the key server dialog import public keys from one of the Internet based key servers Use the drop down menu to se lect one of the preconfigured key servers and enter a search string e mail address of the communication partner or the ID of the key to find When you click Search your system connects to the Internet and searches the specified key server for a key that matches your specifications Refer to Fig ure 15 3 Import Export Key Servers Key server hkp pgp mit edu Text to search or ID of the key to import Close Figure 15 3 Search Screen for Importing a Key If your search on the key server is successful a list of all retrieved server entries is displayed in a new window Select the key to include in your key ring and click Import See Figure 15 4 on the following page Confirm the following message with OK then exit the key server dialog with Close SUSE LINUX User Guide 6d2 um uodo 253 254 The imported key then appears in the main overview of the key manager and is ready for use Found 1 matching keys w Friendly Fred lt fred example org gt Key to import BCO2F4FE ul F d Figure 15 4 Hits
497. ure 15 5 Exporting a Key to a Key Server 15 3 The Applet On start up KGpg is available as an applet in the panel Click the padlock icon with the left or middle mouse button to open a menu with all available functions Apart from the options introduced above Open key manager Key server dialog find the options Encrypt clipboard and Decrypt clip board as well as the option for opening the integrated editor Right click to open a menu for configuring and closing KGpg 15 3 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard Files copied to the clipboard can easily be encrypted with a few clicks Open the function overview by clicking the KGpg icon Select Encrypt clipboard and designate the key to use A status message about the en cryption procedure is displayed on the desktop The encrypted contents can now be processed from the clipboard as needed The decryption of clip board contents is just as easy Simply open the function overview select Decrypt clipboard and enter the password associated with your secret key The decrypted version is now available for processing in the clipboard and in the KGpg editor SUSE LINUX User Guide 6d2 um uodo 255 256 15 3 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping To encrypt or decrypt files click the icons on the desktop or in the file man ager drag them to the padlock in the panel and drop them there If the file is not encrypted KGpg ask
498. vailable for YaST However the Alf key combinations and the F keys should always be fully available on a pure text console The following paragraphs assume that the key combinations are func tional 4 10 3 Module Operation Navigating Buttons and Selection Lists Tab and Aif Tab navigate among buttons and frames Navigating in Selection Lists 1 and always navigate among the sin gle items within an activated frame containing a selection list These can for instance be the single modules of a module group in the con trol center 4 10 YaST2 in Text Mode ncurses Checking Radio Buttons and Check Boxes Buttons with empty square brackets check boxes or empty paren theses radio buttons can be selected with or Enter The buttons at the bottom of the individual modules are activated with when selected green rec or with the combination yellow letter Refer to Figure The Function Keys Various functions are mapped to the F keys FD to F12 Which keys are actually mapped to functions depends on which YaST module is active because the different modules offer dif ferent buttons such as details info add and delete The buttons OK Next and Finish are mapped to F10 The YaST help which can be accessed with FT provides information about the functions of the individual F keys Figure 4 33 The Software Installation Module 4 10 4 Starting Individual Modules To save time th
499. view below the search options To integrate the retrieved entries in your address book click the respective buttons You can also send an e mail message to all addresses found 11 3 Searching Address Data r Search for Addresses in Directory Search for Xj Recursive search in Name f Search lc Full Name Email Phone Number Mobile Number Fax Number Company Orge eim l Add Selected JI Mail to Selected JI Select All JI Unselect All Close j 4 Figure 11 4 Searching an LDAP Directory 11 4 Importing and Exporting Address Data File gt Import adds a contact present in another file or location Export exports a contact in a certain format It is for example possible to transfer the addresses onto a mobile phone or to create a VCard and send it via e mail SUSE LINUX User Guide xoogsseJpp vy ULIM JUSUIBDUDIA SSSIPPY 229 Part IV Internet The Web Browser Konqueror Konqueror is not only a versatile file manager It is also a modern web browser If you start the browser with the icon in the panel Konqueror opens with the web browser profile lesa dee eu M S 234 inves 234 12 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords 235 12 4 Bookmarks oo 235 12 5 Java and JavaScript o o o o o oo ooo 236 JOJONDOUOY JOSMOIG q M SUL 234 12 1 Opening Web Pages Simply enter a web address in the URL line for exa
500. vironment as well as from virtual consoles console Formerly synonymous with In Linux there are several vir tual consoles that allos the screen to be used for several independent parallel work sessions Glossary CPU Central Processing Unit cursor The cursor is normally a block character that marks the place for in put on a computer screen This term also often refers to the symbol representing the location of the mouse in graphical interfaces daemon A daemon disk and execution monitor is a program that monitors in the background and comes into action when required Daemons answer FTP or HTTP requests for example or control activity in the PCMCIA slots DDC Direct Display Channel Communication standard between the monitor and the graphics card which transmits various parameters such as monitor name or resolution to the graphics card directory Directories make up the structure of a jfile system A directory lists file and directory names DNS Domain Name System A system that converts name based addresses to s TCP IP addresses and vice versa driver A program between the operating system and the hardware that translates the communication between these two layers e mail electronic mail The means of transporting mail electronically between registered users via a network As with normal mail often referred to as snail mail the address must be entered In e mail it is in the form sender sender s
501. w click any of its handles keep the button pressed and drag the handle until the dashed frame reaches the desired size When you release the button the image is scaled according to your changes To change the position of an image while leaving its size unchanged click the image and keep the mouse but ton pressed Drag the image to the desired position 7 7 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc Calc is the spreadsheet module of OpenOffice org Use this application for example to handle your private or business accounting data If Writer is already running start Calc by selecting File gt New gt Spreadsheet After starting Calc presents an empty spreadsheet divided into rows and columns Rows are numbered from top to bottom and columns are lettered from left to right The intersection of a row and a column marks the loca tion of a cell so each cell has a unique address coordinate For instance the address B3 refers to the cell located in the second column 8 and the third row This address is also shown at the top to the left of the entry field A cell may be active or inactive The currently active cell has a thick black frame around it To activate another cell move the frame with the cursor keys or click another cell with the mouse You can edit a cell if it is cur rently active 7 7 1 Changing Cell Attributes To enter something in a cell simply write in that cell By default texts are aligned to th
502. wn passwords at any time using this com mand The administrator root can use the command to change the password of any user on the system su option s username The su command makes it possible to log in under a different user name from a running session When using the command without specifying a user name you will be prompted for the root password Specify a user name and the cor responding password to use the environment of the respective user The password is not required from root as root is authorized to assume the identity of any user halt option s To avoid loss of data you should always use this program to shut down your system 25 3 Important Linux Commands reboot option s Does the same as halt except the system per forms an immediate reboot clear This command cleans up the visible area of the console It has no options 25 4 The vi Editor Operating the vi editor takes some practice For many it is the preferred editor partly because it is available on any UNIX like operating system and is included in default Linux installations Also if nothing else works vi will The short instructions that follow should enable you to edit various configuration files and other types of files with vi vi provides three operating modes In command mode keys are inter preted as command elements Insert mode interprets all keys as text entries Last line mode is used for more complex commands which are entered in t
503. ww thekompany com projects gphoto Information about Kamera a KDE front end for gPhoto2 a http www stud uni karlsruhe de urc8 GnoCam Infor mation about GnoCam xnur pub spJeuupo OLIBIG SUSE LINUX User Guide 349 Create Dir Delete File Rename File home geeko _4J Directories y af Desktop Documents public_html What to save Save photos Save audio data _ Save thumbnails Open image s with F Use filenames provided by the camera Filename prefix Selection home geeko AA OK Cancel Figure 22 2 Saving Images 350 ___ 22 6 For More Information Kooka A Scanning Application Kooka is a KDE application for scanning This chapter explains the user interface and the functionality of the application Le eh ye a ios d 352 O a Oe 352 C ee aaa 352 23 4 TheMenus 0 0000 eee ene 353 23 5 TheGallery i s s soits oom eee a oo 355 23 6 Optical Character Recognition 356 uouooigddy Guiuuposg v D 00X 352 23 1 The Kooka Window Start Kooka from the main menu or enter the command kooka When started Kooka opens a three frame window with a menu bar to the upper left and a toolbar directly below it All windows can be freely readjusted or rearranged with the mouse It is also possible to completely detach sin gle frames from the Kooka window for deliberate placement on the desk top To move the frames click and drag the
504. xt for the respective topic explaining the required entries After making the needed settings complete the procedure by pressing Finish in the last configuration dialog The configuration is then saved GED Control Center eme n Supe Ey Change Source of E Install and Remove Installation Software Hardware ME installation into Directory Online Update ma System Fr Network Devices T 2 4 Patch CD Update e System Update e Network Services E Security and Users Help Search Close Figure 4 1 The YaST Control Center 4 3 Software 4 3 1 Change Installation Source The installation source is the medium containing the software to install YaST can administer a number of different installation sources It enables their selection for installation or update purposes When this module is started a list displaying all previously registered sources is displayed Following a normal installation from CD only the installation CD is listed Click Add to include additional sources in this list You can add removable media such as CDs and DVDs and network servers such as NFS and FTP Even directories on the local hard disk can be selected as the installation medium See the detailed YaST help text SUSE LINUX User Guide UOILOINBWUOD ISOA 55 56 During the installation or update YaST can take multiple installation sources into consideration Therefore all registered sources have an acti va
505. y default because the CD is often forgotten in the drive Select In stallation with the arrow keys This will load YaST and start the installa tion The boot screen provides several options for starting from the CD The op tions and the actions triggered by them are Boot from Hard Disk Boots the system installed on the hard disk the system normally booted when the machine is started This op tion is preselected Installation The normal installation mode All modern hardware functions are enabled Installation ACPI Disabled If the normal installation fails this may be due to lacking ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power In terface support of the system hardware In this case use this option to perform the installation without ACPI support Installation Safe Settings The DMA mode for CD ROM drives and any critical power management functions are disabled Experts can also use the command line to enter or change kernel parameters SUSE LINUX User Guide _______ 13 14 Boot from Hard Disk In ati Boot Options Lo BEEN 3 3 F1 Help F2 1024 x 768 F3 CD ROM F4 English F5 Silent F6 Driver Update Figure 2 1 The Boot Screen a Manual Installation If the automatic loading of drivers causes prob lems with the installation you can perform the installation manually In a manual installation drivers are not loaded automatically How ever this will not work if you use a USB keyboard on y
506. y keeping the left mouse button pressed This text can be trans ferred to another application by moving the mouse pointer to the target location then pressing the middle mouse button on a two button mouse press both buttons simultaneously The text is copied to the selected loca tion from the clipboard By default Klipper is started when KDE is loaded and appears as a clip board icon in the panel View the contents of the clipboard by clicking this 5 4 Important Utilities icon The Klipper context menu and the last seven entries also referred to as the history are displayed see Figure 4 If an extensive text was copied to Klipper only the first line of the text is displayed The most recent entry is listed on top and is marked as active with a black check mark To copy an older text fragment from Klipper to an application select it by clicking it move the mouse pointer to the target application and then middle click kprinter README txt kprinter doptseq JG eut Enable Actions AI Ctri X 4 Clear Clipboard History Configure Klipper Help b Quit Figure 5 4 The Clipboard Klipper As well as the contents of the clipboard the context menu features the fol lowing menu items Enable Actions If you click this a black check mark is displayed in front of it For example if you mark a URL with the mouse when actions are enabled a window opens enabling you to select a browser for displaying th
507. y to add graphical descriptive symbols to the icon The Permissions tab pro vides access to the access read and write permission settings for this file for the user the group or others The Notes tab offers the management of comments The menu for the trash can additionally features the Empty Trashcan option This deletes its contents To remove an icon from the desktop simply move it into the trash can However be careful with this option if you throw folder icons or file icons into the trash can the actual data is deleted If the icons only repre sent links to a file or to a directory only the links are deleted To create a link on the desktop to a folder or a file access the object in ques tion with Nautilus Right click the object and select Make Link Drag the link from the Nautilus window and drop it on the desktop 6 1 2 The Desktop Menu Right clicking a free spot on the desktop displays a menu with various op tions Select New Folder to create a new folder Create a launcher icon for an application with New Launcher Provide the name of the application and the command for starting it then choose an icon to represent it It is also possible to change the desktop background or to reset it to its default setting 6 1 The Desktop 6 1 3 The Panel The panel contains the window icons of all started applications in the taskbar If you click the name of a window in the taskbar it is moved to t
508. yn rere eius ISO images sees teste players WorkMan SAA 399 i raso 397 M E E 394 Eu 396 O O A smkdir ivi mMount erines tinerii iunea Ut doa tate TP nslook p oreet eer ne s passwd oe rere nete veta SPINE o bic ci e we ea oon 2 3 TEDOOE a insere etia A SFM arrima SU rats clan A enr eir telnet coercere ier EXOD adoranton pe tado tendons 390 mount AAA updatedb 08 configuration files asound conf s sess o A 398 424 modules conf ssssss rcconfig 1 6 eee eee eee 126 sysconfig cepet fia i eee eee 126 configuring cable modem CD ROM ir eer wee B Dire 6mMall Vin emen firewalls cesis na graphics cards S3 TOUDS aee ssepe e me RES EE hard disk controller 179 hard disks DMA Seo is 89 hardware sess zISDIN vainas cnica nara a 103 joysticks keyboard language modems Index network ooo ocoocoocooooo 194117109 NES Rara 107 NTP clients ici oa teed oie e 108 PONNE ull estere LALO escono te pe es s routing 16 eee eee eee eee eee 109 Samba dients Gass renine eee eee 108 A a ssexaa sus eE OSA 108 TEDSL E Sia erts D date yaro ete tC an Cebu eee 399 desktop sharing ssssss 161 AG 8 pie dida da ei dins 1398 dictionaries GNOME iff ie gira TEE digital cameras
509. ync only PC items to Pilot next sync only IR Sync archived entries to the PC X Cancel Figure 9 4 Dialog Showing the Path to a KOrganizer Calendar File KOrganizer should not be running when data is being exchanged with the handheld Otherwise KPilot will fail to carry out the sync operation 214 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot 9 2 Working with KPilot Synchronizing the data of KDE applications with those of the handheld computer is quite easy Simply start KPilot then press the HotSync button on the cradle to start the sync operation Eile Settings Help Address Viewer g File Installer A Figure 9 5 The Main Window of KPilot 9 2 1 Backing up Data from the Handheld To do a full backup select File gt Backup The backup will be performed during the next sync operation After that switch back by selecting File gt HotSync from the menu Otherwise the time consuming full backup will be performed again during the next sync operation After a full backup all copies of the handheld s programs and databases are found in kde share apps kpilot DBBackup lt user gt where lt user gt is the name of the actual user as registered on the handheld The two built in KPilot viewers can be used for a quick lookup of addresses or memos but they are not designed to actually manage this data The KDE applications mentioned above are much more suited for these
510. your computer If no Linux system was installed on your computer previously your hard disk is partitioned an installed Windows system is resized a software selection is installed and your hardware is configured automati cally If you do not like the suggestions of the system assistant YaST Yet an other Setup Tool or have special requirements for your system change the individual installation suggestions manually as described in Chapter 2 on pagel TI T 6 m tics Oo 6 PLI eM S 7 aco 7 UOHDIIDISU JOINS 1 1 Step One The Start Screen Turn on your computer and all connected hardware components and immediately insert CD 1 or the DVD in the respective drive In the start screen select an installation mode or boot an installed operating system Following the successful installation the CD only needs to be inserted in the drive occasionally to install additional software As the CD can be for gotten in the drive the option to boot the installed system is preselected For installation use the arrow keys to select Installation Note If your computer does not boot from CD 1 or the DVD read Sec tion 2 2Jon page 13 Note 1 2 Step Two Accept Suggestions After the system is booted from CD or DVD the SUSE system assistant YaST is started First select the language for your system The language setting is automatically adopted for the keyboard layout Then YaST checks your system If you already installed a
511. ypes There is a dialog for general settings and sev eral special dialogs to define how external formats should be han dled Language Settings This entry covers various settings related to lan guages and writing aids namely your locale and spell checker set tings This is also the place to enable support for Asian languages Internet This entry includes dialogs to configure any proxies and to change settings related to search engines Text Document Under this entry configure global word processing op tions such as the basic fonts and layout Writer should use HTML Document Under this entry change the settings related to the HTML authoring features of OpenOffice org Spreadsheet Use this to change settings for Calc such as those related to sort lists and grids Presentation Under this entry change settings that should apply to all presentations For instance specify the measurement unit for the grid used to arrange elements SUSE LINUX User Guide SLINS SIWO 8610 eoyjouedo SUI 189 190 Drawing This entry covers settings related to the vector drawing mod ule such as the drawing scale grid properties and some print op tions Formula This entry provides a single dialog to set some special print options for formulas Chart This defines the default colors used for newly created charts Data Sources Use this to define how external data sources should be acc
512. ypted secure connec tions How do I connect to the Internet in Linux Section on page 154 provides information about this I found a bug in SUSE LINUX Where should I report it First ascertain whether it is actually a bug in the program or just an error in operation or faulty configuration settings Also read the doc umentation in usr share doc packages and usr share doc howto The bug may have already been discovered Check in the support database at http sdb suse de sdb en hem Enter a keyword or work your way forward or backward via the History link If it really is a bug send a description of it by e mail to How can I install applications Applications included in the SUSE LINUX CDs are best installed with YaST Another possibility is to start YaST from the command line with yast i package Replace the placeholder package with the file name of the RPM package including the path You can also specify multiple packages I only have an application in source code How can I install it Some know how is required with some applications Find more infor mation in a good Linux book Here a brief description Decompress the archive with tar xvzf name tar gz read the INSTALL or README files and follow the instructions Usually the following command sequence needs to be executed configure make make install No installation support is available for the compilation or self compiled programs 23 24

SUSE LINUX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents